Copyright: Copyright © 1994 Intuit
Citation: Copyright © 1994 Intuit


*Quicken 4 for Windows Help (contents)
Click a topic below, or Help on Help for more information.

Getting started

What you need to know to set up and work with your accounts.

Using your accounts

Find out how to balance your checkbook, schedule transactions, use Quicken's Financial Calendar, set up loans and savings goals, track investments, and use Quicken online.

Analyzing your finances

Learn how to create reports and graphs, forecast your finances, display Snapshots, use Quicken's financial planners, set up a budget, and estimate your taxes.

Having Quicken work for you

General information about customizing Quicken, managing Quicken files, using QuickFill, memorizing transactions, transferring data to and from Quicken, and technical information.


Getting started

Quicken menus and icons

Setting up accounts

Categories, classes, and supercategories

Using the register

Writing and printing checks

Printing


Using your accounts

Balancing your accounts

Scheduling transactions & using the calendar

Setting up and scheduling loan payments

Setting up savings goals

Tracking investments

Using Quicken online


Analyzing your finances

Creating reports about your finances

Graphing your finances

Forecasting your financial future

Displaying Quicken Snapshots

Using financial planning calculators

Setting up a budget

Estimating your taxes


Having Quicken work for you

Customizing Quicken

Managing Quicken files

Using QuickFill and memorizing transactions

Transferring data to and from Quicken

Quicken technical information


*Intuit online services (contents)
Using Quicken online

To search for a Help topic, click the Search button above.

Overviews

Setting up your modem

Registering your software online

Paying bills electronically

Using IntelliCharge (to track credit card transactions online)

Updating your portfolio prices online

Using the Intuit Marketplace (to oder supplies online)

How to...

Set up your modem

Set up your modem for CheckFree

Register your Quicken software online

Pay bills electronically

Use IntelliCharge

Update your portfolio prices online

Order an Intuit product online


Update your portfolio prices online

Sign Up for Portfolio Price Update

Use Portfolio Price Update

Change your Portfolo Price Update account


Pay bills electronically

Set up for electronic payments

Make electronic payments

Change or ask about a payment you've sent


Use IntelliCharge

Apply for a Quicken credit card

Set up a credit card account to use IntelliCharge

Update and pay your credit card account


Quicken 4 for Windows copyright and trademarks notice
Quicken 4 for Windows

Copyright

(c) 1994 Intuit Inc. All rights reserved.

Intuit Inc.

P.O. Box 3014

Menlo Park, CA 94026

Trademarks

EasyStep, Intuit, the Intuit logo, MacInTax, MacInUse, Quicken, QuickBooks, Qcard, TaxView,  and TurboTax are registered trademarks of Intuit Inc.

Billminder, Bizminder, End Financial Hassles, Financial Calendar, Frequent Filer, HeadStart,  IntelliCharge, Intuit Marketplace, Pocket Money, Pocket Quicken, Pocket Quicken Connect, Pocket Quicken SmartWallet, ProSeries, Quicken Companion, Quicken Home Inventory, Quicken Quotes, Quicken Transfer Utility, Quicken for Windows CD-ROM Deluxe Edition,   QuickFill, QuickInvoice, QuickPay, QuickReport, QuickScroll, QuickTour, QuickZoom, Tax Partner,  and TurboForms are trademarks of Intuit.

Other brands or products are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders and should be treated as such.

IDD and Tradeline Electronic Stock Guide are registered trademarks of IDD Enterprises, L.P.


*Setting up accounts (contents)
Setting up accounts

To search for a Help topic, click the Search button above.

Overview

Click here

How to...

Create a new account

Select an account to use

Edit account information

Delete an account

Set up an account for electronic payment

Common Questions

How do I set up a joint bank account?

How do I change the credit limit on my credit card?

I've set up an account in the wrong file. How can I move it to the correct file?

When I transfer a principal amount to a liability account, the balance increases instead of decreases.

Quick Tips

Assigning an account to an icon

Setting up a cash management account


Setting up accounts
Overview: Setting up accounts

With Quicken, you can create up to 255 related accounts in a single Quicken file.  To take a look at the types of accounts you can use, click here.

For personal finances, you probably need only one Quicken file. When all your accounts are in one file, Quicken can:

•	Maintain one list of categories, classes, and memorized transactions for all your accounts

•	Combine data from all accounts in a single report or graph to track your income and expenses, net worth, and other information

•	Transfer money from one account to another in the same file.


Account types

Create a...	To keep track of...
Checking	Checking accounts
Savings	Savings accounts
Credit Card	Credit card transactions and balances
Cash	Cash expenditures or petty cash
Money Market	Money market accounts
Investment	Investments such as stocks, bonds, and mutual funds
Asset	Things you own such as your house, capital equipment, or accounts receivable
Liability	What you owe, such as a mortgage or a loan


Selecting an account to use
Select an account to use

When you want to work with a particular account, you select it from the Account list.

There are three ways to open the Account list:

•	From the Lists menu, choose Account.

•	Press Ctrl+A.

•	Click the Accts (Accounts) icon on the iconbar.

There are four ways to open the account you want to use (and display its register):

•	Choose it from the Account list.

•	If the account is already open, click in the account's register window to make the account active.

•	If the account is already open but obscured by other windows, choose the account name from the Window menu.

•	If another account's register is already open, click one of the Account Selector buttons at the bottom of the register to select the account you want to open.


Account list

The Account list shows all the accounts in the current file.  It displays the name, type, description, number of transactions, and the ending balance for each account.  If you have checks to be printed, the Account list displays a checkmark in the Chks column for that account.


Editing account information
Edit account information

Once you have created an account, you can rename it or change its description.  If the account is a credit card account, you can also change the credit card limit.

To edit account information:

1.	From the Lists menu, choose Account.

2.	Select the account you want to edit, and then click Edit.

3.	(Optional)  Change the account information, as necessary.

4.	(Optional)  If this is a credit card account that you want to turn into an IntelliCharge account, select the Enable IntelliCharge checkbox.  For further instructions, click here.

5.	Click OK when you are done editing.


Deleting an account
Delete an account

Caution!  Deleting an account permanently removes that account's records from your file.  Once you delete an account, there's no way to recover the account or the information for all the transactions it contained.

To delete an account:

1.	From the Lists menu, choose Account.

2.	Select the account you want to delete, and then choose Delete.

3.	Type the word YES, and then click OK.  Quicken permanently removes the account from your file.  Quicken also deletes the account name from the Category field of all transactions that have transfers to the account.


Account list window
Account List

The Account list shows all the accounts in the current file.  It displays the name, type, description, number of transactions, and the ending balance for each account.  If you have checks to be printed, the Account list displays a checkmark in the Chks column for that account.

How to...

Select an account to use

Create a new account

Change the name of an account

Change the limit of a credit card account

Delete an account

What you see

Account List button bar

Account List tabs

Account List columns

Balance Total


Balance Total

The balance total of all your accounts, or the balance total of currently selected account type.

To display the balance total for a different account type, click its tab.  For example, to display the balance total for your bank accounts, click the Bank tab.


Account List columns

This column...	Displays....
Account List	The names of your accounts.
Type	The type of account (Bank, CCard, etc.) A lightning bolt if you've set up a bank account for electronic payments, or if you've set up an IntelliCharge credit card account.
Description	The description you entered when you set up the account.
Trans	The number of transactions in the account.
Balance	The balance or market value of the account. If you see a tilde (~) next to the balance, it means you haven't updated your security prices as of today (the market value may be inaccurate), or you've updated your prices, but Quicken has not recalculated the market value yet. To have Quicken recalculate the market value of an account, open the account (display its register), or press Ctrl+Z at the Account List.
Chks	A check mark if the account has checks to be printed. A lightning bolt if the account has electronic payments to transmit.


Account List tabs

This tab...	Displays....
All Types	All of your accounts.
Bank	Your checking, savings, and money market accounts.
Credit	Your credit card accounts.
Other	Your cash, asset, and liability accounts.
Invest	Your investment accounts.


Account List button bar

This button...	Does this...
New	Creates a new account and adds it to the Account list.
Edit	Edits the account you selected, allowing you to change the account name and the account description.
Delete	Deletes the account you selected.  Use this button with caution!  Once you delete an account, all the transaction information in the account is permanently removed from Quicken.
Open	Opens the register for the account you selected.
Info	Lets you enter additional information about the account you selected.
Close	Closes the list.


Edit Account Information window
Edit Account Information

To edit account information:

•	Change the information displayed as necessary, and then click OK.

What you see:

Account Information

Optional Information

Tax Information


Account Information

Account Name

Enable IntelliCharge (credit card accounts)

Account contains a single mutual fund (investment accounts)


Deleting Account

CAUTION!

When you delete an account, you permanently remove all of the account's records from your disk.  Once they are removed, there is no way to get them back.

To delete the account:

•	Type YES and click OK.


How do I set up a joint bank account?

If you and your spouse have a joint bank account from which you both make withdrawals and to which you both make deposits, you can still track each bank balance separately.

To set up a joint bank account:

1.	Set up a class for each person. You can even use a single letter, such as T for Tim and S for Sue.

2.	For the opening balance, use a split transaction to allocate an amount to each person.

3.	When you enter transactions in the register (for deposits or expenses) assign a class (T or S in this example) to each transaction.

How to...

Set up a class


I've set up an account in the wrong file
I've set up an account in the wrong file.  How can I move it to the correct file?

First select the account and move the account data:

1.	Open the file containing the account you want to move.  To open the list of files, choose Open from the File menu. Then double-click the file in the list on the left side of the Open Quicken File window.

2.	From the File menu, choose Export.  Quicken displays the QIF Export window. QIF stands for "Quicken Interchange Format."

3.	In the QIF Export window, enter the path and name for the file to export to.  For example, if you were moving the account visa, and Quicken were stored in a directory named quickenw on drive c, you'd enter:  c:\quickenw\visa.qif

4.	Select the account name from the drop-down list, and then click OK.  In this example, you'd select visa.

5.	To export the entire file, leave the date range as 1/1/1 to 12/31/99.  The Export Items selected should be Transactions and Account List.

6.	Click OK to export the file.

Next, create the account in the correct file and import the data:

1.	Open the file you want to move the account into.

2.	From the Lists menu, choose Account, and then click New.

3.	Set up a new account of the same type with a balance of zero.  You will move all the transactions from the account in the other file to this new account in the correct file.

4.	Open the new account.

5.	From the File menu, choose Import.  Quicken displays the QIF Import window.

6.	The QIF File to Import field shows the file you exported to.

7.	Select the account you just created as the account you want to import into, and then click OK.  Quicken imports the transactions and other information from the account in the old file into this newly created account in the correct file.

8.	Back up all your files, and then delete the account you no longer need.


Liability account balance is increasing instead of decreasing
When I transfer a principal amount to a liability account, the balance increases instead of decreases.

To correct the problem:

1.	Open the liability account.  From the Lists menu, choose Account, and then select your liability account from the list.

2.	See if the opening balance is in the Increase or Decrease column.  The opening balance should be in the Increase column to work correctly.

3.	If the opening balance is in the Decrease column, edit the opening balance to place the amount in the Increase column.


How do I change the credit limit on my credit card?
How do I change the credit limit on my credit card account?

To change a credit card limit:

1.	From the Lists menu, choose Account.

2.	Select the credit card account from the Account list, and then click Edit.

3.	Change the credit limit, and then click OK.


Setting up a cash management account

If you have a cash management account (CMA) with a broker, set up the checking part as a Quicken checking account.  (You'll be able to print checks, track check numbers, and reconcile easily.)  Set up a regular investment account for the rest of the investments in the brokerage account.  You transfer money between the two accounts when you buy and sell investments or receive investment income.

How to...

Create a new account

Set up a regular investment account


*Setting up loans (contents)
Setting up and scheduling loan payments

To search for a Help topic, click the Search button above.

Overview

Click here

How to...

Set up a loan and make loan payments

Handle different kinds of loans

Change a loan

Common Questions

Why is my original loan balance correct and my current balance incorrect?

Why isn't Quicken recording my loan payment in my liability account?

How do I set up my loan? I don't see how to do it from my Memorized Transaction list.

Quick Tips

Changing your loan payment

Calculating the break-even point for refinancing a loan


Set up a loan and make loan payments

Set up a loan and make loan payments

Use an amortized payment in a transaction

Include additional principal in a loan payment


Handle different kinds of loans

Follow the same basic instructions for setting up a loan. Click on a loan type for specific information about how to handle these types of loans.

Adjustable-rate loans

Balloon payments and nonamortized loans

Negative amortization

Zero-interest loans

Loans for which you receive payment


Change a loan

Change the interest rate for a adjustable rate loan

Edit an interest rate I've recorded in the past

Delete an interest rate from the list

Refinance a loan


Setting up loans
Overview: Setting up a loan and making loan payments

If you make regular payments on a loan, you can have Quicken amortize your loan payment.  Each time you record a loan payment, Quicken calculates the amount to allocate to principal and interest, and updates the balance of the loan.

There are several different amortization formulas in use today.  For this reason, the amounts shown for principal, interest, and loan balance may differ by a few cents from the amounts shown in your loan statement.  For more information, see below.

How to...

Set up a loan

More about...

Quicken's amortization formula


My current loan balance is incorrect
Why is my original loan balance correct and my current balance incorrect?

Two possible reasons why you've encountered this problem:

1.	The opening date of the loan is not correct. Check the date. Change it if you made an error when you were setting up the loan.

2.	The original length of the loan is incorrect. Check that you entered the total number of years rather than the number of years left on the loan.


Loan payments are not recorded in liability account
Why isn't Quicken recording my loan payment in my liability account?

Check your loan setup. You may have chosen the wrong account for Quicken to record your loan payments in.  If you have chosen the wrong account, you'll need to set up your loan again.

How to...

Set up a loan


I can't set up a loan from the Memorized Transaction list
How do I set up my loan? I don't see how to do it from my Memorized Transaction list.

You need to set up the loan first, then memorize the loan payment.  Memorizing the loan payment will add it to the Memorized Transaction list, where you can recall it to record a payment in your account register.

If you set up a loan payment as a scheduled transaction, or as a CheckFree fixed payment, the register entry is made automatically for you.

How to...

Set up a loan

Memorize transactions

Set up and use scheduled transactions

Amortize fixed payments to an electronic payee


Set Up Loan Account window
Set Up Loan Account

This is where you select an account to track your loan.

To select an account to track your loan:

1.	First, indicate whether you are borrowing or lending money.

2.	Then, to track the principal, choose an existing liability or asset account, or create a new account.  If you are borrowing money, Quicken displays your liability accounts in the Existing Account drop-down list.  If you are lending money, Quicken displays your asset accounts.


Setting up a loan and making loan payments
Set up a loan and make loan payments

When you set up a loan, Quicken creates a liability or asset account (depending on whether you are borrowing or lending) to track the principal remaining on the loan.

To set up a loan and make loan payments:

1.	From the Activities menu, choose Loans.

2.	In the upper left corner of the View Loans window, click New.  The Set Up Loan Account window appears.

3.	Click Borrow Money or Lend Money, then enter or select an account name.

4.	Click OK.  The Set Up Loan window appears.

5.	Fill in the Set Up Loan window.  For more information on what to enter in each box, click Help.

6.	Click OK.  The Set Up Loan Payment window appears.

7.	Fill in the Set Up Loan Payment window.  For more information on what to enter in each box, click Help.

8.	Click OK.  This completes the loan setup.


Changing your loan payment

On occasion, you may want to make an additional payment on your loan principal.  The easiest time to handle this is when Quicken is about to enter your transaction into the register (provided you have set up Quicken to prompt you before your loan payment is recorded in the register).  However, you can also edit the transaction after Quicken enters it in the register.

To change the loan payment before Quicken enters the transaction in the register:

•	Prior to recording your transaction, Quicken asks you to confirm principal and interest amounts. Simply change the amounts as needed.  Quicken records the transaction with the change you have indicated.

To change the loan payment after Quicken enters the transaction in the register:

1.	Find the transaction in the register.

2.	Open the Splits window.

3.	Add the amount for the extra principal.

4.	Click Adj. Total to have Quicken recalculate the transaction amount, then click OK.

5.	Click Record to record the change you made to the transaction.


Using an amortized payment in a transaction
Use an amortized payment in a transaction

When to do it:

When it's time to make your next payment on a loan, and you've set up your loan payment as a memorized transaction.

To enter the transaction:

1.	Open the Quicken window from which you make the loan payment.  This will be either one of your account registers or the Write Checks window.

2.	Scroll to the bottom of the window to select a new transaction.

3.	If QuickFill is turned on, enter the payee name and press Tab to complete the transaction.  If QuickFill is turned off, choose Memorized Transaction from the Lists menu, select the transaction, and press Enter.

4.	Check the information that Quicken displays about your loan.  Then do one of the following:

•	If you have no principal prepayment to make and if the information shown is correct, click OK.

•	If you want to change the interest or principal amounts, enter your changes and click OK. Your changes will appear in the split for the transaction.

5.	Click Record to record the new transaction.


View Loans window
View Loans

Each time you make a loan payment (or deposit) in your checking account register, Quicken updates the past and future payment schedules shown in this window.

You can also set up a new loan, or change the details of an existing loan from this window.

How to...

Set up a loan and make loan payments

Handle different kinds of loans

Change a loan

What you see

Loan

New, Delete buttons

Payment History

Projected Payments

Show Running Totals

Loan button

Payment button

Rates button


Loan

This is where you select an account to track your loan.


New, Delete buttons

Click New to set up a new loan account.

Click Delete to delete an existing loan account.


Payment History

Shows the payments already made on the loan.  Double-click on a payment to go to its entry in the register.


Projected Payments

Shows the payments to be made on the loan.


Show Running Totals

Select this option to see accumulated principal and interest payments.


Loan button

Click to view your loan or change information about it, such as:

•	Length of the loan

•	Payment periods per year

•	Loan balance.


Payment button

Click to change information about your loan payment, such as:

•	Next payment date

•	Name of lender

•	How you record your payment in Quicken (for example, you can change your payment from a memorized transaction to a scheduled transaction).


Rates button

Click to add, edit, or delete an interest rate in the Loan Rate list.


Handling loans with balloon payments
Handle loans with balloon payments

A mortgage with a balloon payment is amortized over one period, but the entire loan principal comes due within a shorter period. For example, you amortize your payments for a 30 year loan, but the loan is due in 7 years (a "30 due in 7" loan). At the end of 7 years, you must repay the entire amount or refinance the remaining amount at current interest rates.

Quicken lets you define this type of loan when you are entering information about the loan.

In the Set Up Loan window, enter this information:

Box	What to enter
Original Length of Loan	Number of years the loan is amortized for. For example, for a "30 due in 7" loan, enter 30.
Due in	Click the checkbox and enter the number of years you'll be making loan payments. For example, for a "30 due in 7" loan, enter 7.


Handling negative amortization
Handle negative amortization

If your actual payment is less than the amortized payment, your loan has negative amortization. In this case, your payment covers neither the interest nor any of the principal. The unpaid interest is added to the loan balance.

When you set up the loan, at the Set Up Loan and Set Up Loan Payment windows enter this information:

Set Up Loan window
Box	What to enter
Original Length of Loan	Number of years the loan is amortized for
Set Up Loan Payment window
Box	What to enter
Principal and Interest	Change this amount to the amount you plan to pay
Interest rate	Interest rate charged


Handling zero-interest loans
Handle zero-interest loans

If you have a zero-interest loan, you do not incur any interest expenses. Your entire payment, excluding other charges such as property taxes or insurance, is principal.

Enter zero as the interest rate when you are setting up the loan:

•	Click Rates (at the View Loans window). Then clear the Category for Interest box. This will keep Quicken from displaying this category with a zero amount in your reports.


Handling loans for which you receive payments
Handle loans for which you receive payments

If you hold a loan note and receive payments on a loan, you can set up your loan for amortization in Quicken. Quicken creates a loan deposit (rather than a payment) and tracks the deposits in an asset account (rather than a liability account).

When setting up your loan, enter this information:

Set Up Loan Account window
Box	What to enter
Loan Type	Select Lender
Set Up Loan window
Box	What to enter
Payee	Name of the borrower
Set Up Loan Payment window
Box	What to enter
Category for interest. Quicken preselects Int Inc as the category. You can select a different category from the drop-down list.	Select an income category


Set up Loan window
Set Up Loan

This is where you enter the information Quicken uses to calculate a payment schedule for a loan.

To enter loan information:

•	Fill in the boxes, then click OK.  The Set Up Loan Payment window appears.

What you see

Loan/Account Name

Opening Date of Loan

Original Balance of Loan

Original Length of Loan

Due in

Periods per year

Current Balance, as of

Canadian Compounding (Semi-Annual)

More about ...

Setting up a loan


Loan/Account Name

The name of the account that tracks your loan.


Opening Date of Loan

Enter the date you originally took out (or made) the loan here.


Original Balance of Loan

Enter the original (opening) balance here.


Original Length of Loan

Enter the length of the loan in years.

Can I include months?  Yes, by entering the number of years as a decimal fraction.  For example, if 24 years 6 months remain on your mortgage, you would enter 24.5 (the decimal equivalent of 24 1/2).


Due in

If you have a balloon payment due, select the Due in checkbox and enter the length of the loan in years.


Periods per year

Enter the number of times per year you make payments. (For example, enter 12 if you make monthly payments.)

Quicken can handle up to 52 payments per year.


Current balance, as of

Enter today's balance, or the balance as of the date recorded on your last bank statement.  If you are setting up a brand-new loan, leave the Current Balance field empty.


Canadian Compounding

If you are a Canadian user, select this checkbox. Quicken compounds interest on Canadian loans semiannually.

To see the Canadian amortization formula, click here.


Set Up Loan Payment window
Set Up Loan Payment

This is where you enter or edit information about your loan payment.

To set up your loan payment:

•	Fill in the boxes, then click OK.  If you are going to make payments with Intuit checks and you want a printed address to appear on the checks, click Address.  If you want to record your loan payment ahead of time, click Pay Now.

To edit an existing payment:

•	Change the loan payment information, as necessary.

What you see

Current Interest Rate

Principal and Interest

Other amounts in payment

Split

Full Payment

Type

Payee

Memo

Next Payment Date

Category for Interest

Address

Pay Now

Method of Pmt


Current Interest Rate

Enter the today's interest rate for the loan.


Principal and Interest

Quicken uses the current interest rate to calculate the regular payment amount (principal plus interest).

You can change the amount in this box:

•	If you increase the payment amount, the number of scheduled payments is reduced, but interest is still calculated based on the original length of the loan.

•	If you decrease the payment amount, the last scheduled payment is increased to make up the remaining balance.  (Adjusting it a few cents up or down shouldn't make a difference to the length of the loan.)


Other amounts in payment

For example, you may have an impound account (also called an escrow account) set up to handle property tax payments, homeowner insurance premiums or PMI (Private Mortgage Insurance).  To include these items in your payment, click Split.


Split

Click to display the Splits window and enter items other than principal and interest to include in loan payment.  Enter each category and the amount you want to assign to it, then click OK.


Full Payment

The total loan payment.


Type

Select one of the following:

Pmt

Chk

Epmt


Chk (Check)

Select this method of payment if you plan to print Intuit checks from Quicken.


Pmt (Payment)

Select this method of payment if you plan to write checks out of your checkbook.  If you want to write Intuit checks and print them yourself, select Check instead.


Epmt (Electronic Payment)

Select this method of payment if you plan to transmit your loan payment electronically to CheckFree.


Payee

Who you are making the loan payment to.


Memo

Any optional information you may want to keep track of.


Next Payment Date

The date of the next loan payment.


Category for Interest

The category that will keep track of the amount of interest you pay.


Address

Click if you are going to pay by printing a check, then do the following:

1.	In the Address box, enter the address you want to appear on the check.

2.	If you want a message to appear on the check, enter the message in the Message box.

3.	Click OK.


Method of Pmt

Click if you want to change the type of transaction Quicken records in your register.

•	Scheduled Transaction. Select this option if you'd like Quicken to enter this transaction automatically in your register.

•	Memorized Transaction. Select this option if you want to recall your memorized loan payment into your register when payment is due.

•	CheckFree Fixed Payment. Select this option: 1) if you want to use CheckFree to transmit your payment electronically, and 2) if you have already set up a series of fixed payments to an electronic payee.


Pay Now

Click if you want to record your loan payment now. Then from the drop-down list, select the account in which you want to record this transaction.


Choose Account for the Loan window
Choose Account to Pay FROM

Select the account from which you want Quicken to make this loan payment.


Changing the interest rate for an adjustable rate loan
Change the interest rate for an adjustable rate loan

Adjustable-rate loans have a variable interest rate. If you have this type of loan, set up your loan in Quicken and enter the current interest rate.

To change the interest rate:

1.	From the Activities menu, choose Loans.

2.	Be sure that the loan you are changing is displayed in the Loan drop-down list.  If that loan is not displayed, select it from the list.

3.	Change the rate.

If the interest rate change takes effect today:

1.	Click Payment.

2.	Enter the new rate in the Current Interest Rate box, then click OK.  Quicken uses today's date as the effective date.

If the interest rate change takes effect any other day:

1.	Click Rates.

2.	Click New.

3.	Change the date.

4.	Enter the rate, then click Done.

What happens

Quicken calculates your new payment amount using this new interest rate. The length of the loan doesn't change.  If you change the regular payment, however, Quicken does change the length of the loan to correspond to the new payment.


Loan Rate Changes list
Loan Rate Changes

This window lists the history of your interest rates for this loan.

How to...

Change the interest rate for an adjustable rate loan

Edit an interest rate recorded in the past

Delete an interest rate from the list

What you see

New, Edit, Delete, Close buttons


Loan Rate Changes buttons

This button...	Does this...
New	Creates a new interest rate and adds it to the list.
Edit	Edits the interest rate you selected. Editing an interest rate in the list does not affect transactions you've recorded in your register.
Delete	Deletes the interest rate you selected. Deleting an interest rate in the list does not affect transactions you've recorded in your register.
Close	Saves the changes you've made to the list and closes the Loan Rate Changes window.


Editing a prior interest rate
Edit an interest rate recorded in the past

To edit an interest rate recorded in the past:

1.	From the Activities menu, choose Loans.

2.	In the View Loans window, click Rates.  The Loan Rate Changes window appears.

3.	Select an interest rate and click Edit.  The Edit Interest Rate Change window appears.

4.	Make the needed changes.

5.	Click Done to record your changes.

What happens

Quicken uses the new rate to calculate the new regular payment amount.  Quicken keeps the length of the loan constant.

However, if you increase the regular payment amount, Quicken reduces the length of the loan accordingly.  If you decrease the regular payment amount, Quicken doesn't change the length of the loan but adds the extra remaining principal to the last payment.

Quicken indicates the interest rate change in the Payment History section of the View Loans window, and adjusts the principal and interest amounts in the projected payment schedule to match.


Deleting an interest rate
Delete an interest rate

To delete an interest rate:

1.	From the Activities menu, choose Loans.

2.	In the View Loans window, click Rates.  The Loan Rate Changes window appears.

3.	Select an interest rate and click Delete.  Deleting an interest rate in the list does not affect transactions you've recorded in your register.

4.	Click Done.


Edit/Insert an Interest Rate Change window
Edit/Insert an Interest Rate Change

This is where you edit or insert a change in your interest rate.

To edit/insert an interest rate change:

1.	Enter the information requested, or make changes as necessary.  Editing an interest rate in the list does not affect transactions you've recorded in your register.

2.	Click Done to record your changes.

What happens

Quicken calculates your new payment amount using the new interest rate. The length of the loan doesn't change.  If you change the regular payment, however, Quicken does change the length of the loan to correspond to the new payment.


Confirm Principal and Interest window
Confirm Principal and Interest

Quicken is giving you an opportunity to confirm or change the information about this loan payment.

To confirm the loan payment principal and interest:

•	Click OK.  Quicken will record it in your register.

You can also make changes to the principal and interest amounts. These changes apply to this transaction only.  If you need to make a change for future payments as well, see: Changing the interest rate for a loan.


Set Up Loan Account window
Set Up Loan Account

This is where you select or set up an account to track a loan balance.  If you are setting up a new account, Quicken takes care of adding it to the Accounts list. Don't enter a name you've already used as a category name.

To set up a loan account:

1.	Indicate whether you are borrowing or lending money.

2.	Enter or select an account name.  If you are borrowing money, your liability accounts appear in the Existing Account drop-down list.  If you are lending money, your asset accounts appear.


Refinancing a loan
Refinance a loan

If you plan to refinance a loan you've been tracking in Quicken, you need to set up a new loan and "pay off" the old loan.

To refinance a loan:

1.	From the Activities menu, choose Loans, and set up your new loan.

2.	Adjust the balance of the account for the old loan to zero.  To do so:

•	Open the liability account.

•	From the Activities menu, choose Update Balances.  Then choose Update Cash Balance.

•	Enter zero (0.00) as the amount.

3.	(Optional) Delete the old loan.

How to...

Set up a loan

Delete a loan

Calculate the break-even point for refinancing a loan


Deleting a loan
Delete a loan

When you have paid off or refinanced a loan, you can delete that loan from the View Loans window.

To delete a loan:

1.	From the Activities menu, choose Loans.

2.	In the View Loan window, select the loan and click Delete.

3.	Click OK to confirm that you want to delete this loan.  Note: The loan account is not deleted.


Select Payment Method window
Select Payment Method

This window lets you select a different loan payment method.

To select a different loan payment method:

1.	Click on a payment type.

2.	If you choose Scheduled Transaction, complete the information for scheduled transactions.

What you see

Scheduled Transaction

Memorized Transaction

CheckFree Fixed Payment

Register Entry

Account to pay from

Days in advance to remind


Scheduled Transaction

Select this option if you'd like Quicken to enter this transaction automatically in your register.


Memorized Transaction

Select this option if you want to recall your memorized loan payment into your register when payment is due.


CheckFree Fixed Payment

Select this option if you use CheckFree to transmit your payment.  To do so, you must first set up series of fixed payments an electronic payee.


Register Entry (for Scheduled Transactions)

Select whether you want Quicken to automatically enter the transaction in the register, or prompt you before entering it.


Account to pay from (for Scheduled Transactions)

Select an account to enter the transaction in, if different from the current account.


Days in advance to remind (for Scheduled Transactions)

Enter the number of days in advance to remind you of the transaction.


Set Up Account for Loan window
Set Up Account for Loan

Enter an account name up to 15 characters long.  Use a descriptive name, if you'd like.  The name can include letters, numbers, spaces, and any characters except these:
 / : [ ]


*Balancing your accounts (contents)
Balancing your accounts

To search for a Help topic, click the Search button above.

Overview

Click here

How to...

Reconcile your balance with your account statement

Adjust for differences

Update the balances of your accounts

Common Questions

How do I adjust for the opening balance of my bank statement?

How do I adjust the account register to agree with my account statement?

How do I adjust the register to agree with my credit card statement?

What's the difference between "x" and "X" in the Clr (Cleared) field of a register?


Reconcile your balance with your account statement

Reconcile a bank account statement

Reconcile a credit card statement

Reconcile a mutual fund account statement

Reconcile an investment account statement

Mark a range of transactions as cleared

Print a reconciliation report


Adjust for differences

Adjust for the opening balance of a bank statement

Adjust the account register to agree with the account statement

Adjust the register to agree with a credit card statement


Update the balances of your accounts

Match the balance of a cash account to the cash on hand

Update the balance of an investment account

Update the value of your assets or liabilities


Balancing your accounts
Overview: Balancing your accounts

When your bank statement arrives, you can bring your Quicken records into balance with your bank, credit card, or brokerage account statement.  In Quicken, you can do this to the degree of accuracy that works for you.  You can track down every cent if you prefer, but Quicken does not require you to balance to the penny.

How to...

Reconcile your balance with your account statement

Adjust for differences

Update the balances of your accounts


Reconciling a bank account statement
Reconcile a bank account statement

To reconcile a bank account statement:

1.	Open the account you want to reconcile.

2.	From the Activities menu, choose Reconcile.

3.	Using your bank statement, enter the opening balance and ending balance.

4.	If there is a service charge or interest earned, enter the appropriate amount, date, and category information, then click OK.

5.	For each transaction that appears on your statement, click the transaction in the list.  If you have a large group of transactions to mark as cleared, you can mark them in a single operation.  For instructions, click here.

For each transaction you mark, a check mark appears in the Clr column.  At the end of this process, the Difference in the lower right corner of the window should be 0.00.

6.	Click Done when all the transactions on your statement have been marked.

If your account is reconciled:

Quicken gives you an opportunity to print a reconciliation report.  For instructions, click here.

If your account is not reconciled:

Quicken lets you make an adjustment.  One window appears if the difference is in the opening balance; another window appears if the difference is elsewhere.  For further instructions, see:

Adjusting for the opening balance of a bank statement

Adjusting the account register to agree with the account statement


Reconciling an investment account statement
Reconcile an investment account statement

When you receive a statement from your broker, you can clear each transaction that appears on your statement and adjust the register if necessary. At the end, Quicken allows you to go to the Portfolio View window to update your security prices.

To reconcile the account:

1.	Open the account to reconcile.

2.	From the Activities menu, choose Reconcile.

3.	Using information from your account statement, fill in the starting and ending cash or share balance.

4.	If necessary, change the statement ending date to reflect the statement, then click OK.

5. 	Enter the ending price per share.

6.	For each transaction that appears on your statement, click the transaction in the lists.  If you have a large group of transactions to mark as cleared, you can mark them in a single operation.

For each transaction you mark, a check mark appears in the Clr column. At the end of this process, the Difference in the lower right corner of the window should be 0.00.

7.	Click Done when all the transactions on your statement have been marked.

If your account is reconciled:

Quicken gives you an opportunity to update your security prices.

If your account is not reconciled:

Quicken lets you make adjustments to your account.


Reconciling a mutual fund account statement
Reconcile a mutual fund account statement

When you receive a statement from your mutual fund, you can clear each transaction that appears on your statement and adjust the share balance if necessary. Quicken automatically updates the market value if you fill in the ending price per share.

To reconcile the account:

1.	Open the account you want to reconcile.

2.	From the Activities menu, choose Reconcile.

3.	Using information from your account statement, fill in the starting and ending share balances.

4.	If necessary, change the statement ending date to reflect the statement.

5.	Enter the ending price per share, then click OK.

6.	For each transaction that appears on your statement, click the transaction in the lists.  If you have a large group of transactions to mark as cleared, you can mark them in a single operation.

For each transaction you mark, a check mark appears in the Clr column.  At the end of this process, the Difference in the lower right corner of the window should be 0.000.

7.	Click Done when all the transactions on your statement have been marked.

If your account is not reconciled:

Quicken lets you make adjustments to your account.


Adjusting the account register to agree with the account statement
Adjust the account register to agree with the account statement

If you can't reconcile your account with your statement, the problem may be a difference in the opening balance, a missing payment, or missing charges.  If you don't want to track down the differences, you can adjust for them automatically.

To adjust the account register:

1.	Take the process of reconciling your account with the statement as far as you can and click Done.

If at the end of this process the Difference in the lower right corner of the window still hasn't reached 0.00, a window appears when you click Done.

2.	Click Adjust Balance.

What happens

A window appears with information about the adjustment and reconciliation.  If you are reconciling a bank statement, the window gives you a chance to print a reconciliation report.  If you are reconciling an investment account statement, another window gives you a chance to update security prices from your account statement.

How to...

Adjust for the opening balance of a bank statement

Print a reconciliation report

Reconcile a bank account statement

Reconcile a mutual fund account statement

Reconcile an investment account statement

Update security prices from your account statement


Adjusting for the opening balance of a bank statement
Adjust for the opening balance of a bank statement

If the opening balance in your account register is different from the opening balance in the statement, you may nevertheless not want to change the account balance.  In this case, you can create an opening balance adjustment to make up the difference and thus make reconciliation possible.

To adjust the opening balance:

1.	Open the account you want to reconcile.

2.	From the Activities menu, choose Reconcile.

3.	Using information from your account statement, fill in the opening balance and ending balance.

4.	Reconcile your balance with your account statement (see below).

5.	Leave the opening balance as it is, even though it is different from the opening balance in the statement.

6.	Continue the process of reconciling your account with the statement as far as you can and click Done.  If at the end of this process, the difference in the lower right corner of the window still hasn't reached 0.00, a window appears when you click Done.

7.	Click Yes.  If you click No, Quicken does not make an adjustment to your opening balance.  This may cause your account not to balance the next time you reconcile.

How to...

Reconcile your balance with your account statement


Difference between "x" and "X" in the Clr field
What's the difference between "x" and "X" in the Clr (Cleared) field?

If you return to the register while you are still reconciling your account, you'll see "x" in the Clr field of all transactions you just marked as cleared in the Reconcile window.

After you finish marking transactions as cleared in the Reconcile window and click OK to show that the account is balanced, Quicken turns the "x" (lowercase) into "X" (uppercase) to signify that the cleared transactions are now reconciled.

This symbol...	Means that...
x  (lowercase)	You have marked the transaction as cleared.
X  (uppercase)	Quicken has reconciled the transaction.


Updating security prices from your account statement
Update security prices from your account statement

When you reconcile an investment account with your account statement, Quicken gives you the option of updating prices from the statement.

To update the security prices:

1.	Open the investment account you want to reconcile.

2.	From the Activities menu, choose Reconcile.

3.	Fill in the starting and ending cash balance from your statement and click OK.

4.	Reconcile your balance with your account statement and click Done.

5.	Click Portfolio View.

6.	Change the date in the Portfolio View window to the date shown on your statement, then enter the price for each security.

How to...

Reconcile your balance with your account statement


Printing a reconciliation report
Print a reconciliation report

Print a reconciliation report if you want a record on paper or disk of your previous and ending balances or all new and all newly cleared transactions since the last time you reconciled.

To create and print a reconciliation report:

1.	Reconcile your account, then click Yes when Quicken asks if you would like to create a  reconciliation report.  (To create the report at any time, choose Reconciliation from the Reports menu.)

2.	Enter a title for the report and, if necessary, change the date.  Select All Transactions to see detail for every transaction (in addition to summary information).

3.	Click Print and specify how you'd like Quicken to print your report.

4.	Click Print again to print the report.


Reconciling a credit card statement
Reconcile a credit card statement

Quicken helps you reconcile your credit card statement with the Quicken credit card account. At the end of reconciling, you can let Quicken help you pay the bill.

To reconcile the statement:

1.	Open the credit card account you want to reconcile.

2.	From the Activities menu, choose Pay Credit Card Bill.

3.	Using information from your credit card statement, fill in the text boxes in the window.

4.	If there are finance charges, enter the appropriate charges, date, and category information, then click OK.

5.	For each transaction that appears on your statement, click the transaction in the lists.  If you have a large group of transactions to mark as cleared, you can mark them in a single operation.

For each transaction you mark, a check mark appears in the Clr column. At the end of this process, the Difference in the lower right corner of the window should be 0.00.

6.	Click Done.

If your account is reconciled:

A window appears if you have a payment due.  For instructions, click here.

If your account is not reconciled:

Quicken lets you make an adjustment to the account.  For instructions, click here.


Adjusting the register to agree with a credit card statement
Adjust the register to agree with a credit card statement

If you can't reconcile your credit card account with your credit card statement, the problem may be a difference in the opening balance, a missing payment, or missing charges. If you don't want to change the account to eliminate these differences, you can adjust for them automatically.

To adjust the register:

1.	Reconcile your account with the statement as far as you can.  Note that the Difference in the lower right corner of the window still hasn't reached 0.00.

2.	Click Done.  A window appears.  You can provide categories for any adjustments that are made.

3.	Click Adjust Balance.  A window appears to help you make a payment if one is due.

How to...

Make a credit card payment

Reconcile a credit card statement


Making a credit card payment
Make a credit card payment

To make a credit card payment:

1.	Open the credit card account you want to reconcile.

2.	From the Activities menu, choose Pay Credit Card Bill.

3.	Fill in the window with information from your credit card statement and click OK.

4.	Reconcile your account with the statement and click Done.

5.	Select the account to pay from.

6.	Select the method of payment: Printed, Hand Written, or Electronic and click OK.

7.	Complete the check or transaction information and click Record.

How to...

Write checks

Enter and make electronic payments

Reconcile a credit card statement


Marking a range of transactions as cleared
Mark a range of transactions as cleared

When you are reconciling an account, ordinarily you have to mark individual transactions as cleared one at a time. But when all transactions in a range are cleared, you can mark them all at once.

To mark a range of transactions:

•	Click the first transaction in the range. Then move the mouse pointer down to the last transaction in the range. Press Shift + mouse button.

Quicken marks all the transactions between these two points.

•	OR put the mouse pointer over the first transaction you'd like to mark and hold down the mouse button. As you move the mouse pointer down through the list of transactions, Quicken marks each transaction. Release the mouse button when Quicken has marked the last transaction in the range.

Afterwards:

•	If necessary, you can unmark individual transactions in the range.  To do so, press the Ctrl key and click the mouse button.


Updating the balance of an investment account
Update the balance of an investment account

You can match the balance of an investment account to the balance of the account statement without reconciling, simply by adjusting the cash balance or share balance.

To update the balance of an investment account:

1.	Open the investment account you want to reconcile.

2.	Choose Update Cash Balance or Update Share Balance from the Update Balance submenu of the Activities menu.

3.	If you are adjusting the share balance of a non-mutual fund account, enter the security to adjust.

4.	Depending on whether you chose Update Share Balance or Update Cash Balance, enter the number of shares or the cash balance.

5.	If desired, change the date from the current date.

6.	Click OK.

How to...

Reconcile a mutual fund account statement

Reconcile an investment account statement


Matching the balance of a cash account to the cash on hand
Match the balance of a cash account to the cash on hand

To match the balance of a cash account to the cash on hand:

1.	Open the cash account you want to reconcile.

2.	Choose Update Cash Balance from the Update Balance submenu of the Activities menu.

3.	Enter the amount of cash on hand as the cash balance.

4.	Type a category for the adjustment transaction and change the date (optional), then click OK.


Updating the value of your assets or liabilities
Update the value of your assets or liabilities

With an asset account for a 401(k) plan whose value fluctuates, or for some comparable asset or liability account that appreciates or depreciates, you may want to enter the current value periodically.  Quicken makes an adjustment transaction to make up the difference.

To update the value of your assets or liabilities:

1.	Open the asset or liability account you want to reconcile.

2.	Choose Update Cash Balance from the Update Balance submenu of the Activities menu.

3.	Enter the account balance.

4.	Type a category name for the adjustment transaction and change the date (optional), then click OK.


Reconcile or Pay Credit Card Bill window
Reconcile / Pay Credit Card Bill window

This window lists all your uncleared transactions.  It is titled Pay Credit Card Bill for credit card accounts, and Reconcile for all other accounts.

To reconcile your account:

•	Mark all transactions that appear on your statement, then click Done.

How to...

Reconcile your balance with your account statement

Adjust for differences

Update the balances of your accounts

What you see

Lists in the Reconcile window

Lists in the Pay Credit Bill window

Mark

Edit

New

Sort by Date

Done

Cancel

Info

Difference


Lists in the Reconcile window

For accounts other than credit card accounts, the left side of the window displays your uncleared payments and checks; the right side of the window displays your uncleared deposits.


Lists in the Pay Credit Card Bill window

For credit card accounts, the left side of the window displays your uncleared charges; the right side of the window displays your uncleared payments.


Mark

To mark/unmark a transaction:

•	Click it.  Or, select the transaction and click the Mark button.  A check mark appears/disappears in the Clr column.

To mark a range of transactions:

1.	Click the first transaction you'd like Quicken to mark.

2.	Move the mouse pointer down to the last transaction in the range.

3.	Press Shift + mouse button.  Quicken marks all the transactions between these two points.


Edit

Clicking Edit displays the register of the account you are reconciling and selects the transaction that is currently highlighted in the register.


New

Clicking New displays the register of the account you are reconciling and creates a new transaction.


Sort by Date

Clicking Sort by Date sorts all transactions in the Reconcile window by date.


Cancel

Clicking Cancel stops the account balancing process. Quicken asks if you'd like to save your work up to this point.


Info

Clicking Info displays your bank statement information, which you entered previously.  The information includes statement opening balance, statement ending balance, service charge and interest transactions, their categories, and their dates.


Done

When you are reconciling a credit card account, clicking Done displays a window where you can pay your balance.  When you are reconciling the cash balance of a regular investment account, clicking Done displays the Cash Balance Reconciled window. From there, you can select the Portfolio View window and enter the share prices from the statement in it.


Difference

This is the difference between the balance of cleared transactions and the statement balance. It should read 0.00 (zero) when you have finished marking cleared transactions. If you click Done when it doesn't read 0.00, Quicken offers to add a balance adjustment transaction to the register to make up the difference.


Create Opening Balance Adjustment window
Create Opening Balance Adjustment

If the opening balance from your bank statement is different from the amount Quicken expected as your previously recorded balance, you need to account for the difference so that Quicken can reconcile your account accurately.  For reasons why your previously reconciled account balance might differ, click here.

To have Quicken create an opening balance adjustment:

•	Click Yes.

To finish reconciliation, using different opening balances:

•	Click No.

To return to the Reconcile window:

•	Click Cancel.


Reason 1 of 4

You are reconciling the account for the first time.

Quicken uses the amount of the Opening Balance transaction in your check register as the Bank Statement Opening Balance in the Reconcile Bank Statement window.  When you set up the account, you may have entered a balance that was different from the actual amount in your bank account.  There are probably transactions missing from your Quicken account that affect the balance.

Next reason


Reason 2 of 4

You recorded transactions prior to the last reconciliation.

For example, say it's July.  You started recording transactions in May and subsequently reconciled your account for May/June.  Then you went back and recorded transactions starting in January.  After entering these transactions, you noticed that the ending balance in the register was incorrect.  So you updated the date and amount of the original Opening Balance transaction that Quicken recorded in your register when you set up your account in May.

Next reason


Reason 3 of 4

You have started reconciling with a current bank statement, but you didn't reconcile each of the previous months' statements.

You should reconcile one month at a time, starting with the earliest month.

Last reason


Reason 4 of 4

You inadvertently changed or deleted a previously reconciled transaction.

Quicken always asks to confirm a change to a previously reconciled transaction.  If you have already ruled out other possible errors, you probably should continue with reconciliation and have Quicken record an adjustment transaction when reconciliation is complete.


Adjust Balance window
Adjust Balance

To reconcile your account by putting a balance adjustment transaction in the register:

•	Click Adjust Balance.

To return to the Reconcile window to fix the problem yourself:

•	Click Cancel.


Cash/Share Balance Reconciled window
Cash/Share Balance Reconciled

Your investment account balance is reconciled.  If it is a cash balance, you may now update the prices of your securities with current market prices from your account statement.

How to...

Update security prices from your account statement


Reconciliation Complete window
Reconciliation Complete

The items you marked have been cleared.  You may now print a reconciliation report or return to the register of the reconciled account.

To print a reconciliation report:

•	Click Yes, fill out the window that appears, and then click Print.

To return to the register:

•	Click No.


Credit Card Statement Information window

This window asks you for information from your credit card statement.  Quicken uses this information to reconcile your credit card account.

To complete the window:

1.	Using information from your credit card statement, fill in the text boxes.

2.	If there are finance charges, enter the appropriate charges, date, and category information, then click OK.

What you see

Charges, Cash Advances

Payments, Credits

New Balance

Transactions to be added

OK


Charges, Cash Advances

Enter the total amount of charges and advances from your statement. Don't include interest or service charges.


Payments, Credits

Enter the total amount of payments and credits from the statement.


New Balance

Enter the new balance for your card from the statement.


Transaction to be added

Enter any finance charges shown for your account. You can also enter a category for the finance charge and change the date.


OK

Clicking OK displays a window where you clear items that appear on the statement.


Adjusting Register to Agree with Statement window
Adjusting Register to Agree with Statement

This is where you adjust the register so that the amount it shows agrees with your credit card statement.  You can make adjustments for an opening balance difference, missing payments, and missing charges.  You can also categorize any of these adjustments.

To adjust the register of your credit card account:

•	Provide categories for any of the adjustments, and then click Adjust Balance.  Clicking Adjust Balance opens a window where you can pay your balance.


Make Credit Card Payment window
Make Credit Card Payment

This window shows your credit card balance and facilitates making a credit card payment. You can pay by printed or hand-written check, or electronically.

To pay your credit card balance:

•	Select the account and type of check payment, click Pay, then use the Write Checks or Register window to write or record the check.

What you see

Bank Acct

Printed/Electronic

Hand Written


Bank Acct

Enter the account from which the check is to be written.


Printed/Electronic

With Printed or Electronic selected, clicking Pay opens the account in the Write Checks window, where you can write the payment check. Quicken automatically memorizes the transaction, and automatically uses it the next time you make a credit card payment.


Hand Written

With Hand Written selected, click Pay to open the account in the Register window, where you can record the payment check. When QuickFill is on, the transaction is automatically memorized, and automatically used the next time you make a credit card payment.


Reconciliation Report Setup window
Reconciliation Report Setup

Quicken uses the information you enter in this window to create a reconciliation report.

To print the report:

•	Fill in the window, then click Print.

What you see

Report title

Show Reconciliation to Bank Balance as of

Transactions to Include

Show Savings Goal Transactions


Report Title

If you don't enter a title, Quicken uses "Reconciliation Report" as the title.


Show Reconciliation to Bank Balance as of

Change the date if you want the report to state your reconciled balance as of a different date than today.  For example, you might want a reconciliation report that ends on the last day of your accounting period, even if your bank statements arrive mid-month.


Transactions to Include

Click All Transactions if you want to see detail for every reconciled transaction in addition to summary information.


Show Savings Goal Transactions

Select this option to include any savings goal contributions you've made from this account.  Your account balance will be adjusted in the report to reflect those contributions.


Reconcile Investment Account window
Reconcile Investment Account

This window asks you for information from your investment account statement.  Quicken uses this information to reconcile your account.

To complete the window:

•	Enter the ending cash balance and statement ending date, then click OK.

What you see

Starting cash balance

Ending cash balance

Statement ending date


Starting cash balance

Displays the cash balance as of the last time you reconciled. If you're reconciling for the first time, it's the cash balance for all transactions marked with an X in the Register (ShrsIn transactions and balance adjustments).


Ending cash balance

Enter the cash balance from your statement.


Statement ending date

Enter the date of the statement ending balance.


Reconcile Bank Statement window
Reconcile Bank Statement

This window asks you for information from your bank statement.  Quicken uses this information to reconcile your account.

To complete the window:

1.	Using information from your bank statement, enter the opening and ending balances.

2.	If there are transactions to be added, such as service charges or interest earned, enter them then click OK.

What you see

Bank Statement Opening Balance

Bank Statement Ending Balance

Service Charge, Date, and Category

Interest Earned, Date, and Category

Report

OK


Bank Statement Opening Balance

Enter the opening balance shown on your bank statement if it is different from the one shown. Your bank statement might call this amount the "previous" or "beginning" balance.


Bank Statement Ending Balance

Enter the ending balance shown on your bank statement. Your bank statement might call this amount the "new" or "current" balance.


Service Charge, Date, and Category

If your bank statement lists service charges, total them and enter the amount here.  This causes Quicken to enter a transaction for the service charge in the register.  You can also enter a category for service charges and change the date.


Interest Earned, Date, and Category

If your bank statement lists interest earned by your account, enter the amount here.  This causes Quicken to enter a transaction for the interest in the register.  You can also enter a category for the interest and change the date.


Report

Clicking Report displays a window where you can print the last reconciliation report you created.


Reconcile Mutual Fund Account window
Reconcile Mutual Fund Account

This window asks you for information from your mutual fund statement.  Quicken uses this information to reconcile your account.

To complete the window:

•	Enter the ending share balance and statement ending date, then click OK.

What you see

Ending share balance

Statement ending date

Starting share balance

Ending price per share


Starting share balance

Displays the share balance as of the last time you reconciled. If you're reconciling for the first time, it's the share balance for the initial ShrsIn transaction.


Ending share balance

Enter the total number of shares from your statement.


Ending price per share

Quicken uses the price you enter to update the market value of the account.


Update Account Balance window
Update Account Balance

Matches the balance of a cash account to the amount of cash you now have on hand. Quicken makes an adjustment transaction to account for the difference between the previous balance shown in the account and the amount you specify.

To update:

•	Enter the amount of cash on hand as the balance, enter a category, change the date, and click OK.


Save Changes?

You clicked Cancel to end reconciliation.

You have two options:

•	Click Save to save the work you've done so far.

•	Click Don't Save if you'd prefer to start reconciliation all over again, the next time you choose to balance this account.


Update Account Balance window
Update Account Balance

Update the value of your assets or liabilities for the current account.  Quicken will make an adjustment transaction to do this for you.

For example, if this is an Other Asset account for a 401(k) plan that has a fluctuating value, you can have Quicken enter the current value.

To update:

•	Enter the account balance, enter a category for the adjustment transaction, change the date, and click OK.  Enter a category such as "Unrealized gain" if you want the adjustment transaction to be assigned to a category.


*Setting up a budget (contents)
Setting up a budget

To search for a Help topic, click the Search button above.

Overview

Click here

How to ...

Set up a budget

Use supercategories

Create budget reports and graphs

Print and export a budget

Create a budget from a forecast

Common Questions

When I autocreate a budget, why do the budgeted amounts and actual amounts differ?

Why don't the numbers on my budget and those in my budget report match?

Why does the Budget window display an account I have deleted?

Quick Tips

Moving through a budget

Printing a budget in landscape mode


Set up a budget

Create a budget from data in your accounts

Enter amounts into a budget

Edit budget amounts

Set up budget amounts for account transfers


Create budget reports and graphs

Create a custom budget report

Graph your budget performance


Print and export a budget

Print a budget

Copy and paste a budget into a spreadsheet program


Setting up a budget
Overview: Setting up a budget

A budget lets you set up a goal for the amount of money you want to spend in a particular category (for example, $200 for dining per month), and then compare it to the actual amount you spend.

Quicken can automatically set up your budget amounts

Quicken looks at the data you've already entered into your account registers and uses these amounts to fill out your budget.

You can easily change these amounts if you know of changes in your finances, or if you'd like to adjust any amounts for inflation. To learn how to automatically create your budget, see: Creating a budget from data in your accounts.

Or, you can enter the amounts yourself into a blank budget

Enter the amount you plan to spend; the result isn't influenced by previous spending trends. To learn how to enter amounts into a budget by hand, see: Entering amounts into a budget.


Budget and budget report amounts differ
Why don't the numbers on my budget and those in my budget report match?

You may be using a different date range for the budget report. For example, budget amounts are set for a single month; if the date range you've set for the budget report is two months, the figures won't match. The amounts in the budget report will be twice as large.

Also, the differences in the amounts you see may be a result of amounts being rounded up or down.

The amounts in the budget are rounded to the nearest $1, $10, or $100, depending on which rounding option you chose in the Automatically Create Budget window.

The amounts in a budget report are displayed in dollars and cents, unless you have cleared the Show Cents in Amounts checkbox in the Customize Budget Report window, in which case Quicken rounds to the nearest dollar.  To find out how to customize a report, click here.


There's a deleted account in budget window
Why does the Budget window display an account I have deleted?

The deleted account doesn't appear in the Account list or the Category & Transfer list.

Your data may be slightly damaged.  Here's a solution:

1.	In the Budget window, budget an amount for this account.

2.	Open the Category & Transfer list.  This account now appears on the list. Quicken thinks it is a category.

3.	Delete the item from the Category & Transfer list.  Quicken removes the item from your budget.


Actual and budgeted amounts differ
When I autocreate a budget, why do the budgeted amounts and actual amounts differ?

When you use autocreate to create a budget, Quicken may only find transactions in a portion of the month specified in the date range. Quicken compensates for this by multiplying the actual amount by a factor to arrive at the full budgeted amount.

For example, if Quicken finds transactions for a category in the first half of the month only, the amount for this portion of the month is doubled to calculate the budgeted amount for the entire month.

Also, the differences in the amounts you see may be a result of amounts being rounded up or down. The amounts in the budget are rounded to the nearest $1, $10, or $100, depending on which rounding option you chose in the Automatically Create Budget window.


Entering amounts into a budget
Enter amounts into a budget

You can set up budget amounts for some or all of the categories and subcategories you use in your Quicken file.

To enter the amounts:

1.	From the Plan menu, choose Budgeting.

2.	Click the Layout button to choose how you want Quicken to lay out and display the budget.

3.	Enter budget amounts in the Budget window.  To enter an amount for an item, select one of the amounts shown in the row for the item.  Then enter the new amount.  Click the Edit button and use the Fill commands to enter amounts quickly.

4.	If you have a special item that you enter into Quicken every two weeks (such as a paycheck), you can budget that item at two-week intervals (see below).

5.	When you have finished entering the amounts, click Close, then click Yes to confirm that you want Quicken to save the budget.

Note:

You can't enter decimal points in budget amounts.

How to: ...

Budget biweekly amounts

Create a custom budget report

Graph your budget

Print your budget


Creating a budget from data in your accounts
Create a budget from data in your accounts

To set up a budget quickly, you can have Quicken automatically compute a budget for you.  The new budget will be based on the actual income and expenses you have recorded in Quicken.

Caution.  If you have already created a budget, this procedure overwrites all the amounts in the budget of the categories selected.

To automatically create a budget:

1.	From the Plan menu, choose Budgeting.

2.	Click the Layout button to choose how you want Quicken to lay out and display the budget.

3.	Click Create on the Budget button bar.  The Automatically Create Budget window appears.

4.	(Optional)  Change the date range shown by entering different beginning and ending dates.  By default, the date range is the previous calendar year.  You can enter a different date range (if you choose the Use Monthly Detail option, the date range cannot exceed one year).

5.	(Optional)  Click an Amount option to change the setting that Quicken uses to round dollar amounts when it copies your data into the budget.  From the drop-down list, you can choose $1 (the default), $10, or $100.

6.	(Optional) Click Categories to autocreate only the selected categories when creating your budget.

7.	Click OK.

How to: ...

Create a custom budget report

Graph your budget

Print your budget


Setting up budgeted amounts for account transfers
Set up budget amounts for account transfers

You can budget transfer amounts in addition to income and expense categories.  For example, you can use this feature to budget money you deposit in your savings account, 401(k), or Keogh plan.

To set up budget amounts for transfers:

1.	Click Layout on the Budget button bar. Then select the Show Transfers checkbox to turn on display of transfers.

2.	To budget a monthly transfer of $200 from an account called Checking to an account called Savings, scroll down the Budget window and enter 200 for FROM Checking. Then scroll down to the bottom of the Budget window and enter 200 for TO Savings.


Budgeting biweekly amounts
Budget biweekly amounts

When to do it:

When you have a recurring transaction that you enter into Quicken every two weeks.  For example, you might record the deposit of your paycheck every other week.

To budget biweekly amounts:

1.	Select one of the cell amounts for the category or the transfer item you want to budget at two-week intervals.

2.	Click Edit on the Budget button bar, then choose 2-Week.

3.	Enter the amount you want to budget in two-week intervals.

4.	Enter the starting date for the first two-week interval.  If you are setting up your salary as a two-week budget category for the entire year, enter the date of your first payday in January.  If part of the year has already elapsed and you are budgeting only to the end of the year, enter the date of your next payday.

5.	Click OK.  When you click OK, Quicken calculates the budget amounts and adds them to the spreadsheet.


Budget window

This window shows the current budget for your Quicken file.  If you have never created a budget for this file, the budget is blank and only zero amounts are shown.

How to ...

Set up a budget

Create budget reports and graphs

Print and export your budget

What you see

Category View or Supercategory View

Budget amounts

Budget totals

Budget button bar


Budget levels
Category View and Supercategory View

When you create your first budget, Quicken displays it in Category View (the words "Category View" appear in the upper left corner). This means that budget amounts are organized by category and subcategory.

You can also include supercategories in your budget. A supercategory is simply a grouping of categories. This is useful, for example, if you want to group the categories Dining and Groceries under the supercategory Food. You can then enter a single budget amount for Food. Or, you can track both the income and expense categories of a small hobby with a single supercategory.

To display supercategories:

•	Click Layout in the Budget button bar. Select Show Supercategories and click OK. The words "Supercategory View" appear in the upper left corner of the Budget window.

To expand or collapse supercategory levels:

•	Click the supercategory row. You can expand supercategories preceded by a plus sign (+) to show all categories in it; you can collapse supercategories preceded by a minus sign (-) to hide all categories in it. You can also expand and collapse INFLOWS and OUTFLOWS in this way.

To move a category to another supercategory, or between INFLOWS and OUTFLOWS:

•	Click the category and hold the left mouse button down. Then move the cursor to the supercategory you want, and release the mouse button. Note that once you drag and drop a category, you can't restore it to its original position using the Restore button. You can also move supercategories between INFLOWS and OUTFLOWS in this way.

To edit the supercategory list:

•	Click Edit on the Budget button bar. Then click Supercategories.

To show supercategories:

•	Click Layout on the Budget button bar. Then select the Show Supercategories checkbox.

To show transfers:

•	Click Layout on the Budget button bar. Then select the Show Transfers checkbox.


Budget amounts

These appear in the columns to the right of the categories.  By default, the budget shows a column for each month of the year, though you can redisplay the budget so that it shows quarterly or yearly amounts.

To show quarterly amounts:

•	Click Layout on the Budget button bar. Then select Quarter.

To show yearly amounts:

•	Click Layout on the Budget button bar. Then select Year.

Note:

You can't enter decimal points in budget amounts.


Budget totals

The Totals column on the right shows the total budgeted amount for each category for the year.  The three rows at the bottom show the following information for each column:

•	Your budgeted INFLOWS categories.

•	Your budgeted OUTFLOWS categories.

•	The difference between your budgeted INFLOWS and OUTFLOWS categories.


Budget button bar

This consists of the row of buttons across the top of the Budget window.  You use these buttons to change the layout of the budget and to perform several budget-related tasks.

Buttons

Create

Edit

Layout

Print

Save

Restore

Close


Create button

Lets Quicken automatically enter budget amounts for you.  Quicken computes the amounts based on your actual income and expenses over a period of time that you specify.


Edit button

Commands

2-Week

Copy All

Clear Row

Clear All Budgets

Fill Row Right

Fill Columns

Supercategories


2-Week

Budget a category on a two-week basis.  This is useful for amounts you enter into Quicken every two weeks -- such as a paycheck.


Copy All

Copies the budget information to the Windows clipboard. You can then open a spreadsheet program (such as Lotus 1-2-3) and paste your Quicken budget into your spreadsheet program.


Clear Row

Erases amounts in all cells in this row. Click Yes to confirm that you'd like Quicken to clear these amounts.


Clear All Budgets

Erases amounts in all cells in this budget.  Click Yes to confirm that you'd like Quicken to clear all cells in the current budget.


Fill Row Right

Copies the amount you have selected into all the cells to the right in the same row.  For example, if the amount you select is $350 for "Groceries" in the March column, clicking Fill Row Right adds $350 for "Groceries" to each month after March through the end of the year.

This option is disabled when Year is selected.


Fill Columns

Copies the amounts in all cells of the current column to all cells in the columns to the right.  For example, if you have selected an amount in the June column, choosing Fill Columns copies the June amounts into the columns for July to December.


Supercategories

Displays the Manage Supercategories window. From that window, you can add, edit, and delete supercategories, as well as assign categories to supercategories.


Layout button

Commands

Month

Quarter

Year

Show Supercategories

Show Transfers

Hide Zero Budget Categories


Month

Changes the budget layout so that it provides amount columns for each month of the year.

If you have already entered amounts for a quarterly or yearly budget, Quicken recalculates the budget and places the correct amounts in the monthly columns.


Quarter

Changes the budget layout so that it provides amount columns for each quarter of the year.  The columns are labeled Q1, Q2, Q3, and Q4.

If you have already entered amounts for a monthly or yearly budget, Quicken recalculates the budget and places the correct amounts in the quarterly columns.


Year

Changes the budget layout so that it shows budget amounts only for the entire year.

If you have already entered amounts for a monthly or quarterly budget, Quicken recalculates the budget and places the correct amounts in the yearly column.


Show Supercategories

Displays supercategories in the Budget window so you can enter budget amounts for supercategories.

If you uncheck Show Supercategories after you have displayed supercategories, Quicken remembers any supercategory amounts that you entered.

If you collapse a supercategory to hide the categories in it, and then change the budget amount total for the supercategory, the difference between the supercategory amount and the total amount of all the categories in it will appear in the Other category in that supercategory.


Show Transfers

Adds accounts to the Categories column, giving you the ability to budget transfer amounts as well as income and expenses.  For example, you could include transfers to your IRA account to budget payments to your IRA.


Hide Zero Budget Categories

Removes all category rows that contain zero amounts.  To redisplay these rows, select the Hide Zero Budget Categories checkbox again.

This option works only with categories and subcategories.  It does not hide zero amounts in transfers or supercategories.


Print button

Prints your budget. These printing options are available in the Print window.

To print a budget on the report printer:

•	Click Print.

To print a budget to a disk:

•	Select one of the options below. Quicken then lets you type the drive and directory where the file should be printed.

ASCII Disk File

Tab-delimited Disk File

1-2-3 [.PRN] Disk File

To preview a budget on the screen:

•	Click Preview.

Other options

•	Print in color (negative amounts in red)

•	Print your budget in draft mode (this speeds up printing)

•	Print the entire budget or print a range of pages


Save button

Click Save to save the current budget to disk. Once you have clicked Save you cannot restore the previous version of the budget.


Restore button

Restores the budget amounts from the last time you saved your budget.

This feature is useful if you want to change some amounts to see how these changes alter your savings or spending. These "what ifs" are useful for planning.

For example, add a new loan payment or add to a current payment. See how this increased payment decreases your savings each month.  Click Restore to bring back your saved version of the budget.


Close button

Closes the Budget window.  If you haven't yet clicked Save, Quicken asks you if you want to save the budget amounts you entered.  If you click Yes, Quicken saves the budget.


Editing budget amounts
Edit budget amounts

You can change any budget amount.  When you change an amount, Quicken updates the totals affected by the amount.

To change a budget amount:

•	Click the amount and enter the new amount in the selection box that appears.

To undo a typing mistake:

•	Click Esc.  This restores the amount that was originally in the cell.

To fill a row:

•	Select the amount you want to use, click Edit, and then choose Fill Row Right.  This copies the amount to all cells in that row to the right of the amount.

To copy column amounts:

•	Select an amount in the column you want to copy, click Edit, and then choose Fill Columns.  This copies the amounts in that column into all the columns to the right.

To restore the original budget:

•	Click Restore.  This returns the budget to the way it was when you opened the Budget window.

To erase all amounts:

•	Click Edit on the Budget button bar. Then choose Clear All Budgets. Click Yes to confirm that you'd like Quicken to clear all amounts.


Automatically Create Budget window
Automatically Create Budget

This is where you specify the range of transaction dates that you want Quicken to use when it creates a budget from past transaction data.  The new budget will be based on your income and expenses from the period of time you specify.

To automatically create a budget:

•	Look at the information shown and change it if necessary.

What you see

Transactions From/To

Amounts

Categories

What happens

When Quicken creates the budget, it copies the data from the months you specify to the corresponding periods in the budget.


Transactions From ____ To ____

Unless you specify otherwise, Quicken uses the previous calendar year as the date range.  To use a different date range, enter the beginning date in the From box and the ending date in the To box.  Make sure that transactions exist in this date range.

You can use any range of dates (if you choose the Monthly Detail option, the date range cannot exceed one year).  Make sure that transactions exist in the date range.


Amounts

Round Values to Nearest

Unless you specify otherwise, Quicken rounds each budget amount to the nearest dollar.  You can instead round to the nearest $10 or nearest $100.

Use Monthly Detail

Quicken copies your actual income, expense, and transfer amounts from the months you specified into their corresponding months in the budget.  If you are budgeting by quarter or year, Quicken totals the monthly amounts to get amounts for each quarter or the entire year.

Use Average for Period

Quicken computes monthly averages for income, expense, and transfer amounts based on the months you specified in the date range.  If you are budgeting by Quarter (or Year), Quicken enters 3 (or 12) times the monthly average in every period.


Categories

Click to display your category list.

•	To exclude a category from your budget when you use AutoCreate, click it so the checkmark disappears.

•	To include a category in your budget when you are using AutoCreate, click it so the checkmark appears. The category is now marked to be included in your budget.


Layout Budgets window
Layout Budgets

The Layout Budgets window lets you customize the way your budget looks onscreen.

What you see

Month

Quarter

Year

Show Supercategories

Show Transfers

Hide Zero Budget Categories


Set Up 2 Week Budget window
Set Up 2-Week Budget

Budget a category on a two-week basis.  This affects only the supercategory, category, subcategory, or transfer you have selected -- unselected row items in the budget remain unaffected by this operation.

To create a 2-week budget:

•	Enter the amount you want to budget at two-week intervals.  Enter also the starting date for the first two-week interval.


Printing a budget
Print a budget

To print a budget:

1.	Click Print on the Budget button bar.

2.	Click Print.

To print a budget to a disk:

1.	Click Print on the Budget button bar.

2.	Select one of the options below. Quicken then lets you type the drive and directory where the file should be printed.

ASCII Disk File

Tab-delimited Disk File

1-2-3 [.PRN] Disk File

3.	Click Print.

To preview a budget on the screen:

1.	Click Print on the Budget button bar.

2.	Click Preview.

Other options

•	Print your budget in color (if you have a color printer)

•	Print your budget in draft mode (this speeds up printing)

•	Print the entire budget or print a range of pages

How to ...

Printing your budget in landscape mode


Copying and pasting your budget into a spreadsheet
Copy and paste a budget into a spreadsheet program

To copy and paste a budget into a spreadsheet program:

1.	Click Edit on the Budget button bar, then choose Copy All.  Quicken copies your budget information to the Windows Clipboard.

2.	Open your spreadsheet program (such as Lotus 1-2-3).

3.	Use the Paste command to insert the Quicken budget into the spreadsheet.

4.	Save the Quicken budget in your spreadsheet program.  You can work with this information just as you work on other data you use in your spreadsheet program.  When you return to Quicken, the budget information is still in Quicken.


Clearing all amounts in a budget
Clear all amounts in the current budget

To clear all amounts in the current budget:

1.	Click Edit on the Budget button bar, then choose Clear All Budgets.

2.	Click Yes to confirm that you'd like Quicken to erase all budget amounts.  Quicken displays a new budget with all amounts cleared.


Moving through a budget

To move quickly to a category that doesn't show in the Budget window:

Drag the scroll bar.  Quicken displays the category names while you scroll.  When you see the category you want, release the mouse button.

To expand or collapse a category, supercategory, INFLOWS, or OUTFLOWS:

•	Click on the row.

To move a category to another supercategory, or between INFLOWS and OUTFLOWS:

•	Click the category and hold the left mouse button down. Then move the cursor to the supercategory you want, and release the mouse button.

To enter budget amounts:

Tab	Moves right, one amount at a time, in the same row.  Pressing Tab has the same effect as pressing the Right Arrow key.
Shift + Tab	Moves left, one amount at a time, in the same row.  Pressing Shift + Tab has the same effect as pressing the Left Arrow key.
Esc	Undoes the last entered amount.
Left Arrow	Moves left, one amount at a time, in the same row.  Pressing the Left Arrow key has the same effect as pressing Shift + Tab.
Right Arrow	Moves right, one amount at a time, in the same row.  Pressing the Right Arrow key has the same effect as pressing Tab.
Enter	Moves down one row in the same column.  Pressing Enter has the same effect as pressing the Down Arrow key.
Up Arrow	Moves up one row in the same column.
Down Arrow	Moves down one row in the same column.  Pressing the Down Arrow key has the same effect as pressing the Enter key.
Pg Up	Scrolls the budget up to display the previous group of categories.
Pg Dn	Scrolls the budget down to display the next group of categories.
Home + Home	Moves to the first cell in the current row.
End + End	Moves to the last cell in the current row.
Ctrl + Home	Moves to the first row in the budget.
Ctrl + End	Moves to the last row in the budget.
Ctrl + Left Arrow	Scrolls the budget one page to the left.
Ctrl + Right Arrow	Scrolls the budget one page to the right.


Printing a budget in landscape mode
Printing your budget in landscape mode

If you are printing out your monthly budget, all columns probably don't fit on one page.  You can change your printer setup so that your budget is printed in landscape mode.

To print in landscape mode:

1.	From the File menu, choose Printer Setup. Then choose Report/Graph Printer Setup.

2.	Click Settings.

3.	Select Landscape Orientation, then click OK.

4.	Click OK again.

Note

Once you've printed your budget, you'll probably want to reset your printer to Portrait. Follow the steps outlined above, except select Portrait Orientation.


*Using Quicken's financial planning calculators (contents)
Using Quicken's financial planning calculators

To search for a Help topic, click the Search button above.

Overview

Click here

How to use...

The Loan Planner

The Investment Savings Planner

The College Planner

The Retirement Planner

The Refinance Planner

Common Questions

How can I use the loan planner to calculate a six-month loan?

What formulas does Quicken use to make these calculations?


The Loan Planner

Calculate loan amounts

Calculate loan payments


The Investment Savings Planner

Calculate a starting amount for your savings

Calculate your regular savings contribution

Calculate how much you can save


The College Planner

Calculate a starting amount for your college savings

Calculate your annual contribution

Calculate how much your college savings will provide


The Retirement Planner

Calculate a starting amount for your retirement savings

Calculate your annual contribution to your retirement plan

Calculate how much retirement income you'll have


The Refinance Planner

Calculate the break-even point for a new loan


Using Quicken's financial planning calculators
Overview: Quicken's financial planning calculators

Quicken provides financial planning calculators for:

•	Calculating loan payments and principals (Loan Planner)

•	Calculating the growth of your investment savings (Savings Planner)

•	Planning for college expenses (College Planner)

•	Planning for retirement (Retirement Planner)

•	Calculating the cost and benefit of refinancing a loan (Refinance Planner).

These calculators enable you to perform "what if" calculations. The way you work with each financial planning calculator is the same; only the information and the calculations are different.

Use the calculators to answer these kinds of questions:

•	If I want to buy a new car and plan to borrow $14,000 at 7.5% interest for 5 years, what will my monthly payments be?

•	If I invest my savings of $15,000 and receive an annual yield of 9%, what will the value of my investment be in 7 years?

•	If I plan to retire in 15 years, and plan to put $2,500 into my IRA account each year until then, how much money will be available to me when I retire?

•	If I start putting aside $4,000 a year for my 4-year-old child's college fund, will I have enough money to pay for a good, four-year college?

Once you enter the amounts and have Quicken create the payment schedule, you can print the schedule. This is handy, in case you want to create a number of scenarios and then review the differences in payment schedules.

Technical information

Quicken's financial planning formulas


Calculating a six-month loan
How can I use the loan planner to calculate a six-month loan?

To use the loan planner to calculate a six-month loan:

1.	From the Plan menu, choose Financial Planners, then choose Loan.

2.	Fill in the Loan Planner window.

•	Enter the amount of the loan in the Loan Amount box.

•	Enter half the interest rate in the Annual Interest Rate box.

•	Enter 1 in Number of Years box.

•	Enter 6 in the Periods per Year box.

3.	Click Schedule to see the payments.


Loan Planner window
Loan Planner

With this financial planning calculator, you can calculate loan amounts and loan payments.

How to calculate ...

Loan amounts

Loan payments

What you see

For all calculations, you enter the following information:

Annual Interest Rate

Number Of Years

Periods Per Year

You also enter one of the following calculating options:

Loan Amount  (to calculate loan payments)

Payment Per Period  (to calculate loan amounts)


Approximate Payment Schedule window
Approximate Payment Schedule

To print the schedule:

•	Click Print.

What you see

Pmt

Principal

Interest

Balance


Pmt (Payment)

The payment number.


Principal

The payment amount applied to the loan principal.


Interest

The amount of interest paid.


Balance

The remaining loan principal.


Calculating loan amounts
Calculate loan amounts

You can calculate how much you can afford to borrow, if you know how much you want your loan payment to be, and if you know the interest rate and length of the loan you are considering.

To calculate loan amounts:

1.	From the Plan menu, choose Financial Planners, then choose Loan.

2.	Under "Calculate," click Loan Amount.

3.	Under "Loan Information," enter information about the loan.

4.	Press Tab after entering the last value.  When you press Tab, Quicken calculates the amount and displays it by "Loan Amount."

5.	To see a payment schedule for the loan, click Schedule.  The schedule shows how much of each payment is principal, how much is interest, and what your loan balance is after each payment.


Calculating loan payments
Calculate loan payments

You can calculate what your loan payments would be, if you know the amount of the loan, the length of the loan, and the interest rate.

To calculate loan payments:

1.	From the Plan menu, choose Financial Planners, then choose Loan.

2.	Under "Calculate," click Payment Per Period if it's not already selected.

3.	Under "Loan Information," enter information about the loan.

4.	Press Tab after entering the last value.  When you press Tab, Quicken calculates the amount and displays it by "Payment Per Period."

5.	To see a payment schedule for the loan, click Schedule.  The schedule shows how much of each payment is principal, how much is interest, and what your loan balance is after each payment.


Loan Amount

Enter the amount of money you want to borrow.


Annual Interest Rate

Enter the annual interest rate of the loan.  For example, if the interest rate is 9 1/2 percent, you would enter 9.5.


Number of Years

Enter the number of years you have to repay the loan.  For example, if the loan is a 5-year loan, you would enter 5.


Periods Per Year

Enter the number of payments you will make in one year.  For example, if you have a loan payment due each month, you would enter 12.


Payment Per Period

Enter the amount of the loan payment.


Investment Savings Planner window
Investment Savings Planner

With this financial planning calculator, you can plan the growth of your investment savings.

How to calculate ...

A starting amount for your savings

What your regular contribution should be

How much you can save

What you see

For all calculations, you enter the following information:

Annual Yield

Number Of

You also enter two of these three items.  Which two depends on the type of calculation you are making:

Opening Savings Balance

Contribution Each

Ending Savings Balance

Finally, you can use these options to account for inflation:

Predicted Inflation

Inflate Contributions

Ending Balance in Today's $


Calculating a starting amount for your savings
Calculate a starting amount for your savings

You can calculate how much money you need to start with to reach a savings goal, if you know the amounts you plan to invest on a regular basis.

To calculate a starting amount for your savings:

1.	From the Plan menu, choose Financial Planners, then choose Savings.

2.	Under "Calculate," click Opening Savings Balance.

3.	Under "Savings Information," enter information about your savings account.

4.	(Optional) Under "Inflation," enter the adjustments you want Quicken to make for inflation.

5.	Press Tab after entering the last value.  When you press Tab, Quicken calculates the amount and displays it next to "Opening Savings Balance."

6.	To see the schedule of deposits you must make to achieve your savings goal, click Schedule.  The schedule shows the balance of your savings account after each scheduled contribution.

Here's a tip:

You can use this calculation to determine whether your planned contributions alone will provide enough money to achieve your savings goal.  If the planner displays a positive amount under "Opening Savings Balance," your regular contributions will not be enough.  You either need to start with initial savings equal to the amount shown, or increase the amount of your regular contribution.


Calculating your regular savings contribution
Calculate your regular savings contribution

You can calculate how much you need to add to your savings to reach a savings goal, if you know the amount you've saved already, the interest that your savings earn, and a specific rate of inflation.

To calculate a regular savings goal:

1.	From the Plan menu, choose Financial Planners, then choose Savings.

2.	Under "Calculate," click Regular Contribution.

3.	Under "Savings Information," enter information about your savings account.

4.	(Optional)  Enter the adjustments you want Quicken to make for inflation.

5.	Press Tab after entering the last value.  When you press Tab, Quicken calculates the amount and displays it above the Ending Savings Balance.

6.	To see the schedule of deposits you must make to achieve your savings goal, click Schedule.  The schedule shows the balance of your savings account after each scheduled contribution.


Calculating how much you can save
Calculate how much you can save

You can calculate how much money you will have after a specific interval of time, if you know the amount you've invested already and the amounts you plan to invest on a regular basis.

To calculate how much you can save:

1.	From the Plan menu, choose Financial Planners, then choose Savings.

2.	Under "Calculate," click Ending Savings Balance.

3.	Under "Savings Information," enter information about your savings account.

4.	(Optional)  Enter the adjustments you want Quicken to make for inflation.

5.	Press Tab after entering the last value.  When you press Tab, Quicken calculates the amount  and displays it next to "Opening Savings Balance."

6.	To see the schedule of deposits you must make to achieve your savings goal, click Schedule.  The schedule shows the balance of your savings account after each scheduled contribution.


Opening Savings Balance

Enter the amount of your savings at the time you set up your savings account.


Annual Yield

Enter the interest that your savings account earns.  For example, if the money is in an account that earns 7% interest, you would enter 7.  You do not need to type the percent sign.


Number of

In the first box, click the Down Arrow and select either Weeks, Months, Quarters, or Years.  Quicken displays the unit of time you select in this box and in the "Contribution each" box immediately below.

In the second box, type the number of weeks, months, quarters, or years by which you want to reach your savings goal.

Example.  If you want to reach your savings goal in 5 years, you would select Years from the list in the first box and type 5 in the second box.


Contribution Each

In the drop-down list, click the Down Arrow and select either Week, Month, Quarter, or Year.  Quicken displays the unit of time you select in this box and in the "Number of" box immediately above.

In the second box, type the amount of money you plan to add at the interval you selected.

Note:  Quicken assumes that you make each contribution at the end of the year.


Ending Savings Balance

Enter the amount you would like to have saved at the end of the time interval you selected.


Predicted inflation

Initially, Quicken assumes an inflation rate of 4%.  If you want Quicken to use a different inflation rate, enter that rate in the Predicted Inflation box.  You do not need to include a percent sign.


Inflate contributions

Select this checkbox if you want to increase your contribution each year to counteract the effects of inflation.  This causes Quicken to increase each contribution by the inflation rate you entered above this checkbox.


Ending balance in today's $

Select or clear this checkbox as needed.

When the box is selected.  Quicken shows the value of your ending savings balance in terms of the purchasing power of today's dollars.  Because inflation erodes the value of your savings, the amount shown will be less than the actual amount you will have saved.

When the box is clear.  Quicken shows the actual amount of your ending savings balance.  The effect of inflation on the purchasing power of your savings is not shown.


Annual income in today's $

Select or clear this checkbox as needed.

When the box is selected.  Quicken shows your retirement income in terms of the purchasing power of today's dollars.  Because inflation erodes the value of money you save for the future, the amount shown will be less than the actual amount of the income you'll receive.

When the box is clear.  Quicken shows the actual amount of your retirement income.  The effect of inflation on the purchasing power of your retirement income is not shown.


College Planner window
College Planner

With this financial planning calculator, you can plan for your own or your children's college education.  If you have more than one child, you must make a separate calculation for each child.

How to calculate ...

A starting amount for your college savings

Your annual contribution

How much your college savings will provide

What you see

For all calculations, you enter the following information:

Years Until Enrollment

Number of Years Enrolled

Annual Yield

You also enter two of these three items.  Which two depends on the type of calculation you are making:

Annual College Costs

Current College Savings

Annual Contribution

Finally, you can use these options to account for inflation:

Predicted Inflation

Inflate Contributions


Calculating how much your college savings will provide
Calculate how much your college savings will provide

You can calculate how much money will be available to meet college expenses, if you know your present savings, how much you can save each year, and the number of years until your child goes to college.

To make the calculation

1.	From the Plan menu, choose Financial Planners, then choose College.

2.	Under "Calculate," click Annual College Costs.

3.	Under "College Information," enter information about your child, how much you expect college to cost, and your savings plan.

4.	(Optional)  Enter the adjustments you want Quicken to make for inflation.

5.	Press Tab after entering the last value.  When you press Tab, Quicken calculates the amount and displays it next to "Annual College Costs."

6.	To see the schedule of deposits you must make to achieve your savings goal, click Schedule.  The schedule shows the balance of your savings account after each scheduled contribution, and after each withdrawal to meet college costs.


Calculating a starting amount for your college savings
Calculate a starting amount for your college savings

You can calculate how much money you need to start with to reach a savings goal for your child's college education.

To calculate a starting amount for your college savings:

1.	From the Plan menu, choose Financial Planners, then choose College.

2.	Under "Calculate," click Current College Savings.

3.	Under "College Information," enter information about your child, how much you expect college to cost, and your savings plan.

4.	(Optional)  Enter the adjustments you want Quicken to make for inflation.

5.	Press Tab after entering the last value.  When you press Tab, Quicken calculates the amount and displays it next to "Current College Savings."

6.	To see the schedule of deposits you must make to achieve your savings goal, click Schedule.  The schedule shows the balance of your savings account after each scheduled contribution, and after each withdrawal to meet college costs.


Calculating your annual contribution
Calculate your annual contribution

You can calculate how much you need to save each year to provide a specific amount of money for your child's college education.

To calculate your annual contribution:

1.	From the Plan menu, choose Financial Planners, then choose College.

2.	Under "Calculate," click Annual Contribution.

3.	Under "College Information," enter information about your child, how much you expect college to cost, and your savings plan.

4.	(Optional)  Enter the adjustments you want Quicken to make for inflation.

5.	Press Tab after entering the last value.  When you press Tab, Quicken calculates the amount and displays it next to "Annual Contribution."

6.	To see the schedule of deposits you must make to achieve your savings goal, click Schedule.  The schedule shows the balance of your savings account after each scheduled contribution, and after each withdrawal to meet college costs.


Annual College Costs

Enter the amount you expect to pay for one year of your child's college education.

Note:  In the calculation, Quicken assumes that you will withdraw this amount at the beginning of each year that your child is enrolled in college.


Years Until Enrollment

Enter the number of years between now and the date your child will enter college.


Number of Years Enrolled

Enter the number of years you anticipate your child will be enrolled in college.


Current College Savings

Enter the amount you have already saved toward your child's college education.


Annual Yield

Enter the interest you expect to earn on the money you contribute toward your child's college education.  For example, if the money is in an account that earns 7% interest, you would enter 7.  You do not need to type the percent sign.


Annual Contribution

Enter the amount you plan to contribute each year toward your child's college education.

Note:  In the calculation, Quicken assumes that you make each contribution at the end of the year and that you continue to make contributions until your child graduates.


Retirement Planner window
Retirement Planner

With this Planner, you can perform "what if" calculations to plan for your retirement.  This Financial Planner works for only one retirement account at a time; if you have more than one account, you must make separate calculations for each account.

How to calculate...

A starting amount for your retirement savings

What your annual contribution should be

How much retirement income your plan will provide

What you see

For all calculations, you enter the following information:

Annual Yield

Current Age

Retirement Age

Withdraw Until Age

Other Income (SSI, etc.)

You also enter two of these three items.  Which two depends on the type of calculation you are making:

Current Savings

Annual Contribution

Annual Retirement Income

Finally, you can use these options to account for inflation:

Predicted Inflation

Inflate Contributions

Annual Income in Today's $


Calculating a starting amount for your retirement savings
Calculate a starting amount for your retirement savings

You can calculate how much money you need to start with when you launch your retirement plan.

To calculate a starting amount for your retirement savings:

1.	From the Plan menu, choose Financial Planners, then choose Retirement.

2.	Under "Calculate," click Current Savings.

3.	Under "Retirement Information," enter information about your retirement account and when you plan to retire.

4.	If your retirement account is not a tax-sheltered investment, click Non-Sheltered Investment.

Note:  Both IRA and Keogh accounts are tax-sheltered investments.

5.	If the tax rates shown are incorrect for your income bracket, enter the correct tax rates in the boxes provided.

6.	(Optional).  Enter the adjustments you want Quicken to make for inflation.

7.	Press Tab after entering the last value.  When you press Tab, Quicken calculates the amount and displays it next to "Current Savings."

8.	To see the schedule of deposits you must make to achieve your retirement goal, click Schedule.  The schedule shows the balance of your retirement account after each scheduled contribution, as well as your retirement income for each year of your retirement.


Calculating your annual contribution to your retirement plan
Calculate your annual contribution to your retirement plan

You can calculate how much you need to contribute to your retirement plan each year to reach your retirement income goal.

To calculate your annual contribution to your retirement plan:

1.	From the Plan menu, choose Financial Planners, then choose Retirement.

2.	Under "Calculate," click Annual Contribution.

3.	Under "Retirement Information," enter information about your retirement account and when you plan to retire.

4.	If your retirement account is not a tax-sheltered investment, click Non-Sheltered Investment.

Note:  Both IRA and Keogh accounts are tax-sheltered investments.

5.	If the tax rates shown are incorrect for your income bracket, enter the correct tax rates in the boxes provided.

6.	(Optional).  Enter the adjustments you want Quicken to make for inflation.

7.	Press Tab after entering the last value.  When you press Tab, Quicken calculates the amount and displays it next to "Annual Contribution."

8.	To see the schedule of deposits you must make to achieve your retirement goal, click Schedule.  The schedule shows the balance of your retirement account after each scheduled contribution, as well as your retirement income for each year of your retirement.


Calculating how much retirement income you'll have
Calculate how much retirement income you'll have

You can calculate how much income your retirement plan will provide when you retire.

To calculate how much retirement income you'll have:

1.	From the Plan menu, choose Financial Planners, then choose Retirement.

2.	Under "Calculate," click Annual Retirement Income.

3.	Under "Retirement Information," enter information about your retirement account and when you plan to retire.

4.	If your retirement account is not a tax-sheltered investment, click Non-Sheltered Investment.

Note:  Both IRA and Keogh accounts are tax-sheltered investments.

5.	If the tax rates shown are incorrect for your income bracket, enter the correct tax rates in the boxes provided.

6.	(Optional).  Enter the adjustments you want Quicken to make for inflation.

7.	Press Tab after entering the last value.  When you press Tab, Quicken calculates the amount and displays it next to "Annual Retirement Income."

8.	To see the schedule of deposits you must make to achieve your retirement goal, click Schedule.  The schedule shows the balance of your retirement account after each scheduled contribution, as well as your retirement income for each year of your retirement.


Current Savings

Enter the amount you have saved up to today for retirement.


Annual Yield

Enter the interest rate that your retirement account is earning.  For example, if the interest rate is 11 1/2 percent per year, you would enter 11.5.  You do not need to type the percent sign.


Annual Contribution

Enter the amount you plan to contribute each year toward your retirement.

Note:  In the calculation, Quicken assumes that you make this contribution at the end of each year.


Current Age

Enter your age as of today.


Retirement Age

Enter the age at which you plan to retire.


Withdraw Until Age

Enter the age at which you will stop withdrawing funds from your retirement account.  Assume you will live a long, healthy life.


Other Income

Enter the amount of money you expect to receive from another source of income (such as social security) when you retire.  This amount should be the amount you expect to receive each year.


Annual Retirement Income

Enter the annual income you would like to receive after you retire.

Note:  In the calculation, Quicken assumes that you withdraw this amount at the beginning of each year of your retirement.


Deposit Schedule

This table shows how your savings balance changes if you make the regular contribution shown in the Investment Savings, College, or Retirement Planner.

Deposit	These amounts are the amounts you must contribute each year to meet your savings goal.  If you chose to adjust your contributions for inflation, the amount increases each year by the inflation rate.  Quicken assumes that you make each deposit at the end of the year.
Tuition (College Planner only)	These amounts show how much money (in future dollars) you can withdraw each year to meet college expenses after your child enrolls in college.  Quicken assumes that you withdraw each amount at the beginning of the year.
Income (Retirement Planner only)	These amounts show how much income (in future dollars) will be available to you each year after you retire.  Quicken assumes that you withdraw each amount at the beginning of the year.
Total/Balance	These amounts show the balance of your account (in future dollars) after each deposit or withdrawal.


Refinance Planner window
Refinance Planner

With this financial planning calculator, you can determine whether it is to your advantage to refinance a loan. A lower interest rate doesn't always mean that refinancing is the right thing to do. You must also consider up-front fees, closing costs, and other charges.

Fill in the boxes in the Refinance Calculator. Quicken calculates how long it will take for you to break even if you choose to refinance.

What you enter for your existing mortgage:

Current payment

Impound/escrow amount

Quicken calculates:

•	Monthly principal/interest amount.

What you enter for your proposed mortgage:

Principal amount

Years

Interest rate

Quicken calculates:

•	Monthly principal/interest amount

•	Monthly savings

What you enter for your break-even analysis:

Mortgage closing costs

Mortgage points

Quicken calculates:

•	Total closing costs

•	Months to break even


Current Payment

Enter your total payment, including impound and escrow amounts.


Impound/Escrow Amount

Sometimes a mortgage payment includes other items, such as property tax or insurance payments. The mortgage company then handles these payments for the borrower.

Enter the total amount for these other items here. Quicken deducts them from the current payment.


Principal Amount

Enter the amount you are borrowing.


Years

Enter the length of the loan in years.


Interest Rate

Enter the interest rate for the proposed loan.


Mortgage Closing Costs

Enter the costs you must pay at the time of purchase. Examples of closing costs are appraisal and surveying fees, title search costs, and lawyers' fees.

Closing costs can range from 2 to 10 percent of the purchase price of the home.


Mortgage Points

Enter the number of points you are charged.

For each point charged, the buyer pays 1 percent of the mortgage amount to the lending institution.


Calculating the break-even point for a new loan
Calculate the break-even point for a new loan

You can compare your existing mortgage with a proposed mortgage and figure out how long it will take to break even --that is, recoup your refinancing costs.

To calculate the break-even point for a new loan:

1.	From the Plan menu, choose Financial Planners, then choose Refinance.

2.	Under "Existing Mortgage," enter information about your current loan.

3.	Press Tab.  Quicken calculates the monthly principal/interest amount.

4.	Under "Proposed Mortgage," enter information about the proposed refinanced mortgage.

5.	Press Tab.  Quicken calculates the monthly principal/interest amount and monthly savings.

6.	Under "Break-Even Analysis," enter information about closing costs and mortgage points.

7.	Press Tab.  Quicken calculates total closing costs and months to break even.


*Quicken's financial planning formulas (contents)
Quicken's financial planning formulas

The following topics show the formulas that Quicken's financial planning calculators use to make calculations.

Loan Planner formula (Quicken's amortization formula)

Investment Savings Planner formula

College Planner formula

Retirement Planner formulas

Refinance Planner formula


Quicken's amortization formula

Quicken's Loan Planner and amortization features use the formulas shown here to calculate the payments, principal, and interest for your loan. The Refinance Planner uses this formula to calculate the proposed mortgage.

where

n	=	number of periods per year

y	=	total years

r	=	interest rate per period, given by this formula:

Similarly, if you enter the principal, Quicken calculates the payment amount as follows:

Payment schedules

To calculate each line in your payment schedule, Quicken uses the following formulas to base each amount on the principal remaining (as shown in the Balance field on the previous line of the schedule):

Interest payment = r x Remaining principal

Payment against principal = Total payment - Interest payment

Note:  If your loan company uses some other formula to calculate interest rate per period, Quicken's amortization calculations are not accurate for your loan.

For information about Canadian amortization, click here.


Investment Savings Planner formula

Quicken's Investment Savings planner uses the following formula to calculate current savings, future savings, and regular contributions to savings:

where

Input amounts

c	=	Present value

y	=	Annual yield

n	=	Number of periods

p	=	Number of periods per year

a	=	Payment each period

f	=	Future value

i	=	Predicted annual inflation rate

Intermediate amounts

ip	=	Annual payments inflation rate (i for inflate payments; 0 for don't inflate payments)


College Planner formula

Quicken's College Planner uses the following formula to calculate current college savings, college expenses, and annual contributions toward college:

where

Input amounts

t	=	Annual college costs

u	=	Years until enrollment

e	=	Number of years enrolled

c	=	Present savings

y	=	Annual yield

a	=	Yearly payments

i	=	Predicted annual inflation rate

Intermediate amounts

ip	=	Annual payments inflation rate (i for inflate payments; 0 for don't inflate payments)


Retirement Planner formulas

Quicken's Retirement Planner uses the following formulas to calculate current retirement savings, retirement income, and annual contributions to retirement:

where

Input amounts

c	=	Present savings

y	=	Annual yield

a	=	Yearly payments

ac	=	Current age

ar	=	Age at retirement

ad	=	Withdraw until age

o	=	Other income (after tax)

t	=	After tax income

xe	=	Pre-retirement tax rate

xo	=	Post-retirement tax rate

i	=	Predicted annual inflation rate

Intermediate amounts

v	=	Years spent saving (v = ar - ac)

d	=	Years spent spending (d = ad - ar)

ye	=	Pre-retirement yield (See Sheltered table)

yo	=	Post-retirement yield (See Sheltered table)

z	=	Income tax rate (See Sheltered table)

ip	=	Annual payments inflation rate (i for inflate payments; 0 for don't inflate payments)

Sheltered/Non-sheltered table


Refinance Planner formula

To calculate the existing mortgage, Quicken calculates the monthly principal and interest payment using the numbers you enter in the Current payment box and Impound/escrow amount box.

To calculate the proposed mortgage, Quicken uses this formula to calculate the payments, principal, and interest for your "new" loan. (Quicken uses this same formula in the Loan Planner and amortization features.)

where

n	=	number of periods per year

y	=	total years

r	=	interest rate per period, given by this formula:

To calculate the monthly savings, Quicken determines the difference between your current monthly payment and the proposed mortgage payment.

To perform the break-even analysis, Quicken performs two calculations:

•	Quicken takes the closing costs and the mortgage points to calculate the total closing costs.

total closing costs = closing costs + mortgage points x new loan amount

•	Then Quicken arrives at the break-even point.

months to break even = total closing costs /monthly savings


*Scheduling transactions and using the Financial Calendar (contents)
Scheduling transactions and using the Financial Calendar

To search for a Help topic, click the Search button above.

Overview

Click here

How to...

Set up and use scheduled transactions

Set up and use memorized transaction groups

Use the Financial Calendar

Common Questions

Where do the transactions in the Financial Calendar list come from?

Can I remove transactions from the Financial Calendar list?

How do I set up a transaction group containing investment transactions?

Quick Tips

Finding a transaction in the transaction list

Using reminders to record scheduled transactions due


Set up and use scheduled transactions

Add a transaction to the Scheduled Transaction List

Pay a bill from the Scheduled Transaction List

Edit the Scheduled Transaction List

Delete a transaction from the Scheduled Transaction List


Set up and use memorized transaction groups

What is a transaction group?

Set up a transaction group

Use a transaction group

Change a transaction group

Delete a transaction group

Memorize an existing transaction

Memorize a new transaction


Use the Financial Calendar

Schedule a transaction on the Financial Calendar

Edit a scheduled transaction from the Financial Calendar

Pay a bill ahead of time

Remove a scheduled transaction from the Financial Calendar

Add a note to the Financial Calendar

View next month's (or last month's) calendar

Change Financial Calendar options

Print the Financial Calendar


Scheduling transactions and using the Financial Calendar
Overview: Scheduling transactions and using the Financial Calendar

Scheduling Transactions:

Think of your expenses and deposits that come up on a regular basis.  For instance, you may be paid every two weeks, pay rent once a month, and pay the gardener once a week.

Instead of entering a transaction on the day it's due, you can schedule transactions ahead of time.  On the day the transaction becomes due, Quicken either reminds you, or automatically enters it for you in your register, whichever you prefer.

The Financial Calendar:

You can use the Quicken Financial Calendar to keep track of your transactions.  It looks just like the calendar on your wall.  On the Financial Calendar, you can mark one-time transactions such as a vacation, and recurring transactions like your rent and paycheck.

The Financial Calendar shows your upcoming bills, and enters them into your registers as they become due.  For one-time bills, this serves as a useful reminder.  For recurring bills, you've put your bill paying on autopilot.

How to...

Set up and use scheduled transactions

Use the Financial Calendar


Finding a transaction in the transaction list

To find a specific transaction in the list:

1.	Click in the transaction list.

2.	Start typing.  As you type each letter, the highlight moves down the list. Continue typing letters until the transaction you want is highlighted.

3.	Select the transaction.


Setting up an investment transaction group
How do I set up a transaction group containing investment transactions?

Although you can't schedule an investment transaction on the Financial Calendar, you can memorize it and create transactions groups containing memorized investment transactions.

To create a transaction group containing investment transactions:

1.	First, memorize the investment transactions you want to include in the transaction group.

2.	From the Lists menu, choose Scheduled Transaction.  Quicken displays the Scheduled Transaction List.

3.	Click New.  The Create Scheduled Transaction window appears.

4.	Click Group.  The Create Transaction Group window appears.

5.	Select Investment as the type of transaction, then fill in the remaining information.

6.	Click OK.  The Assign Transactions to Group window appears.

7.	Mark transactions to include in the group, as needed.

8.	Click Close when you are finished.

How to...

Use a transaction group

Change a transaction group

Delete a transaction group

Memorize an existing transaction

Memorize a new transaction


Where do the transactions in the Financial Calendar list come from?

The Financial Calendar Transaction list is comprised of memorized transactions.

To put a memorized transaction in the Financial Calendar Transaction list:

1.	If the Financial Calendar is displayed, click Manage List; if it is not displayed, choose Memorized Transaction from the Lists menu.

2.	Select a transaction in the Memorized Transaction list, then click the Calendar button at the bottom of the window.  A "calendar" graphic appears next to the selected transaction, indicating that it is to be displayed on the Financial Calendar Transaction list.


Can I remove transactions from the Financial Calendar list?

Yes, you can.  There are two ways you can do so.  You can limit the list so that it displays memorized transactions from only certain accounts.  Or you exclude individual memorized transactions so that Quicken never displays them in the list.

To limit the list to certain accounts:

1.	From the Activities menu, choose Financial Calendar.

2.	Click Options on the Financial Calendar button bar.

3.	In the Select Accounts to Include list, click any currently marked account names that contain transactions you want excluded from the Financial Calendar Transaction list.

4.	Click OK.

To exclude individual transactions from the list:

1.	If the Financial Calendar is displayed, click Manage List; if it is not displayed, choose Memorized Transaction from the Lists menu.

2.	Look for transactions in the Memorized Transaction list marked with a "calendar" graphic.  These are the transactions that appear in the Financial Calendar Transaction list.

3.	Click the Cal column of a calendar transaction.  You can also select it, then click the Calendar button at the bottom of the window.  Quicken removes the calendar graphic and the transaction from the Financial Calendar Transaction list.


Scheduling a transaction on the Financial Calendar
Schedule a transaction on the Financial Calendar

To schedule a transaction on the Financial Calendar:

1.	From the Activities menu, choose Financial Calendar.  The Financial Calendar, and its Transaction list appears. (If you don't see the list, click View on the Financial Calendar button bar, then select Show Memorized Txns.)

2.	In the Transaction list, put the mouse pointer on the transaction you'd like to schedule on the Financial Calendar.

3.	Hold down the left mouse button and drag the transaction to a date on the Financial Calendar.  The mouse pointer changes to a calendar to show that you can drop the transaction into a day.  If you move the pointer over a date in the past, the pointer changes to a register.  This indicates that the transaction is to be entered directly into your register.

4.	Release the mouse button.  The Drag and Drop Transaction window appears.

5.	Fill in the boxes and click OK.  Quicken displays the transaction on the Financial Calendar.


Editing a scheduled transaction from the Financial Calendar
Edit a scheduled transaction from the Financial Calendar

To edit a scheduled transaction from the Financial Calendar:

1.	From the Activities menu, choose Financial Calendar.  The Financial Calendar appears.  Scheduled transactions appear in blue on the calendar until they have been recorded.

2.	Click the date on the date of the scheduled transaction.  All of the transactions scheduled on that date appear.

3.	Select the scheduled transaction you'd like to change and click Edit.  Scheduled transactions are identified by <Sched> in the list.  The Edit Scheduled Transaction window appears.

4.	Change the date.  You may also change the frequency of payment, or how Quicken enters the payment or deposit in your register.  If the transaction has already been recorded, the Register button takes you to the transaction in the register.

5.	Click OK.


Removing a transaction from the Financial Calendar
Remove a scheduled transaction from the Financial Calendar

To remove a scheduled transaction from the Financial Calendar:

1.	From the Activities menu, choose Financial Calendar.  The Financial Calendar appears.

2.	Click the date on which you've scheduled the transaction.  The transactions scheduled on that date appear.

3.	Select the transaction you'd like to remove and click Delete.

4.	Click OK to confirm that you want to delete this scheduled transaction.

What happens

Quicken deletes the transaction from the Financial Calendar and from your Scheduled Transaction List.  If the transaction was a recurring one, all future transactions are removed also.

If the transaction was already entered in your register, Quicken deletes it only from the register.  It doesn't delete it from the Scheduled Transaction list, or from future dates on the Financial Calendar.


Paying a bill ahead of time (from the Financial Calendar)
Pay a bill ahead of time

Sometimes you need to pay bills ahead of time. Perhaps you are planning a 10-day trip and need to pay your rent and car insurance before you leave.

To pay a bill ahead of time:

1.	From the Activities menu, choose Financial Calendar.  The Financial Calendar appears.

2.	Click the scheduled date for a bill you want to handle now.

3.	Select the bill from the list and click Pay.  Quicken prompts you to review the transaction.

4.	Look at the details and click Record to enter the transaction.


Adding a note to the Financial Calendar
Add a note to the Financial Calendar

In addition to scheduling transactions on your Financial Calendar, you can add notes like "Call tax accountant" or "Check price of XYZ stock."  You can color code the notes for extra usefulness.

To add a note to the Financial Calendar:

1.	From the Activities menu, choose Financial Calendar.

2.	Click the date you'd like to attach a note to.

3.	Click Note on the button bar above the Financial Calendar.  A blank note appears.

4.	Enter your text.

5.	(Optional) Choose a different color for your note.

6.	Click Save.  Quicken pastes a small colored box on the date.  To read the note, click on the small box.

How to...

Use reminders when you have notes on the calendar


Viewing next (or last) month's Financial Calendar
View next (or last) month's Financial Calendar

To see last month's calendar:

•	Click Prev on the Financial Calendar button bar.

To see next month's calendar:

•	Click Next on the Financial Calendar button bar.

To jump to a date:

•	Click on the date text, enter a date in the Go To Date window, then click OK.


Paying a bill from the Scheduled Transaction list
Pay a bill from the Scheduled Transaction list

To pay a bill from the Scheduled Transaction List:

1.	From the Lists menu, choose Scheduled Transaction.  The Scheduled Transaction list appears.

2.	Select the item you want to pay.

3.	Click Pay.  The Edit Register Transaction window appears.

4.	Make any changes to information entered in the boxes.

5.	To split the transaction, click Splits.  The Splits window appears.  Enter the information as you would for a split transaction in your register.

6.	To print checks with Quicken, click Address.  You can enter the payee address here. When you print this check, Quicken inserts the address on the check face.

7.	Click Enter.


Check number

This box is optional. Enter a check number or another reference number.


Date

You can change the date on which Quicken enters this transaction in the register and on the Financial Calendar.


Adding a transaction to the Scheduled Transaction list
Add a transaction to the Scheduled Transaction list

To add to the Scheduled Transaction list:

1.	From the Lists menu, choose Scheduled Transaction.  The Scheduled Transaction List appears.

2.	Click New.  The Create Scheduled Transaction window appears.

3.	Fill in the information about this transaction.

4.	To split the transaction, click Splits.  The Splits window appears.  Enter the information as you would for a split transaction in your register.

5.	To print checks with Quicken, select Printed Checks from the Type drop-down list, then click Address and enter the payee address. When you print this check, Quicken inserts the address on the check face.

6.	To assign one or more transactions to a regularly scheduled group, click Group.  The Create Transaction Group window appears.

7.	Click OK to set up this scheduled transaction.

How to...

Schedule a transaction on the Financial Calendar


Editing the Scheduled Transaction list
Edit the Scheduled Transaction list

To edit the Scheduled Transaction list:

1.	From the Lists menu, choose Scheduled Transaction.  The Scheduled Transaction List appears.

2.	Click Edit.  The Edit Scheduled Transaction window appears.

3.	Change information about this transaction.

4.	To split the transaction, click Splits.  The Splits window appears.  Enter the information as you would for a split transaction in your register.

5.	To print checks with Quicken, click Address.  You can enter the payee address here. When you print this check, Quicken inserts the address on the check face.

6.	Click OK.


Transaction information

Next Scheduled

Account

Type

Payee

Memo

Category

Amount

Frequency

Register Entry

Number of Payments

Days in advance

Splits, Address, Group buttons


Deleting a transaction from the Scheduled Transaction List
Delete a transaction from the Scheduled Transaction list

To delete a scheduled transaction:

1.	From the Lists menu, choose Scheduled Transaction.  The scheduled transaction list appears.

2.	Select the transaction you want to delete.

3.	Click Delete.

4.	Click OK to confirm that you want to delete this transaction from the list.


What is a transaction group?

A way of reminding you.  Transaction groups are groups of recurring transactions that you pay or add to your account at the same time.  Quicken lets you group these transactions and reminds you when their scheduled date arrives.

A time-saver.  When you tell Quicken to use a transaction group, Quicken enters all the transactions in the group for you automatically.  Because of this, transaction groups are useful for recurring transactions you enter at the same time every month.

How to...

Set up a transaction group

Assign a transaction to a transaction group

Use a transaction group

Change a transaction group

Delete a transaction group


Setting up a transaction group
Set up a transaction group

Transaction groups are groups of recurring transactions that you pay or add to your account at the same time.  Quicken lets you group these transactions and reminds you when their scheduled date arrives.

When you tell Quicken to use a transaction group, Quicken enters all the transactions in the group for you automatically.  Because of this, transaction groups are useful for recurring transactions you enter at the same time every month.

Quicken only allows you to set up 12 transaction groups. If you plan to use transaction groups extensively, be sure to group as many transactions as possible into each group.

To set up a transaction group:

1.	From the Lists menu, choose Scheduled Transaction.  The Scheduled Transaction list appears.

2.	Click New.  The Set Up Scheduled Transaction window appears.

3.	Click Group.  The Create Transaction Group window appears.

4.	Enter the information requested.

5.	Click OK.  The Assign Transactions to Group window appears.

6.	Mark transactions to include in the group, as needed.  A transaction must be memorized before you can include it in a group.

7.	Click Close when you are finished.

How to...

Assign a transaction to a transaction group

Use a transaction group

Change a transaction group

Delete a transaction group

Memorize a transaction


Assigning a transaction to a transaction group
Assign a transaction to a transaction group

To assign a transaction to a group:

1.	From the Lists menu, choose Scheduled Transaction.  The Scheduled Transaction list appears.

2.	Select a group name at the top of the list, then click Edit.  The Edit Transaction Group window appears.

3.	Edit information as necessary, then click OK.  The Assign Transactions to Group window appears.

4.	Mark the transactions to assign to the group.

5.	Click Done when you are finished.

How to...

Use a transaction group

Change a transaction group

Delete a transaction group


Using a transaction group
Use a transaction group

Once you have set up a transaction group, you can use it at any time.

To use a transaction group:

1.	From the Lists menu, choose Scheduled Transaction.

2.	Select the transaction group you want to recall and click Pay.  The Edit Transaction Group window appears.

3.	Make sure that the account shown is the account where you want the transactions to be entered.  If the wrong account is shown, select the correct account from the Account drop-down list.

4.	(Optional) Change the date on which you want Quicken to enter these transactions in the register.

5.	Click OK.  Quicken enters all the transactions into the register of the target account.  If the transactions are checks to be printed, they are entered into the Write Checks window.

How to...

Assign a transaction to a transaction group

Change a transaction group

Delete a transaction group


Changing a transaction group
Change a transaction group

Once you have set up a transaction group, you can select a different scheduling frequency, add new transactions to the group, or subtract transactions from the group.

To change a transaction group:

1.	From the Lists menu, choose Scheduled Transaction.

2.	Select the transaction group you want to change and click Edit.

3.	If needed, change the information shown in the Edit Transaction Group window.

4.	Click OK.  The Assign Transactions to Group window appears.

5.	Mark or unmark transactions as needed.

6.	When you have made all of your changes, click Close.

How to...

Assign a transaction to a transaction group

Use a transaction group

Delete a transaction group


Deleting a transaction group
Delete a transaction group

Proceed with caution.  When you delete a transaction group, you remove it permanently from your Quicken file.

To delete a transaction group:

1.	From the Lists menu, choose Scheduled Transaction.

2.	Select the group that you want to delete and click Delete.

3.	Click OK to confirm that you want to delete the group.

How to...

Change a transaction group


Financial Calendar window
The Financial Calendar

For an overview...

Click here

How to...

Use the Financial Calendar

What you see

Financial Calendar button bar

Financial Calendar

Transaction list

Manage List button

Register, Scheduled, Show Both options

Account Balances Graph


The Financial Calendar

Think of your expenses and deposits that come up on a regular basis.  For instance, you may be paid every two weeks, pay rent once a month, and pay the gardener once a week.

You can use the Quicken Financial Calendar to keep track of all these transactions.  It looks just like the calendar on your wall.  On the Financial Calendar, you can mark one-time transactions such as a vacation, and recurring transactions like your rent and paycheck.

The Financial Calendar shows your upcoming bills, and enters them into your registers as they become due.  For one-time bills, this serves as a useful reminder.  For recurring bills, you've put your bill paying on autopilot.


Financial Calendar button bar

Note button

View button

Prev, Next buttons

Options button

Close button


Note button

Adds a reminder note to the selected date in the Financial Calendar.

You can color code your notes (yellow for birthdays, blue for meetings). After you save the note, Quicken places a small colored box on the date. Click the box to read the note.


View button

Displays a menu that lets you change the layout of the Financial Calendar.  A checkmark next to a menu command indicates that it is selected.

Command	What it does
Show Memorized Txns	Displays the Transaction List.
Show Account Graph	Displays the account balances graph.


Prev, Next buttons

Displays last or next month's Financial Calendar.


Options button

Displays the Calendar Options window, where you can select which accounts display their memorized transactions in the Transaction list, as well as change Quicken's QuickFill settings.


Close button

Closes the Financial Calendar window.


Financial Calendar

Displays scheduled and register transactions, both recurring and onetime, one month at a time.

Register transactions, displayed in black, are already in your register.  Scheduled transactions appear in blue until they have been recorded.  Today's date is shown in a different color (or shade).

Transactions scheduled ahead of today aren't yet entered in your register.  You can view them only on the Financial Calendar or in the Scheduled Transaction list.  As they become due, Quicken enters them for you in the register and changes them from blue to black on the Financial Calendar.


Transaction list

Displays your memorized transactions.

Drag and drop a transaction onto a date on the Financial Calendar, then fill in the information requested.  Quicken records this transaction in your account register on the date you choose.

If you want to limit the transactions listed to selected accounts, click the Options button, then select only the accounts that contain the transactions you want listed.

If you want to remove individual transactions from the list, click the Manage List button, select the transaction you want to remove, then click the calendar button at the bottom of the Memorized Transaction list window.


Register, Scheduled, Show Both options

Click to view only already recorded transactions, only scheduled transactions, or both on the Financial Calendar.


Manage List button

Displays the Memorized Transactions window, which lets you create, edit, and mark transactions for display in the Transaction List on the Financial Calendar.


Account Balances Graph

To show/hide the graph, click View on the Financial Calendar button bar, then choose Show Account Graph.

The Account Balances Graph shows your actual account balances plus post-dated and scheduled transactions.  If you upgraded from Quicken 3 for Windows, your forecast data and worksheet have been moved to Forecasting.

Click the right mouse button on any bar in the graph to see the amount that bar represents.

This color...	Represents this...
Yellow	Account balances before today
Blue or Red	Projected balances, based on current spending. If your balances are negative, the bars are red.
Green	Represents today (or the date selected on the Financial Calendar)


Note window
Note

This is where you add a reminder note to the selected date in the Financial Calendar.  You can color code your notes (yellow for birthday reminders, blue for meetings, etc.).

To add a note to the Financial Calendar:

1.	Type in your text.

2.	(Optional) Choose a different color for your note.

3.	Click Save.  Quicken pastes a small colored box on the date.  To read the note, click on the small box.

How to...

Use Quicken Reminders


Go To Date window
Go To Date

To go to a specific calendar date:

•	Enter a date, or click the date button and select a date, then click OK.


Create/Edit Scheduled Transaction window
Create/Edit Scheduled Transaction

To create/edit a scheduled transaction:

1.	Enter or change the information, as necessary.

2.	To split the transaction, click Splits.  The Splits window appears.  Enter the information as you would for a split transaction in your register.

3.	To print checks with Quicken, click Address.  You can enter the payee address here. When you print this check, Quicken inserts the address on the check face.

4.	To assign one or more transactions to a regularly scheduled group, click Group.  The Create Transaction Group window appears.

5.	Click OK.

What you see

Next Scheduled	Frequency
Account	Register Entry
Type	Number of Payments
Payee	Days in advance
Memo	Splits, Address, Group buttons
Category
Amount


Edit Register Transaction window
Edit Register Transaction

To edit a register transaction:

1.	Change the information, as necessary.

2.	To split the transaction, click Splits.  The Splits window appears.  Enter the information as you would for a split transaction in your register.

3.	To print checks with Quicken, click Address.  You can enter the payee address here. When you print this check, Quicken inserts the address on the check face.

4.	Click OK.

What you see

Date

Account

Type

Payee

Memo

Category

Amount

Num field

Splits, Address buttons


Drag and Drop Transaction window
Drag and Drop Transaction

To add a transaction to the Financial Calendar:

1.	Enter or change the information, as necessary.

2.	To split the transaction, click Splits.  Quicken opens the Splits window. Enter the information as you would for a split transaction in your register.

3.	To print checks with Quicken, click Address.  You can enter the payee address here. When you print this check, Quicken inserts the address on the check face.

4.	Click OK.

What you see

Scheduled Transaction	For register transactions:
Register Transaction	Num field
Date	For scheduled transactions:
Account	Frequency
Type	Register Entry
Payee	Number of Payments
Memo	Days in advance
Category	Buttons:
Amount	Splits, Address buttons


Scheduled Transaction

Click to create a new scheduled transaction.


Register Transaction

Click to create a standard, non-scheduled register transaction.  Quicken enters the transaction in your register on the date you specify.


Splits, Address, Group buttons

This button...	Opens the...
Splits	Splits window where you can divide this transaction among several categories.
Address	Printed Check Information window. If you print checks with Quicken, you can enter the information here.
Group	Create Transaction Group window. If you plan to pay several bills at one time, you can set up a transaction group, and have Quicken enter the transactions at one time.


Splits, Address buttons

This button...	Does this...
Splits	Displays a window where you can divide the amount of the transaction between two or more categories.
Address	Displays a window where you enter the address you want to appear on checks you will be printing.  Use this option if you chose Printed Check as your method of payment.


Type

Select the payment type: Payment for a handwritten check, Deposit for an amount you are depositing into this account, Print Check for a check you print from Quicken or Elec Payment for an electronic payment sent by CheckFree.


Memo

Enter a note about this transaction.


Payee

Select a payee name or enter a new payee.


Category

Enter a category for this transaction.


Amount

Enter the amount of the transaction.


Next Scheduled

Enter the date you'd like to start entering this transaction in your register.


Frequency

Select how often you'd like to enter this transaction in your register, for example, once a month, every two weeks, or only one time.


Number of Payments

To enter this payment an indefinite number of times, leave the number set at 999. If you know exactly how many payments (or deposits) you'll be making, enter that number.

To temporarily disable a scheduled transaction that you will use later, enter a 0.  Quicken won't record any more transactions in your register until you enter a new number, although the item remains in your Scheduled Transaction list.


Register Entry

•	Automatically Enter: Quicken automatically enters the transaction in your register.

•	Prompt before entering: When you have payments or deposits to record on a particular date, you can have Quicken prompt you at the Reminders window (at start up) before any transactions are entered.  You have an opportunity to make changes to each transaction before Quicken enters it in the register.

For example, if the scheduled transaction contains an estimated amount, select this option so that you can enter the actual amount before the transaction is recorded in your register.


Account

From the drop-down list, select the account in which you'd like to record a scheduled transaction.


Days in advance

Enter this transaction in advance of the payment date.

If you enter a number in this box, Quicken enters the transaction in the register as a postdated transaction the specified number of days before the scheduled transaction date.


Scheduled Transaction List

The Scheduled Transaction list displays all of your scheduled transactions and groups.  From here you can set up, edit, delete, or use any scheduled transaction or group.

How to...

Set up and use scheduled transactions

Set up and use transaction groups

What you see

New button

Edit button

Delete button

Pay button

Close button


Pay button

Allows you to pay a bill or use a transaction group in advance of the date you're scheduled to do so.


New button

Creates a new scheduled transaction and adds it to the list.


Edit button

Edits the scheduled transaction or group you selected, allowing you to change the frequency of payment, how Quicken enters your transaction or group in the register, the number of payments planned and other details.


Delete button

Deletes the scheduled transaction or group you selected.


Close button

Closes the list.


Create Transaction Group window
Create/Edit Transaction Group

This is where you create or edit a transaction group.  If you wish, you can also choose to have Quicken remind you each time payments in the group are due.

To create/edit a transaction group:

1.	Enter the date when the transactions in the group will be due next.

2.	From the Account drop-down list, select the account where you'd like Quicken to enter the transaction.

3.	Click either Regular or Investment to let Quicken know what type of transactions are in the group.

4.	Type a name for the group.

5.	Choose a frequency from the Frequency drop-down list that indicates how often you want Quicken to schedule the group.

6.	Enter the number of payments.

7.	Choose how you'd like Quicken to enter the payment in the register. The options in the Register Entry drop-down list let you choose whether or not Quicken prompts you before entering a payment or whether a payment is for planning purposes only.

8.	Enter the number of days in advance you'd like Quicken to enter the payment.

9.	Click OK.

What you see

Next

Account

Group Type

Group Name

Frequency

Number of Payments

Register entry

Days in advance


Next (payment date)

Enter the date you'd like to start entering this transaction group in your register.


Account

From the drop-down list, select the account in which you'd like to record the transaction group.


Group Type

Select Investment if you're setting up an investment transaction group, otherwise select Regular.


Group Name

Type the name you would like to assign to the transaction group.


Frequency (of payment)

Select how often you'd like to enter this transaction group in your register, for example, once a month, every two weeks, or only one time.


Number of Payments

To enter this transaction group an indefinite number of times, leave the number set at 999. If you know exactly how many payments (or deposits) you'll be making, enter that number.


Register entry

•	Prompt before enter: Quicken prompts you before entering the transaction group in your register.

•	Automatically enter: Quicken automatically enters the transaction group in your register.


Days in advance

Enter this transaction group in advance of the payment date.

If you enter a number in this box, Quicken enters the transaction group in the register as a postdated transaction the specified number of days before the scheduled transaction date.


Assign Transactions to Group window
Assign Transactions to Group

This list shows all the memorized transactions in the current file.  In the list, you mark the transactions that you want Quicken to assign to the group.  If you are editing a group, you can unmark transactions so that they are no longer part of the group.

To assign a transaction to a group:

•	Select the transaction and click Mark.  Once you assign a transaction, the number of the group it belongs to appears in the Grp column on the far right.

To remove a transaction from a group:

•	Select the transaction you want to remove, then click Mark.  In the Grp column, Quicken removes the number of the group the transaction was assigned to.

What you see

View Locked Items Only


View Locked Items Only

Click to view only locked transactions.  Locked transactions are not changed if you enter another transaction with the same payee.

To lock a transaction:

•	Choose Memorized Transaction from the Lists menu, select the transaction you want to lock, then click the Lock button.


Record Transaction Group window
Record Transaction Group

To record the transaction group:

1.	Verify and change the Due Date and Account, if necessary.

2.	Click Record.  Quicken enters the transactions in the register of the target account.

What you see

Due Date

Account

Record, Skip, Edit buttons


Due Date

The date Quicken uses when it enters the transactions in the target account.


Account

The account where the transactions in the group will be recorded.


Record, Skip, Edit buttons

This button...	Does this
Record	Enters the transaction group in your register.
Skip	Doesn't record the transaction group. If the transaction group was scheduled on the Financial Calendar, you won't be reminded to record the group again until its next occurrence on the calendar.
Edit	Allows you to assign or remove transactions from the group.


*Quicken for Canadian users (contents)
Quicken for Canadian users

Thank you for using Quicken.  Intuit is glad to have a growing community of Canadian users.  We apologize for spelling cheque wrong elsewhere in this Help system.  But you will find that you can adapt Quicken for your special needs.  This section addresses several points of interest to Canadians.

How to...

Install Quicken for Canadian use

Use a Canadian date style

Amortize Canadian loans

Use Canadian categories

Track Canadian GST and PST for your personal expenses

Track Canadian GST and PST in your business

Order cheques and other supplies


Installing Quicken for Canadian use
Install Quicken for Canadian use

If you installed Quicken without setting your Windows International setting to "Canada" first, you'll need to follow the steps below and then reinstall Quicken.  Otherwise, you won't get the correct TAX.SCD file.  The TAX.SCD file contains a list of Canadian tax form assignments and links to WinTax, Intuit's tax preparation software.  TAX.SCD lets you assign Quicken categories to specific tax schedule line items so you can easily run reports on how much taxes you owe.

To install Quicken for Canadian use:

1.	Quit Quicken.

2.	Double-click the Windows Program Manager, if it isn't already open.

3.	Double-click the Control Panel icon.

4.	Double-click the International icon.

5.	Select Canada from the Country drop-down list, then click OK.

6.	Reinstall Quicken.

Common Question

How do I set up categories with tax time in mind?


Using a Canadian date style
Use a Canadian date style

Quicken can display dates in either the Canadian style (day/month/year) or the U.S. style (month/day/year).  If your Windows International setting (part of the Control Panel) is set to Canada before you install Quicken, Quickens dates are automatically set to the Canadian style.

To set the date style in Quicken:

1.	Click Options on the Quicken iconbar or the register window.

2.	Click Register, then the Miscellaneous tab.

3.	Click on a date style in the upper left corner of the window.  Select DD/MM/YY for the Canadian style.

To set the date style on your printed cheques:

1.	Click Prefs on the Quicken iconbar or the Write Checks window.

2.	Click Checks.

3.	Click on a printed date style.  To select a Canadian style, click on either DD/MM/YEAR (for example, 17/2/1994) or DD/MM/YY (for example, 17/2/94).

How to...

Install Quicken for Canadian use


Amortizing Canadian loans
Amortize Canadian loans

Quicken can amortize loans using the formula commonly used in Canada, by calculating interest on the basis of semiannual compounding.  (In the U.S., annual compounding is used.) When you track amortized loan payments such as your house mortgage or car payments, Quicken calculates the correct principal and interest amounts.

When you set up the loan information in Quicken, specify Canadian compounding in the Set Up Loan window.

How to...

Set up and schedule loan payments

More about ...

The Canadian amortization formula


Using Canadian categories
Use Canadian categories

If you chose to use one of Quickens standard category lists when you created your first file, youll notice that the list includes categories specific to Canada.  The standard list of home categories includes these categories:

Category	Type	Description
CPP	Income	Canada Pension Plan
GST	Expense	Goods and Services Tax
PST	Expense	Provincial Sales Tax
RRSP	Expense	Registered Retirement Savings Plan
UIC	Expense	Unemployment Insurance Commission

The standard business list includes categories for GST and PST (but not CPP, RRSP, or UIC).  If you didnt use one of Quickens standard lists, you can easily add these categories yourself.

How to...

Use categories, classes, and supercategories


Tracking Canadian GST and PST (Personal)
Track Canadian GST and PST for your personal expenses

If you want to track how much you are spending on GST (Goods and Services Tax) and PST (Provincial Sales Tax) in your personal expenses, use a split transaction to record the taxes as separate line items.  Assign the GST and PST categories to the tax amounts.  For example, lets say you buy a gold ring for $325.  With 7% GST and 8% PST added (the PST rate depends on your province), the total cost is $373.75.  You would enter these amounts in the Splits window.

When you run a report or display a graph, Quicken shows you how much you are spending overall on GST and PST.

To calculate the tax amounts on each purchase, use the pop-up calculator (click the calculator button in the Amount field).  Or, to save you from calculating amounts each time, set up a memorized split transaction with the split amounts memorized as percentages.  Then, you just recall the memorized transaction and enter the total purchase amount.  Quicken splits the transaction and allocates the correct tax amounts.

How to...

Split a transaction

Memorize transactions


Tracking Canadian GST and PST (Business)
Track Canadian GST and PST in your business

If you need to track GST (Goods and Services Tax) as part of your business, we recommend that you use a liability account.  You may need to track PST (Provincial Sales Tax) too, depending on your province; if so, use a separate liability account for tracking PST.

Using liability accounts has two advantages:

•	The accounts are included in net worth reports and graphs, so these give you a more accurate picture of your business finances.  When you collect GST, for example, the tax amount should not be added to your net worth, as you will pay it to Revenue Canada later.  Transferring the amount to a liability account does not affect your net worth.  You can filter out your tax accounts when you run a net worth report.

•	The liability account balances give you an instant record of what you owe the federal and provincial tax authorities.  You can easily run reports on these accounts, and can print the reports for a complete record on paper of your tax transactions.

How to...

Set up tax liability accounts

Enter your business transactions

Report on your business transactions

Pay GST and PST to the tax authorities


Setting up Canadian tax liability accounts
Set up tax liability accounts

Set up a liability account in which to track both the GST you pay to vendors and the GST you collect from customers.  You may wish to name the account GST Owed. If you also need to track the PST you collect on sales, set up a separate liability account and name this account PST Owed.

To set up your tax liability accounts:

1.	From the Activities menu, choose Create New Account.

2.	Click Liability.

3.	Complete the information requested, then click OK.

4.	When Quicken asks if you want to set up an amortized loan, click No.

5.	If you need to track PST, repeat steps 1 through 4 to create your PST Owed liability account.


Entering Canadian business transactions
Enter your business transactions

When you record a business sale or purchase, use a split transaction to record GST as a separate line item.  Enter the name of the tax liability account in the Category field for this item, so that Quicken transfers the tax amount to the liability account.  If you pay PST, similarly transfer the PST you collect on sales to the PST liability account.  (You do not receive PST tax credit for purchases, so do not record PST for purchases.  However, if you pay Quebec Sales Tax, record QST on both sales and purchases.)

If your bill or invoice lists several items, you can include them all in the same Splits window, and then add the tax line items.

If you need to calculate the tax amounts, use the pop-up calculator (click the calculator button in the Amount field).

For simple transactions, you can save time by setting up a memorized split transaction with the split amounts memorized as percentages.  Then, you just recall the memorized transaction and enter the total payment or deposit amount.  Quicken splits the transaction and allocates the correct tax amounts.

How to...

Split a transaction

Memorize transactions


Reporting on your business transactions
Report on your business transactions

If you open the GST Owed (or PST Owed) liability account, you see one entry for each business transaction.  When you collect GST or PST from a customer, the tax appears as an increase in the account balance, because your liability increases.  When you pay GST (or QST) to a supplier, the tax paid appears as a decrease in the account balance, because GST (or QST) you pay to a supplier acts as a credit and reduces your liability to Revenue Canada.

There are various ways of reporting on your tax records.

•	For a simple listing of entries in the tax liability account, highlight the blank transaction at the end of the register and click the Report button in the register button bar.

•	For more transaction detail, open the chequing account you use for business transactions and create a transaction report (listed under Other in the Create Report window).  Customize the report as follows.  If you use more than one chequing account for business, select the other chequing accounts too.  Select Show Split Transaction Detail (in the Report Layout customize option) to show the tax amounts for each transaction.  If you like, you can subtotal the report by month.  To list only sales, select Deposits (under Transactions Types) as the Transaction Type.  To list only purchases, select Payments as the Transaction Type.

How to...

Create reports about your finances


Paying Canadian GST and PST to the tax authorities
Pay GST and PST to the tax authorities

Find out how much you owe the tax authorities by running reports or by looking at the Ending Balances of your tax liability accounts, as described in the previous section.  If the Ending Balance of your account displays in black rather than red, the tax authority owes you a refund.

If you are making a payment, record your cheque to the tax authority in your chequing account, using the Write Checks window if you print cheques with Quicken, or the register for a handwritten cheque.  In the Category field, enter a transfer to the tax liability account.  The transfer pays off your liability, reducing the balance of the liability account.

If you receive a GST refund, record the deposit in your chequing account register and enter the name of the tax liability account (for example, [GST Owed]) in the Category field.  Quicken records an increase in your tax liability account equal to the amount you receive.  In effect, you are recognizing payment of a receivable that is tracked in a liability account rather than in an asset account.

How to...

Create reports about your finances


Ordering cheques and other supplies

Intuit cheques are accepted at all financial institutions in Canada and the United States.  See the supplies catalogue in your Quicken package for information about ordering from our Canadian cheque printer.

You can also use the Intuit Marketplace to order checks, software, and other products for use with Quicken 4 for Windows.  In addition to checks, you can order deposit slips, envelopes, stamps, forms leaders for printers, and stationery.

More about...

The Intuit Marketplace


Canadian amortization formula

In Canada, all mortgages are compounded semiannually. This means that interest is added to the outstanding principal every six months.

The interest for the first six months is added to the principal balance and earns interest from then on.

For example, on a $1,000 loan:

•	With a 10% interest rate, the interest payment is $100 per year.

•	With a 10% interest rate compounded semiannually:

$1,000 x 10% x 6 months = $50.00

$1,050 x 10% x 6 months = $52.50

The effective annual interest rate is $102.50/10.25%

Quicken uses this formula to calculate interest payments according to Canadian regulations:

In this formula:

i =	stated interest rate (for example, i = 0.10 for 10%)
m =	number of times the interest rate is compounded in a year
n =	number of payments made per year
R =	rate needed by Quicken to calculate Canadian payments


*Categories, classes, and supercategories (contents)
Categories, classes, and supercategories

To search for a Help topic, click the Search button above.

Overview

Click here

How to...

Set up and use categories

Set up and use classes

Set up and use supercategories

Common Questions

How do I set up categories with tax time in mind?

What are the standard Quicken home categories?

What are the standard Quicken business categories?

Quick Tips

Saving time when deleting subcategories

Transferring categories to a new file

Adding home or business categories to an existing file


Set up and use categories

What is a category?

Set up a category

Assign a category to a transaction

Split transactions between several categories

Change a category

Merge two categories

Delete a category

Turn a category into a subcategory

Turn a subcategory into a category

Move a subcategory to a different category


Set up and use classes

What is a class?

Set up classes and subclasses

Assign a class to a transaction

Change a class

Delete a class


Set up and use supercategories

What is a supercategory?

Set up supercategories

Assign categories to supercategories

Rename supercategories

Delete supercategories


Categories, classes, and supercategories
Overview: Categories, classes, and supercategories

All Quicken registers have a Category field. When you enter a category name in the Category field of a transaction, you categorize the transaction with an income or expense category. These categories identify where your income comes from and what your expenses are.

When you categorize your transactions, any Quicken reports, budgets, and graphs you create will be more meaningful, providing detailed information about your spending.

The way you use categories and classes can be as simple or intricate as your finances require.

Categories help you understand and organize your finances

For example, if you were recording your monthly gasoline expenses by hand, you might keep track of them by putting all the receipts in an envelope or recording them in a notebook. At the end of the month you'd have to tally them all up. You'd probably follow the same procedure to track your spending on groceries or clothing.

Quicken lets you track these expenditures by simply assigning your expenses to a category (such as "groceries" or "gasoline") each time you enter a payment in Quicken.

With just a few keystrokes, you can then create a report or graph showing how much you spent on any category of expense.

Classes organize your transactions in different ways

For example, let's say that you use your personal checking account for both business and personal finances.  You assign transactions from this account to classes named Business and Personal.  Then you also categorize your expenses within each class.

•	Categorize business travel as "Travel" within the class Business.

•	Categorize personal travel as "Travel" within the class Personal.

This keeps your business and personal finances separate when you create reports, graphs, and budgets in Quicken.  For more examples, click here.

Supercategories give you a broader view

You can group your categories together into supercategories for budgets and budget reports.  Supercategories give you another level for viewing your finances.  For example, you may want to group Dining and Groceries under Food, and enter a single budget amount for Food.

How to...

Set up and use categories

Set up and use classes

Set up and use supercategories


More Examples

Use classes to specify	Examples
Who the transaction is for	Your clients (e.g., Ellis, Jones) Your sales staff (for tracking commissions) You or your spouse
Where the transaction applies	Sales regions (e.g., East, West) Your rental properties (e.g.,Oak, Elm)
What the transaction is for	Security names (in an asset account) Job or project names (for job costing)


Saving time when deleting subcategories

When you delete a subcategory, Quicken asks if you want to merge the subcategory with the parent. If you know the subcategory isn't used anywhere (or if you don't mind having some uncategorized transactions), click No.

Doing this will save you time. If you ask Quicken to merge the subcategory with its parent, Quicken searches your entire file to find occurrences of the category which may need to be merged.


Transferring categories to a new file

If you want to create a new file that uses the same categories you have in an existing file, you can use the Copy command to perform this task.

To transfer categories to a new file:

1.	From the File menu, choose File Operations, then choose Copy.

2.	Enter the name for the new file and a date range for which you have no existing transactions.

3.	Since you are copying categories, and not transactions, clear the Copy All Prior Uncleared Transactions checkbox.

If the file you are copying includes an investment account, clear the Copy All Prior Investment Transactions checkbox as well.

4.	Click OK.  The File Copied Successfully window appears.

5.	Choose Load New Copy.

6.	Click OK.  The new file has the same names and account types as the accounts in the original file. You can edit or delete these accounts and still have the original category, class, and memorized transaction lists.


Adding home or business categories to an existing file

When you set up a new Quicken file, you specify whether you want the file to include business categories, home categories, or both.

Later, if you change our mind, you can add home or business categories to the file using the following procedure.

To add home or business categories to an existing file:

1.	From the File menu, choose Import.  The QIF Import window appears.

2.	Select the Quicken account you want to add the categories to.

3.	Under "Import Items," select Category List.

4.	Click Browse.  The Import from QIF File window appears.

5.	Display the files in the directory where you installed Quicken.  To display the files in a particular directory, double-click the directory name in the Directories list.

6.	Select HOME.QIF or BUSINESS.QIF in the list under the File Name box.

7.	Click OK.  The QIF Import window reappears.

8.	Click OK again.  Quicken adds the selected categories

More about ...

QIF files

Quicken's standard home categories

Quicken's standard business categories


What is a category?

A useful label

In Quicken, categories are labels that you can apply to transactions.  You use them to keep track of where your money comes from and where it goes.  Examples of categories that you might use are "Salary," "Groceries," and "Utilities."

Categories extend the power of Quicken

When you categorize your transactions, Quicken reports, graphs, and budgets become much more meaningful.  You can create reports and graphs that tell you how much you spend on items like food, entertainment, or mortgage interest; or how much income you receive from sources like salary, dividends, or interest.

Quicken's categories are flexible

Quicken provides a list of standard categories that you can begin using immediately.  You can add categories of your own to the list and delete categories that you don't need.  If a category doesn't provide enough detail, you can create subcategories within the category.  Your reports will show the subcategory amounts as subtotals for their parent category.

See a list of...

Quicken's standard home categories

Quicken's standard business categories

How to...

Set up categories

Assign categories to transactions

Change a category

Delete a category you no longer need


Quicken's standard home categories

Category	Type	Tax	Description
Bonus	Income	Tax	Bonus Income
CPP	Income	Tax	Canadian Pension Plan
Div Income	Income	Tax	Dividend Income
Gift Received	Income	Tax	Gift Received
Int Inc	Income	Tax	Interest Income
Invest Inc	Income	Tax	Investment Income
Old Age Pension	Income	Tax	Old Age Pension
Other Inc	Income	Tax	Other Income
Salary	Income	Tax	Salary Income
Salary Spouse	Income	Tax	Spouse's Salary Income
Auto	Expense		Automobile Expenses
Fuel	Sub		Auto Fuel
Loan	Sub		Auto Loan Payment
Service	Sub		Auto Service
Bank Chrg	Expense		Bank Charge
Charity	Expense	Tax	Charitable Donations
Cash Contrib.	Sub	Tax	Cash Contributions
Non-Cash	Sub	Tax	Non-Cash Contributions
Childcare	Expense		Childcare Expense
Christmas	Expense		Christmas Expenses
Clothing	Expense		Clothing
Dining	Expense		Dining Out
Dues	Expense		Dues
Education	Expense		Education
Entertain	Expense		Entertainment
Gifts	Expense	Tax	Gift Expenses
Groceries	Expense		Groceries
GST	Expense	Tax	Goods and Services Tax
Home Rpair	Expense		Home Repair & Maint.
Household	Expense		Household Misc. Exp
Housing	Expense		Housing
Insurance	Expense		Insurance
Int Exp	Expense	Tax	Interest Expense
Invest Exp	Expense	Tax	Investment Expense
Medical	Expense	Tax	Medical Expense
Doctor	Sub	Tax	Doctor & Dental Visits
Medicine	Sub	Tax	Medicine & Drugs
Misc	Expense		Miscellaneous
Mort Int	Expense	Tax	Mortgage Interest Exp
Other Exp	Expense	Tax	Other Expenses
PST	Expense	Tax	Provincial Sales Tax
Recreation	Expense		Recreation Expense
RRSP	Expense		Reg Retirement Sav Plan
Subscriptions	Expense		Subscriptions
Supplies	Expense		Supplies
Tax	Expense	Tax	Taxes
Fed	Sub	Tax	Federal Tax
Medicare	Sub	Tax	Medicare Tax
Other	Sub	Tax	Misc. Taxes
Prop	Sub	Tax	Property Tax
Soc Sec	Sub	Tax	Soc Sec Tax
State	Sub	Tax	State Tax
Tax Spouse	Expense	Tax	Spouse's Taxes
Fed	Sub	Tax	Federal Tax
Medicare	Sub	Tax	Medicare Tax
Soc Sec	Sub	Tax	Soc Sec Tax
State	Sub	Tax	State Tax
Telephone	Expense		Telephone Expense
UIC	Expense	Tax	Unemploy. Ins. Commission
Utilities	Expense		Water, Gas, Electric
Gas & Electric	Sub		Gas and Electricity
Water	Sub		Water


Category

The category name, as it appears in the Category & Transfer List.


Type

Categories are divided into Income (such as salary, dividends, and interest) and Expense (such as dining, groceries, and telephone).  Subcategories (Sub) are listed under their parent categories.


Type

Categories are divided into Income (such as salary, dividends, and interest) and Expense (such as dining, groceries, and telephone).


Tax

Tax-related categories are identified by the word Tax.  These categories track tax information and make it easy to create reports and graphs of your tax-related income and expenses.

How to...

Set up categories with tax time in mind


Description

A brief description of the category.


Quicken's standard business categories

Category	Type	Tax	Description
Gr Sales	Income	Tax	Gross Sales
Other Inc	Income	Tax	Other Income
Rent Income	Income	Tax	Rent Income
Ads	Expense	Tax	Advertising
Bus. Insurance	Expense	Tax	Insurance (not health)
Bus. Utilities	Expense	Tax	Water, Gas, Electric
Business Tax	Expense	Tax	Taxes & Licenses
Car	Expense	Tax	Car & Truck
Commission	Expense	Tax	Commissions
Freight	Expense	Tax	Freight
GST	Expense	Tax	Goods and Services Tax
Int Paid	Expense	Tax	Interest Paid
L&P Fees	Expense	Tax	Legal & Prof. Fees
Late Fees	Expense	Tax	Late Payment Fees
Meals & Entertn	Expense	Tax	Meals & Entertainment
Office	Expense	Tax	Office Expenses
PST	Expense	Tax	Provincial Sales Tax
Rent on Equip	Expense	Tax	Rent-Vehicle,mach,equip
Rent Paid	Expense	Tax	Rent Paid
Repairs	Expense	Tax	Repairs
Returns	Expense	Tax	Returns & Allowances
Supplies, bus.	Expense	Tax	Supplies
Travel	Expense	Tax	Travel Expenses
Wages	Expense	Tax	Wages & Job Credits


What is a class?

Classes are another way of labeling your transactions in Quicken.  You use classes to specify where, to what, or to whom your transactions apply.  Classes do not replace categories.  Rather, classes complement categories by adding a second dimension to your reports, graphs, and budgets.

A transaction can have a category, a class, or both.

Use classes to:

•	Use your personal checking account for business and personal expenses.  Leave your personal transactions unclassified, but assign the class name Business to business transactions.

•	Manage properties.  You can identify transactions by property name or address.  That way, six different utitlity bills could be marked clearly as utiltiyexpenses applying to six different properties.

•	Work with multiple clients.  You can identify transactions by client name.  Then you could report separately on the income and expenses related to each client.

•	More examples>

How to...

Set up and use classes


Setting up a category
Set up a category

To set up a category:

1.	From the Lists menu, choose Category & Transfer.

2.	Click New.

3.	Type a name for the new category.

4.	(Optional)  Enter a description of the category in the Description box.

5.	Indicate whether the category is to track income or expenses.

6.	If you want the category to be a subcategory, click Subcategory Of and enter the name of the parent category.

7.	If the category is for tracking tax-related transactions, click the Tax-related checkbox.  From the Form drop-down list, select the tax schedule line item to which you want to assign your category.  If there is no Form drop-down list, it means that Quicken is not set up to use tax schedules with categories.  More detail>

8.	Click OK.

How to...

Set up and use categories

Set up Quicken to use tax schedules with categories


Changing a category
Change a category

To change a category:

You can change a category name if you need to.  When you change the name, Quicken automatically changes the name in transactions that you categorized under the old name.

1.	From the Lists menu, choose Category & Transfer.

2.	Select a category in the list.

3.	Click Edit.

4.	Change the category information as needed.

5.	Click OK.

Note

If you want to change a category so that it tracks tax-related transactions, click the Tax-related checkbox.  From the Form drop-down list, select the tax schedule line item to which you want to assign your category.  If there is no Form drop-down list, it means that Quicken is not set up to use tax schedules with categories.

How to...

Set up and use categories

Set up Quicken to use tax schedules with categories


Turning a category into a subcategory
Turn a category into a subcategory

If necessary, you can change a category into a subcategory. When you "demote" a category in this way, Quicken automatically changes the name in each of the transactions that you had categorized with the old name.

To turn a category into a subcategory:

1.	From the Lists menu, choose Category & Transfer.

2.	Select the category you want to demote.

3.	Click Edit.

4.	Click Subcategory Of.

5.	Pull down the Subcategory Of list and select the name of the main category to which you want to assign your new subcategory.

6.	Click OK.

What happens

All transactions that use the category now show the original category as a subcategory of the new category you selected.  In the register, Quicken inserts a colon (:) between the two category names to indicate that the second category (the one you demoted) is now a subcategory of the first category.

How to...

Set up and use categories


Merging two categories
Merge two categories

To combine two categories into a single category:

1.	Change the category you don't want into a subcategory of the category you want to keep.

2.	Delete the subcategory.  Quicken deletes the subcategory name from the category list and reassigns its transactions to the parent category.

How to...

Set up and use categories


Turning a subcategory into a category
Turn a subcategory into a category

If necessary, you can change a subcategory into a category.  When you "promote" a category in this way,  Quicken automatically changes the name in each of the transactions that you had categorized with the old name.

To turn a subcategory into a category:

1.	From the Lists menu, choose Category & Transfer.

2.	Select the subcategory that you want to promote.

3.	Click Edit.

4.	Select Income or Expense instead of Subcategory Of.

5.	Click OK.

How to...

Set up and use categories


Moving a subcategory to a different category
Move a subcategory to a different category

After working with Quicken a while, you may want to move a subcategory from one category to another.  When you move a subcategory, Quicken automatically changes the name in each of the transactions that you had categorized with the old name.

To move a subcategory in the Category & Transfer list:

1.	From the Lists menu, choose Category & Transfer.

2.	Select the subcategory you want to move.

3.	Click Edit.

4.	Pull down the Subcategory Of list and select the name of the category to which you want to assign the selected subcategory.

5.	Click OK.

How to...

Set up and use categories


Assigning a category to a transaction
Assign a category to a transaction

You use categories to identify exactly where your income comes from and where your expenses go.  Quicken uses this information when it creates reports and graphs about your finances.

To assign a category to a transaction:

1.	Click in the Category field of the transaction (or check) you want to categorize.

2.	Use one of these methods to enter the category:

•	Select the category you want to use from the drop-down list in the Category field.

•	Choose Category & Transfer from the Lists menu.  When the list appears, double-click the category name to paste it in the Category field.

•	Type the category directly into the Category field.

3.	(Optional)  If you also want to assign a class to the transaction, choose Class from the Lists menu.  Then double-click the class name to paste it in after the category name.

If the category you want isn't on the list:

•	Enter the category in the Category field.  Quicken gives you an opportunity to add the new category to the Category & Transfer list.

How to...

Set up and use categories


Assigning a class to a transaction
Assign a class to a transaction

Classes let you define a transaction even more specifically than you can with a category alone.  Classes complement categories by adding a second dimension to reports and graphs.

To assign a class to a transaction:

1.	Enter the category for the transaction.

2.	Use one of these methods to enter the class:

•	Choose Class from the Lists menu.  When the list appears, double-click the class name to paste it after the category name.

•	Type a forward slash (/) after the category name.  Then type the class name.

How to...

Set up and use classes


Setting up categories with tax time in mind
How do I set up categories with tax time in mind?

You can set up your income and expense categories in several ways, depending on how you want to report your tax information.  For example>

Quicken's standard home and business categories are already set up with appropriate tax schedule assignments.  Whenever you create a new category, you may need to assign it to a tax schedule line item.

To assign a category to a tax schedule line item:

1.	If you want to create tax schedule reports, make sure you've set up Quicken to use tax schedules with categories.  More detail>

2.	From the Lists menu, Choose Category & Transfer.

3.	Select the category or subcategory that you want to be tax related and click Edit.  If the category isn't already in the list, click New.

4.	If you want to create tax summary reports, select Tax-related.

5.	If you want to create tax schedule reports, select the tax schedule line item for that category from the drop-down list.

6.	Click OK.

How to...

Set up and use categories


For example:

To get these kinds of reports...	Set up your category like this...
Tax summary reports	Mark the category as tax related.
Tax schedule reports and  capital gains reports	Set up Quicken to use tax schedules with categories, then assign the category to the correct tax schedule line item.  More detail>


To set up Quicken to use tax schedules with categories:

1.	From the Edit menu, choose Options, then click General.

2.	Select the Use Tax Schedules With Categories checkbox.


Setting up classes and subclasses
Set up classes and subclasses

To set up a class:

1.	From the Lists menu, choose Class.

2.	Click New.

3.	Enter a name in the Name box.

4.	(Optional)  Enter a description of the class in the Description box.

5.	Click OK.

To create a subclass:

Once you have created a class, you can use it as either a main class or as a subclass of another class.  If you want to use a class as a subclass, enter this when you are classifying the transaction in the register:

1.	The category of the transaction.

2.	A slash (/).

3.	The name of the main class.

4.	A colon (:)

5.	The name of the subclass.  For example: Groceries/Vacation:Yosemite.

How to...

Set up and use classes


Changing a class
Change a class

Once you have created a class, you can change either its name or its description.  Changes to a class will be reflected in your register transactions.

To change a class:

1.	From the Lists menu, choose Class.

2.	Select the class you want to change.

3.	Click Edit.  The Edit Class window appears.

4.	Change the name or the description of the class.

5.	Click OK.

How to...

Set up and use classes


Deleting a category or class
Delete a category or class

To delete a category:

1.	From the Lists menu, choose Category & Transfer.

2.	Select the category you want to delete.

3.	Click Delete.

4.	Click OK to confirm that you want to delete the category.  Quicken removes the category from the Category and Transfer list and erases it from the Category field of any transactions to which it has been assigned.  If the category was a subcategory, Quicken reassigns all transactions that use the subcategory to the parent category.

Note

Quicken won't let you delete a category that has subcategories.  Before you delete the category, you must do one of the following:

Turn the subcategories into categories

Move the subcategories to another category

To delete a class:

1.	From the Lists menu, choose Class.

2.	Select the class you want to delete.

3.	Click Delete.

4.	Click OK to confirm that you want to delete the class.  Quicken removes the class from the Class list and erases it from the Category field of any transactions to which it has been assigned.

How to...

Set up and use categories

Set up and use classes


Set Up / Edit Category window
Set Up / Edit Category

Use this window to create or edit the categories you plan to assign to your transactions.

How to...

Set up and use categories

What you see

Name

Description

Income or Expense

Subcategory of

Tax-related

Form


Name

Enter a name for the category.  When you change a category name, Quicken automatically changes it in all transactions categorized with the old name.  The name can contain up to 15 characters.  Use any combination of letters, numbers, spaces, and other characters except these:

[	(left bracket)

]	(right bracket)

/	(slash)

:	(colon)

|	(bar)

^	(caret)


Description

Descriptions, which are optional, appear in report headings. If you don't enter a description, Quicken uses the category name instead.


Income or Expense

Indicate whether the category is to track income or expenses:

•	Click Income if the category is to track income.

•	Click Expense if the category is to track expenses.


Subcategory of

Assign a subcategory to an existing category by clicking Subcategory Of and then selecting a category from the list.


Tax-related

The tax summary report includes only transactions assigned to tax-related categories.  You can also request that tax-related categories be included in other reports.


Form

Appears only if you've set up Quicken to use tax schedules with categories.  If you select a tax-form line item for a tax-related category from the drop-down list, the category will be covered in tax-schedule reports.

How to...

Set up Quicken to use tax schedules with categories


Set Up / Edit Class window
Set Up / Edit Class

Use the Set Up Class window to establish the classes you assign to transactions.  Use the Edit Class window to change the names or descriptions of these classes.

How to...

Set up and use classes

What you see

Name

Description


Name

Enter a name for the class.  The name can be up to 15 characters.  Use any combination of letters, numbers, spaces, and other characters except these:

[	(left bracket)

]	(right bracket)

/	(slash)

:	(colon)

|	(bar)

^	(caret)


Description

Descriptions, which are optional, appear in report headings.  If you don't enter a description, Quicken uses the class name.


Category & Transfer List

This list displays the categories and accounts in the current file.

Income categories appear first, followed by expense categories.  Transfer accounts appear at the end of the list, enclosed in brackets.  Subcategories are indented under their parent categories.

Categories with names beginning with an underscore (_) are used in investment transactions.  Quicken automatically adds these categories to the list when you create your first investment account.  Unlike the other categories, these cannot be deleted or changed.

How to...

Use the Category & Transfer List

What you see

Category & Transfer List button bar

Category & Transfer List fields


How to...

Add a new category or subcategory to the list

Use a category in a transaction

Change the name of a category

Change the tax status of a category

Turn a category into a subcategory

Turn a subcategory into a category

Move a subcategory to a different category

Merge two categories

Delete a category from the list

Print a copy of this list

Assign categories to supercategories


Category & Transfer List button bar

This button...	Does this...
New	Creates a new category or subcategory and adds it to the list.
Edit	Edits the category or subcategory you selected, allowing you to change the category name, description, type (income or expense), and tax status.
Delete	Deletes the selected category from the list and from all transactions that use it.
Super	Displays the Manage Supercategories window, allowing you to set up supercategories, and to assign categories to supercategories.
Report	Creates a report listing all the transactions assigned to this category.
Close	Closes the Category & Transfer list.


Category & Transfer List fields

This field...	Displays...
Category	The category or account name.  Subcategories are indented under their parent category.  Account names are at the end of the list, enclosed in brackets.
Type	For a category: whether it is used to track income or expenses, or if it is a subcategory. For an account: its type (Bank, CCard, etc.).
Tax	The word "Tax" appears if the category is used to track tax information.
Description	The description that was entered when the category was set up.


Class List

This window lists each class in the current file.

How to...

Set up and use classes

Print a copy of this list

What you see

Class List button bar


Class List button bar

This button...	Does this...
New	Creates a new class and adds it to the list.
Edit	Edits the class you selected, allowing you to change the class name or the class description.
Delete	Deletes the class you selected.
Report	Creates a report listing all the transactions assigned to this class.
Close	Closes the class list.


What is a supercategoy?
What is a supercategory?

A way to group categories together.

Quicken lets you group categories together into supercategories, which you can use in your budget, and in budget reports, to get a more simplified picture of your budget.

You set up supercategories from the Category & Transfer list, or from Budgeting.

How to...

Set up and use supercategories


Setting up supercategories
Set up supercategories

To set up supercategories:

1.	From the Lists menu, choose Category & Transfer.

2.	Click Super.  The Manage Supercategories window appears.

3.	Click New to set up a new supercategory.

4.	Enter a name for the supercategory and then click OK.

5.	Next, assign your categories to supercategories.

6.	Click Done.  Now you can use these supercategories in your budgets and budget reports.

How to...

Set up and use supercategories


Renaming supercategories
Rename supercategories

To rename supercategories:

1.	From the Lists menu, choose Category & Transfer.

2.	Click Super.  The Manage Supercategories window appears.

3.	Select the supercategory you want to edit.

4.	Click Edit.

5.	Type the new name in the Supercategory Name field, and then click OK.

How to...

Set up and use supercategories


Deleting supercategories
Delete supercategories

To delete supercategories:

1.	From the Lists menu, choose Category & Transfer.

2.	Click Super.  The Manage Supercategories window appears.

3.	Select the supercategory you want to delete.

4.	Click Del.

How to...

Set up and use supercategories


Assigning categories to supercategories
Assign categories to supercategories

To assign categories to supercategories:

1.	From the Lists menu, choose Category & Transfer.

2.	Click Super.  The Manage Supercategories window appears.

3.	Select a category or categories from the list on the left.

4.	Select a supercategory from the list on the right.

5.	Click Assign to assign the selected categories to the selected supercategory.

To remove the supercategory assigned to a category:

•	Select the category in the left-hand list and click Clear.

How to...

Set up and use supercategories


Manage Supercategories window
Manage Supercategories

Use this window to set up supercategories, and to assign categories to supercategories.  You can get here by clicking Super from the Category & Transfer list, or by selecting Supercategories from the Edit button in Budgets.

How to...

Set up and use supercategories

What you see

Category Name, Supercategory, Supercategory Name lists

Assign, Clear buttons

New, Edit, and Del buttons


Manage Supercategories lists

This list...	Shows this...
Category Name	All the categories in your category list.
Supercategory	The supercategory that each category is currently assigned to.
Supercategory Name	All the supercategories currently defined.


Assign, Clear buttons

This button...	Does this...
Assign	Assigns the currently selected categories to the selected supercategory.
Clear	Clears the supercategories assigned to the currently selected categories.


New, Edit, Del buttons

This button...	Does this...
New	Creates a new supercategory.
Edit	Renames the selected supercategory.
Del	Deletes the selected supercategory.


Edit Supercategory window
Create/Edit Supercategory

Use this window to create a new supercategory, or rename an existing supercategory.

To complete the window:

•	Type a name for the supercategory, then click OK.

How to...

Set up and use supercategories


Category Not Found window
Category not found

The category is not on the Category & Transfer list.

To add the category:

•	Click Set Up.

To select a category from the Category & Transfer list:

•	Click Select.


Ask the Experts command (CDROM Add-Ons menu)
Ask the Experts command

Select this command to get interactive financial advice from Jane Bryant Quinn and Marshall Loeb.

Ask the Experts is a feature of:

Quicken Deluxe 4 CDROM for Windows


Mutual Fund Selector command (CDROM Add-Ons menu)
Mutual Fund Selector command

Select this command to start the Mutual Fund Selector ActiveBook.

The Mutual Fund Selector is a feature of:

Quicken Deluxe 4 CDROM for Windows


Talking Tutors: Using the Register command (CDROM Help menu)
Talking Tutorials: Using the Register command

Select this command to hear a Quicken Expert demonstrate the features of your Quicken account register. Youll see how Quicken helps to speed data entry with QuickFill, pop-up calendars and calculators.

Talking Tutorials are a feature of:

Quicken 4 CDROM for Windows

Quicken Deluxe 4 CDROM for Windows


Talking Tutors: Reconciling a Bank Account command (CDROM Help menu)
Talking Tutorials: Reconciling a Bank Account command

Select this command to hear how Quickens Reconcile feature makes balancing your checkbook fast and easy. A Quicken Expert will walk you through the process from beginning to end.

Talking Tutorials are a feature of:

Quicken 4 CDROM for Windows

Quicken Deluxe 4 CDROM for Windows


Talking Tutors: Your Financial Calendar command (CDROM Help menu)
Talking Tutorials: Your Financial Calendar command

Select this command to listen to a Quicken Expert describe how to schedule transactions on Quicken's Financial Calendar. Shell also show you how to manage your transaction list and create notes that Quicken can remind you of.

Talking Tutorials are a feature of:

Quicken 4 CDROM for Windows

Quicken Deluxe 4 CDROM for Windows


Talking Tutors: Viewing Your Portfolio command (CDROM Help menu)
Talking Tutorials: Viewing Your Portfolio command

If you use Quicken to track your investments, select this option to learn about Quickens Portfolio View and how it makes getting information about your investments even easier.

Talking Tutorials are a feature of:

Quicken 4 CDROM for Windows

Quicken Deluxe 4 CDROM for Windows


Talking Tutors: Forecasting command (CDROM Help menu)
Talking Tutorials: Forecasting command

Select this option to hear how Quicken's Forecasting feature allows you to view your spending patterns, project them into the future and study the impact of financial events like buying a car.

Talking Tutorials are a feature of:

Quicken 4 CDROM for Windows

Quicken Deluxe 4 CDROM for Windows


Talking Tutors: Using Categories command (CDROM Help menu)
Talking Tutorials: Using Categories command

Select this option to find out how to use Quicken categories to track your income and expenses and gain financial insight.

Talking Tutorials are a feature of:

Quicken 4 CDROM for Windows

Quicken Deluxe 4 CDROM for Windows


Talking Tutors: Printing Checks command (CDROM Help menu)
Talking Tutorials: Printing Checks command

Select this command to get advice from an Expert on printing checks with Quicken.

Talking Tutorials are a feature of:

Quicken 4 CDROM for Windows

Quicken Deluxe 4 CDROM for Windows


Talking Tutors: Customizing Quicken command (CDROM Help menu)
Talking Tutorials: Customizing Quicken command

Stop here to learn about all of the ways that you can customize Quicken to your liking.

Talking Tutorials are a feature of:

Quicken 4 CDROM for Windows

Quicken Deluxe 4 CDROM for Windows


Quicken User's Guide command (CDROM Help menu)
Quicken User's Guide command

This command opens Quicken's on-screen User's Guide.

The Quicken User's Guide is a feature of:

Quicken Deluxe 4 CDROM for Windows


Quicken Home Inventory User's Guide command (CDROM Help menu)
Quicken Home Inventory User's Guide command

This command opens Quicken Home Inventory's on-screen User's Guide.

The Quicken Home Inventory User's Guide is a feature of:

Quicken Deluxe 4 CDROM for Windows


Quicken Quotes User's Guide (CDROM Help menu)
Quicken Quotes User's Guide command

This command opens Quicken Quotes' on-screen User's Guide.

The Quicken Quotes User's Guide is a feature of:

Quicken Deluxe 4 CDROM for Windows


Quicken Tips command (CDROM Help menu)
Quicken Tips command

This command opens the on-screen Quicken Tips book.

Quicken Tips is a feature of:

Quicken Deluxe 4 CDROM for Windows


Quicken Tax Guidebook command (CDROM Help menu)
Quicken Tax Guidebook command

This command opens the on-screen Quicken Tax Guidebook.

The Quicken Tax Guidebook is a feature of:

Quicken Deluxe 4 CDROM for Windows


Load Sample Data command (CDROM Help menu)
Load Sample Data command

This command loads a sample data file you can practice using Quicken with.

The sample data file is a feature of:

Quicken 4 CDROM for Windows

Quicken Deluxe 4 CDROM for Windows


MENU_ACT_LIBRARY command

Do you know anything about this command?.

MB.


*Writing and printing checks (contents)
Writing and printing checks

To search for a Help topic, click the Search button above.

Overview

Click here

How to...

Write checks

Print checks

Print a logo on your checks

Common Questions

How do I print a sample check?

How do I print a partial page of checks?

Can I write a postdated check?

Quick Tips

Using Reminders when you have checks to print

Changing the onscreen check artwork


Write checks

Write checks

Revise checks you've written

Delete a check

Void a check

Make electronic payments


Print checks

Print checks

Set up a printer to print checks

Change options for printing checks

Print a partial first page of checks


Print a logo on your checks

Create a logo for your checks

Print a logo on your checks


Writing and printing checks
Overview: Writing and printing checks

You can have Quicken prepare and print checks for you.  When Quicken prints your checks, you avoid the extra work of writing checks by hand and then recording them in Quicken.

You can order checks directly from Intuit.  Intuit checks are accepted everywhere.  For details, see the catalog that came in your Quicken package.

Use the Write Checks command (on the Activities menu) to fill out checks that you plan to print with Quicken.

Enter other transactions, such as checks you've written by hand, deposits, or bank fees in the check register. When you record a check in the Write Checks window, Quicken adds it automatically to the check register.


Can I write a postdated check?

Quicken allows you to write checks for future payments. You can then forecast how much money you'll need in the coming weeks. Except for changing the date, writing postdated checks is the same as writing regular checks with Quicken.

To postdate a check:

1.	If you are not in the Write Checks window, choose Write Checks from the Activities menu.

2.	In the Write Checks window, change the current date to the date in the future when you plan to print the check.  Shortcut>

3.	Fill out the check.

4.	Click Record to record the check.  When you have postdated checks in your account, Quicken calculates a Current Balance and an Ending Balance and displays them both at the bottom of the Write Check window.

How to...

Write a check


Shortcut

To enter a date quickly, click the Calendar button or press the right mouse button. Click a date on the pop-up calendar.  You can also change the date by placing the insertion point in the Date field and pressing one of these keys:

Press	To get this date
+	Next day
-	Previous day
t	Today
m	Beginning of month
h	End of month
y	Beginning of year
r	End of year


Writing checks
Write checks

In the following steps, you can use the Tab key to move the insertion point from field to field.

To write a check:

1.	From the Activities menu, choose Write Checks.  The Write Checks window appears.

2.	Use the Account Selector to select the account you'd like to record the payment in.

3.	Enter the payee name as you want it to appear on the check.

4.	Enter the amount of the check on the $ (amount) line.  When you tab to the next line, Quicken spells out the amount of the check.

5.	If you plan to mail the check in an Intuit window envelope, enter the payee name and mailing address in the Address box.  To enter the payee name on the first address line, press the single quote key ( ' ).

6.	If you wish, enter a note on the Memo line.

7.	Enter a category on the Category line.

8.	If you have set up your checks to include an extra message line, enter a message if necessary.

9.	If you plan to pay the check electronically with CheckFree, select the Electronic Payment checkbox.

10.	Click Record to enter and save the check in the register.

How to...

Print checks

Revise checks you've written

Change the onscreen check artwork

Change options for printing checks

Delete a transaction

Make a credit card payment

Memorize and recall transactions manually

Split a transaction

Assign a category to a transaction

Assign a class to a transactions

Void a transaction


Changing the onscreen check artwork

You can select the artwork to display on the check image in the Write Checks window.  The artwork is not printed when you print your checks.

To change the check artwork:

1.	From the Activities menu, choose Write Checks.

2.	Click Options from the Write Checks button bar.

3.	Select the Artwork on Check Entry Screen checkbox, then select the artwork you want to display from the drop-down list.


Splits in voucher checks

Voucher checks have a perforated attachment.  If the check setting for printing category information on voucher checks is turned on, you can print category information from split checks on the attachment.  Quicken prints up to 15 lines of split information on the perforated voucher attachment.


Revising checks
Revise checks you've written

Once you have written and recorded checks, you can change them prior to printing them.  You can do this either from the Write Checks window, or your checking account register.

To revise checks from the Write Checks window:

1.	If you are not in the Write Checks window, choose Write Checks from the Activities menu.

2.	From the Account Selector bar, select the account from which you wrote the checks.

3.	Press Page Up until the check appears in the window.

4.	Make any changes.  If you change a check by mistake, click Restore.  This removes your changes and restores the check as you originally wrote it.

5.	Click Record.

To revise checks from the register:

1.	Open the register for the account from which you wrote the checks.

2.	Scroll through the register to find the checks you want to revise.  You can identify unprinted checks by looking for the word PRINT in the Num field.

3.	For each check, change the date, payee, amount, memo, category, or split information as needed.  Then click Record.

Changes you make will appear on the checks when you print them.  Note that if you need to change address or message information on a check, you must do that from the Write Checks window.

How to...

Find a transaction in the register

Delete a transaction

Void a transaction


Write Checks window

This is where you fill out new checks.  You can also revise checks at this window if you haven't printed or transmitted them yet.

How to...

Write checks

Print checks

What you see

Write Checks button bar

Account Selector

Record, Restore, Split buttons

Checks to Print balance

Ending Balance/Current Balance


Write Checks button bar

This button...	Does this...
Delete	Deletes the current check.
Find	Displays the Find window, which helps you locate specific transactions.
Options	Displays the Options window.
Report	Creates a Register Report.
Close	Closes the Write Checks window.


Record, Restore, Splits buttons

This button...	Does this...
Record	Enters the check in the register. After you print or transmit the check, it appears only in the Register, not in the Write Checks window.
Restore	Removes any changes you have made to a check.  If the check was blank when you started, Restore makes the check blank again.  If the check was filled in when you started, Restore puts back the information that originally appeared on the check.
Splits	Displays a window where you split the check as you would split a register transaction.  Splitting a check lets you assign it to multiple categories.


Checks to Print

Shows the total of all checks written and not yet printed.  Checks to Xmit appears when Electronic Payment is checked.


Ending Balance/Current Balance

The Ending Balance is the balance in your account resulting from all recorded transactions.  A Current Balance appears if you have postdated checks or other transactions.


*Paying bills electronically (contents)
Paying bills electronically

To search for a Help topic, click the Search button above.

Overview

Click here

How to...

Set up for electronic payments

Make electronic payments

Change or ask about a payment you've sent

Common Questions

How do I confirm that a payment has been made?

How do I stop an electronic payment

How do I stop a series of fixed electronic payments

How do I contact CheckFree?

Why am I unable to transmit under OS/2?


Set up for electronic payments

Set up your modem for CheckFree

Set up an account for electronic payment

Add payees to your electronic payee list

Import data from an existing CheckFree account


Make electronic payments

Make electronic payments

Set up a series of fixed payments to a payee

Amortize fixed payments to an electronic payee

Change loan information for a CheckFree fixed payment

Transmit electronic payments


Change or ask about a payment you've sent

Get information about an electronic payment

Stop electronic payments

Change or delete a payee

Contact CheckFree


Paying bills electronically
Overview: Paying bills electronically

If you subscribe to CheckFree, you can use Quicken and a modem to pay any bill electronically.  CheckFree is an electronic bill-payment service developed by CheckFree Corporation of Columbus, Ohio.

Many small businesses use CheckFree; however, it is not specifically designed for business use. CheckFree works for any household with a computer, a modem, and Quicken.

Before you can use CheckFree from Quicken:

•	You must be a CheckFree subscriber.

•	Your computer must be equipped with a Hayes-compatible modem.

•	You must set up the Quicken account you plan to use for electronic payment.

CheckFree payment service provides convenience and security:

•	It is convenient because you don't need stamps or envelopes, and you don't have to print and sign checks.

•	It is secure because your financial records reside only on your computer; you have a CheckFree personal security code; and you control the access to your security code.

How to...

Set up for electronic payments

Make electronic payments

See also ...

Confirming CheckFree payments

Changing or asking about a payment you've sent


I am unable to transmit under OS/2
Why am I unable to transmit under OS/2

IBM released a set of COM drivers on September 24, 1992. Installing these drivers should correct the transmission problems between CheckFree and Quicken.

You can obtain these drivers from CompuServe, the OS/2 bulletin board in Atlanta, or from a local bulletin board service.

See also...

Installing a driver


Setting up your modem (CheckFree)
Set up your modem for CheckFree

Before you can send electronic payment instructions directly to CheckFree, you must set up your modem for CheckFree.

To set up your modem for CheckFree

1.	From the Activities menu, choose CheckFree, and then choose Set Up Modem.

2.	Under Dial Type, indicate the type of phone line you have:

•	For a touch-tone line, click Tone.

•	For a rotary-dial line, click Pulse.

3.	From the Port drop-down list, select the address of the port your modem is connected to.  If you don't know which port to select, try COM2 first.  If you have a mouse that uses COM2, try COM1 for your modem.

4.	From the Speed drop-down list, select the baud rate of your modem.

5.	In the CompuServe Local Access Number box, enter the telephone number you received in your CheckFree welcome kit.

Call waiting.  If your phone line supports call waiting, you should disable this feature when calling CheckFree.  To disable call waiting, enter these codes in front of the local access phone number.  Note the comma that goes between the code and your phone number:

For this type of phone line...	Insert...
Touch tone	*70,
Rotary dial	#1170,
Note:  The prefix to disable call waiting may be different in your area.  Call your phone company if the prefixes given above do not work.

6.	If the default codes in the Initialization String box don't work with your modem, look in your modem user's manual to find the codes you need.  (Most modem commands begin with the prefix AT.)

7.	Click OK.


Setting up an account for electronic payment
Set up an account for electronic payment via CheckFree

Before you can transmit electronic payments to CheckFree, you must tell Quicken which bank account to use.

To set up an account for electronic payment:

1.	From the Activities menu, choose CheckFree, and then choose Set Up Account.

2.	Select the bank account you want to set up.

3.	Click Set Up. The Electronic Payment Account Settings window appears.

4.	Make sure that the Enable Electronic Payments for Account checkbox is selected. (The checkbox should have a checkmark in it.)

5.	Enter information into the Electronic Payment Account Settings window.

6.	When you have finished entering information, click OK.


Street Address

Enter the street address on the first line and the apartment or suite address, if any, on the second line.


State

Enter the first letter of your state name.  If the correct postal abbreviation does not appear, enter the first letter again to see the next state in the list that begins with that letter, or use the drop-down list to select a state.


Zip

Enter your zip code.  You can use either the 5-digit format or the 9-digit format.


Home Phone

Enter your telephone number, starting with the area code.  You can enter the number without punctuation and let Quicken format the number for you.  For example, if you enter 4157678900, Quicken formats it as (415) 767-8900.


CheckFree Account Number

Enter your nine-digit CheckFree account number as indicated in your "welcome" letter.


CheckFree Security Code

Enter the four-digit CheckFree personal security code you selected when you signed up for CheckFree.


Adding payees to your electronic payee list
Add payees to your electronic payee list

To add a payee to the Electronic Payee list:

1.	From the Activities menu, choose CheckFree, and then choose Electronic Payee List.

2.	Click New.

3.	Click Normal Payee, and then click OK.

4.	Enter information about the payee in the Set Up Electronic Payee window.

5.	Click OK to record the information.

How to...

Change or delete a payee

Import data from a CheckFree 3.0 file


Name, Street, City

Enter the payee's name and street address accurately.  CheckFree uses this information to ensure your payment is routed to the correct electronic payee.


State

Enter the first letter of your state name.  If the correct postal abbreviation does not appear, enter the first letter again to see the next state in the list that begins with that letter, or use the drop-down list to select a state.


Zip

Enter the payee's zip code.  You can use either the 5-digit format or the 9-digit format.


Phone

Enter the phone number you usually call if you have a billing question.  CheckFree may need the phone number to contact the payee on your behalf if there are any problems.

When you enter the number, include the area code.  You can enter the number without punctuation and let Quicken format the number for you.  For example, if you enter 4157678900, Quicken formats it as (415) 767-8900.


Account

Enter the number that the payee uses to identify you.  This could be an account number, a loan number, or a policy number.  If you don't know the number to use, enter your last name.  The electronic payee uses the number (or your name) to credit your account with the payment, make sure you enter it accurately.


Changing or deleting electronic payees
Change or delete electronic payees

You can edit or delete a payee in the Electronic Payee List as long as you do not have an untransmitted or pending payment for that payee.  Quicken transmits your changes to CheckFree the next time you transmit electronic payments.

To change an electronic payee:

1.	From the Activities menu, choose CheckFree, and then choose Electronic Payee List.

2.	Select the payee you want to edit.

3.	Click Edit.

4.	Enter the changes you want in the Edit Electronic Payee window.

5.	Click OK.

To delete an electronic payee:

1.	From the Activities menu, choose CheckFree, and then choose Electronic Payee List.

2.	Select the payee you want to delete.

3.	Click Delete.

4.	Click OK to confirm that you want to delete the payee.


Setting up a series of fixed payments to a payee
Set up a series of fixed payments to a payee

You can authorize CheckFree to make a series of fixed, recurring payments from your bank account to an electronic payee.  You set up the payment only once, specifying payment frequency and other details.  After you transmit the first payment, CheckFree makes the subsequent payments and Quicken automatically enters each payment in your register.

To authorize fixed payments:

1.	From the Activities menu, choose CheckFree, and then choose Electronic Payee List.

2.	Click New.

3.	Click Fixed, Recurring Payee and click OK.

4.	Enter information about the payee in the Set Up Electronic Payee window.

5.	Click Categories.

6.	Enter a category and memo for the payment and click OK.

7.	Click OK to authorize CheckFree to make the fixed payments you specified.

To amortize payments:

Do not follow the instructions above. See instead,

Amortizing fixed payments to an electronic payee

See also...

Scheduling transactions and using the Financial Calendar

Confirming that CheckFree payments has been made

Stopping fixed payments


Bank account

If you have more than one electronic payment account, use the drop-down list to choose the account from which CheckFree draws the payments.

If you have only one electronic payment account, Quicken automatically lists it for you (you don't have to select it from the list).


Amount

Enter the amount of your regular payment.

You can enter any amount from $.01 to $9,999,999.99.  Negative amounts are not allowed.


Frequency

From the drop-down list, choose how often CheckFree should make the payments.


Date

Enter the date you want CheckFree to make the first fixed payment.

Timing is important.  To give the payee adequate time to process the payment from CheckFree, enter a date that is at least five business days before the payment is due.


Duration of Payments

Specify the length of time you want the payments to continue:

•	If you want the payments to continue indefinitely, click Unlimited.  CheckFree will make the payments until you stop them (either by deleting the payee from the Electronic Payee list or by using the Stop Payment command).

•	If you want the payments to stop after a certain number of payments, click Stop After and enter the total number of payments you want CheckFree to make.


Amortizing fixed payments to an electronic payee
Amortize fixed payments to an electronic payee

If your fixed payments are for a loan, Quicken can automatically track how much of each payment goes toward principal and how much goes toward interest.

To amortize fixed payments to an electronic payee:

1.	Set up the payee.

2.	Create your loan.

3.	Enter your loan information.

4.	Set up your loan payment.


Amortizing fixed payments (Step One)
Set up the payee

1.	From the Activities menu, choose CheckFree, and then choose Electronic Payee List.

2.	Click New.

3.	Click Fixed, Recurring Payee, and then click OK.

The Set Up Electronic Payee window appears.

4.	Enter information about the payee, and then click OK.


Create your loan

1.	From the Activities menu, choose Loans.

The View Loans window appears. This window is the starting point for setting up loans and changing information you've recorded about a loan.

2.	In the upper left corner of the View Loans window, click New to set up a new loan.

The Set Up Loan Account window appears.

3.	Fill in the Set Up Loan Account window.

4.	Select Borrow Money.

5.	Enter an account name or select a name from the drop-down list.

Quicken uses this account to track the loan principal.

6.	Click OK. The Set Up Loan window appears.


Enter your loan information

Quicken uses your loan information to calculate a payment schedule for the loan.  The schedule, which you can display at any time, shows the principal payment, interest payment, and loan balance for each scheduled payment.

1.	Fill in the boxes in the Set Up Loan window.

2.	Click OK to set up the loan.

The Set Up Loan Payment window appears.


Set up your loan payment

Enter the information about your payment in the Set Up Loan Payment window.

1.	Enter the current interest rate.  When you tab out of this box, Quicken enters your payment in the Principal and Interest box.

2.	(Optional) Click Splits to enter an additional payment.  For example, you may have an impound account (also called an escrow account) set up to handle property tax payments, homeowner insurance premiums or PMI (Private Mortgage Insurance).

3.	Click Method of Pmt.  The Select Payment Method window appears.

4.	Select CheckFree Fixed Payment as the payment type.

5.	Select the Fixed Payee from the drop-down list.

6.	Click OK.  The Set Up Loan Payment window appears.

7.	(Optional) Enter a memo.

8.	(Optional) Change the date of your next payment.

9.	(Optional) Change the category used to track the interest you pay.

10.	Click OK.  Your loan is now set up.


Changing loan payment for a CheckFree fixed payment
Change the loan payment for a CheckFree fixed payment

To change the loan payment for a CheckFree fixed payment:

1.	From the Activities menu, choose CheckFree, and then choose Electronic Payee List.

2.	Select the Payee for the loan you want to change.

The Edit Electronic Payee window appears.

3.	Click Loan Info.  The Set Up Loan Payment window appears.

4.	Make any changes to the information displayed.  For example, you can change the interest rate, add a split transaction to cover an insurance payment, or change the next payment date.

5.	Click OK.


Making electronic payments
Make electronic payments

Making an electronic payment is similar to making any other kind of payment.  You can either write an electronic check in the Write Checks window, or you can enter an electronic payment directly into your register.

If you have set up fixed payments:

You do not need to enter any transactions.  CheckFree sends the payments at the intervals you specified, and Quicken automatically records the payment in your check register.

How to...

Write electronic checks

Enter electronic payments in the register

Confirm that a CheckFree payment has been made


Writing electronic checks
Write electronic checks

To enter an electronic payment, you can either use the Write Checks window, or enter the payment in your register.

To write electronic checks:

1.	Check your calendar.  You need to allow a minimum of five business days for CheckFree to receive your transmission and process the payment.  In addition, we recommend that you allow five more business days for the payee to receive the payment in the mail and credit your account.

1.	From the Activities menu, choose Write Checks.  The Write Checks window appears.

2.	Under the check illustration, select the account from which to draw funds.

3.	Make sure that the Electronic Payment checkbox is selected (it should have an X in it).

4.	In the Date field, enter the payment date.

5.	In the Payee field, enter the payee name.  You can enter the payee by displaying the Electronic Payee list, and then double-clicking the payee.  If you enter the payee name and the payee is not on the Electronic Payee list, Quicken gives you an opportunity to add the payee to the list.

6.	Fill in the $ amount, Memo, and Category fields.

7.	Click Record to record the payment.

8.	Transmit your payments to CheckFree.

How to...

Transmit electronic payments

Enter electronic payments in the register


Entering electronic payments in the register
Enter electronic payments in the register

To enter an electronic payment, you can either enter the payment in your register, or use the Write Checks window.

To enter electronic payments in the register:

1.	Check your calendar.  You need to allow a minimum of five business days for CheckFree to receive your transmission and process the payment.  In addition, we recommend that you allow five more business days for the payee to receive the payment in the mail and credit your account.

2.	Open the register for the account from which to draw funds.

3.	Type XMIT in the Num field (or choose it from the drop-down list) to indicate that this is an untransmitted payment.

4.	In the Date field, enter the payment date.

5.	In the Payee field, enter the payee name.  You can enter the payee by displaying the Electronic Payee list, and then double-clicking the payee.  If you enter the payee name and the payee is not on the Electronic Payee list, Quicken gives you an opportunity to add the payee to the list.

6.	Fill in the Payment, Memo, and Category fields.

7.	Click Record to record the payment.

8.	Transmit your payment to CheckFree.  After the payment is transmitted, XMIT changes to EPMT in the Num field.

How to...

Transmit electronic payments

Write electronic checks


Transmitting electronic payments
Transmit electronic payments

The last step in making an electronic payment is transmitting the payment to CheckFree.  When you transmit a payment, Quicken also transmits changes you've made to the electronic payee list or fixed payments setup.

To transmit an electronic payment:

1.	Check your calendar.  You need to allow a minimum of five business days for CheckFree to receive your transmission and process the payment.  In addition, we recommend that you allow five more business days for the payee to receive the payment in the mail and credit your account.

2.	Go to either the Write Checks window or the register from which you are making the payments.

3.	From the Activities menu, choose CheckFree, and then choose Transmit.

4.	Click Preview to preview the transmissions.  The window that appears lists all pending transmissions.  Electronic payments appear above the line; changes to your Electronic Payee list appear below the line.  If you have set up a fixed payment, it is listed as "Add Fixed" below the line.

5.	If you need to change any of the transmissions shown, click Cancel.  This takes you to either the Write Checks window or the register.  You can then modify the transactions as needed.  If you also need to change an electronic payee, go to the Electronic Payee list to make the change.

6.	If the transactions are correct, click Transmit.

How to...

Get information about an electronic payment

Set up a bank account for electronic payment

Set up an electronic payee

Set up your modem for electronic payment

Stop electronic payments

Send electronic mail to CheckFree


Getting information about an electronic payment
Get information about an electronic payment

Each time you transmit a payment to CheckFree, CheckFree sends a confirmation number back to Quicken.  You can display the confirmation number, as well as other information about the payment.

To get information about an electronic payment:

1.	Select the transaction in the check register.

2.	From the Activities menu, choose CheckFree, and then choose Electronic Payment Info.  The window that appears shows the transmission date of the transaction, the payment date of the transaction, the transmission status of the payment, and the confirmation number.

3.	Click OK.


Stopping electronic payments
Stop electronic payments

If it isn't too late, you can transmit a message to CheckFree requesting that they stop a payment you have previously transmitted.  Payment can be stopped if the payment date is at least five business days from the current date.

How to...

Stop normal electronic payments

Stop a sequence of fixed payments

Find out when you transmitted a payment

Obtain the confirmation number for a payment


Stopping normal electronic payments
Stop normal electronic payments

To stop normal, individual electronic payments:

1.	Select the payment transaction in the register.

2.	From the Activities menu, choose CheckFree, and then choose Stop Payment.

Timing is important.  Quicken determines whether there is time to stop the payment, taking into account the five business days it takes CheckFree to process the payment.  If there is enough time to stop the payment, Quicken asks you if you want to do so.

3.	If there is time to stop payment, click OK to stop it.  Quicken records the confirmation number and marks the transaction as VOID in the register.

If it is too late to stop payment through Quicken, you may be able to stop payment by calling CheckFree Corporation Technical Support.

How to...

Stop a sequence of fixed payments


Stopping a sequence of fixed payments
Stop a sequence of fixed payments

When you stop the fixed payments, you can retain the information you entered about the payee or have Quicken delete the payee information.  Either way, all future payments in the series are stopped.

To retain information about the payee:

1.	In the check register, select the most recent transaction for that fixed payment.

2.	From the Activities menu, choose CheckFree, and then choose Stop Payment.

3.	Click OK.

4.	Transmit your changes to CheckFree.

When you transmit this change, CheckFree stops all future fixed payments to the payee but leaves the payee on the Electronic Payee list. (In the list, the payee type changes from FIXED to INACTIVE.)  If you need to, you can use the payee or payment information in a future inquiry or to start payments again.

To delete all information about the payee:

1.	From the Activities menu, choose CheckFree, and then choose Electronic Payee list.

2.	Select the payee.

3.	Click Delete.

4.	Transmit your changes to CheckFree.

This stops all future fixed payments.  It also deletes all information you entered for the payee and deletes any confirmation number history that Quicken has stored about the payee.

How to...

Transmit your changes to CheckFree

Stop normal electronic payments


Contacting CheckFree
Contact CheckFree

There are several ways to get in touch with CheckFree.  You can:

Send an inquiry about a payment

Send electronic mail to CheckFree

Call CheckFree Corporation Technical Support


Inquiring about electronic payments
Inquire about electronic payments

You can get information about an electronic payment:  the scheduled payment date, the payee's account number, whether or not the payment has been transmitted to CheckFree, and the confirmation number if it has been transmitted.

To inquire about electronic payments:

1.	In the check register, select the payment transaction.

2.	From the Activities menu, choose CheckFree, and then choose Inquiry.  The Electronic Payment Inquiry window appears.  It shows the date the transaction was transmitted, the payment date, the account number, and the confirmation number.  Quicken asks if you would like to transmit a message to CheckFree regarding this transaction.

3.	Check to make sure this transaction is the one you want to inquire about.  If it is, click OK to send an inquiry.  The Transmit Payment Inquiry to CheckFree window appears.

4.	Enter information in the boxes.  After the date, the reference to the payee, and the salutation, you can enter three lines of text.  Quicken supplies the signature line.

5.	Click Transmit to send the message to CheckFree.


Sending electronic mail to CheckFree
Send electronic mail to CheckFree

You can send CheckFree a message that is not specific to a payment.  When CheckFree replies to your message, you can read the reply in Quicken.

To send CheckFree electronic mail:

1.	From the Activities menu, choose CheckFree, and then choose E-Mail.

2.	Click Create.

3.	Enter your message in the text area.  You can enter 10 lines of up to 60 characters each.  The words wrap from line to line automatically.

4.	Click Transmit to transmit the message.

How to...

Receive electronic mail from CheckFree

Call CheckFree Corporation Technical Support


Receiving electronic mail from CheckFree
Receive electronic mail from CheckFree

When you send an electronic mail message or an electronic payment inquiry to CheckFree, they send you an electronic reply.

To receive electronic mail from CheckFree:

1.	From the Activities menu, choose CheckFree, and then choose E-Mail.

2.	Click Retrieve.  The messages you've received from CheckFree appear in chronological order.

3.	Select the message you want to read.  The text of the message appears in the Message window.

How to...

Send electronic mail to CheckFree


Calling CheckFree Technical Support
Call CheckFree Technical Support

CheckFree Corporation provides all customer service and support regarding payments, inquiries, electronic payee problems, and CheckFree billing.  CheckFree also helps you with modem problems, phone lines, and other communications concerns.

To obtain the CheckFree Technical Support phone number:

•	Click here

Note

The CheckFree service is a product of CheckFree Corporation, not of Intuit.  Intuit answers questions about using Quicken, not about using CheckFree.

How to...

Send electronic mail to CheckFree


Importing data from an existing CheckFree account
Import data from an existing CheckFree account

If you have been using CheckFree to make electronic payments and now plan to use Quicken to access the CheckFree system, you may want to import your CheckFree register data into Quicken.  Importing this data updates your Quicken register with any CheckFree transactions your Quicken register doesn't include.

To import data from a CheckFree account:

1.	Delete your electronic payees from CheckFree

2.	Add your CheckFree categories and classes to Quicken

3.	Import your data from CheckFree

Restrictions

Quicken for Windows imports only CheckFree files that were created with version 3.0 (or higher) of CheckFree.  After you have used Quicken to make a payment even once, CheckFree Corporation will no longer permit you to process payments using CheckFree software.  You cannot use CheckFree and Quicken concurrently to pay bills.


Importing data from CheckFree (Step One)
Deleting your electronic payees from CheckFree

Before you can import data from CheckFree to Quicken, you must delete the electronic payees you have set up in CheckFree.  If you do not delete the payees, the CheckFree Processing Center may make errors in processing your payments.

To delete your electronic payees from CheckFree:

1.	Start CheckFree and print your list of electronic payees.

2.	Call CheckFree Corporation Technical Support and ask them to delete your current CheckFree payees.

3.	The CheckFree Technical Support representative will tell you when you can start sending payment requests from Quicken (normally two business days).

What about pending payments?

Payments scheduled for the next few business days are already in process at CheckFree and will not be stopped by your deletions.  All payments dated beyond a few days are deleted, so you must reschedule them with Quicken.


Add your CheckFree categories and classes to Quicken
Adding your CheckFree categories and classes to Quicken

If you want your CheckFree transactions to appear in your Quicken register with their categories and classes intact, you have to add your CheckFree categories and classes to Quicken BEFORE you import your CheckFree data.

To add CheckFree categories and classes to Quicken:

1.	Print out a list of your CheckFree categories and classes.

2.	Compare your CheckFree list to the list of categories and classes you've already set up in Quicken.

3.	Add any missing categories and classes to Quicken.


Importing data from CheckFree (Step Two)
Import your data from CheckFree

To import your data from CheckFree:

1.	Display the Quicken check register for the bank account you're using to pay bills with CheckFree.

2.	From the File menu, choose Import.

3.	In the Directories list, click the CheckFree directory.  If you accepted the default installation directory when you installed CheckFree on your hard disk, the directory is c:\cf3.

4.	Type REG.DAT in the Filename box, and check the Special Handling for Transfers box.

5.	Click OK to continue.  The Import from CheckFree File window appears.

6.	In the Import Items Dated On or After box, check the start date for importing items.  The default start date is 1/1/80.  Change the date only if you don't want to include all your CheckFree data.

7.	Click OK to continue. Quicken begins importing the CheckFree register.

When Quicken has imported all CheckFree data, a message reports the number of transactions imported.  If any CheckFree categories or classes were not in the Quicken list, it also reports the number of categories or classes ignored (not imported into Quicken).

8.	Record the number of categories or classes that were ignored, if any, and click OK.

To stop importing the data:

•	Click Cancel.

If you stop before Quicken has imported all your CheckFree data, your Quicken check register will contain the transactions up to the one at which you stopped.  You will need to decide what to do to keep your check register accurate, and that will depend on why you stopped importing.  For example, you may want to start importing again, starting at the date where you stopped importing, and then delete any duplicate transactions.


Electronic Payment Setup window
Electronic Payment Setup

This window lists the bank accounts in the current file, indicates which are enabled for electronic payment, and sets up other bank accounts for electronic payment.

To set up a bank account for electronic payment:

1.	Select the account.

2.	Click Set Up.

3.	Fill in the window that appears, and click OK.

The account must be a bank account, and it must be one you have authorized CheckFree Corporation to make payments from. You provide this authorization when you fill out the form for registering with CheckFree Corporation.

What you see

Set Up button

How to...

Sign up for CheckFree


Signing up for CheckFree
Sign up for CheckFree

1.	In your Quicken package, find the CheckFree information booklet.  If you cannot find the booklet, call CheckFree Corporation Technical Support.

2.	Fill out and sign the CheckFree enrollment form at the back of the booklet.

3.	Enclose a voided check from the account you wish to use with CheckFree.

4.	Mail your enrollment form to CheckFree.  When you get your welcome kit from CheckFree, set up your account in Quicken.


Set Up button

Clicking Set Up displays a window where you list your name, address, phone, CheckFree account number, and CheckFree personal security code.


Electronic Payment Account Settings window
Electronic Payment Account Settings

This is where you set up an account for electronic payment through CheckFree.  You enter your name, address, phone number, CheckFree account number, and CheckFree personal security code.

To set up an account for electronic payment through CheckFree:

•	Fill in the boxes provided.

What you see

Street Address

State

Zip

Home Phone

CheckFree Account Number

CheckFree Security Code


Set Up/Edit Electronic Payee window
Set Up / Edit Electronic Payee

This is where you set up a new electronic payee, or edit information about an existing electronic payee.

To set up or edit a payee:

•	Complete or change the boxes as necessary, then click OK.

What you see

Name, Street, City

State

Zip

Phone

Account

In addition, if you are setting up a series of fixed, recurring payments to the payee, these boxes also appear:

Bank Account

Amount

Frequency

Date

Duration of Payments


Electronic Payee List

This window lists each electronic payee in the current file.  Payees listed as FIXED in the Type column are payees for whom you have set up a series of fixed, recurring payments.

Payees listed as INACTIVE are former FIXED payees to whom you are no longer making fixed payments, either because you finished making all the payments, or because you stopped making payments before the last payment was due.

How to...

Add an electronic payee to the list

Make electronic payments

Change information about a listed payee

Set up a series of fixed payments to a payee

Amortize a series of fixed payments to a payee

Delete an electronic payee from the list

Print this list

What you see

New, Edit, Delete, Close buttons


Buttons in the Electronic Payee list

This button...	Does this...
New	Adds a new electronic payee to the list.  Before you can make an electronic payment, you must add the payee who will receive the payment to the list.
Edit	Allows you to edit information about a payee, as long as you do not have pending or untransmitted payments to that payee.
Delete	Deletes the payee.  You cannot delete payees to whom you have pending or untransmitted payments.
Close	Closes the Electronic Payee list.


Electronic Payment Information/Inquiry
Electronic Payment Inquiry

This window provides information about the selected electronic paymentthe scheduled payment date, the payee's account number, whether or not the payment has been transmitted to CheckFree Corporation, and the confirmation number if it has been transmitted.

You can transmit an inquiry about this payment to CheckFree and receive a response via regular U.S. mail or electronic mail.  The inquiry automatically includes the confirmation number and other information about this transaction.  There is also room for you to enter a message.

To transmit an inquiry:

1.	Click OK.

2.	Fill out the window that appears.

3.	Click Transmit.


Transmit Payments window
Transmit Payments

This window tells you how many transactions in the current account are ready to be transmitted to CheckFree.  The number shown includes all untransmitted electronic payments, as well as all recent changes to your Electronic Payee list.

To preview the transactions first:

•	Click Preview.  This displays a list of the transactions (you still need to transmit them after you check the list).

To transmit the transactions without previewing:

•	Click Transmit.  Quicken transmits the transactions immediately.


Preview Transmission to CheckFree window
Preview Transmission to CheckFree

This window lists all the transactions that are ready to be sent to the CheckFree Processing Center.  All payments to be transmitted appear above the line in the list; changes to your Electronic Payee list appear below the line.

To transmit the transactions:

•	Click Transmit.  All transactions are transmitted exactly as shown on the list.

If you need to make a change:

1.	Click Close.

2.	Go to the appropriate register or window to make the change.  For example, if a payment shows the wrong amount, go to the window where you entered the payment and change the amount.


Problem in Transmitting

If Quicken is unable to transmit your instructions, wait a short time and try transmitting again.

If you still can't transmit, try the following suggestions one by one. After each step, try transmitting until you transmit successfully. If you're still unable to transmit, call Intuit Technical Support for CheckFree.

Possible solutions:

1.	Have you correctly filled in all the boxes in the Electronic Payment Setup window? If you're not sure, look at each box and verify that the information is correct.

2.	Check all connections at both ends (modular phone plugs, RS-232-C cable, power cords) to make sure they are securely plugged in and the power is on.

3.	If you have an older modem, check the modem switch settings. The modem manual describes the function of each switch. With the modem turned off, set the switches to originate a message (not to transmit), to respond to DTR, and to recognize commands.

4.	Dial the phone yourself to be sure that you're getting a dial tone and that the processing center answers with a high-pitched tone. When you dial yourself, do you have to wait to get an outside line? Do you have to add extra digits?

5.	Choose Set Up Modem under CheckFree on the Activities menu. Try changing the settings.

•	Change the setting for the serial port from its current setting to another one to see if that port is active. If the setting is COM2 (as it typically is), change it to COM1.

•	Change the setting for modem speed and change the phone number accordingly.

•	Change the Dial Type setting. Select Pulse if you have a rotary-dial line or Tone if you have a touch-tone phone line.

•	Click OK to save the new settings.


Transmit Stop Payment Request window
Transmit Stop Payment Request

Informs you when CheckFree Corporation is scheduled to make a payment you have already transmitted to it, and lets you stop the payment if time allows. Payment can be stopped if the payment date is at least five business days from the current date.

To stop a payment:

•	Click OK.

If the request is transmitted successfully, the stopped payment is marked VOID in the register and the confirmation number recorded.

How to...

Get information about an electronic payment


Transmit Payment Inquiry window
Transmit Payment Inquiry

This is where you transmit an inquiry about a payment to CheckFree.  The inquiry can include up to three lines of your personal message.

To transmit an inquiry:

1.	Select a type of inquiry.

2.	Check the boxes that apply if you've already contacted your bank or the payee.

3.	Enter a message to CheckFree.

4.	Click Transmit.

CheckFree will send you a reply via email or regular U.S. mail.


Transmit Message to Checkfree window
Transmit Message to CheckFree

This is where you send a message to CheckFree.  CheckFree sends you an electronic reply to the message.

To transmit a message:

1.	Enter the message in the box.

You can enter up to 10 lines of 60 characters each.

2.	 Click Transmit.


Read E-Mail window
Read E-Mail

This is where you retrieve and read electronic messages that you have received from CheckFree and create new messages to CheckFree.  The messages are listed in chronological order.

To read a message:

•	Select the message title in the list.

The text of the message appears in the Message Content box.

To delete a message:

•	Select the message title in the list and click Delete.

This removes the message from the list.

To create a new message:

1.	Click Create.

2.	Enter your message in the box that appears.

3.	Click Transmit to send the message to CheckFree.


CheckFree Fixed Payment Categories window
CheckFree Fixed Payment Categories

This is where you enter the category information for your fixed payment.

To select a category:

•	Choose a category from the drop-down list.

If you want to split the payment between several categories:

•	Click Splits and enter the categories with their subtotals in the window that appears.


Choose Type of Electronic Payee window
Choose Type of Electronic Payee

This is where you select how you want to make payments to an electronic payee.  Quicken gives you two options:

Normal Payee

Select this option if you intend to transmit the electronic payments yourself.

Fixed, Recurring Payee

Select this option if you want CheckFree to automatically send payments when they are due.  This option is useful when you make regular payments at fixed intervals (such as loan payments).


Electronic payee not found (message)
Electronic Payee Not Found

The payee name you entered is not on the Electronic Payee list.

To add the payee to the list:

•	Click Set Up.


Multiple Electronic Payees (message)
Multiple Electronic Payees with the Same Name

Each name in the Electronic Payees List must be unique.

To resolve the problem:

•	Enter additional identifying information enclosed in braces {}, then click OK.  The new payee is stored in the list with the additional identifying information, in {braces}, appended.  However, for electronic payment purposes, only the original name will be transmitted.


Confirming CheckFree payments
How do I confirm that a CheckFree payment has been made?

Your bank statement will list the payee name, the payment amount, and the transaction date.  In addition, you may receive a returned check if your payee is paid by check.


Installing any driver
Install a driver

Drivers are small programs that allow printers, video cards, sound cards, or any specific piece of hardware to run and communicate with Windows.  Because of incompatibility, upgrades, or damage to a particular driver, you may need to reinstall that driver.  While this is not very difficult, one rule always applies:  When a driver is already loaded, you will not be able to reinstall it correctly until you remove the installed driver first.

To remove a current driver:

1.	At the Windows Program Manager, open the Main program group, then double-click the Control Panel icon.

2.	Double-click Drivers.

3.	Select the driver you want to remove, then click Remove.

4.	Click Yes to confirm the removal.

To install a new driver:

1.	At the Windows Program Manager, open the Main program group, then double-click the Control Panel icon.

2.	Double-click Drivers.

3.	Click Add.  This brings up a list at the bottom of the screen.

4.	Select the driver you want to install.  If the driver you want isn't in the list, select Unlisted or Updated driver.

5.	Click OK.

6.	If you are installing a driver from a diskette, enter the drive, insert the diskette, and click OK.


CheckFree Modem Options window
Set Up Modem - CheckFree

This is where you set up your modem so that you can transmit electronic payments to the CheckFree Processing Center.

To set up your modem:

•	Fill in the boxes provided.

What you see

Dial Type

Port

Speed

CompuServe Local Access Number

Initialization String


Dial Type

Select Tone if you have a touch tone phone. Select Pulse if you have a rotary dial phone.


Port

Select the address of the COM port you have your modem connected to.  If you have only one serial port, the address is COM1.  If you have a mouse that uses COM1, try COM2 for your modem.


Speed

From the Speed drop-down list, select the number that corresponds to the modem speed (baud rate) required by CheckFree and your modem.

2400 baud is the most common speed, but many older modems support only 1200 baud.


CompuServe Local Access Number

Enter the CompuServe access phone number for your local area.  You should find the number in your CheckFree confirmation package.

If you need a special prefix to obtain an outside line, include the prefix.  If you need a pause after the prefix, add a comma before you type the phone number.


Initialization String

Enter any special letters, digits, and other characters to be sent to the modem.  To find out what codes you need, look in the modem's user's manual.  (Most modem commands begin with the prefix AT.)


Enter key

In Quicken's preset options, the Enter key is set to record transactions and the Tab key is set to move from field to field.

You used the Enter key to try to move between fields in this register.

If you'd prefer to use the Enter key to move from field to field, you can change the register option.

How to...

Change Quicken's register options.


Creating your first account

We recommend that you create a bank account for your first Quicken account.

How to...

Create a new account


Using date keys

Using the + and - keys to change the date will save you time.

How to...

Enter dates in the register and use the pop-up calendar


Using categories

You have entered several transactions without assigning categories to them. When you systematically assign categories when you enter transactions, you can create meaningful reports and graphs about your finances.

How to...

Set up categories, classes, and supercategories


*Quicken menus and icons (contents)
Quicken menus and icons

To search for a Help topic, click the Search button above.

Quicken menus

File

Edit

Activities

Lists

Reports

Plan

Add-Ons

Online

Window

Help

Quicken icons

Click here

How to...

Choose menu commands

Use Quicken HomeBase


File menu commands
File menu

Commands

New

Open

File Operations

Year-End Copy

Passwords

Backup

Restore

Import

Import Prices

Export

Save Desktop

Printer Setup

Print Checks

Print

Exit


File Operations commands

Copy

Delete

Rename

Reindex


Passwords commands

File

Transaction


Printer Setup commands

Report/Graph Printer Setup

Check Printer Setup


Edit menu commands
Edit menu

Commands

Undo

Cut

Copy

Paste

New

Edit

Delete

Insert Transaction

Void Transaction

Copy Transaction

Paste Transaction

Memorize Transaction, Report, or Graph

Find/Replace

Find

Go To Date

Replace

Recategorize

Go To Transfer

Options


Activities menu commands
Activities menu

Commands

HomeBase

Create New Account

Write Checks

Use Register

Reconcile

Pay Credit Card Bill

Get IntelliCharge Data

Update Balances

Financial Calendar

Loans

Portfolio View

Recategorize

Use Calculator

Reminders

CheckFree

Order Checks


Update Balances commands

Update Cash Balance

Update Share Balance


CheckFree commands

Transmit

Inquiry

Stop Payment

E-Mail

Electronic Payment Info

Electronic Payee List

Set Up Account

Set Up Modem


Lists menu commands
Lists menu

Commands

Account

Category & Transfer

Class

Memorized Transaction

Scheduled Transaction

Security

Security Type

Investment Goal

Memorized Investment Transactions


Reports menu commands
Reports menu

Commands

Home

Investment

Business

Other

Memorized Reports

Graphs

Memorized Graphs

Snapshots

Reconciliation


Home commands

Cash Flow

Monthly Budget

Itemized Categories

Tax Summary

Net Worth

Tax Schedule

Missing Checks

Comparison


Investment commands

Portfolio Value

Investment Performance

Capital Gains

Investment Income

Investment Transactions


Business commands

P&L Statement

P&L Comparison

Cash Flow

A/P by Vendor

A/R by Customer

Job/Project

Payroll

Balance Sheet

Missing Checks

Comparison


Other commands

Transaction

Summary

Comparison

Budget

Account Balances


Graphs commands

Income and Expense

Budget Variance

Net Worth

Investments


Plan menu commands
Plan menu

Commands

Budgeting

Forecasting

Financial Planners

Tax Planner

Savings Goals

Progress Bar


Financial Planners commands

Loan

Savings

College

Retirement

Refinance


Add-Ons menu commands
Add-Ons menu

Commands

TurboTax

Quicken Home Inventory

Quicken Quotes

Tradeline Stock Guide

Tax Link Assistant

QuickPay

QuickInvoice

Pocket Quicken Connect

Commands added in
Quicken 4 CDROM for Windows:

Ask the Experts

Mutual Fund Selector


Online menu commands
Online menu

Commands

Update Portfolio Prices

Change Online Account

Get IntelliCharge Data

Intuit Marketplace

Software Registration

Set Up Modem


Change Online Account

Change Password

Cancel Service


Window menu commands
Window menu

Commands

Cascade

Arrange Icons

Close All Windows


Help menu commands
Help menu

Commands

Quicken Help

How to Use Help

Tutorials

Show Qcards

About Quicken

Commands added in
Quicken 4 CDROM for Windows:

Talking Tutors

Quicken User's Guide

Quicken Home Inventory User's Guide

Quicken Quotes User's Guide

Quicken Tips

Quicken Tax Guidebook

Load Sample Data


Tutorials commands

Introduction to Windows

Introduction to Quicken


Talking Tutors commands

Using the Register

Reconciling a Bank Account

Your Financial Calendar

Viewing Your Portfolio

Forecasting

Using Categories


Quicken Icons

Icon	What it does
	Displays the Quicken HomeBase, which provides easy access to Quicken's most popular features.
	Opens the register for the current account.
	Displays your Account list.
	Opens a window where you can begin reconciling your accounts.
	Opens the Write Checks window for the current account.
	Displays the Financial Calendar. Use the calendar to schedule transactions.
	Opens the Create Graphs window.
	Opens the Create Report window.
	Open the Quicken Snapshots window.
	Displays the Options window. Click an option to change how that feature works.
	Prints the current window.
	Shows context-sensitive help.


New (file or account) command (File menu)
New command

Creates and opens a Quicken file. Or creates a new account in the current file.

How to...

Create a new Quicken file

Set up an account


Open command (File menu)
Open command

Opens an existing Quicken file so that you can work with the accounts in it.

Quicken for Windows files, Quicken 5, Quicken 6, and Quicken 7 files all use the same format.  You can open and work with a single file in each of these versions of Quicken.

Quicken 3 and Quicken 4 files are converted automatically to Quicken for Windows format when you open them in Quicken for Windows.  After you open a Quicken 3 or 4 file in Quicken for Windows, you can't continue using it in Quicken 3 or 4 unless you make a backup copy.

How to...

Open a Quicken file

Create a new Quicken file

Convert Quicken 3 and Quicken 4 files


Copy (the current file) command (File menu)
File Operations: Copy command

Copying a file will take all or part of your current file and create a new file with a different name.  This will condense the size of the file by removing unused and deleted records from the file.

You can limit the copy to transactions from a range of dates such as the previous year or the year to date, and you can exclude prior uncleared or investment transactions.

How to...

Copy a Quicken file

Back up a Quicken file

Restore a Quicken file


Delete (the current file) command (File menu)
File Operations: Delete command

Deletes a Quicken file and all of its accounts and transactions.

Use caution!  Once you delete a Quicken file, you cannot recover the file's accounts and transactions unless you have a backup copy of the file.

How to...

Delete a Quicken file


Rename command (File menu)
File Operations: Rename command

Changes the name of a Quicken file.

How to...

Change the name of a Quicken file


Reindex command (File menu)
File Operations: Reindex command

Quicken maintains an index file to improve access to your financial data.

When you restart Quicken you may see a message explaining that Quicken is maintaining or reconstructing your index file.  This occurs if Quicken didn't have a chance to save the index file the last time you exited (for example, if the computer was turned off before you exited Quicken).

Quicken normally reindexes automatically whenever it's required.  However, if Quicken asks you to reindex, choose File Operations from the File menu, and then choose Reindex.

Note: Don't reindex unless Quicken tells you to, and be sure to back up your data before doing so.


Year-End Copy command (File menu)
Year-End Copy command

Saves an archive file containing last year's transactions from the current file. Or creates a new file for this year with last year's transactions removed.

More about...

Year end procedures

How to...

Archive a Quicken file

Create a new-year file


Passwords: File command (File menu)
Passwords: File command

Provides, changes, or removes the file password to the current file.

How to...

Provide a file password

Change a file password

Remove a file password

Provide a transaction password


Passwords: Transaction command (File menu)
Passwords: Transaction command

Provides, changes, or removes the transaction password to the current file.

How to...

Provide a transaction password

Change a transaction password

Remove a transaction password

Provide a file password


Backup command (File menu)
Backup command

Backs up all accounts in a Quicken file for safekeeping.

If your data fits on one disk, Backup creates a normal DOS copy of your file. If your data doesn't fit on one disk, the backup file created by this command is a special compound file that you need to "restore" in order to use it again.

How to...

Back up a Quicken file

Restore a Quicken file

Change the frequency of automatic backups

Common Question

Why does Quicken create a BACKUP directory?


Restore command (File menu)
Restore command

Copies a previously backed-up Quicken file onto your main disk. Can be used with files backed up with the Copy or Backup commands on the File menu.

How to...

Restore a Quicken file

Back up a Quicken file

Copy a Quicken file


Import command (File menu)
Import command

Imports data from a CheckFree 3.0 file or an ASCII file into an account.

The CheckFree 3.0 data is in the CheckFree REG.DAT file. Quicken does not import data from versions of CheckFree earlier than 3.0.

The ASCII data must be in the Quicken Interchange Format (QIF).

How to...

Import data from a CheckFree 3.0 file

Import data from a QIF file

Learn more about QIF files


Import Prices command (File menu)
Import Prices command

Imports price data from an ASCII file and updates the market values of the securities in the Portfolio View window.  Appears only when the Portfolio View window is active.

How to...

Import security prices from an ASCII file


Export command (File menu)
Export command

Exports data from an account in the current file to an ASCII file. The data is in Quicken Interchange Format (QIF).

How to...

Export data to a QIF file

Import data from a QIF file


Save Desktop command (File menu)
Save Desktop command

Stores the layout of your Quicken desktop as it exists when you choose this command.  Quicken remembers the layout and restores it each time you open the current file.

This command is useful if you want to have certain windows open and in a particular position each time you start Quicken.  Reports and graphs are not saved by this command.

How to...

Save your Quicken Desktop


Printer Setup: Report/Graph Printer Setup command (File menu)
Printer Setup: Report/Graph Printer Setup command

Sets up your printer for printing reports and graphs.  Through this command, you can select the fonts that you want the printer to use when it prints your reports and graphs.  Keep in mind, however, that some printers will not print certain font types and sizes, even though they are selectable.

If necessary, you can also change other printer settings, such as paper size and page orientation.

How to...

Set up your printer


Printer Setup: Check Printer Setup command (File menu)
Printer Setup: Check Printer Setup command

Sets up your printer for printing checks.  Through this command, you print a sample check to make sure that all printed information appears in the correct position on the check.  You can also select the font that you want the printer to use when it prints the checks.

How to...

Set up your printer


Print Checks command (File menu)
Print Checks command

Prints checks you have written on the account you've selected. Uses the check printer. You can select which checks to print and the type of checks to print on. You can also print a sample check for alignment.

How to...

Write checks

Print checks

Print a logo on your checks


Print command (File menu)
Print [ ] command

Prints the register, report, summary, or list in the active window on the report printer selected or to a disk. When a printable window is active, appears as Print Register, Print Report, Print Summary, Print Graph or Print List.

When the Portfolio View window is active, prints data for the date displayed in the window.

How to...

How to print...

Print to a file

Preview on the screen before printing


Exit command (File menu)
Exit command

Saves your data and closes Quicken.

Double-clicking the Control-menu box has the same effect as choosing this command.


Undo command (Edit menu)
Undo command

Reverses the last text-editing action. Unavailable if there is no previous text-editing action or if reversing the previous action is impossible.

How to...

Edit text


Cut command (Edit menu)
Cut command

Removes the selection and copies it to the Clipboard.  Unavailable if nothing is selected.

How to...

Edit text


Copy (text) command (Edit menu)
Copy command

Copies the selection onto the Clipboard.  Unavailable if nothing is selected.

How to...

Edit text


Paste (text) command (Edit menu)
Paste command

Inserts a copy of the Clipboard contents at the insertion point. Unavailable if nothing is on the clipboard.

How to...

Edit text


New (item) command (Edit menu)
New (item) command

Creates a new transaction or a new item in a list.

Depending on the active window, the command appears as New Transaction or "New" plus the name of a type of list such as "Account" or "Class."

How to...

Add a transaction to the register

Set up a bank account for electronic payment

Set up a category

Set up a class

Set up a security type

Set up a security

Set up a transaction group

Set up an account

Set up an electronic payee

Related topics

About classes

About categories

About securities

About transaction groups

Account types


Edit (item) command (Edit menu)
Edit (item) command

Makes changes to an item in a list or in a price history.

Depending on the active window, the command appears as Edit Price History or "Edit" plus the name of a type of list such as "Account" or "Class."

How to...

Edit a category

Edit a class

Edit an account

Edit an electronic payee

Edit a security

Edit the price history of a security

Rename a memorized report


Delete (item) command (Edit menu)
Delete (item) command

Permanently removes an item. You can delete selected transactions in the register, checks in the Write Checks window, and selected items in lists.

Depending on the active window, appears as Delete Transaction or "Delete" plus the name of a type of list such as "Account" or "Class."

How to...

Delete a category or class

Delete a transaction


Insert Transaction command (Edit menu)
Insert Transaction command

Inserts a new transaction above the selected one.

How to...

Insert a transaction


Void Transaction command (Edit menu)
Void Transaction command

Voids the selected transaction. Quicken inserts the word "VOID" before the payee name, deletes the amount, and marks the transaction as cleared with an X.

How to...

Void a transaction


Copy Transaction command (Edit menu)
Copy Transaction command

Copies the selected transaction.  To paste the transaction somewhere else, choose Paste Transaction from the Edit menu.


Paste Transaction command (Edit menu)
Paste Transaction command

Pastes a copied transaction.  To copy a transaction, select it and then choose Copy Transaction from the Edit menu.


Memorize Report command (Edit menu)
Memorize Transaction, Graph, or Report commands

When a register or the Write Checks window is open, memorizes the current transaction.  Appears on the Edit menu as Memorize Transaction.

When a report window is open, memorizes the settings of a report.  Appears on the Edit menu as Memorize Report.

When a graph window is open, memorizes the settings of a graph.  Appears on the Edit menu as Memorize Graph.

How to...

Memorize and recall transactions manually

Memorize a report

Use a memorized report

Memorize a graph

Use a memorized graph


Find command (Edit menu)
Find command

This command searches your records to find a specific transaction.  You set the criteria for the search.

How to...

Find a transaction in the register


Replace command (Edit menu)
Find/Replace command

Finds all transactions that match your search criteria, and then allows you to replace any field in some or all of the found transactions.

How to...

Replace transaction information


Go To Transfer command (Edit menu)
Go To Transfer command

When you have selected a transaction that transfers money to or from another account, this command displays the transaction in the second account that records the other end of the transfer.

How to...

Go to the other account involved in a transfer


Go To Date command (Edit menu)
Go To Date command

Displays information about your securities as of the date you specify. If there is no securities information with that date, goes to the closest matching date.

Appears only when the Portfolio View window is active.

How to...

Display prices and market value as of a given day


Go To Date dialog box
Go To Date

To go to a specific date:

•	Type the date you want to go to.  To enter a date quickly, click the Date drop-down list button, then click a date on the calendar.  If no date matches, the closest matching date is displayed.


Options command (Edit menu)
Options command

Lets you change various Quicken settings.

How to...

Change Quicken's general options

Change options for printing checks

Change Quicken's register options

Change Quicken's report options

Turn Billminder and Reminder off and on

Customize the iconbar


HomeBase command (Activities menu)
HomeBase command

Displays the Quicken HomeBase, which provides easy access to the most popular Quicken activities and features.


Create New Account command (Activities menu)
Create New Account command

This command creates a new account and adds it to your Quicken file.  When you create a new account, you choose one of these eight account types:  checking, savings, credit card, cash, money market, investment, asset, or liability.

How to...

Create a new account


Write Checks command (Activities menu)
Write Checks command

Opens the Write Checks window for the current account. Use the window to write and print checks or to make electronic payments.

How to...

Write checks

Print checks


Use Register command (Activities menu)
Use Register command

Displays the register of the current account in a window. The register lists the transactions in your accounts. You can enter transactions in a register directly, and transactions are entered automatically when you transfer funds from another account or use the Write Checks window to write a check.

Depending on the current account, this command opens one of two windows, the register or the investment register.  The register is used for the various kinds of noninvestment accounts.

How to...

Use the register

Enter a transaction

Change a transaction


Reconcile/Pay Credit Card Bill/Get IntelliCharge Data commands
Reconcile, Pay Credit Card Bill,
Get IntelliCharge Data commands

Click a command for help:

Reconcile

Pay Credit Card Bill

Get IntelliCharge Data


Reconcile command (Activities menu)
Reconcile command

When the current account is a checking, savings, money market, cash, asset, liability, or investment account, the Reconcile command appears on the Activities menu.

You use this command to balance the account with the statements you receive from your bank, investment company, or other provider of financial services.

How to...

Reconcile a bank account statement

Reconcile a mutual fund account statement

Reconcile an investment account statement


Pay Credit Card Bill command (Activities menu)
Pay Credit Card Bill command

When the current account is a credit card account, the Pay Credit Card Bill command appears on the Activities menu.

You use this command to balance your credit card account with the statements you receive from your credit card company.

How to...

Reconcile a credit card statement


Update Cash Balance command (Activities menu)
Update Balances: Update Cash Balance command

Updates the cash value of an account without using the reconciling process. This command works with cash, asset, and liability accounts and all investment accounts except mutual fund accounts.

How to...

Match the balance of a cash account to the cash on hand

Update the balance of an investment account

Update the value of your assets or liabilities


Update Share Balance command (Activities menu)
Update Balances: Update Share Balance command

Updates the share value of an investment account without using the reconciling process.

How to...

Update the balance of an investment account


Finanical Calendar command (Activities menu)
Financial Calendar command

Opens the Financial Calendar. For an overview of the Financial Calendar, click here.

How to...

Use the Financial Calendar


Loans command (Activities menu)
Loans command

Opens the View Loans window. This is the starting point for setting up a loan. You can also view your previous loan payments and see future payments.

How to...

Set up a loan and make loan payments

Handle different kinds of loans

Change a loan


Portfolio View command (Activities menu)
Portfolio View command

Opens the Portfolio View window.  The Portfolio View window shows a complete picture of your investments.

How to...

Set up investment accounts

Set up a security

Track and update security prices

Update your portfolio prices online

Handle transactions and use the investment forms

Manage your securities


Recategorize command (Activites menu)
Recategorize command

Finds all transactions with a specific category, and then allows you to recategorize some or all of the found transactions.

How to...

Recategorize transactions


Use Calculator command (Activities menu)
Use Calculator command

You can use Quicken's calculator to do standard mathematical calculations.

To use the calculator:

1.	From the Activities menu, choose Use Calculator.

2.	Click the calculator buttons (or use the number keys on your keyboard) to calculate amounts.

Quicken also provides financial planning calculators that perform various types of financial calculations.

How to...

Use Quicken's financial planning calculators


Reminders command (Activities menu)
Reminders command

Opens the Quicken Reminders window.  The Reminders window displays any Financial Calendar notes, tells you if you have checks to print, payments to transmit, or scheduled transactions due.

How to...

Use Reminders


CheckFree: Transmit command (Activities menu)
CheckFree: Transmit command

Transmits payments to the CheckFree Processing Center. Used only with accounts you have set up for electronic payment.

How to...

Set up for electronic payments

Make electronic payments

Change or ask about a payment you've sent


CheckFree: Inquiry command (Activities menu)
CheckFree: Inquiry command

Transmits an inquiry about an electronic payment previously transmitted to CheckFree Corporation. Select the payment transaction from the register of the current bank account before using this command.

How to...

Send an inquiry about a payment


CheckFree: Stop Payment command (Activities menu)
CheckFree: Stop Payment command

Transmits a message to CheckFree Corporation to stop payment on a payment previously sent. Select the payment transaction from the register in the active window before using this command.

How to...

Stop electronic payments


CheckFree: E-Mail command (Activities menu)
CheckFree: E-Mail command

Transmits a message on any subject to CheckFree Corporation.

How to...

Contact CheckFree


CheckFree: Electronic Payment Info command (Activities menu)
CheckFree: Electronic Payment Info command

Provides information about the selected electronic payment -- the scheduled payment date, the payee's account number, whether or not the payment has been transmitted to CheckFree Corporation, and the confirmation number if it has been transmitted.

How to...

Get information about an electronic payment


CheckFree: Electronic Payee List command (Activities menu)
CheckFree: Electronic Payee List command

Opens the Electronic Payee list, makes the electronic payees you have set up available.  Payees are also listed at the CheckFree Processing Center.  You can add payees to the list or change information about existing payees.

How to...

Add payees to your electronic payee list


CheckFree: Set Up Account command (Activities menu)
CheckFree: Set Up Account command

Sets up accounts for payment to the CheckFree electronic bill-payment service.

How to...

Set up an account for electronic payment


CheckFree: Set Up Modem command (Activities menu)
CheckFree: Set Up Modem command

Use this command to set up your modem so that you can transmit electronic payments to the CheckFree Processing Center.

How to...

Set up your modem for CheckFree


Order Checks command (Activities menu)
Order Checks command

Use the Order Checks command to access the Intuit Marketplace.  The Intuit Marketplace provides an easy way to order checks, software, and other products for use with Quicken 4 for Windows. In addition to checks, you can order deposit slips, envelopes, stamps, forms leaders for printers, and stationery.

Note

The Order Checks command appears on the Online menu as the Intuit Marketplace command.

More about...

The Intuit Marketplace


Account command (Lists menu)
Account command

Opens the Account list and makes your accounts available. You can add accounts to the list or change information about existing accounts.

How to...

Create a new account

Select an account to use

Edit account information

Delete an account

Set up an account for electronic payment


Category & Transfer command (Lists menu)
Category & Transfer command

Opens the Category & Transfer List and makes the categories and accounts you can apply to transactions available.  Applying an account to a payment transaction automatically transfers the payment to that account.

You can add categories to the list or change information about existing categories.

How to...

Use the Category & Transfer List


Class command (Lists menu)
Class command

Opens the Class list and makes the classes you can apply to transactions available.  You can add new classes to the list, change information about existing classes, or delete a class.

How to...

Set up and use classes


Memorized Transaction command (Lists menu)
Memorized Transaction command

Opens the Memorized Transaction list and makes the transactions you have memorized available.

How to...

Memorize transactions

Set up and use memorized transaction groups


Scheduled Transaction command (Lists menu)
Scheduled Transaction command

Opens the Scheduled Transaction list. This list contains all payments and deposits you have defined. You can add, edit, or delete transactions on the list. You can also pay a scheduled transaction before it comes due.

Note. This list contains any transaction groups you created using a previous version of Quicken. You can add more groups to the list (up to a total of 12) and change information about existing groups.

How to...

Set up and use scheduled transactions

Set up and use memorized transaction groups


Security command (Lists menu)
Security command

Opens the Security list. Makes available the securities you have set up for investment account transactions. You can add securities to the list or change information about existing securities.

How to...

Set up a security


Security Type command (Lists menu)
Security Type command

Opens the Security Type list. Makes available the types used to classify your securities. Quicken starts with the types Bond, CD, Mutual, and Stock. You can add types to the list or change information about existing types.

Securities are sorted alphabetically by type and within type in the Update Prices window. This makes it easy for you to enter prices from the newspaper. You can group securities by type in investment reports.

How to...

Set up a security type


Investment Goal command (Lists menu)
Investment Goal command

Opens the Investment Goal list. Makes available the goals you can use to group your investments in investment reports. Quicken starts with the goals College Fund, Growth, High Risk, Income, and Low Risk. You can add goals to the list or change information about existing goals.

How to...

Set up an investment goal

Assign an investment goal to a security


Memorized Investment Transaction command (Lists menu)
Memorized Investment Transaction command

Opens the Memorized Investment Transaction list. Makes the investment transactions you have memorized available. Select a transaction from the list and Quicken types it out for you in the investment account register.

How to...

Use a memorized investment transaction

Memorize a noninvestment transaction


Home: Cash Flow command (Reports menu)
Home: Cash Flow command

Produces a preset report summarizing your income and expenses by category. Covers all bank, cash, and credit card accounts.

How to...

Create a home report


Home: Monthly Budget command (Reports menu)
Home: Monthly Budget command

Produces a preset report comparing actual income and expenses with budgeted income and expenses by month. Covers all bank, cash, and credit card accounts. You need to establish a budget before you can use this command.

How to...

Create a home report

Create a budget report

Create a budget


Home: Itemized Categories command (Reports menu)
Home: Itemized Categories command

Produces a preset report listing transactions from all your accounts, grouped and subtotaled by category.

How to...

Create a home report


Home: Tax Summary command (Reports menu)
Home: Tax Summary command

Produces a preset report listing transactions with tax-related categories from all your accounts. Groups and subtotals the transactions by category (first income, then expenses).

How to...

Create a home report

Set up a category


Home: Net Worth command (Reports menu)
Home: Net Worth command

Produces a preset report calculating your net worth as of a specified date. The report is based on the balances of all your accounts.

How to...

Create a home report


Home: Tax Schedule command (Reports menu)
Home: Tax Schedule command

Produces a preset report listing transactions from all your accounts with tax-related categories assigned to tax-schedule line items. Groups and subtotals the transactions by line item (first income, then expenses). You need to turn the tax schedule setting on before you use this command. For details, see the related topic.

If you assign categories to line items correctly, you can transfer a report of this type directly to tax preparation software that uses the tax schedules. For details, see the related topic.

How to...

Create a home report

Turn tax schedule settings on

Transfer tax schedule report data to a tax program

Common Question

How do I set up categories with tax time in mind?


Home: Comparison command (Reports menu)
Home: Comparison command

Creates a report comparing your income and expenses (by category or other item) for two time periods. For example, you can compare your income and expenses for this month with those for this month last year.

How to...

Create a home report


Home: Missing Checks command (Reports menu)
Home: Missing Checks command

Lists payments in the current account by check number, so you can easily spot a break in a sequence of check numbers. It lists missing check numbers as well as duplicate check numbers.

How to...

Create a home report


Investment: Portfolio Value command (Reports menu)
Investment: Portfolio Value command

Produces a report showing the value of each security on a specified date. The report shows number of shares, most recent known price for the date, cost basis, unrealized (paper) gain or loss, and market value for the date.

How to...

Create a report on selected accounts

Limit which transactions are included in your report

Create an investment report


Investment: Investment Performance command (Reports menu)
Investment: Investment Performance command

Produces a preset report showing the average annual total return of your securities during a specified period.

How to...

Create a report on selected accounts

Create a report on selected categories or other items

Limit which transactions are included in your report

Create an investment report


Investment: Capital Gains command (Reports menu)
 Investment: Capital Gains command

Produces a preset report showing long- and short-term capital gains for securities sold during a specified time period. Useful for Tax Schedule D.

For capital gains distributions from a mutual fund, use the investment income report.

How to...

Create a report on selected accounts

Limit which transactions are included in your report

Create an investment report

Related topic

Investment Income command


Investment: Investment Income command (Reports menu)
Investment: Investment Income command

Produces a preset report showing dividend income (taxable and nontaxable), interest income (taxable and nontaxable), capital gains distribution, realized gain or loss, unrealized gain or loss (as an option), and margin interest and other investment expenses during a specified time period.

How to...

Create a report on selected accounts

Limit which transactions are included in your report

Create an investment report


Investment: Investment Transactions command (Reports menu)
Investment: Investment Transactions command

Produces a preset report listing transactions during a specified time period. The report shows how transactions during a specified time period have affected either the market value or the cost basis of your investment and the cash balance in your investment accounts.

How to...

Create a report on selected accounts

Create a report on selected categories, classes, and supercategories

Limit which transactions are included in your report

Create an investment report


Business: P&L Statement command (Reports menu)
Business: P&L Statement command

P&L stands for profit and loss. The P&L Statement command produces a preset report summarizing the revenue and expenses of a business by category (first income, then expenses). It includes all your accounts.

How to...

Create a business report


Business: P&L Comparison command (Reports menu)

P&L stands for profit and loss. The P&L Comparison command produces a preset report that compares profit and loss for the current month to profit and loss for the current year.  Of course, Quicken lets you change this preset date range to any two time periods you want to compare.

How to...

Create a business report


Business: Cash Flow command (Reports menu)
Business: Cash Flow command

Produces a preset report summarizing your income and expenses by category. Covers bank, cash, and credit card accounts.

How to...

Create a business report


Business: A/P by Vendor command (Reports menu)
Business: A/P by Vendor command

A/P stands for accounts payable. The A/P By Vendor command produces a preset report summarizing the dollar amount of all the unprinted checks in your bank accounts by payee name.

If you are not using Quicken to print checks, the A/P report still works if you enter all your payables as printable checks.

How to...

Create a business report


Business: A/R by Customer command (Reports menu)
Business: A/R by Customer command

A/R stands for accounts receivable. The A/R By Customer command produces a preset report summarizing uncleared transactions in all your Quicken asset accounts by payee. The report includes one column for each month in the date range you specify.

How to...

Create a business report


Business: Job/Project command (Reports menu)
Business: Job/Project command

Produces a preset report summarizing your income and expenses for each job, property, client, project, or other Quicken class.  For example, if you manage properties and have set up your properties as class names, you can use this report to summarize your income and expenses by property.

How to...

Create a business report


Business: Payroll command (Reports menu)
Business: Payroll command

Produces a preset report summarizing income and expenses by category, with a separate column for each payee. It is limited to transactions with category or transfer information containing the word Payroll -- that is, to transactions categorized with payroll categories and transfers to payroll liability accounts.

How to...

Create a business report

Note

The easiest way to do payroll tasks is to use the Intuit program QuickPay together with Quicken.  To order Intuit software and supplies, choose the Intuit Marketplace command from the Online menu.


Business: Balance Sheet command (Reports menu)
Business: Balance Sheet command

Produces a preset report showing the assets, liabilities, and equity (or capital) of a business as of a specific date. Covers all accounts. If your bank accounts include any unprinted checks, Quicken adds them to your bank balance and also lists them as a liability.

How to...

Create a business report


Business: Missing Checks command (Reports menu)
Business: Missing Checks command

Lists payments in the current account by check number, so you can easily spot a break in a sequence of check numbers. It lists missing check numbers as well as duplicate check numbers.

How to...

Create a business report


Business: Comparison command (Reports menu)
Business: Comparison command

Creates a report comparing your income and expenses (by category or other item) for two time periods. For example, you can compare your income and expenses for this month with those for this month last year.  Of course, Quicken lets you change this preset date range to any two time periods you want to compare.

How to...

Create a business report


Other: Transaction command (Reports menu)
Other: Transaction command

Creates a detailed report listing your transactions. You can sort and subtotal transactions by payee, category, class, or time period.

How to...

Create a transaction report

Create a report on selected accounts

Create a report on selected categories, classes, and supercategories

Limit which transactions are included in your report


Other: Summary command (Reports menu)
Other: Summary command

Creates a report that subtotals by category, class, payee, or account without listing transactions.

How to...

Create a summary report

Create a report on selected accounts

Create a report on selected categories, classes, and supercategories

Limit which transactions are included in your report


Other: Comparison command (Reports menu)
Other: Comparison command

Creates a report comparing your income and expenses (by category or other item) for two time periods. For example, you can compare your income and expenses for this month with those for this month last year.

How to...

Create a comparison report


Other: Budget command (Reports menu)
Other: Budget command

Creates a report comparing actual to budgeted income and expenses by category. You need to establish a budget before you can use this command.

How to...

Create a budget report

Create a report on selected accounts

Create a report on selected categories, classes, and supercategories

Limit which transactions are included in your report

Create a budget


Other: Account Balances command (Reports menu)
Other: Account Balances command

Creates a report listing the balances of all the accounts in the current file and calculates your net worth.

How to...

Create an account balances report

Create a report on selected accounts

Create a report on selected categories, classes, and supercategories

Limit which transactions are included in your report


Memorized Reports command (Reports menu)
Memorized Reports command

Opens the Memorized Reports list and makes reports you have memorized available. You can use the customized format of a memorized report to create a new report with a different date or date range. This command also allows you to rename or delete a report from the list of memorized reports.

How to...

Use a memorized report

Customize a memorized report

Memorize a report

Rename a memorized report


Graphs: Income & Expense command (Reports menu)
Graphs: Income and Expense command

Creates a graph that compares your income against expenses for the period of time you select.

How to...

Graph income and expenses


Graphs: Budget Variance command (Reports menu)
Graphs: Budget Variance command

Creates a graph that compares your actual income and expenses to the amounts that you budgeted.

How to...

Graph how much you are over or under your budget


Graphs: Net Worth command (Reports menu)
Graphs: Net Worth command

Creates a graph that shows how your net worth has changed over the period of time that you select.

How to...

Graph your net worth


Graphs: Investments command (Reports menu)
Graphs: Investments command

Creates a graph that shows the performance of your investments over the period of time that you select.

How to...

Graph investment performance


Memorized Graphs command (Reports menu)
Memorized Graphs command

Opens the Memorized Graphs list and makes graphs you have memorized available. You can use the customized format of a memorized graph to create a new graph with a different date or date range. This command also allows you to rename or delete a graph from the list of memorized graphs.

How to...

Use a memorized graph

Customize a memorized graph

Memorize a graph

Rename a memorized graph


Snapshots command (Reports menu)
Snapshots command

Opens the Quicken Snapshots window.  Snapshots are miniature versions of Quicken's graphs, reports, calendar notes, and savings or budget goals progress graphs.

How to...

Display Snapshots

Print snapshots


Reconciliation command (Reports menu)
Reconciliation command

Opens the Reconciliation Report Set Up window. Quicken uses the information you enter here to create a reconciliation report.

How to...

Reconcile your balance with your bank statement


Budgeting command (Plan menu)
Budgeting command

Displays a window that you use to set up a budget for your income, expenses, and transfers.

Each Quicken file can contain one budget.  When you set up the budget, you can either enter the budget amounts individually, or you can have Quicken compute the amounts for you by using your actual income and expenses over a specific period of time.

How to...

Set up a budget

Create budget reports and graphs

Print and export a budget


Forecasting command (Plan menu)
Forecasting command

Displays the Forecasting window.  With forecasting, you can project your financial state into the future and see the effect of different possible events.

How to...

Create a forecast

Create a forecast from your budget

Change a forecast

Compare different forecast scenarios


Financial Planners: Loan command (Plan menu)
Financial Planners: Loan command

This command displays Quicken's Loan Planner, a financial planning tool that you can use to evaluate the payment terms of a loan.

How to...

Calculate loan amounts

Calculate loan payments


Financial Planners: Savings command (Plan menu)
Financial Planners: Savings command

This command displays Quicken's Investment Savings Planner, a financial planning tool that you can use to plan the growth of your savings.

How to...

Calculate a starting amount for your savings

Calculate your regular savings contribution

Calculate how much you can save


Financial Planners: College command (Plan menu)
Financial Planners: College command

This command displays Quicken's College Planner, a financial planning tool that you can use to plan for your children's college education.

How to...

Calculate a starting amount for your college savings

Calculate your annual contribution

Calculate how much your college savings will provide


Financial Planners: Retirement command (Plan menu)
Financial Planners: Retirement command

This command displays Quicken's Retirement Planner, a financial planning tool that you can use to project your retirement income and plan how you will meet your retirement goals.

How to...

Calculate a starting amount for your retirement savings

Calculate your annual contribution

Calculate how much retirement income you'll have


Financial Planners: Refinance command (Plan menu)
Financial Planners: Refinance command

This command displays Quicken's Refinance Planner, a financial planning tool that you can use to calculate the break-even point if you are thinking about refinancing your home.

How to...

Calculate the break-even point for a new loan


Tax Planner command (Plan menu)
Tax Planner command

Opens the Tax Planner.  Quicken Tax Planner can help you estimate your taxes at any time during the year.

How to...

Estimate your taxes


Savings Goals command (Plan menu)
Savings Goals command

Opens the Savings Goals window.  Savings Goals let you hide money for something you want to save for, such as a vacation or a new car.  This is where you set up savings goals and see your progress towards achieving them.

How to...

Set up a savings goal

Contribute to a savings goal

Withdraw from a savings goal

Report on a savings goal


Progress Bar command (Reports menu)
Progress Bar command

Displays or removes the Progress Bar at the bottom of your Quicken window.  The Progress Bar can show up to two budget, savings, or supercategory budget goals of your choice.

How to...

Display and change the Progress Bar

Set up a savings goal


TurboTax command (Add-Ons menu)
TurboTax command

Runs TurboTax if you have it installed on your computer.  TurboTax, the world's leading tax software, makes preparing your taxes fast and easy.

TurboTax is an add-on program that is purchased separately from Quicken 4 for Windows.

How to...

Purchase Intuit software and supplies


Quicken Home Inventory command (Add-Ons menu)
Quicken Home Inventory command

Runs Quicken Home Inventory if you have it installed on your computer.  Quicken Home Inventory accurately organizes all records of your personal possessions in one place.

Quicken Home Inventory a feature of Quicken Deluxe 4 for Windows.

How to...

Purchase Intuit software and supplies


Quicken Quotes command (Add-Ons menu)
Quicken Quotes command

Runs Quicken Quotes if you have it installed on your computer.  Quicken Quotes extends the quote tracking capability of Quicken by providing price (high, low, close) and volume information for stocks, options, mutual funds, and indexes.  Use Quicken Quotes to track not only the stocks you own, but also the stocks you may be considering buying.

You can schedule the software to download stock quotes to your computer at a preset time.

Quicken Quotes is a feature of Quicken Deluxe 4 for Windows.

How to...

Purchase Intuit software and supplies


Tradeline Stock Guide (Add-Ons menu)
Tradeline Stock Guide command

Runs the Tradeline Electronic Stock Guide if you have it installed on your computer.  Tradeline provides historical stock price information and allows you to search for stocks that meet varied performance criteria.

The Tradeline Electronic Stock Guide is a feature of Quicken Deluxe 4 for Windows.

How to...

Purchase Intuit software and supplies


Tax Link Assistant (Add-Ons menu)
Tax Link Assistant command

Runs Tax Link Assistant if you have it installed on your computer.  Tax Link Assistant quickly and easily links Quicken categories to tax schedule line items, thereby speeding tax reporting and tax preparation.

Tax Link Assistant is a feature of Quicken Deluxe 4 for Windows.

How to...

Purchase Intuit software and supplies


QuickPay command (Add-Ons menu)
QuickPay command

Runs QuickPay if you have it installed on your computer.  QuickPay is the perfect payroll solution for any small business that runs a payroll.  QuickPay works with both Quicken and QuickBooks.

QuickPay is an add-on program that is purchased separately from Quicken 4 for Windows.

How to...

Purchase Intuit software and supplies


QuickInvoice command (Add-Ons menu)
QuickInvoice command

Runs QuickInvoice if you have it installed on your computer.  QuickInvoice organizes and speeds your invoicing.

QuickInvoice is an add-on program that is purchased separately from Quicken.

How to...

Purchase Intuit software and supplies


Pocket Quicken Connect command (Add-Ons menu)
Pocket Quicken Connect command

Runs Pocket Quicken Connect if you have it installed on your computer.  Pocket Quicken Connect lets you transfer data from Pocket Quicken to Quicken for Windows.

Pocket Quicken runs on various hand-held computing devices.  Pocket Quicken Connect runs on your desktop computer.


Intuit Markeplace command (Online menu)
Intuit Marketplace command

Use the Intuit Marketplace command to order checks, software, and other products for use with Quicken 4 for Windows. In addition to checks, you can order deposit slips, envelopes, stamps, forms leaders for printers, and stationery.

Note

The Intuit Marketplace command appears on the Activities menu as the Order Checks command.

More about...

The Intuit Marketplace


Get IntelliCharge Data command (Activities and Online menus)
Get IntelliCharge Data command

If you have set up IntelliCharge to read your account statement from a disk which is mailed to you each month, this command displays a window where you specify the disk drive that contains your IntelliCharge statement disk.

If you have set up IntelliCharge to download your account statement by modem, this command displays a window that tells you to prepare your modem, then click OK to begin the download.

How to...

Apply for a Quicken credit card

Set up a credit card account to use IntelliCharge

Set up your modem

Update and pay your credit card account


Cascade command (Window menu)
Cascade command

Arranges Quicken windows in an overlapping pattern within the main Quicken window. The title bar of each window remains visible.

How to...

Work with windows


Arrange Icons command (Window menu)
Arrange Icons command

Arranges icons in the main Quicken window in rows. You can shrink any window in the Quicken window to an icon by minimizing it.

How to...

Work with windows


Close All Windows command (Window menu)
Close All Windows command

Closes all the windows and minimized icons in the Quicken main window.

How to...

Work with windows


Quicken Help command (Help menu)
Quicken Help command

Displays information about the active window.

How to...

Use Help


How to Use Help command (Help menu)
How to Use Help command

Displays information about how to use the Help system.

How to...

Use Help


Introduction to Windows command (Help menu)
Tutorials: Introduction to Windows command

Starts a tutorial on how to use Microsoft Windows.


Introduction to Quicken command (Help menu)
Tutorials: Introduction to Quicken command

Starts Quicken's Quick Tour, an overview of Quicken's main features.


Show Qcards command (Help menu)
Show Qcards command

Quicken's Qcards provide you with onscreen directions when you use certain Quicken features.  If you no longer need to use the Qcards, you can turn them off.  Later, if you need to use the Qcards again, you can turn them back on.

To turn Qcards off or on:

•	From the Help menu, choose Show Qcards.  A checkmark next to the command indicates that the Qcards are turned on.


About Quicken command (Help menu)
About Quicken command

Displays the Quicken version number and copyright notice.


Editing text
Edit text

You use the standard Clipboard commands Cut, Copy, and Paste to remove, duplicate, and move selected strings of characters -- letters, numbers, or symbols. You can undo your previous editing action.

The commands you use for these actions are active only when you can use them: Undo when there is an action to undo, Cut and Copy when there is a selection to put on the clipboard, and Paste when there is something on the clipboard.

To undo the last editing action:

•	Choose Undo from the Edit menu.

To remove text and put it on the clipboard:

•	Select the text and choose Cut from the Edit menu.

To place a copy of text on the clipboard:

•	Select the text and choose Copy from the Edit menu.

To insert a copy of the clipboard contents at a given spot:

•	Place the insertion point at the spot and choose Paste from the Edit menu.


Working with Quicken windows
Work with Quicken windows

The Quicken window title bar always displays the name of the Quicken file you are currently working with.

How to...

Shrink a window to an icon

Choose buttons in windows

Make a window larger or smaller

Enter data into fields in windows

Close all the windows in the Quicken window

Arrange icons in the Quicken window in rows

Activate a window and bring it to the top layer in the Quicken window

Arrange the windows open in the Quicken window in an overlapping pattern


To shrink a window to an icon on the Quicken desktop:

•	Click the minimize button in the upper right corner of the window.  To restore a minimized icon, double-click it.


To choose buttons in windows:

Use any of the following methods:

•	Click the left mouse button on the button you want to choose.

•	Press the Enter key to choose the button with a dark outline around it.

•	Each Quicken button contains an underlined letter.  To choose that button, press the Alt key while you press the underlined character.  For example, to record a transaction while working in the register, press Alt+C.


To make a window larger or smaller:

•	Maximize it, or minimize it using the buttons in the upper right corner of the window, or drag the window corners in or out.


To enter data into fields in windows:

A field is an area in a window where you can enter text (characters, numbers, or symbols).

•	Click the mouse in the field that you want to enter text into, then type the text.  You can also press the Tab key to move from field to field.  Press Shift+Tab to move backward one field at a time.


To close all the windows in the Quicken window:

•	Choose Close All Windows from the Window menu.


To arrange icons in the Quicken window in rows:

•	Choose Arrange Icons from the Window menu.


To activate a window and bring it to the top layer in the Quicken window:

•	Choose it from the Window menu.


To arrange the windows open in the Quicken window in an overlapping pattern:

•	Choose Cascade from the Window menu.


Using Quicken Help
Use Quicken Help

To display onscreen Help about the active window:

•	Press F1.

To get information about using the Help window:

•	Choose How to Use Help from the Help menu


Exiting Quicken
Exit Quicken

When you exit Quicken, your data is saved automatically.

To exit Quicken:

•	Choose Exit from the File menu, or double-click the Control-menu box.


Choosing menu commands
Choose menu commands

You can use any of these methods to choose a command from a Quicken menu.

To use a mouse:

•	Click the left mouse button on a menu name to display its commands, then click the command you want to use.  To learn more about using the mouse in Windows, choose Tutorials from the Help menu, then choose Introduction to Windows.

To use the Alt key on your keyboard:

•	Each Quicken menu contains an underlined letter.  To choose a menu from the keyboard, press the Alt key while you press the underlined character.  For example, to display the Activities menu, press Alt+V.

To use Quick Keys:

•	Quick Keys appear to the right of many menu commands.  To choose a menu command using a Quick Key, hold down the Ctrl key while you press the Quick Key indicated on the menu.  For example, press Ctrl+W to display the Write Checks window.

To use the iconbar:

•	You can select many of Quicken's most commonly used menu items by clicking on icons on the iconbar.

More about ...

Quicken menus and icons


*Customizing Quicken (contents)
Customizing Quicken

To search for a Help topic, click the Search button above.

Overview

Click here

How to...

Customize the iconbar

Change Quicken options

Change colors and fonts

Common Questions

Why do reminder messages appear, even though I've turned off Billminder?

Why am I unable to save an empty desktop?

Why doesn't Quicken print my checks when I click the Print Checks icon?

Quick Tips

Adding customized icons for specific tasks

Customizing the iconbar (shortcuts)


Customize the iconbar

Add an icon to the iconbar

Change an icon on the iconbar

Add customized icons for specific tasks

Delete an icon from the iconbar

Change how the iconbar appears


Change Quicken options

Change Quicken's general options

Change Quicken's register options

Change Quicken's report options

Change Quicken's graph options

Change Quicken's Financial Calendar options

Change how QuickFill behaves

Change options for printing checks

Turn Qcards off and on

Turn automatic memorization of transactions off and on

Turn Billminder and Reminder off and on

Save your Quicken desktop


Change colors and fonts

Change the colors used in registers

Change the font and font size used in registers

Change the font in reports displayed onscreen


Customizing Quicken
Overview: Customizing Quicken

There are various ways you can customize Quicken to suit the way you prefer to work.

Some examples

•	Turn Quicken's automatic reminder features on or off.

•	Change how accounts, categories, and dates appear in reports.

•	Change how Quicken displays the iconbar.

•	Change display and printing options for graphs.

•	Determine how your Quicken desktop will appear the next time you open the current file.

•	Turn Qcards off and on.

•	Change the colors and fonts used in your registers.

You can customize the Quicken iconbar

Quicken's iconbar is set to display buttons containing both text and icons. You can turn off the iconbar or change its display.

You'll probably want to use the iconbar as it is when you first start using Quicken. Later, you can customize it to meet your needs.


Turning off Quicken Reminders
Why do Reminder messages appear, even though I've turned off Billminder?

You need to change your Reminders options.

To change the Reminders options:

1.	From the Edit menu, choose Options, then click Reminders.  Or from the Reminders window, click Options.

2.	From the Options window, click the Show Reminders on Startup checkbox.  This removes the checkmark from the box. You will no longer see a reminder message when you start up Quicken.


Saving an empty desktop
Why am I unable to save an empty desktop?

Quicken needs to save a desktop with something on it. When you exit Quicken with an empty desktop, the next time you open Quicken, your desktop has the Account list displayed. Quicken has supplied the Account list.

To get around this, follow these steps when you are ready to exit Quicken:

1.	Clear your desktop.

2.	Open an account.

3.	Minimize the account.

4.	Exit Quicken.  The next time you open Quicken, the desktop is empty, except for the minimized account in the lower left corner.


Print Checks icon doesn't work
Why doesn't Quicken print my checks when I click the Print Checks icon?

You have probably assigned the wrong account to the Print Checks icon.

To change the account assigned to an icon, follow these steps:

1.	From the Edit menu, choose Options, then click Iconbar.

2.	Select the Print Checks icon in the Customize Iconbar window.

3.	Click Edit.

4.	Click OK.  The Print Checks window appears.

5.	Select the correct account from the drop-down list.


Adding an icon to the iconbar
Add an icon to the iconbar

You can add additional icons to Quicken's iconbar.  Each icon that you add performs a specific action when you click it.

To add an icon to the iconbar:

1.	From the Edit menu, choose Options, then click Iconbar.

2.	Click New.  The Add Action to Iconbar window appears.

3.	From the Icon Action list, select the action that you would like the new icon to perform.  When you select an action, a picture of the icon appears next to the list.

4.	If you would like to change the graphic or the text label that appears on the icon, or if you would like to assign a speed key to the icon, click Change, then click OK when you have indicated all the changes you want to make.

5.	Click OK.  For most icons this is all you need to do.

Exceptions to this procedure

If you chose one of the actions in the list below, another window appears.  You use this window to customize the action so that the icon works with a specific item in your Quicken file.  For example, if you chose Use an Account as the action, you would use the window to indicate which account you would like Quicken to open when you click the icon.

These are the actions you can customize:

Use a specific Account...

Use a specific Memorized Txn...

Use a Memorized Report...

Print Checks...

Transmit Payments...

File Backup...

How to...

Customize the iconbar


Adding customized icons for specific tasks

You can add customized icons to the iconbar that work with particular items in your Quicken file.

To add a custom icon:

1.	From the Edit menu, choose Options, then click Iconbar.

2.	Click New.  The Add Action to Iconbar window appears.

3.	From the Icon Action list, select one of these actions, then click OK.

Use a specific Account...

Use a specific Memorized Txn...

Use a Memorized Report...

Print Checks...

Transmit Payments...

File Backup...

4.	Customize the icon by entering the information requested by the window.

5.	Click OK.

How to...

Customize the iconbar


Changing an icon on the iconbar
Change an icon on the iconbar

Once you've added an icon to the iconbar, you can change it by adding a different graphic to the icon, by putting a different text label under the graphic, or by setting up a speed key that activates the icon from the keyboard.  You can also change any of the icons that Quicken originally put on the iconbar.

To change an icon on the iconbar:

1.	From the Edit menu, choose Options, then click Iconbar.

2.	In the Customize Iconbar window, scroll the row of icons until you see the icon you want to change.  Then click that icon.

3.	Click Edit, then click Change.

4.	Indicate the changes that you want to make.

5.	Click OK.

How to...

Customize the iconbar


Deleting an icon from the iconbar
Delete an icon from the iconbar

You can delete any icon from the iconbar.  This is useful when you don't use particular icons, or you need to make room to add new icons.

To delete an icon from the iconbar:

1.	From the Edit menu, choose Options, then click Iconbar.

2.	In the Customize Iconbar window, scroll the row of icons until you see the icon you want to delete.  Then click that icon.

3.	Click Delete.

4.	Click OK to confirm that you want to delete the icon.  After you have deleted an icon, you can add it back at a later time if you need to use the icon again.

How to...

Customize the iconbar


Changing how the iconbar appears
Change how the iconbar appears

The icons on the iconbar normally have both a picture graphic and a text label.  If you wish, you can remove the graphics or the text from the icons.  Either action reduces the height of the iconbar on your screen.

You can also change the order of the icons on the iconbar by dragging and dropping icons on the iconbar.

If you have a lot of icons on the iconbar (so many that you can't see them all on the screen at one time), use the scroll bars at the ends of the iconbar to view the icons that don't fit on the screen.

If you don't use the iconbar, you can turn it off so that Quicken does not display it.

To remove the icon graphics or text:

1.	From the Edit menu, choose Options, then click Iconbar.

2.	Under "Iconbar Display," clear Show Icons or Show Text.

3.	Click OK.

To change the order of the icons on the iconbar:

1.	Place the mouse cursor on the icon you want to move to a different spot on the iconbar.

2.	Holding down the mouse button, drag the icon to the spot you want to place it.

3.	Release the mouse button.

To turn off the iconbar:

1.	From the Edit menu, choose Options, then click Iconbar.

2.	Under "Iconbar Display," clear both Show Icons and Show Text.

3.	Click OK.

How to...

Customize the iconbar


Assign an account to an icon

Follow these steps to indicate which account you would like Quicken to open when you click the icon:

1.	Select the account you want Quicken to open.

2.	Select the window you want Quicken to open when it loads the account.

3.	Click OK.


Assign a memorized transaction to an icon

Follow these steps to indicate which memorized transaction you would like Quicken to use when you click the icon:

1.	Select the memorized transaction that you want Quicken to use.

2.	Select the account where you would like Quicken to enter the transaction.

3.	Select the Automatically Record Item checkbox if you want Quicken to record this transaction in your register without prompting you for confirmation.

4.	Click OK.


Assign a memorized report to an icon

Follow these steps to indicate which memorized report you would like Quicken to display when you click the icon:

1.	Select the report that you want Quicken to use.

2.	Click OK.


Set up an icon to print checks

Follow these steps to indicate which account you would like Quicken to print checks from when you click the icon:

1.	Select the account you would like Quicken to use.

2.	Click OK.


Set up an icon to transmit payments

Follow these steps to indicate which account you would like Quicken to transmit electronic payments from when you click the icon:

1.	Select the account from which you want Quicken to transmit the payments.

2.	Click OK.


Set up an icon to back up a file

Follow these steps to indicate how you want Quicken to perform the backup when you click the icon:

1.	If you would like to skip the window that Quicken normally displays when you back up a file, select the Skip Initial Dialog checkbox (a [image] should appear inside it).

If you select the checkbox, Quicken uses the location of your last backup as the backup location when you click the icon.  For example, if your last backup was to drive B, Quicken backs up your data to drive B.  If you have never performed a backup before, Quicken assumes that drive A is the backup drive.

2.	Click OK.


Turning Qcards off and on
Turn Qcards off and on

Quicken's Qcards provide you with onscreen directions when you use certain Quicken features.  If you no longer need to use the Qcards, you can turn them off.  Later, if you need to use the Qcards again, you can turn them back on.

To turn Qcards off or on:

•	From the Help menu, choose Show Qcards.  A checkmark next to the command indicates that the Qcards are turned on.


Turning Billminder and Reminder off and on
Turn Billminder and Reminder off and on

Reminder and Billminder keep you informed about upcoming bills, checks to print, scheduled transactions and transaction groups, investment reminders, and, if you use CheckFree, electronic payments to transmit.

To turn Billminder and Reminder off or on:

1.	From the Edit menu, choose Options, then click Billminder.  Or from the Reminders window, click Options.

2.	From the Options window, clear the Turn on Billminder checkbox.

3.	(Optional)  Enter the number of business days in advance that you would like Quicken to remind you of upcoming bills.

4.	(Optional)  If you don't want the Reminders window to appear when you start Quicken, clear the Show Reminders on Startup checkbox.

5.	(Optional)  If you don't want to show calendar notes in the Reminders window, clear the Show Calendar Notes checkbox.

6.	Click OK.


Saving your Quicken desktop
Save your Quicken desktop

If you like to have certain windows open when you use Quicken, you can have Quicken memorize the layout and positioning of those windows on your Quicken desktop.  This saves you from having to re-open the windows every time you use Quicken.

To save your Quicken desktop:

1.	Arrange your desktop the way you want Quicken to remember it.

2.	From the File Menu, choose Save Desktop.

3.	From the Save Desktop window, select Save Desktop on Exit, or Save Current Desktop, then click OK.

Can I do this for each file I use?

Yes.  Quicken will remember the layout you saved for each file.  When you open a particular file, Quicken restores the layout for that file.


Save Desktop window
Save Desktop

This window lets you store the layout of your Quicken desktop.  Quicken remembers the layout and restores it each time you open the current file.

To save your Quicken desktop:

•	Select Save Desktop on Exit, or Save Current Desktop, then click OK.

What you see

Save Desktop on Exit

Save Current Desktop


Save Desktop on Exit

Select this option to save your desktop layout whenever you exit Quicken.


Save Current Desktop

Select this option to take a "snapshot" of your current desktop layout.


Changing the colors used in the registers
Change the colors used in the registers

You can change the colors Quicken uses in your account registers. Once you change a option, your change remains in effect until you change the option again.

To change register colors:

1.	Display any Quicken register.

2.	Click Options on the register button bar.  The Register Options window appears.

3.	Click Colors.

4.	For any account type, select the register color you want to use.

5.	Click OK.  If you want to change the colors back to their original state, click Reset.


Changing the font and font size in the register
Change the font and font size used in registers

You can change the font and font size Quicken uses to display your registers and lists.  Once you change a option, your change remains in effect until you change the option again.

To change the register font and font size:

1.	Display any Quicken register.

2.	Click Options on the register button bar.  The Register Options window appears.

3.	Click Fonts.

4.	Select the font you want to use in your registers and lists.

5.	Select the font size you want to use to display text in your registers and lists.

6.	Click OK.


Changing the font in reports displayed onscreen
Change the font in reports displayed onscreen

If you would like the text and numbers in reports displayed onscreen to be larger or smaller, you can change the font size of onscreen reports by editing QUICKEN.INI. This is a text file that Quicken installs in your Windows directory.

To change the onscreen font for reports:

1.	Start Windows Notepad by double-clicking its icon in Program Manager.

2.	From the File menu, choose Open.

3.	Select QUICKEN.INI in the Open window.  You may need to change the directory to \WINDOWS. Make sure that the list shows all the files (*.*).

4.	Click OK.  Notepad displays the QUICKEN.INI file.

5.	Place the insertion point at the beginning of the first blank line in QUICKEN.INI.

6.	Type:

ReportTitleFont=<font name>

ReportHeadingFont=<font name>

ReportDataFont=<font name>

For <font name>, enter the name of the font you want Quicken to use. The preset font for report data is Helvetica. The preset font for report headings is Times Roman.

7.	When you've finished editing the file, choose Save from the File menu.

8.	Exit Notepad.  To see the changes, start Quicken again.


Changing Quicken's font options
Change Quicken's register font

You can change the font and font size Quicken uses to display your registers and lists.  Once you change a option, your change remains in effect until you change the option again.

To change Quicken's register font:

1.	Display any Quicken register.

2.	Click Options on the register button bar.  The Register Options window appears.

3.	Click Fonts.

4.	Select the font you want to use in your registers and lists.  When you select a font from the list, Quicken displays "sample text" in the selected font.

5.	Select the font size you want to use to display text in your registers and lists.  When you select a font size from the list, Quicken displays "sample text" in the selected font and font size.

6.	Click OK.


Changing Quicken's colors preference
Change Quicken's register color

You can change the colors Quicken uses in your registers. Once you change a option, your change remains in effect until you change the option again.

To change Quicken's register color:

1.	Display any Quicken register.

2.	Click Options on the register button bar.  The Register Options window appears.

3.	Click Colors.

4.	For any account type, select the register color you want to use.

5.	Click OK.  If you want to change the colors back to their original state, click Reset.


Changing Quicken's general options
Change Quicken's general options

To change Quicken's general options:

1.	From the Edit menu, choose Options, then click General.

2.	Change the general options, as necessary.

3.	Click OK.


Changing Quicken's register options
Change Quicken's register options

You can change any of the options that control how the register appears and behaves.  Once you change an option, your change remains in effect until you change the option again.

To change Quicken's register options:

1.	Display any Quicken register, then click Options on the register button bar.  Or from the Edit menu, choose Options, then click Register.

2.	As necessary, click the tabs at the top of the Register Options window.

3.	Change any of the following options:

Display

Miscellaneous

QuickFill

4.	Click OK.


Register Display options

Show Account Selector

Show Description Bar

Date in First Column

Memo before Category

Color Shading

Fonts

Colors


Show Account Selector

Click to hide/show the account selection bar, which lets you click on an account name to display its register.


Show Description Bar

Click to hide/show the description bar, which labels the fields in a register.


Date in First Column

Click to switch the positions of the Date and Num fields.


Memo before Category

Click to switch the positions of the Memo and Category fields.


Color Shading

When this option is on, The Register window with color shading in each transaction.  A different color may be used for each account type.


Fonts

Click to change the font used in your registers.


Colors

Click to change the colors of your registers.


Miscellaneous Register options

Date Style

Enter Key Moves Between Fields

Beep When Recording and Memorizing

Use a Single Check Register Window

Warn Before Recording Uncategorized Transactions

Request Confirmation Before Changes

Warn When Recording Out of Date Transactions


Date Style

This option determines how dates are displayed.  If you prefer the Canadian and European style (day/month/year), choose DD/MM/YY.


Enter Key Moves Between Fields

When this option is on, you can use the Enter key as well as the Tab key to move between fields in any account register and the Write Checks window.


Beep When Recording and Memorizing

When this option is on, Quicken beeps when you record, delete, or memorize a transaction, or memorize a report.


Use a Single Check Register Window

When this option is off, a new register window is created for each register you use.  When this option is on, the same register window is used for all your registers.


Warn Before Recording Uncategorized Transactions

When this option is on, Quicken warns you when you are about to record an uncategorized transaction.  This helps you remember to categorize all your transactions for complete information in your reports, graphs, and budgets.


Request Confirmation Before Changes

When this option is on, Quicken asks you to confirm changes you've made to a transaction when you go to another transaction or a new window without first recording the changes.


Warn When Recording Out of Date Transactions

When this option is on, Quicken warns you when you are about to record a transaction for a different year.


QuickFill options

Automatic Memorization of New Transactions

Automatic Completion of Fields

Automatic Recall of Transactions

Drop Down Lists Automatically

Buttons on QuickFill Fields

Auto Memorize to the Calendar list


Automatic Memorization of New Transactions

Memorizes each transaction you enter for a new payee (except investment transactions) and adds it to the Memorized Transaction list.


Automatic Completion of Fields

Automatic completion fills in each field in a transaction as you type it.  Works with check number (Num field in the register), payee, category, subcategory, class, subclass, security names, investment action, and transfer account names.

If you turn off this option, then "Automatic Recall of Transactions" is not available.


Automatic Recall of Transactions

Automatic recall recalls a memorized transaction when you press Tab to leave the Payee field.

If you turn off "Automatic Completion of Fields," then the automatic recall feature is not available.


Drop Down Lists Automatically

Opens a drop-down list when you tab to a field, or place the insertion point in a field.


Buttons on QuickFill Fields

Adds buttons to register QuickFill fields that display information from your memorized transactions.  For example, when you click the Payee button, a drop-down list of memorized payees appears.  To copy one of the memorized payees to the current transaction, click it in the drop-down list.


Auto Memorize to the Calendar list

Adds automatically memorized transactions to the Financial Calendar's Transaction list.

This feature is not available if you turn off "Automatic Memorization of New Transactions."


Shortcuts for customizing the iconbar
Customize the iconbar (shortcuts)

Action	Shortcut:
Delete an icon	Press Shift+click the icon on the iconbar.
Edit an icon	Press Ctrl+click the icon on the iconbar. The Edit Action on Iconbar window appears.
Add an icon	Press Ctrl+click an empty space on the iconbar. The Add Action to Iconbar window appears.
Move an icon	Click the mouse button. While you are holding down the button, drag the icon to the place you want to move it to. Release the mouse button.


Setting display options for graphs
Change Quicken's graph options

To set graph options:

1.	Display any Quicken graph, then click Options on the graph button bar.

2.	From the Graph Options window, change the graph options, as necessary.

3.	Click OK.


Changing how QuickFill behaves
Change how QuickFill behaves

QuickFill is Quicken's automatic data entry feature.  You can customize QuickFill so that it gives you just the degree of automation that you need.

To change how QuickFill behaves:

1.	Display any Quicken register, or the Write Checks window.

2.	Click Options on the button bar.  The Options window appears.

3.	Click the QuickFill tab at the top of the window.

4.	Change the QuickFill options, as necessary.

5.	Click OK.


Turning automatic memorization of transactions off and on
Turn automatic memorization of transactions off and on

Once you have memorized your most frequently-entered transactions, you may want to turn off memorization to keep your Memorized Transaction list to a reasonable length.

To turn memorization off and on:

1.	Display any Quicken register, or the Write Checks window.

2.	Click Options on the button bar.  The Options window appears.

3.	Click the QuickFill tab at the top of the window.

4.	Click Automatic Memorization of New Transactions.  A [image] in the checkbox means that automatic memorization is ON.

5.	Click OK.


Displaying more report columns onscreen
Display more columns onscreen

To see more columns on a summary report (such as a cash flow report), change your report options so that Quicken displays only the name for categories and accounts rather than the description. Since the account name is usually shorter than the description, Quicken can show more report columns on each screen.

To display more report columns onscreen:

1.	Display any Quicken report.

2.	Click Options on the report button bar.  The Report Options window appears.

3.	Change the Account and Category displays to Name.

4.	Click OK.


Setting report options
Change Quicken's report options

To set report options:

1.	From the Edit menu, choose Options, then click Reports.  Or while looking at a report, click Options on the report button bar.

2.	From the Report Options window, change the report options, as necessary.

3.	Click OK.

How to...

Change the font for printed reports


Changing options for printing checks
Change options for printing checks

To change options for printing checks:

1.	From the Edit menu, choose Options, then click Checks.  Or while at the Write Checks window, click Options on the button bar.

2.	As necessary, click the tabs at the top of the Check Options window.

3.	Change any of the following options:

Checks

Miscellaneous

QuickFill

4.	Click OK.


Options dialog
Options

This window lets you change various Quicken settings.

How to...

Change Quicken's general options

Change options for printing checks

Change Quicken's register options

Change Quicken's report options

Turn Billminder and Reminder off and on

Customize the iconbar


Customize Iconbar dialog box
Customize Iconbar

This window is your starting point for making changes to Quicken's iconbar.  You can add new icons; customize icons to work with specific accounts, transactions, groups, and reports; delete icons you no longer need; and change how the iconbar appears on your screen.

How to...

Customize the iconbar

Customize the iconbar (shortcuts)

What you see

New, Edit, Delete, Reset buttons


Customize Iconbar buttons

This button...	Does this...
New	Displays a window that you use to add a new icon to the iconbar.
Edit	Displays a window that you use to change an existing icon on the iconbar.
Delete	Deletes an icon from the iconbar.
Reset	Restores the iconbar to its original state when you created your Quicken file.  This button will undo all the changes you made by using the New, Edit, or Delete buttons.


Add Action to Iconbar dialog box
Add Action to Iconbar / Edit Action on Iconbar

If you are adding an icon to the iconbar, you use this window to select the action you want the icon to perform.  If you are changing an icon that is already on the iconbar, you use this window to select the new action you want the icon to perform.

How to...

Add an icon to the iconbar

Change an icon on the iconbar

What you see

Change button


Change button

Displays a window that you use to change the graphic that appears on the icon, change that text label that appears under the graphic, or assign a speed key to the icon.


Change Iconbar Item dialog box
Change Iconbar Item

You use this window to (1) change the graphic that appears on an icon, (2) change the text label that appears under the graphic, or (3) assign a speed key to the icon.

How to...

Add an icon to the iconbar

Change an icon on the iconbar


Assign Account to Icon dialog box
Assign Account to Icon

The icon you are adding to the iconbar opens a Quicken account.  Here, you select the account you want Quicken to open when you click the icon.

To assign an account to an icon:

1.	Select the account you want Quicken to open.

2.	Select the window you want Quicken to open when it loads the account.

3.	Click OK.


Assign File Backup to Icon dialog box
Assign File Backup to Icon

The icon you are adding to the iconbar creates a backup file of your Quicken data.  Here, you indicate whether you want Quicken to let you select a drive for the backup disk when you click the icon.

If you want to select the drive yourself:

•	Clear the Skip Initial Dialog checkbox (the box should be empty).

If you want Quicken to select the drive:

•	Select the Skip Initial Dialog checkbox (the box should have a checkmark in it).


Assign Memorized Report to Icon dialog box
Assign Memorized Report to Icon

The icon you are adding to the iconbar displays the memorized report of your choice.  Here, you select the memorized report you want the icon to display.

To select the memorized report

•	Choose the report from the Report Name drop-down list and click OK.


Assign Memorized Transaction to Icon dialog box
Assign Memorized Transaction to Icon

The icon you are adding to the iconbar enters the memorized transaction of your choice.  Here, you select the memorized transaction you want the icon to enter.

To select the memorized transaction

1.	Select the memorized transaction that you want Quicken to use.

2.	Select the account where you would like Quicken to enter the transaction.

3.	Select the Automatically Record Item checkbox if you want Quicken to record this transaction in your register without prompting you for confirmation.

4.	Click OK.


Assign Transaction Group to Icon dialog box
Assign Transaction Group to Icon

The icon you are adding to the iconbar enters the transaction group of your choice.  Here, you select the transaction group you want the icon to enter.

To select the group:

•	Enter the number of the group.  Then choose the account where you would like Quicken to enter the transactions, and select one of the three options for entering the date of the transactions.  If you would like the account register to appear after Quicken enters the transactions, select the Display Register checkbox.


Assign Print Checks to Icon dialog box
Print Checks

The icon you are adding to the iconbar prints the checks you have written.  Here, you select the account you want Quicken to print the checks from.

To select the account

•	Choose the account from the Account drop-down list and click OK.


Assign Transmit Payments to Icon dialog box
Transmit Payments

The icon you are adding to the iconbar transmits your electronic payments to CheckFree.  Here, you select the account from which you want the payments to be made.

To select the account

•	Choose the account from the Account drop-down list and click OK.


Setting Up Iconbar Button to Use Specific Account

To assign an account to the UseAcct icon on the iconbar:

•	Click OK, then complete the information in the window that appears.


Register Options window
Register Options

This is where you change the way your register looks and behaves.  Once you change a option, it remains in effect until you change the option again.

To change Quicken's register options:

1.	As necessary, click the tabs at the top of the window.

2.	Change any of the following options:

Display

Miscellaneous

QuickFill

3.	Click OK.

How to...

Change the font and font size in registers

Change the colors used in registers


Fonts Preference dialog box
Choose Register Font

This is where you choose the font and font size used in your Quicken registers.  Once you change a option, your change remains in effect until you change the option again.

To change the register font and font size:

1.	Select the font you want to use in your registers and lists.

2.	Select the font size you want to use to display text in your registers and lists.

3.	Click OK.

How to...

Change the font in reports displayed onscreen


Colors Preference dialog box
Choose Register Colors

This is where you choose the colors used in your Quicken registers. Once you change a option, your change remains in effect until you change the option again.

To choose register colors:

1.	For any account type, select the register color you want to use.

2.	Click OK.  If you want to change the colors back to their original state, click Reset.


Printed Check Info dialog box
Printed Check Information

The address you enter here will appear on all Quicken checks that you print for this transaction.

To enter the address:

•	Type the address on the lines provided.  If you want a message to appear on each check, enter the message in the Message box.


Billminder Options dialog box
Reminder Options

To set the Reminder options:

•	Select or clear the checkboxes as necessary, enter the number of days in advance you would like to be reminded of upcoming bills, then click OK.

What you see

Turn on Billminder

How many days in advance...

Show Reminders on Startup

Show Calendar Notes


Turn on Billminder

Select this checkbox to turn Billminder on.  Billminder is Quicken's automatic reminder feature.  It reminds you of upcoming bills either from DOS at boot time, or at Windows startup.


How may days in advance...

Enter the number of business days in advance that you want Quicken to remind you of upcoming bills.

If you use Quicken...	Set the number to...
Daily (except weekends)	0 days
At least every other day	1 day
At least once every three days	2 days
At least weekly	5 days
At least once every two weeks	10 days
At least once a month	30 days


Show Reminders on Startup

Clear this checkbox if you don't want the Reminders window to appear when you start Quicken.


Show Calendar Notes

Clear this checkbox if you don't want to show calendar notes in the Reminders window.  Calendar notes are created at the Financial Calendar window.


Graph Options dialog box
Graph Options

This window lets you control how Quicken displays graphs on your screen, and prints graphs on your printer.

To change a option:

•	Click a checkbox.  When a option is in effect, a [image] appears in its checkbox.  When a option is turned off, its checkbox is empty.

What you see

Graph options


Graph options

Display patterns on screen

Create all graphs in separate windows

Draw in 2D


Display patterns on screen

Displays graphs on your screen by using black and white texture patterns instead of solid colors.  When this option is not turned on, graphs appear in solid colors on your screen.

If you have a color printer, graphs may print in black and white if this option is selected.


Create all graphs in separate windows

Each Quicken graph consists of two parts.  When this option is selected, Quicken displays each part in a window of its own.  When this option is not turned on, Quicken displays both parts in a single window.

This option is helpful if you want to print only one of the two graph parts.


Draw in 2D

Draws the elements of a graph in two dimensions.  When this option is not turned on, Quicken draws all graphs in three dimensions.

This option is useful if your computer takes a long time to draw a graph in three dimensions.  When a graph is displayed in two dimensions, Quicken also prints it that way.


General Options dialog box
General Options

These options control a variety of Quicken features.

To change a option:

•	Click a checkbox.  When a option is in effect, a [image] appears in its checkbox.  When a option has been turned off, its checkbox is empty.

What you see

General options


General options

Use Quicken's Custom Colors

Confirm Investment Transactions from Forms

Save Price History in DOS Quicken Format

Use Tax Schedules with Categories

Working Calendar

Starting Month for Fiscal Year


Use Quicken's Custom Colors

When this option is on, Quicken displays its windows with a gray background to give them a three-dimensional effect.  This overrides the background color option in the Windows Control Panel.

Note.  You cannot use Quicken's custom colors on a monochrome or EGA display.


Confirm Investment Transactions from Forms

When this option is on, Quicken asks you to confirm a transaction you've entered on an investment form before the transaction is recorded in your investment register.


Save Price History in DOS Quicken Format

If you plan to start using Quicken for DOS, you can save your price history in Quicken for DOS format. Then, when you update prices in DOS, the price history you've been recording in Quicken for Windows will be converted and available for you to use.


Use Tax Schedules with Categories

When this option is on, Quicken allows you to assign a tax schedule form to each tax-related category you set up.


Working Calendar

Select whether you want your working calendar based on the calendar year, or your fiscal year.  To learn more about the fiscal year option, click here.


Starting Month for Fiscal Year

Select the first month of your fiscal year.  To learn more about the fiscal year option, click here.


Fiscal year option in Quicken
The Fiscal Year

You may define a fiscal year that begins on any month of the year.  When you do so, any "yearly" or "quarterly" options in Quicken will be offset, based on the first month of your fiscal year.  For example, if your fiscal year started in April 1994, and it's now January 1995, then "last year" is April 1, 1993 to March 31, 1994.

To find out how to change the fiscal year option, click here.


Report Options dialog box
Report Options

These options control the appearance of your reports.

To change a option:

•	Click one of the options shown. For dates, either select a preset date range or select Custom Date from the drop-down list. Then select the starting and ending dates from the lists Quicken displays. For checkboxes, click to select (to clear, click the checkbox to remove the check).

What you see

Report options


Report options

Account/Category Display

Default Report/Comparison Report Date Range

Skip Create Report Prompt

QuickZoom to Investment Forms

Use Color in Report


Account/Category Display

Quicken's preset reports display an account's or category's name.

You can have Quicken display the description, name, or both name and description. Select an option to have Quicken show accounts and categories the way you like.


Default Report/Comparison Report Date Range

Select a preset date range or select Custom Date to set your own starting and ending dates for all reports.

For memorized reports, this option is very useful. In the Memorize Report window, select the None, Use Report Default checkbox. This option handles "floating" date ranges.

For comparison reports, select a preset date range or select Custom Date to set a second date range for the period you want to use in your analysis.


Skip Create Report Prompt

When you create a report, Quicken normally displays the Create Report window, where you specify the report's starting and ending dates.

Select this checkbox if you want Quicken to create reports without first displaying the Create Report window.  Quicken will create the report, using the dates currently specified in the Report Options window.  If you need to make changes, click Customize on the Report button bar after Quicken creates the report.


QuickZoom to Investment Forms

When this checkbox is selected, Quicken takes you from a specific transaction you've selected in an investment report to the investment form you completed for that transaction.

If this checkbox is cleared, Quicken takes you from a specific transaction in an investment report to the entry in the investment register for that transaction.


Use Color in Report

Select whether to display negative amounts and report titles in color.


Check Options window
Check Options

This is where you customize how your checks are printed.  You do this by choosing which options you want to be in effect when you print your checks.

To change Quicken's register options:

1.	As necessary, click the tabs at the top of the window.

2.	Change any of the following options:

Checks

Miscellaneous

QuickFill

3.	Click OK.


Check options

Printed Date Style

Allow Entry of Extra Message on Check

Print Categories on Voucher Checks

Warn if a Check Number is Re-used

Change Date of Checks to Date When Printed

Artwork on Check Entry Screen


Printed Date Style

Click one of these four options to select a date format for your printed checks:

This option . . .	Prints a date like this...
MM/DD/YEAR	6/19/1993
MM/DD/YY	6/19/93
DD/MM/YEAR	19/6/1993
DD/MM/YY	19/6/93


Allow Entry of Extra Message on Check

Adds an extra message line to the check.  You can use it to enter information such as account numbers.  Quicken prints the message line away from the transparent window on the envelope so that it can't be seen.

If you add a message and then clear the Allow Entry of Extra Message on Check checkbox, Quicken saves the text of the message.  You can restore the text by clicking the Allow Entry of Extra Message on Check checkbox.

The extra message can only be edited from the Write Checks window.


Print Categories on Voucher Checks

Voucher checks have a perforated attachment.  With this setting, you can print category information from split checks on the attachment.  Quicken can print up to 16 lines of split information on the attachment.


Warn if a Check Number is Re-used

Displays a warning message if you enter a check number that is already entered in the register.


Change Date of Checks to Date When Printed

Changes the date of your checks to the date when you print them.  This is useful if you typically print your checks on a different day than when you write them.


Artwork on Check Entry Screen

Select the checkbox, then from the drop-down list select the artwork you would like to display on the check image in the Write Checks window.  The artwork is not printed when you print your checks.


Miscellaneous Check options

Date Style

Enter Key Moves Between Fields

Beep When Recording and Memorizing

Warn Before Recording Uncategorized Transactions

Request Confirmation Before Changes


Financial Calendar Options window
Financial Calendar Options

To change a option:

1.	Click the tabs at the top of the Options window, as necessary.

2.	Click a checkbox.  When a option is in effect, a [image] appears in its checkbox.  When a option is turned off, its checkbox is empty.

What you see

Accounts

QuickFill


Changing Quicken's Financial Calendar options
Change Quicken's Financial Calendar options

To set calendar options:

1.	From the Financial Calendar window, click Options.  Quicken displays the Financial Calendar Options window.

2.	Click the tabs at the top of the Options window, as necessary.

3.	Change any of the following options:

Accounts

QuickFill

4.	Click OK.


Accounts options

Select which accounts are represented on the bar graph and in the Transaction List.


*Managing Quicken files (contents)
Managing Quicken files

To search for a Help topic, click the Search button above.

Introduction

Click here

How to...

Work with Quicken files

Backup and restore Quicken files

Close out your accounts at year end

Use passwords to keep your data secure

Convert Quicken 3 and Quicken 4 Files

Common Questions

Where is my Quicken data file?

Why does Quicken create a BACKUP directory?

I've set up an account in the wrong file. How can I move it to the correct account?

Quick Tips

Transferring categories to a new file

Adding home or business categories to an existing file


Work with Quicken files

About Quicken data files

Create a Quicken file

Open a Quicken file

Copy a Quicken file

Rename a Quicken file

Delete a Quicken file


Backup and restore Quicken files

Back up a Quicken file

Restore a Quicken file

Change the frequency of automatic backups

Why does Quicken create a BACKUP directory?


Close out your accounts at year end

Year-end procedures

Archive a Quicken file

Create a new year file


Use passwords to keep your data secure

Provide a file password

Provide a transaction password

Change a file password

Change a transaction password

Remove a file password

Remove a transaction password


Managing Quicken files
Overview: Managing Quicken files

If you use Quicken for personal finances, you probably need only one file. When you store all your accounts in just one file, Quicken provides special benefits that it cannot provide for separate files.

With all your accounts in one file, Quicken can:

•	Keep one list of income and expense categories for all your accounts (up to 255 separate accounts per file).

•	Combine data from all accounts in a single report or graph to track your income and expenses, net worth, and other information.

•	Transfer money from one account to another in the same file.

With separate files, no connection exists between the accounts in one file and the accounts in another.

Of course, there are good reasons for setting up more than one Quicken file:

•	To keep information separate for business purposes, if your personal and business finances are kept completely separate and have different checking accounts.

•	To keep a separate file for each year's accounts.

With any Quicken file you can:

•	Copy all or part of a file.  More detail>

•	Copy data (transactions) from one account to another.  More detail>

•	Set up passwords to secure your data.  More detail>


Copying all or part of a file

You might need to copy part of a file for one of these reasons:

•	You want to copy transactions within a certain date range to start a new file for a new fiscal year.

•	Your data disk is full.

•	You want to copy your memorized transactions, transactions groups, and categories to a new file without copying any transactions.

For instructions about copying a file, see: Copying a Quicken file.


Copying data from one account to another

You cannot directly copy or move multiple transactions from one Quicken account to another. You can do this indirectly, however, using Quicken's Export and Import commands. You can export transactions within a date range only; you cannot specify certain transactions for export.

For instructions on exporting and importing transactions between Quicken files, see:

Information about QIF files

Exporting data to a QIF file

Importing data from a QIF file


Setting up passwords to secure your data

You might want to protect some or all of your transactions in a Quicken file from unauthorized changes. You can set up two different types of passwords in Quicken:

•	A file password, which must be correctly entered before a Quicken file can be opened.

•	A transaction password, which must be correctly entered before transactions recorded before a certain date can be changed.

For information about passwords, see:

Providing a file password

Providing a transaction password


Where is my Quicken data file?

Here are two common reasons why you don't see your data file:

•	When you installed Quicken, Quicken detected that you had existing Quicken data. When asked if you wanted your files moved to the new Quicken directory, you opted not to move the files.

•	Your existing Quicken files are not located in the same directory as your Quicken program files. Quicken didn't find these existing files when you installed the latest version of Quicken.

To locate your data file:

1.	From the File menu, choose Open.  The Open Quicken File window appears.

2.	If you don't see the filename for your Quicken data file, it is located in a different directory. Click on the folders in the Directories list to view the contents of each subdirectory.

3.	If you can't find the correct directory, your files may be on a different drive. Select a drive from the Drive drop-down list. Click the folders to see the contents of each subdirectory.

4.	After you've located your data file, click OK.


Creating a Quicken file
Create a Quicken file

To create a Quicken file:

1.	From the File menu, choose New.

2.	Select New File.  If you select New Account instead, Quicken creates a new account and adds it to the current file.

3.	Click OK.

4.	In the File Name box, enter the name of the new file.  If you want the file to be in a different directory, double-click the directory in the list of directories shown.  Or, you can include the directory path when you type the filename.

5.	(Optional)  If you don't want to use the standard home and business categories in the new file, clear the Home and Business checkboxes.

6.	Click OK.

See also ...

About Quicken data files


About Quicken data files

Each time you create a new file in Quicken, Quicken creates a set of five files.  These files compose your "data set."

To make it easier to manage your data set, Quicken requires only the name of the transaction file (*.QDT) for all file operations (e.g. opening a file).  This single filename actually refers to your entire data set, which Quicken manages for you automatically.

How to...

Work with Quicken files

Backup and restore Quicken files

Close out your accounts at year end

Use passwords to keep your data secure

Convert Quicken 3 and Quicken 4 Files


Quicken Files

File	Purpose
<filename>.QDT	Data file:  contains all your transactions.
<filename>.QNX	An index to the data (QDT) file.  More detail>
<filename>.QMT	Contains all the items you memorize (categories, classes, etc.).
<filename>.QDI	Dictionary file:  contains addresses of unprinted checks and descriptions in split transactions.
<filename>.QST	Contains investment price history, your custom icons, Financial Calendar notes, extra account information, and information about your loans.
<filename>.QTX	Contains your tax planning data.  Appears only if you use the Quicken Tax Planner.


The Index (.QNX) file

When you restart Quicken you may see a message explaining that Quicken is maintaining or reconstructing your index file.  This occurs if Quicken didn't have a chance to save the index file the last time you exited (for example, if the computer was turned off before you exited Quicken).

Quicken normally reindexes automatically whenever it's required.  However, if Quicken tells you to reindex, choose File Operations from the File menu, and then choose Reindex.

Note: Don't reindex unless Quicken tells you to, and be sure to back up your data before doing so.


Opening a Quicken file
Open a Quicken file

Open a Quicken file when you want to look at data in an existing file other than the current file.  You can work with only one file at a time.

To open a Quicken file:

1.	From the File menu, choose Open.

2.	In the File Name box, enter the name of the file.  Include the directory path if the file is not in the directory where you installed Quicken.  To display the files in a particular directory, double-click the directory name in the Directories list.  To select a particular file, click its name in the list under the File Name box.

3.	Click OK.

Note

Quicken for Windows files, and Quicken 5, 6, 7 and 8 files use the same format.  You can open and work with a single file in both versions of Quicken.

Quicken 3 and 4 files are converted automatically to Quicken for Windows format when you open them in Quicken for Windows.  After you open a Quicken 3 or 4 file in Quicken for Windows, you can't continue using it in Quicken 3 or 4.

More about ...

Quicken data files

Converting Quicken 3 and Quicken 4 files


Copying a Quicken file
Copy a Quicken file

Copying a file will take all or part of your current file and create a new file with a different name.  This will condense the size of the file by removing unused and deleted records from the file.

You can limit the copy to transactions from a range of dates such as the previous year or the year to date, and you can exclude prior uncleared or investment transactions.

The copy will contain all the accounts in the original file.

To copy a Quicken file:

1.	From the File menu, choose File Operations, then choose Copy.

2.	Enter a name for the new file.  An example of a new name would be something like QDATA94, for the file named QDATA.

3.	If you want to copy the file to a different directory, enter that location (drive and directory name) in the Location of New File field.

4.	If you are copying the entire file, make sure the date range is correct.  If you are copying part of the file, set the date range to the dates you want.

5.	If you do not want to copy all prior uncleared transactions, clear the first checkbox.

6.	If you do not want to copy all prior investment transactions, clear the second checkbox.

7.	Click OK.  Once it has copied successfully, click Load New Copy and then OK.  This will load the new file and place it onto the Quicken desktop.


Deleting a Quicken file
Delete a Quicken file

Caution!  You cannot undo this operation.  When you delete a file, you permanently remove all of its records.

To delete a Quicken file:

1.	From the File menu, choose File Operations, then choose Delete.

2.	In the File Name box, enter the name of the file.  Include the directory path if the file is not in the directory where you installed Quicken.  To display the files in a particular directory, double-click the directory name in the Directories list.  To select a particular file, click its name in the list under the File Name box.

3.	Click OK.

4.	Type YES to confirm that you want to delete the file.

5.	Click OK.


Renaming a Quicken file
Rename a Quicken file

If you need to, you can change the name of any Quicken file.

To change the name of a Quicken file:

1.	From the File menu, choose File Operations, then choose Rename.

2.	In the File Name box, enter the name of the file.  Include the directory path if the file is not in the directory where you installed Quicken.  To display the files in a particular directory, double-click the directory name in the Directories list.  To select a particular file, click its name in the list under the File Name box.

3.	Enter the new filename in the box below New Name for Quicken File, and then click OK.  You do not need to enter the .QDT extension as part of the new filename.


Backing up a Quicken file
Back up a Quicken file

Because your Quicken data is so important, Quicken regularly prompts you to back up your current file when you exit the program.  We highly recommend that you do so.  In addition, you can use the procedure described below to back up your data at any time you wish.

For some tips on backing up your data, click here.

To back up a Quicken file:

1.	Place a formatted backup disk in a drive.  If you are using a disk you have previously used to back up your Quicken data, Quicken will overwrite any files with the same name.

2.	From the File menu, choose Backup.

3.	Click either Current File or Select From List.  More detail>

4.	Enter the letter of the drive containing the backup disk.

5.	Click OK.

How to...

Restore a Quicken file

Change the frequency of automatic backups

Why does Quicken create a BACKUP directory?


More detail

Current File:	The file you are currently in.
Select From List:	Lets you choose the file to back up from the list of filenames.


Restoring a Quicken file
Restore a Quicken file

Restore a Quicken file when you want to put a file you previously backed up or copied onto your hard disk.

To restore a Quicken file:

1.	Insert the disk that contains the file.

2.	From the File menu, choose Restore.

3.	Enter the letter of the drive.

4.	Click OK.

5.	In the File Name box, enter the name of the file.  To display the files in a particular directory, double-click the directory name in the Directories list.  To select a particular file, click its name in the list under the File Name box.

6.	Click OK.

How to...

Back up a Quicken file

Change the frequency of automatic backups

Why does Quicken create a BACKUP directory?


Year-end procedures

Many people feel you need to "close out your accounts" before continuing to the new year.  "Closing out accounts" is required by many accounting packages.  It means you save all the information about completed transactions from the previous year in one file, and continue to the new year with only those transactions that are still uncleared.

Quicken does not require you to close out an account at the end of the year, or at the close of any fiscal period.  In fact, if you do "close out" a Quicken file, you forgo easy access to reports covering several years.  However, if you still want to close out a file, Quicken offers two options, depending on how you want to organize your historic files: Archive and Start New Year.

How to...

Archive a Quicken file

Create a new-year file


Archiving a Quicken file
Archive a Quicken file

Archive a Quicken file after the end of the year to save a copy of last year's (and earlier) records for safekeeping. The current file retains all transactions, so your reports can include last year's transactions.

To archive a Quicken file:

1.	From the File menu, choose Year-End Copy.

2.	Click Archive and then click OK.

3.	If necessary, change the Quicken generated filename for the archive file.

4.	If you want the archive file to be in a different directory than the directory where you installed Quicken, change the directory path shown in the window.

5.	If you want to archive transactions from only part of last year, change the date shown in the window.

6.	Click OK.  Quicken creates the archive file and copies the historic transactions to it.  When it finishes, Quicken asks you which file you would like to use, the current file, or the archive file.

Note

You should never need to make changes to the archived file.  To ensure that changes are not made inadvertently, you can set either a file or transaction password for the file.

How to...

Provide a file password

Provide a transaction password


Creating a new-year file
Create a new-year file

You can start a new file each year, so that your current file contains only this year's transactions.  It will contain only the new year's transactions, all uncleared transactions, and all investment transactions.  The Start New Year option saves a copy of your current file, and then deletes any transactions in the current file that are not for the current year.

Important notes:

•	This procedure will work properly only if you reconcile your accounts faithfully.

•	If you are using IntelliCharge to update your credit card accounts, be advised that the Start New Year option removes the previous year's transactions from your accounts (including payee information).  When payee information is removed, IntelliCharge may not be able to match payees and categories correctly the next time you update your register.

To create a new-year file:

1.	From the File menu, choose Year-End Copy.

2.	Click Start New Year, then click OK.

3.	Enter a filename for the new Quicken file.

4.	If you want the new file to begin at a date other than January 1 of this year, change the date shown in the window.

5.	Click OK.  After the new-year file has been created, you have a choice of using the old file or the new one.  Click OK to use the new-year file.

What happens

Quicken has just made a copy of your current file, and deleted all transactions in the current file earlier than the date indicated.  However, it does not delete any investment transactions or any uncleared transactions.

Did Start New Year work as you expected?  If not, it could be because you have not reconciled your previous year's transactions.  Since Quicken made a complete copy of your data file, load that file, reconcile your accounts, then create another new-year file.


Providing a file password
Provide a file password

A file password prevents unauthorized access to the current file.

To provide a file password:

1.	From the File menu, choose Passwords, then choose File.

2.	Enter the password.

3.	Click OK.

4.	Re-enter the password for confirmation.

5.	Click OK.

How to...

Use passwords to keep your data secure


Changing a file password
Change a file password

If you need to, you can change password for the current file.  To change a password, you must know the old password.

To change a file password:

1.	From the File menu, choose Passwords, then choose File.

2.	Enter the old password.

3.	Enter the new password.

4.	Click OK.

5.	Re-enter the new password for confirmation.

6.	Click OK.

How to...

Use passwords to keep your data secure


Removing a file password
Remove a file password

If you need to, you can remove the file password for the current file.  To remove a password, you must know the old password.

To remove a file password:

1.	From the File menu, choose Passwords, then choose File.

2.	Enter the old password.

3.	Leave the New Password box blank.

4.	Click OK.

How to...

Use passwords to keep your data secure


Providing a transaction password
Provide a transaction password

A transaction password prevents unauthorized changes to transactions in the current file.  When you set up the password, you can also specify a date prior to which all transactions are protected by the password.  You may want to set the date at the close of your accounting period as a reminder not to change transactions for that period.

To provide a transaction password:

1.	From the File menu, choose Passwords, then choose Transaction.

2.	Enter the password.

3.	(Optional)  Enter the date of the last transaction you want the password to apply to.  By default, Quicken shows today's date.

4.	Click OK.

5.	Re-enter the password for confirmation.

6.	Click OK.

How to...

Use passwords to keep your data secure


Changing a transaction password
Change a transaction password

If you need to, you can change the transaction password for the current file.

To change a transaction password:

1.	From the File menu, choose Passwords, then choose Transaction.

2.	Enter the old password.

3.	Enter the new password.

4.	(Optional)  Change the date.  All transactions prior to the date will be protected by the password.

5.	Click OK.

6.	Re-enter the new password for confirmation, and then click OK.

How to...

Use passwords to keep your data secure


Removing a transaction password
Remove a transaction password

If you need to, you can remove the transaction password for the current file.

To remove a transaction password:

1.	From the File menu, choose Passwords, then choose Transaction.

2.	Enter the old password.

3.	 Leave the New Password box blank.

4.	 Click OK.

How to...

Use passwords to keep your data secure


Are you sure? window
Creating new file: Are you sure?

To create a new Quicken file:

•	Select New File, then click OK.

To create a new account in the current Quicken file:

•	Select New Account, then click OK.

Tip

A quicker way to create a new account is to choose Create New Account from the Activities menu.


New File window
Create Quicken File

This is where you create and open a new Quicken file.

To create a file:

•	Enter a filename, select home or business categories (or both), then click OK.

Filename

Enter a name for the file -- up to eight characters. Filenames must meet the criteria for DOS filenames, but without an extension. They may not include any of these characters:

,  . "  /  \  [  ]  :  <  >  +  =

See a list of...

Quicken's standard home categories

Quicken's standard business categories


Open File window
Open Quicken File

This is where you open an existing Quicken file so that you can work with the accounts in it.

Quicken for Windows files and Quicken 5-8 files use the same format. You can open and work with a single file in both versions of Quicken.

Files created in Quicken 3 or 4 are converted automatically to the Quicken for Windows format when you open them in Quicken for Windows. After you open an older file in Quicken for Windows, you can't continue using it in the earlier version of Quicken. For details, see the related topic at the end of this topic.

To open a file:

1.	Double-click a directory name in the Directories list to display the files in a particular directory.

2.	Click on the file's name in the list under the File Name box.  If you already know the name and location of the file, you can type the path and file name directly into the File Name box.

3.	Click OK.

How to...

Convert Quicken 3 and Quicken 4 files


Problem with Quicken file

The category and memorized transaction list file (.QMT extension) of this Quicken file is internally inconsistent.

If you have a backed-up copy of this .QMT file, use DOS to make another backup of the current version of the .QMT file -- the damaged version. Then use the DOS copy command to copy the backed-up .QMT file over the damaged file. If you have not added many categories, classes, securities, or memorized items since backing up, stop at this point.

If you have made many changes, or if you do not have a backup copy, see:
Rebuilding a damaged QMT file.


Copy File window
Copy File

This is where you can make a copy of all or part of the current file.

To copy a file:

•	Enter a name for the new Quicken file, then click OK.

To copy part of a file:

•	Enter a name, reduce the date range, or clear one or both of the "Prior Transactions" checkboxes, then click OK.

What you see

Name of New Quicken File

Location of New File

Copy Transactions From/To

Copy All Prior Uncleared Transactions

Copy All Prior Investment Transactions


Name of New Quicken File

The name must meet the requirements for an eight-character DOS file name, without an extension.


Location of New File

You can change the preset drive and directory if you don't want to copy the file to this location. Enter the drive and directory.


Copy Transactions From/To

Enter the date of the first transactions to be copied and the date of the last transactions to be copied. Quicken inserts the first and last dates used in the current file.

If you don't change these dates, all the transactions will be copied. If you change both dates to one day after the last date used in these files, only the lists of categories and memorized transactions will be copied to the new account.


Copy All Prior Uncleared Transactions

Prior uncleared transactions are dated before the date range specified but not yet cleared. You must include these in order to continue to reconcile your account accurately.


Copy All Prior Investment Transactions

Prior investment transactions are dated before the date range specified. You must include these if you want the new account to reflect the prior performance of your investments.

This option appears only if there is an investment account in the current file.


Delete File & Deleting File windows
Delete Quicken File

Caution!  You cannot undo this operation.  When you delete a file, you permanently remove all of its records.

To delete a Quicken file:

1.	In the File Name box, enter the name of the file.  Include the directory path if the file is not in the directory where you installed Quicken.  To display the files in a particular directory, double-click the directory name in the Directories list.  To select a particular file, click its name in the list under the File Name box.

2.	Click OK.  The Deleting File window appears:

•	To cancel the delete, click Cancel.

•	To confirm that you want to delete the file, type YES, then click OK.


Rename File window
Rename Quicken File

This is where you rename a Quicken file.

To rename a Quicken file:

1.	Double-click a directory name in the Directories list to display the files in a particular directory.

2.	Click on the file's name in the list under the File Name box.  If you already know the name and location of the file, you can type the path and file name directly into the File Name box.

3.	Enter the new name in the box under New Name for Quicken File.  The new name must be eight characters or less (it must meet the requirements for a DOS filename).  Do not include a filename extension.

4.	Click OK.


Select Backup Drive & Select Drive to Restore From windows
Select Backup Drive

This where you select the file and disk drive for a backup.  For some tips on backing up your data, click here.

If you are backing up to a floppy disk, place a formatted disk in a drive.  If you are using a disk you have previously used to back up your Quicken data, Quicken will overwrite any files with the same name.

To complete the window:

•	Select Current File or Select From List, enter a drive letter, then click OK.

What you see

Current File

Select From List

Backup Drive


Current File

If you select this option, Quicken backs up the current file.


Select From list

If you select this option, you can select a file to back up from the list.


Backup Drive

Select a disk drive to back up to.


Restore File window
Restore Quicken File

This where you select the file you want to restore.

To restore a Quicken file:

1.	Double-click a directory name in the Directories list to display the files in a particular directory.

2.	Click on the file's name in the list under the File Name box.  If you already know the name and location of the file, you can type the path and file name directly into the File Name box.

3.	Click OK.

How to...

Back up a Quicken file

Change the frequency of automatic backups

Why does Quicken create a BACKUP directory?


Year End Copy window
Year-End Copy

This is where you save an archive file containing last year's transactions, or create a new-year file with last year's transactions removed.

To save an archive file (containing only last year's transactions):

•	Select Archive, then click OK.

To create a new-year file (with last year's transactions removed):

•	Select Start New Year, then click OK.

What you see

Archive

Start New Year


Archive

Archive saves a file containing only last year's transactions. The current file remains intact.


Start New Year

Start New Year saves the current file under a different name, then removes last year's transactions from the current file.


Start New Year window
Start New Year

This is where you create a new-year file by removing last year's cleared noninvestment transactions from the current file.

The new-year file retains all investment transactions and any prior uncleared transactions.  Quicken saves a complete copy of the current file (under a different name) before removing the transactions from last year.

To create a new-year file:

•	Complete the window, then click OK.

What you see

Copy All Transactions to File

Delete Transactions From Current File Older Than

Move Current File to


Start New Year window (IntelliCharge)
Start New Year

This is where you create a new-year file by removing last year's cleared noninvestment transactions from the current file.

The new-year file retains all investment transactions and any prior uncleared transactions.  Quicken saves a complete copy of the current file before removing the transactions from last year.

To create a new-year file:

•	Complete the window, then click OK.

What you see

Copy All Transactions to File

Delete Transactions From Current File Older Than

Move Current File to

Note

IntelliCharge learns how you prefer to categorize your transactions by looking at how you categorized previous transactions with the same payee name.  Because of this, when you remove the bulk of the transactions from your account by using the Start Year End function, you may also lose the "intelligent" part of IntelliCharge.


Copy All Transactions to File

Enter the name of a DOS file to copy your current file to.  The name must meet the requirements for an eight-character DOS file name, without an extension.


Delete Transactions From Current File Older Than

Enter the date prior to which all cleared noninvestment transactions are to be removed from the current file.  The preset date is the first day of the current year.

The new-year file you create retains all investment transactions and any prior uncleared transactions.


Move Current File to

Quicken saves a complete copy of the current file before removing the old transactions.

You can change the preset drive and directory if you don't want to move the file to this location.


Archive File window
Archive File

Saves a copy of your Quicken file with last year's transactions from the current file. Your current file remains intact.

To save an archive file:

•	Enter a name for it and click OK.

What you see

Archive Old Quicken data to

Location of Archive File

Archive Transactions Prior to and Including


Archive Old Quicken data to

Quicken appends a two-digit year designation to the current filename. If the filename you enter is longer than six characters, Quicken shortens it to six to append the year designation. For example, if you enter HOME, the filename becomes HOME94, but if you enter BUSINESS, the filename becomes BUSINE94 (assuming last year was 1994).


Location of Archive File

You can change the default drive and directory for Quicken to copy the archive file.


Archive Transactions Prior to and Including

By default, Quicken archives transactions through the last day of the previous year.


File Copied Successfully window
File Copied Successfully

Your file has been copied.  This is where you reload the original Quicken file or the copy of it you just made.

To reload the original file:

•	Select Reload original file, then click OK.

To load the copy you just made:

•	Select Load new copy, then click OK.


(Archive) File Copied Successfully window
File Copied Successfully

This is where you reload the original Quicken file or the archive copy of it you just made.

To reload the original file:

•	Select Use current file, then click OK.  You might do this if you made a copy of the file for someone else (perhaps your accountant) or plan to put the copy away for safekeeping.

To load the archive copy you just made:

•	Select Use archive file, then click OK.  You might do this if the new copy contains only recent data and you want to use the new, clean copy for this year.


(New Year) File Copied Successfully window
File Copied Successfully

This is where you reload the old Quicken file or the new-year file you just created.

To reload the original file:

•	Select Use old file, then click OK.

To load the new-year file you just made:

•	Select Use file for new year, then click OK.


Set Up Password window
Set Up Password

This is where you provide a file password for the current file.

To provide a password for the current file:

•	Enter a password, then click OK.  Quicken asks you to confirm the password by typing it again.

What you see

Password


Password

You can type up to 16 characters, including spaces. Upper- and lower-case characters are treated the same.


Change Password window
Change Password

This is where you changes or remove the file password for the current file.

To change the password:

•	Enter the old password, enter the new password, then click OK.  Quicken asks you to confirm the password by entering it again.

To remove the password:

•	Enter the old password (leave the New Password box blank), then click OK.


Password to Modify Existing Transactions window
Password to Modify Existing Transactions

This is where you provide a transaction password for the current file.

To provide a transaction password:

•	Enter a password and a date, then click OK.  Quicken asks you to confirm the password by entering it again.

What you see

Password

Required For Dates Through


Required For Dates Through

The password will be required before changes can be made to any transaction dated on or before this date.


Change Transaction Password window
Change Transaction Password

This is where you change or remove the transaction password for the current file.  The change can be made by entering a new password or changing the date of the last transaction for which the password is required.

To change the password:

•	Enter the old password, make the change, then click OK.  After you click OK, Quicken asks you to confirm the change by entering your new password again. If you changed the date but not the password, enter your old password again.

To remove the password:

•	Enter the old password (leave the New Password box blank), then click OK.


Confirm Password window
Confirm Password

This is where you confirm the password you just typed.

To confirm the password:

•	Enter it again, then click OK.


Password Required window
Quicken Password

The file or transaction you are about to access requires a password.

To supply a password:

•	Enter it, then click OK.


Back Up File window
Back Up Quicken File

This is where you select the file you want to back up.

To select the file you want to back up:

1.	Double-click a directory name in the Directories list to display the files in a particular directory.

2.	Click on the file's name in the list under the File Name box.  If you already know the name and location of the file, you can type the path and file name directly into the File Name box.


Backup Directory window
Backup Directory

This is where you specify a directory on your hard disk for the backup file.  If you don't specify a subdirectory, Quicken copies the backup file in the root directory of the backup drive.  For some tips on backing up your data, click here.

To specify a backup directory:

•	Enter the directory path, then click OK.


Converting Quicken 3 and Quicken 4 files
Convert Quicken 3 and Quicken 4 files

Important

When you convert a file, you will no longer be able to use it from Quicken 3 or 4.  The steps below give you the option of backing up the file before the conversion occurs.

If you have Quicken 5, 6, or 7 files, you do not have to complete this conversion process.  See instead:  Opening a Quicken file.

To convert Quicken 3 and Quicken 4 files:

1.	From the File menu, choose Open.

2.	In the File Name box, enter the name of the file.  Include the directory path if the file is not in the directory where you installed Quicken.  To display the files in a particular directory, double-click the directory name in the Directories list.  To select a particular file, click its name in the list under the File Name box.

3.	Click OK.

4.	If you want Quicken to make a backup copy of the file so that you can continue to use it in Quicken 3 or 4, do the following:

a.	Click Backup.

b.	Enter the drive of the backup disk and click OK.

c.	Click OK when the "File backed up successfully" message appears.

d.	Click OK again when the note about categories appears.

5.	If you don't need a backup copy of the file, do the following:

a.	Click Update.

b.	Type YES and click OK to indicate that you want to change the format of the file.

c.	Click OK when the note about categories appears.

Note

By default, Quicken for Windows is set for automatic memorizing and recalling of checks and noninvestment transactions.  When you open a Quicken 3 or 4 file in Quicken for Windows, this default setting is changed.  This lets you start using Quicken for Windows on more familiar ground.


About to update data

The file you are opening is either a Quicken 3 or a Quicken 4 file.  Before you can use this file in Quicken for Windows, Quicken must convert it to a different format.

Once the file has been converted, you won't be able to use it from Quicken 3 or Quicken 4.  If you would like, you can have Quicken create a backup copy of the file before it performs the conversion.

To create a backup copy:

•	Click Back Up.  You will be able to use the backup copy from Quicken 3 or Quicken 4.

To convert the file with no backup:

•	Click Update.


Current file too large (window)
Current file too large for a single backup disk

The file you are backing up is too large to fit on the disk you inserted.  This window gives you two ways to complete the backup.  You can:

Start over

To do this, click "Insert another disk."  Then replace the original disk with one that has more unused space and click OK.  If it can, Quicken backs up the entire file on the new disk.

Continue

To do this, click "Back up onto multiple disks."  Then replace the original disk with a second disk and click OK.  Quicken backs up the remainder of the file, placing it on the second disk.  The result is that the backup file spans both disks.


Rebuilding a damaged QMT file
Rebuild a damaged QMT file

Follow the procedures outlined below to rebuild your QMT file.  If you have questions, call Intuit Technical Support.  For a complete list of Intuit phone numbers, click here.

To rebuild your QMT file:

Step One:	Find the name of your Quicken file and its location.

Step Two:	Copy the Rebuild utility to your Quicken directory.

Step Three:	Run Rebuild and restart Quicken with your new data file.

Step Four:	Check the new file.


Rebuilding a damaged QMT file
Rebuild a damaged QMT file

Follow the procedures outlined below to rebuild your QMT file.  If you have questions, call Intuit Technical Support.  For a complete list of Intuit phone numbers, click here.

To rebuild your QMT file:

Step One:	Find the name of your Quicken file and its location.

1.	Start Quicken.  The name of your Quicken data file is in the window title bar, following the words "Quicken 4 for Windows." In the following example, the name of the data file is QDATA:

Quicken 4 for Windows - QDATA

2.	Write down the name of your file on a piece of paper.

3.	From the File menu, choose Open.  Quicken displays the Open Quicken File window.

4.	Look in the middle of the window, just below the word "Directories." Quicken displays the drive and directories containing your Quicken data. Write down the name of the drive and directories on a piece of paper.   For example, if you've used the preset names, the drive and directory names are c:\QUICKENW\QDATA

5.	Click OK.

6.	Exit Quicken, then exit Windows.

Step Two:	Copy the Rebuild utility to your Quicken directory.

Step Three:	Run Rebuild and restart Quicken with your new data file.

Step Four:	Check the new file.


Rebuilding a damaged QMT file
Rebuild a damaged QMT file

Follow the procedures outlined below to rebuild your QMT file.  If you have questions, call Intuit Technical Support.  For a complete list of Intuit phone numbers, click here.

To rebuild your QMT file:

Step One:	Find the name of your Quicken file and its location.

Step Two:	Copy the Rebuild utility to your Quicken directory.

To rebuild your Quicken data files, the data files and the Rebuild utility must be located in the same subdirectory.

1.	At the DOS prompt, change to your Quicken directory.  For example, if your Quicken data is located in c:\QUICKENW, type cd \quickenw

(This is the preset directory. If your Quicken files are located in a different directory, type in the correct drive and directory names.)

2.	If your Quicken data isn't located in the preset QUICKENW directory, use the DOS copy command to copy Rebuild to your Quicken directory.  For example, if your directory is named checking, type copy rebuild.exe c:\checking

3.	Press Enter.

4.	Use the DOS copy command to make a copy of your Quicken data.  For example, if your Quicken data file is named QDATA, type: copy QDATA.*  NEWDATA.*

Step Three:	Run Rebuild and restart Quicken with your new data file.

Step Four:	Check the new file.


Running the Rebuild utility
Rebuild a damaged QMT file

Follow the procedures outlined below to rebuild your QMT file.  If you have questions, call Intuit Technical Support.  For a complete list of Intuit phone numbers, click here.

To rebuild your QMT file:

Step One:	Find the name of your Quicken file and its location.

Step Two:	Copy the Rebuild utility to your Quicken directory.

Step Three:	Run Rebuild and restart Quicken with your new data file.

1.	Run the Rebuild utility on the copy of your Quicken data.  If you copied your Quicken data into a file named NEWDATA, you would type: rebuild newdata

2.	Press Enter.  Quicken rebuilds your file.  If the rebuild succeeds, you'll see this message:  REBUILD COMPLETE

If the rebuild does not succeed, call Technical Support.

3.	Start Quicken. Be sure to hold down the CTRL key while you double-click the Quicken icon.  This action will keep Quicken from opening your damaged file.

4.	From the File menu, choose Open.  Quicken displays the Open Quicken File window.

5.	Double-click the name of the new Quicken data file in the File Name list box. (In our example, the filename is NEWDATA.)

6.	Review the file for any problems.

7.	If you don't detect any problems, copy the file. (From the File menu choose File Operations. Then choose Copy.)  The Copy File window appears.

8.	Enter the new name and check the date range to make sure that it covers all your transactions.

9.	Click OK.  Quicken creates a new copy of your file.

10.	Choose the option to load the new copy.

Step Four:	Check the new file.


Check the new file
Rebuild a damaged QMT file

Follow the procedures outlined below to rebuild your QMT file.  If you have questions, call Intuit Technical Support.  For a complete list of Intuit phone numbers, click here.

To rebuild your QMT file:

Step One:	Find the name of your Quicken file and its location.

Step Two:	Copy the Rebuild utility to your Quicken directory.

Step Three:	Run Rebuild and restart Quicken with your new data file.

Step Four:	Check the new file.

1.	After the file has been rebuilt, open it and check the Category & Transfer list for any categories like CAT0000, CAT0001, etc.

2.	If any are found, run an Itemized Category Report for the date range covered in the register.  Look for CAT0000.  What name was used for this category?  Edit CAT0000 and change its name back to the old category name.  Change any other "CATnnnn" entries until they are all corrected.


Automatic backup of file
Automatic backup

Quicken regularly prompts you to back up the current file when you exit the program.  Backing up your Quicken data is one of the most important things you can do to help prevent the loss of this important information.  For some tips on backing up your data, click here.

How to...

Change the frequency of automatic backups

Back up a Quicken file whenever you want


Changing the frequency of automatic backups
Change the frequency of automatic backups

Because your Quicken data is so important, Quicken regularly prompts you to back up the current file when you exit the program.  For some tips on backing up your data, click here.

To change how often Quicken prompts you to backup:

1.	Quit Quicken.

2.	From the Windows Program Manager File menu, choose Run.

3.	On the command line, type NOTEPAD, then click OK.

4.	From the Notepad File menu, choose Open.

5.	Open the QUICKEN.INI file.  It's located in your WINDOWS directory.

Include the directory path if the file is not in the currently displayed directory.  For example, c:\windows\quicken.ini

To display the files in a particular directory, double-click the directory name in the Directories list.  To select a particular file, click its name in the list under the File Name box.

6.	Locate the AutoBackup line in the QUICKEN.INI file.  The number following the equal (=) sign indicates how often Quicken will prompt you to backup your data.  For example, a 3 means that you'll be prompted to back up every third time you quit Quicken; a 7 means every seventh time.

7.	Change the AutoBackup number to whatever you would like.  If you change the number to 1, Quicken will prompt you to back up every time you exit the program; if you change the number to 0, Quicken will never prompt you to back up.

8.	From the Notepad File menu, choose Save.

9.	Quit the Windows Notepad, then restart Quicken.

How to...

Back up a Quicken file whenever you want

Common Question:

Why does Quicken create a BACKUP directory?


Backup Tips

We recommend a backup as often as there is new data added to your files.

Some people use a two disk method where they backup to disk 1, and the next time to disk 2, and rotate the sequence so that neither disk is never more than one backup behind the current data.

We recommend that you back up your data to a floppy disk rather than a hard disk.  Although they have lots of room, hard disks can fail.


Why does Quicken create a BACKUP directory?

Because your Quicken data is so important, every seven days Quicken makes a copy of your current file.  It places this copy in a subdirectory named BACKUP in the directory where you keep your Quicken data files.  If the BACKUP directory doesn't exist, Quicken creates it.

Quicken keeps five historical copies of your data in the BACKUP directory.  If you want to change the number of copies Quicken keeps in the BACKUP directory, or turn the feature off completely, see below.

What happens

Each time Quicken copies your current file, it renames the historical copies as follows:

Original file name...	Copied file name...
MYFILE	MYFILE1 (always the most recent file)
	MYFILE2 (renamed MYFILE1)
	MYFILE3 (renamed MYFILE2)
	MYFILE4 (renamed MYFILE3)
	MYFILE5 (renamed MYFILE4)
To change the number of copies Quicken keeps in the BACKUP directory:

1.	Quit Quicken.

2.	From the Windows Program Manager File menu, choose Run.

3.	On the command line, type NOTEPAD, then click OK.

4.	From the Notepad File menu, choose Open.

5.	Open the QUICKEN.INI file.  It's located in your WINDOWS directory.

Include the directory path if the file is not in the currently displayed directory.  For example, c:\windows\quicken.ini

To display the files in a particular directory, double-click the directory name in the Directories list.  To select a particular file, click its name in the list under the File Name box.

6.	Locate the AutoCopy line in the QUICKEN.INI file.  The number following the equal (=) sign indicates how many copies of your data Quicken will keep in the BACKUP directory.

7.	Change the AutoCopy number to a value from 0 to 9.  If you change the number to 0, Quicken will never copy your data to the BACKUP directory.

8.	From the Notepad File menu, choose Save.

9.	Quit the Windows Notepad, then restart Quicken.


Verify different backup window
Caution! You cannot undo this operation!

To cancel this operation:

•	Click Cancel.

To confirm this operation:

•	Type YES, then click OK.


Verify more recent backup window
Caution! You cannot undo this operation!

You are about to copy over (and erase) a backup copy of the current file that is more recent than the current file itself.  Perhaps you entered transactions, or otherwise made changes to the backup file inadvertently.

To cancel this operation:

•	Click Cancel.

To copy over (and erase) the newer backup:

•	Type YES to confirm the operation, then click OK.


*Forecasting your financial future (contents)
Forecasting your financial future

To search for a Help topic, click the Search button above.

Overview

Click here

How to...

Create a forecast

Create a forecast from your budget

Change a forecast

Compare different forecast scenarios

Print a forecast

Common Questions

Where do the amounts in my forecast come from?

What's the difference between forecasting and budgeting?

What's the difference between forecasting and the account balances graph?

Quick Tip

Creating a budget from your forecast


Change a forecast

Change your forecast amounts

Change the forecast time period

Select accounts for your forecast

Create a new forecast item

Change an Estimated Item to a Known Item

Change a Known Item to an Estimated Item

Delete a forecast item


Compare different forecast scenarios

Create multiple forecast scenarios

Compare two forecast scenarios

Save a forecast projection line


Forecasting your financial future
Overview: Forecasting your financial future

Forecasting projects forward the balances of your accounts, based on Known Items (scheduled transactions) and Estimated Items (estimated average amounts).  Forecasting doesn't affect your real data, so use it to experiment with different possibilities.

Use forecasting to:

•	See when you'll be able to afford the new jacuzzi, motorbike, or skiing trip.

•	Plan your spending and map out your savings more clearly.

•	Experiment with Quicken's projections to do "what-if" planning.  For example, you can alter the rent amount and see what happens to your account balance over the next six months, to find out what level of rent you can afford.

•	Compare different possible outcomes by creating multiple forecast scenarios.

How to...

Create a forecast

Create a forecast from your budget

Change a forecast

Compare different forecast scenarios


Difference between forecasting and budgeting
 What's the difference between forecasting and budgeting?

Forecasting and budgeting are two of Quicken's tools for planning your spending.  Budgeting allows you to create budget amounts, and then track how well you are staying within those amounts.  Forecasting allows you to project your cash flow for the future, based on scheduled transactions and estimated amounts.

You can use your budget to create a forecast, and you can also use your forecast to create a budget.


Difference between forecasting and account balances graph
 What's the difference between forecasting and the account balances graph?

The account balances graph on the Financial Calendar is similar to forecasting in that it can help you predict your cash flow.  However, the account balances graph includes only your actual scheduled transactions, postdated transactions, and transactions in your register.  Forecasting data can include those things, plus your estimated average amounts.

Use forecasting to do long-term, "what-if" planning, such as determining what would happen to your finances if you took out a car loan.  Use the account balances graph to answer short-term cash flow questions, such as "Is my checking account in danger of being overdrawn this month?"


Where do the amounts in my forecast come from?

If you use Autocreate to create your forecast, you may not know where all the amounts come from.

Forecasting data includes Income and Expense Items, which are divided into Known Items and Estimated Items.

•	Known Items are regularly scheduled items that occur on a particular date.  When you create a forecast automatically, Quicken gets them from your Scheduled Transactions list and from regularly occurring transactions in your register.

•	Estimated Items are average amounts spread out over a period of time.  When you create a forecast automatically, Quicken gets them from either your budget or your register.  If you have a Known Item with a certain category, Quicken won't create an Estimated Item for that category, even if it occurs in your budget or register.

Quicken will not get these amounts from your data unless your click Create in the Forecasting window.


Regularly occurring transactions

Quicken creates Known Items for any transactions in your register that:

•	Occur at least three times within 120 days of today's date

•	Have the same payee, category, and account

•	Occur about every two weeks (within two days) or every month (within four days).


Known Items

Known Items are regularly scheduled items that occur on a particular date.  When you create a forecast automatically, Quicken gets them from your Scheduled Transactions list and from regularly occurring transactions in your register.

You can also create and change Known Items manually.


Estimated Items

Estimated Items are average amounts spread out over a period of time.  When you create a forecast automatically, Quicken gets them from either your budget or your register .

You can also create and change Estimated Items manually.


Comparing two forecast scenarios

You can create different scenarios and then compare them.

To compare two scenarios:

1.	Create the two scenarios and save them.

2.	Display the first scenario.

3.	Click Scenario.

4.	Select Compare Current Scenario with Display Options.

5.	Select the second scenario from the drop-down list.

6.	Click Done.

Quicken displays the second scenario in green, on top of the first scenario.


Creating a forecast from a budget
Creating a forecast from your budget

To create a forecast from your budget:

1.	From the Plan menu, choose Forecasting.  The Forecasting window appears.

2.	Click Create.  The Automatically Create Forecast window appears.

3.	Click Advanced.

4.	Click from Budget Data under Create Estimated Amounts

5.	Click Done.

6.	Click OK to create the forecast.

Note

If you later make changes to your budget, the changes will not affect Forecasting unless you click Create again.


Creating a forecast
Create a forecast

Quicken can automatically create forecast amounts for you from information already entered.  After you automatically create amounts, check the amounts to make sure they are reasonable for your financial situation, and change them if necessary.

To create a forecast:

1.	From the Plan menu, choose Forecasting.  The Forecasting window appears.

2.	Click Create.  The Automatically Create Forecast window appears.

3.	If necessary, change the date range you want Quicken to look in for your forecast amounts.

4.	(Optional) Click Advanced to change the Advanced AutoCreate options.

You can choose whether you want Quicken to create only Known Items, only Estimated Items, or both.  You can also choose whether you want Quicken to get Estimated Items from your register, or from your budget.  Click Accounts or Categories to include only certain accounts and categories in your forecast.

5.	Click OK to create the forecast.

Note

If you later make changes to your register, budget, or Scheduled Transaction List, the changes will not affect Forecasting unless you click Create again.

Common Question

Where do the amounts in my forecast come from?


Change the forecast time period

You can display your forecast for the periods of one month, six months, one year, or two years.

To change the forecast time period:

1.	From the Plan menu, choose Forecasting.  The Forecasting window appears.

2.	Select a date range from the drop-down list at the bottom of the forecasting graph.

3.	Click << or >> to see the previous or next time period.


Selecting accounts for your forecast graph
Select accounts for your forecast

You can select which account balances you want to include in your forecast.

If you select accounts before you automatically create your forecast, Quicken looks for transactions only in those accounts.  However, changing the accounts selected after you create a forecast does not affect which items are included in your forecast.

To select the accounts for your forecast:

1.	Click Accounts on the Forecasting button bar.

2.	Mark the accounts to include:

To mark or unmark an account, click it, or select it and then press the spacebar.  Click Mark All or Clear All to mark or clear all accounts.

3.	Click OK.


Changing your forecast amounts
Change your forecast amounts

To change your forecast amounts:

1.	Click the Income button at the lower right of the main Forecasting window to display income amounts, or click the Expense button to display expense amounts.

2.	Click in the Amount field of the item you want to change.

3.	To change the amount, type directly in this field.

4.	To change other information, click Edit.

5.	(Optional) Change the description, frequency, or date.

6.	(Optional)  Click Average Amount to make this an Estimated Item, or click Next Scheduled to make this a Known Item.

5.	(Optional) Click More to change the category or number of payments.

Include category information for Estimated Items if you want use the Track feature to create a budget from your forecast.

Include category information for Known Items to avoid counting amounts twice when you create a forecast automatically: if a Known Item has a category assigned to it, then an Estimated Item will not be created for that category, even if it is in your budget or register.

6.	Click OK to get back to the Income or Expense Items window, and then click Done.

Note

Changing forecast amounts does not affect your real data.


Changing an Estimated Item to a Known Item
Change an Estimated Item to a Known Item

Forecasting data includes Income and Expense Items, which are divided into Known Items and Estimated Items.

To change an Estimated Item to a Known Item:

1.	Click the Income button at the lower right of the main Forecasting window to display income amounts, or click the Expense button to display expense amounts.

2.	Click in the Amount field of the item you want to change.

3.	Click Edit.

4.	Click Next Scheduled to make this a Known Item, and select a date from the drop-down list.

5.	Click OK to get back to the Income or Expense Items window, and then click Done.


Changing a Known Item to an Estimated Item
Change a Known Item to an Estimated Item

Forecasting data includes Income and Expense Items, which are divided into Known Items and Estimated Items.

To change a Known Item to an Estimated Item:

1.	Click the Income button at the lower right of the main Forecasting window to display income amounts, or click the Expense button to display expense amounts.

2.	Click in the Amount field of the item you want to change.

3.	Click Edit.

4.	Click Average Amount to make this an Estimated Item.

5.	Click OK to get back to the Income or Expense Items window, and then click Done.


Creating a new forecast item
Create a new forecast item

Forecasting data includes Income and Expense Items, which are divided into Known Items and Estimated Items.

To manually add a forecast amount:

1.	To add an income item, click the Income button in the Forecasting window.  To add an expense item, click the Expense button, then click New.  Or, click the grey line below the forecasting graph.

2.	Enter a description, amount, and frequency.

3.	Select an Item Date option.

To create a Known Item, select Next Scheduled Date.  To create an Estimated Item, select Average Amount.

4.	Click More to enter a category or number of payments.  (Category information is only necessary if you want to use your forecast to create a budget, or to avoid counting amounts twice if you create new Estimated Items from your budget or your register.)

5.	Click OK.  Quicken adds the new item to your forecast.

Note

Remember that items created here are for planning only and are never actually entered in your register.


Deleting a forecast item
Delete a forecast item

To delete a forecast amount:

1.	From the main Forecasting window, click the Income button or the Expense button.

2.	Select the item you want to delete by clicking in the Amount column.

3.	Click Delete.

Quicken deletes the item from Forecasting.  Deleting an item here does not affect any other part of Quicken, even if you created the item automatically from real data.


Creating multiple forecast scenarios
Create multiple forecast scenarios

You can create forecast scenarios with different amounts.  This lets you see the effects of different possibilities.

To save a scenario:

1.	Create the forecast amounts you want.

2.	Click Scenario on the Forecasting button bar.

3.	Click New.

4.	Enter a name for the scenario and click OK.

To edit a scenario name:

1.	Click Scenario on the Forecasting button bar.

2.	Select the scenario you want to rename, and then click Edit.

3.	Enter the new name and click OK.

To delete a scenario:

1.	Click Scenario on the Forecasting button bar.

2.	Select the scenario you want to delete.

3.	Click Delete.


Saving a forecast projection line
Save a forecast projection line

As well as saving different scenarios, you can save a forecast graph so that you can:

•	Compare what has actually happened to what you thought was going to happen

•	Compare two scenarios, so that you can do "what-if" analysis.

To save a projection:

1.	With the forecast displayed, click Scenario.

2.	Under Display Options, select Show how Forecast looked on.

3.	Click Update.  This updates the saved projection line to the current graph.

Quicken saves the projection.  When you click Done, notice the additional line on the graph -- this is your saved projection.  To get rid of the line from your graph, click Scenario, select Current Scenario only under Display Options, and click Done.

How to...

Compare two scenarios


Creating a budget from a forecast
Create a budget from your forecast

Once you've set up a forecast that you like, you can use the Estimated Items to create a budget.  Do this if you want to know what kind of budget you'll have to stick to in order to achieve your forecast.

Caution...

Creating a budget from your forecast overwrites your current budget.

To create a budget from your forecast:

1.	With the forecast displayed, click Track.

2.	Click OK to overwrite your current budget.

3.	Assign categories to all your estimated forecast items.

If not all items have categories assigned to them, Quicken displays the Assign Categories window. To assign a category to an item, select the item, and then select a category from the drop-down list.  Click OK when you're done.

You can also assign categories to forecast items by clicking More from the Edit Item window.

4.	If you have created a budget from your forecast before, Quicken asks if you want to replace the existing Forecast Snapshot page.  Click Yes to replace the page, or click No to save the old page.

4.	Click Done to return to the Forecasting window, or click Snapshot to see the Snapshot page Quicken created for your six biggest budget goals.


Automatically Create Forecast window
Automatically Create Forecast

This is where you create a forecast from data that you have already entered in Quicken.

Quicken creates Known Items from your Scheduled Transaction list and your register, and Estimated Items. from your register or your budget.  If Quicken finds a category in your Scheduled Transaction list, it will create a Known Item for it, but not an Estimated Item, even if the category appears in your budget or register.  This way, Quicken won't count amounts twice.

After Quicken creates your forecast automatically, check it to make sure the amounts are realistic and that all the amounts you want to include are there.

If you later change amounts in your register, budget, or Scheduled Transaction List, the changes will not affect Forecasting unless you click Create again.

To automatically create a forecast:

1.	If necessary, change the date range you want Quicken to look in for your forecast amounts.

2.	Click OK to create the forecast.

What you see

Date Range to Read

Advanced


Date Range to Read

The date range that Quicken will look at for forecast amounts.


Advanced

Opens the Advanced AutoCreate window, where you can make changes to the way Quicken creates your forecast.


Advanced AutoCreate  window
Advanced AutoCreate

This window lets you make changes to the way Quicken creates your forecast.

To change the AutoCreate settings:

1.	Select a Forecast Items to Create option.

2.	Select a Create Estimated Amounts option.

3.	Click the Accounts and Categories buttons and make changes, as necessary.

What you see

Forecast Items to Create

Create Estimated Amounts

Accounts, Categories buttons


Forecast Items to Create

This option...	Does this...
Known Items (from Scheduled Txns)	Updates only income and expense Known Items from your Scheduled Transaction list.
Estimated Items	Updates only Estimated Items, from either your register or your budget.
Create Both	Create new Estimated and Known Items.


Create Estimated Amounts

Create Estimated Amounts...	Does this...
from Register	Gets the Estimated Items by looking back through your register and averaging what you've spent or earned in each category during the time period selected.
from Budget	Gets the Estimated Items from your budget.  Only use this option if you have already set up a budget.


Accounts, Categories buttons

This button...	Does this...
Accounts	Lets you select the accounts to create the forecast from.
Categories	Lets you select the categories Quicken will create Estimated Items from.


Create/Edit Item window
Create/Edit Item

This is where you create and edit your forecast items.  Note that changes made here don't affect your real data.

How to...

Create a new forecast item

What you see

Income Item / Expense Item

Description, Amount, Frequency

Item Date

More button


Income Item / Expense Item

Select Income Item to create a new income item, or to change the item you are editing to an income item.

Select Expense Item to create a new expense item, or to change the item you are editing to an expense item.


Description, Amount, Frequency

In this field...	Enter this...
Description	A name for the item, such as "Hawaii Vacation" or "Food"
Amount	The amount of the item
Frequency	A frequency selected from the drop-down list.


Item Date

This option...	Does this...
Average Amount	Enters the item as an Estimated amount, spread out over the entire period.
Next Scheduled Date	Enters the item as a Known (scheduled) amount on the date you select from the drop-down list.


More button

Opens the Edit Advanced Info window, where you can specify a category and the number of payments for this item.

Include category information for Estimated Items in order to create a budget from your forecast.

Include category information for Known Items to avoid counting amounts twice when you create a forecast automatically: if a Known Item has a category assigned to it, then an Estimated Item will not be created for that category, even if it is in your budget or register.


Edit Advanced Information window
Edit Advanced Info

To complete the window:

•	Select a category, enter the number or payments, and then click OK.

Include category information for Estimated Items in order to create a budget from your forecast.

Include category information for Known Items to avoid counting amounts twice when you create a forecast automatically: if a Known Item has a category assigned to it, then an Estimated Item will not be created for that category, even if it is in your budget or register.

What you see

Category (for tracking)

Number of Payments


Category (for tracking)

Select a category from the drop-down list.


Number of Payments

To make this payment (or deposit) an indefinite number of times, enter 999.  If you know exactly how many payments (or deposits) you'll be making, enter that number.


Manage Forecast Scenarios window
Manage Forecast Scenarios

Quicken lets you create different forecast scenarios and compare them.  You can also compare your current forecast to a past forecast.

How to...

Compare different forecast scenarios

What you see

Scenario Data

New, Edit, Delete buttons

Display Options

Update button


Scenario Data

Displays the name of the current forecast scenario.  To display a different scenario, select it from the drop-down list and click Done.


New, Edit, Delete buttons

This button...	Does this...
New	Creates a new forecast scenario using the current set of forecast data.
Edit	Lets you rename the selected scenario.
Delete	Deletes the selected scenario.


Display Options

This option...	Does this...
Current Scenario only	Displays only the current forecast scenario.
Show how Forecast looked on:	Displays the current scenario and the saved forecast graph from this date.
Compare Current Scenario with:	Displays the current scenario and the scenario selected in the drop-down list.


Update button

Updates the saved projection to the current date.


Create New Scenario window
Create New Scenario

To save the current forecast scenario:

•	Enter a name, then click OK.

What you see

Scenario Name

Copy Current Scenario


Scenario Name

Enter a name for the forecast scenario.


Copy Current Scenario

Select this option to create a new forecast scenario using the current set of forecast data.


Edit Scenario Name window
Edit Scenario Name

To change the name of the selected scenario:

•	Enter a new name, then click OK.

What you see

Scenario Name


Forecast Income/Expense Items window
Forecast Income or Expense Items

This window displays a list of your forecast items.  You can create, edit, and delete any of the forecast items, as necessary.

How to...

Create a new forecast item

Edit an existing item

Delete an item

Change an Estimated Item to a Known Item

Change a Known Item to an Estimated Item

What you see

Income/Expense Items

Known and Estimated Items

Average Monthly Income or Expense

New, Edit, Delete buttons


Income/Expense Items

Select Income Items to display income forecast items, or select Expense Items to display expense forecast items.


Known and Estimated Items

This is a list of all your forecast items.  Income and Expense Items are divided into Known and Estimated Items.  Known Items are regularly scheduled items that Quicken can get from your Scheduled Transaction List or from your register if you create your forecast automatically.  Estimated Items are average amounts that Quicken can get from either your register or your budget.  You can also add amounts for the purposes of forecasting only.

For each item, Quicken displays the description, amount, frequency, and next date (Known Items only).


Average Monthly Income or Expense

Displays your average monthly income or expense, based on the items in your forecast.

For each item, Quicken projects it forward for one year from today and divides by 12 to get the average monthly amount for that item.  The total Average Monthly Income or Expense is the sum of the average monthly amounts for all items.


New, Edit, Delete buttons

This button...	Does this...
New	Lets you create a new forecast item.
Edit	Lets you edit the selected item.
Delete	Deletes the selected item.


Forecasting window

For an overview...

Click here

How to...

Create a forecast

Create a forecast from your budget

Change a forecast

Compare different forecast scenarios

Print a forecast

What you see

Forecasting button bar

Forecasting graph

Date Range field

<< and >> buttons

Events on Graph

Income and Expense


Forecasting Overview

Forecasting projects forward the balances of your accounts, based on Known Items (scheduled transactions) and Estimated Items (estimated average amounts).  Forecasting doesn't affect your real data, so use it to experiment with different possibilities.

Use forecasting to:

•	See when you'll be able to afford the new jacuzzi, motorbike, or skiing trip.

•	Plan your spending and map out your savings more clearly.

•	Experiment with Quicken's projections to do "what-if" planning.  For example, you can alter the rent amount and see what happens to your account balance over the next six months, to find out what level of rent you can afford.

•	Compare different possible outcomes by creating multiple forecast scenarios.


Forecasting button bar

This button...	Does this...
Scenario	Allows you to save different forecast scenarios, and to save the current projection line for comparison.
Accounts	Allows you to select which account balances to include in the graph.  Selecting different accounts does not affect which forecast items are included.
Create	Autocreates a forecast from data that you have already entered in Quicken.
Track	Creates a budget based on the Estimated Items in your forecast.
Close	Closes the Forecasting window.


Forecasting graph

The forecasting graph projects forward the balances of the accounts included in the forecast.  Projected future balances are shown in blue (positive) or red (negative), and past balances are shown in yellow.  To see the exact balance for a particular date, click and hold down the mouse button on the graph.

The green and red triangles at the bottom of the graph represent scheduled income and expense items in your forecast.  Click them to see the details.

To create a new item for your forecast, click the grey line below the graph.


Date Range field

Displays the date range for your forecasting graph.  You can forecast your financial state for the next month, six months, year, or two years.  To change the date range, select it from the drop-down list.


<< and >> buttons

Click << or >> to see the next or previous time period.


Events on Graph

You can display all your regularly scheduled events (Known Items) on the graph, or only annual and one-time events.  Forecast events show up as red and green triangles at the bottom of the graph.  If you are looking at a longer period, such as one year, you probably want to display only annual and one-time events.

Select Show All to display all events, or select Annual, One-Time to display only those.


Income and Expense

Displays your total forecast income and expense for the month, and your net savings.  The total income and expense amounts are monthly averages.

Click the Income or Expense buttons to see and edit the items that make up your forecast.


Assign Categories window
Assign Categories

Quicken displays this window if not all your forecast items have categories assigned to them.  Quicken can't create a budget amount for an item that doesn't have a category assigned to it.

To assign a category to a forecast item:

1.	Select the forecast item in the list on the left, then select a category for it from the drop-down list.

2.	When you are done assigning categories to forecast items, click OK.

What you see

Forecast items

Category

Assigned Category


Forecast items

Lists your estimated income and expense items, which make up your forecast.


Category

Displays the category assigned to each forecast item.


Assigned Category

Lists the categories that you can assign to your forecast items.


Created Budget window
Created Budget

A budget has been created from your Estimated Items.  Quicken has also created a Snapshot page displaying budget goals for your six biggest budget categories.

To display the newly created budget:

•	From the Plan menu, choose Budgeting.

To display the newly created Snapshot page:

•	Click Snapshot

How to...

Create a budget report

Graph your budget variance


Convert Quicken for Windows 3 Forecast window
Convert Forecast Data

If you used the Financial Planning Graph in Quicken 3 for Windows, Quicken can convert your data to Quicken 4 for Windows forecasting data.

To convert your forecasting data:

•	Click Use Previous to convert the data, or click Start Again to create your forecast from scratch.


Convert Quicken for DOS Forecast window
Convert Forecast Data

If you have forecasting data in Quicken 8 for DOS, Quicken can convert your data to Quicken 4 for Windows forecasting data.

To convert your forecasting data:

•	Click Use Previous to convert the data, or click Start Again to create your forecast from scratch.


Select Accounts to Include window
Select Accounts to Include

This is where you select which account balances you want to include in your graph.

If you select accounts before you automatically create your forecast, Quicken looks for transactions only in those accounts.  However, changing the accounts selected after you create a forecast does not affect which amounts are included in your forecast.

To select which account balances to include in your graph:

1.	Mark the accounts to include:

To mark or unmark an account, click it, or select it and then press the spacebar.  Click Mark All or Clear All to mark or clear all accounts.

2.	Click OK.


Overwrite existing budget window
Overwrite existing budget?

Quicken is about to create a budget based on your current forecast.

Click OK and Quicken will:

•	automatically create a budget based on the Estimated Items in your forecast

•	automatically create a Snapshot page to show you how well you are meeting your top budget goals

Caution...

Clicking OK in this window will overwrite your current budget.


Replace existing Snapshot page window
Replace existing Snapshot page?

If you click Yes, Quicken will create a new Snapshot page with your six biggest budget goals.

Click No to keep your existing Forecast Snapshot page.


	Glossary

A

401(k)

Account

Account selector

Accounts payable

Accounts receivable

Active window

Aligning checks

Amortization

Annuity

Archive

ASCII

Assets

Asset accounts

Autoconfigure

Average annual total return

Average cost per share

B

Backup

Balance

Billminder

Bond

Broker

Brokerage account

Budget report

C

Calculators (financial)

Capital

Capital gains distribution

Cash-basis accounting and accrual-basis accounting

Cash management account

Categorize

Category

Category & Transfer list

Certificate of deposit (CD)

Character

Characters per inch (cpi)

Chart of accounts

CheckFree

Class

Cleared item

Clipboard

Continuous-feed printer

Control box

Cost basis

Credit

Current account

Current file

D

Data disk

Debit

Deposit

Dialing prefix

Directory

Disk drive

Dividend

E

EGA

Electronic payment

Ending balance and current balance

Equity

Export

F

File

File password

Financial Calendar

Financial Calendar Notes

Find and replace

Forecasting

Forecasting scenarios

G

Ginnie Mae

Graph

Graph legend

H

HomeBase

I

Import

Individual Retirement Account (IRA)

Initialization string

IntelliCharge

Internal rate of return

Intuit online account

Intuit Marketplace

Investment account

Investment goal

K

Keogh

L

Liabilities

Liability account

M

Market value

Memo

Memorized transaction

Modem

Money market

Money market fund (money fund)

Monochrome

Mutual fund

N

Net savings

Net worth

Noninvestment account

O

Online account

Online account number

Online account password

Option

Options

Other and custom reports

P

Page-oriented printer

Partial page

Pathname

Payment

Percent unrealized gain or loss

Planning Graph

Port

Portfolio Price Update

Postdate

Progress Bar

Printer driver

Print to disk

Q

QIF file

Quicken file

QuickFill

QuickZoom

R

Realized gain or loss

Reconciled item

Reconciling

Record

Register

Reminders

Report printer

Reports

Reset string

Restore

Return on investment (ROI)

S

Savings goal account

Scenarios

Scheduled Transaction

Security

Security type

Snapshots

Speed key

Split

Standard checks

Start New Year

Stock

Subcategory

Subclass

Supercategory

Symbol

T

Ticker symbol

Transaction

Transaction group

Transaction password

Transfer

Treasury bill (T Bill)

U

Unit trust

Unrealized gain or loss

V

VGA

Voucher checks

W

Wallet checks


401(k) definition
401(k)

A retirement account arranged by an employer. Money is deducted from the employee's paycheck and reduces the employee's taxable income. The money you invest does not generate any taxable income as long as it is in the 401(k).


Account (definition)
Account

In Quicken, the term "account" refers to:

•	A bank account--checking, money market, or savings

•	A cash account, in which you record cash expenditures

•	A credit card account

•	An other asset account, in which you keep track of assets such as your home

•	An other liability account, in which you keep track of liabilities such as loans

•	An investment account, in which you keep track of investments such as mutual funds and securities.

Usually, you keep all your Quicken accounts in a single file.


Account selection bar (definition)
Account selector

A set of buttons representing each of your accounts which runs across the bottom of each account register. You can use these buttons to move between accounts.


Accounts payable (definition)
Accounts payable

Outstanding bills that are to be paid in the future.


Accounts receivable (definition)
Accounts receivable

Outstanding invoices for which payment has not been received.


Active window (definition)
Active window

The window that keystrokes and mouse actions apply to.  Its title bar is highlighted.


Aligning checks (definition)
Aligning Checks

Quicken provides tools to help align your checks. You can print a sample check by clicking Test at the Print Checks window. To correct alignment on the sample check, you can click Align to use the Coarse alignment or Fine alignment tools. Coarse alignment is used to make vertical adjustments to checks printed on continuous-feed printers. Fine alignment allows you to make adjustments on page-oriented or laser printers.


Amortization (definition)
Amortization

Division of a loan payment into principal and interest. As the balance (outstanding principal) declines, the amount of each payment that goes toward interest declines and the amount that goes toward principal increases.


Annuity (definition)
Annuity

An investment, often with an insurance company, that does not generate any taxable income as long as it is in the annuity. Fixed annuities guarantee a fixed rate of interest one year at a time (the rate varies from year to year). Variable annuities offer fluctuating interest. The insurance company may be investing your money in real estate or bonds or stocks.


Archive (definition)
Archive

To archive a backup copy of your Quicken file and keep working with your current file. The backup copy is sometimes called an "archive."


ASCII (definition)
ASCII

American Standard Code for Information Interchange. Set of standard character codes used by many computers. When you print to disk, Quicken puts the data onto the disk in ASCII format so it can be read by other programs, such as word processors.


Asset (definition)
Assets

Items that you own, such as your home, shares of stock, real estate, and other valuables.  When Quicken calculates your net worth, it counts your checking, cash, asset, and investment accounts as assets.


Asset accounts (definition)
Asset accounts

These are checking, savings, cash, money market, investment, and asset accounts.


Autoconfigure (definition)
Autoconfigure

The process by which Quicken automatically sets up your modem to use Intuit online services.  During Autoconfigure, Quicken queries your modem and makes the modem settings it determines are correct.  This process takes about 20 seconds.


Average annual total return (definition)
Average annual total return

Often called the internal rate of return (IRR), the average annual total return is a percentage equal to the interest rate on a bank account that would give you the same total return on your investment.  It takes into account money earned by the investment (interest, dividends, capital gains distributions) as well as changes in share price.  Since it is an annual rate, it acts like a bank interest rate that compounds annually.

For example>

The formula>


Average annual total return

For example

If you invest $10,000 and get an average annual total return of 12.0% over two years, you'd have $12,544 (an increase of $2544, or 25.4%) at the end of the two years.

Quicken displays the average annual total return in the investment performance report.  A negative value indicates a loss, which can be either paper or real.  If the return seems surprisingly high, it could be because you have set a short date range.

The formula>


Average annual total return

The formula Quicken uses is:


Average cost per share (definition)
Average cost per share

Equals the total cost of all shares of this security divided by the total number of shares. For example, if you own 52.5 shares of stock with a cost basis of $1251, the average cost per share is $1251 divided by 52.5 shares, or $23.83 per share. Quicken displays the average cost per share in the AVG COST column in the Portfolio View window.


Backup (definition)
Backup

A spare copy of a disk to be used in case of the accidental loss or destruction of the original disk. Quicken will help you make a backup copy of your data disk.


Balance (definition)
Balance

The difference between payments and deposits in an account (or the amount of money in your account). Quicken calculates your balance each time you record a transaction and displays your balance near the bottom of the Write Checks and Register windows.


Billminder (definition)
Billminder

A Quicken reminder program that reminds you (either at DOS boot time or Windows startup) of upcoming bills to pay, electronic payments to transmit, investment actions to take, and so on.


Bond (definition)
Bond

Issued by a company or a government unit (state, US, water district, and so on) that borrows your money and pays you interest at a fixed rate. Bonds have a stated redemption date, although many bonds can be redeemed earlier by the issuer. After a bond is issued, its current value depends on current interest rates offered by new bonds. (If new bonds are paying higher interest, the value of the old bond drops, and vice versa.)


Broker (definition)
Broker

A person who sells securities to the public.


Brokerage account (definition)
Brokerage account

An account that contains securities you bought through a broker. The broker keeps track of the securities and sends you a statement.


Budget report (definition)
Budget report

A report comparing planned income and expense with actual income and expense.


Calculators (definition)
Calculators (financial)

Quicken's self-contained planning tools for trying out different variations of your financial future.

Quicken also provides a pop-up calculator in any field in which you enter an amount.  To use the pop-up calculator, click the calculator button in the amount field.


Capital (definition)
Capital

Same as principal. Return of capital is a term used by unit trusts for payments of principal.


Capital gains distribution (definition)
Capital gains distributions

Money paid to shareholders by a mutual fund. It comes from sales by the fund of some of its underlying securities for more than their cost. The distributions you receive are a distribution of the fund's own capital gains.


Cash-basis accounting vs. accrual-basis accounting (definition)
Cash-basis accounting and accrual-basis accounting

In cash-basis accounting, you recognize an expense when you pay a bill. You recognize an item of income when you receive payment from a customer.

In accrual-basis accounting, you recognize an expense when you incur the obligation for which you will pay a bill. You recognize an item of income when you bill the customer.


Cash management account (definition)
Cash management account

An account set up by a broker that combines a money market fund with a brokerage account. That is, you can write checks on the cash in the account.  This type of account is usually set up as a Quicken bank account.


Categorize (definition)
Categorize

To assign a transaction to an income or expense category.


Category (definition)
Category

A specific way of identifying your transactions by income and expense item; for example, Utilities, Groceries, and Salary. You can then use Quicken to create reports and graphs of various aspects of your finances.  More detail>


Category & Transfer list (definition)
Category & Transfer list

A list of all the income and expense categories and transfer account names for the current Quicken file.


Certificate of Deposit (definition)
Certificate of deposit (CD)

Issued by a bank that borrows your money for a specified time and pays you interest at a fixed rate. The value does not fluctuate, but you pay penalties if you redeem it before its due date.


Character (definition)
Characters

Any letter, numeral, punctuation mark, or other symbol (such as a dollar sign or asterisk) that a computer can read, write, and record.


Characters per inch (definition)
Characters per inch (CPI)

The number of characters of type a printer prints per inch. Most printers print at either 10, 12, or 17 (compressed mode) characters per inch. Also called "pitch."


Chart of accounts (definition)
Chart of accounts

Balance sheet accounts (your business assets, liabilities, and capital) are equivalent to Quicken bank, cash, credit card, other asset, other liability, and investment accounts.

Income statement accounts (your business revenue and expenses) are equivalent to Quicken income and expense categories.  Income statement accounts are also called profit and loss accounts.

For more information, contact Intuit Direct Sales and ask for a copy of the Quicken Business User's Guide.  Click here for the phone number.


CheckFree (definition)
CheckFree

An electronic bill-paying service.


Class (definition)
Class

Classes are another way of labeling your transactions in Quicken.  You use classes to specify where, to what, or to whom your transactions apply.

For example, classes let you use your personal checking account for business and personal expenses.  Leave your personal transactions unclassified, but assign the class name "Business" to your business transactions.

More about...

Classes


Cleared item (definition)
Cleared item

Any transaction (payment, charge, or deposit) that has been processed by the bank. Cleared items appear on your monthly bank statement and credit card statement. When you balance your Quicken bank account, you mark cleared items in the Cleared (Clr) column of the register.


Clipboard (definition)
Clipboard

A temporary storage area in memory, used to transfer information.  You can cut or copy information onto the Clipboard and then paste it into another document or application.


Continuous-feed printer (definition)
Continuous-feed printer

A printer that prints on a continuous sheet of paper.  A tractor mechanism engages the holes along the edge of the sheet and pulls the paper through the printer.  You tear off individual pages as the paper comes out of the printer.

Most dot matrix printers are continuous-feed printers.  Some dot matrix printers, however, are page-oriented printers because they print on individual sheets of paper that are fed in from a paper tray.


Control box (definition)
Control-menu box

There is a Control-menu box at the upper left of the Quicken window and another at the upper left of every window that opens within the Quicken window. Double-clicking the box closes the window. Clicking the box opens the Control-menu.


Cost basis (definition)
Cost basis

Cost basis equals the total cost to you of a security you purchased. It includes commissions, fees, and mutual fund loads. It also includes all purchases, even reinvestments of dividends and capital gains distributions. However, it excludes the cost of any shares you have sold or given away. Also, it is reduced in a return-of-capital transaction.

For example>


Cost basis

For example

Suppose you buy 100 shares of stock for $2402, including the commission. The cost basis of the stock is $2402.

You reinvest a total of $50 of dividends in 2.5 new shares. The total cost basis increases by $50 to $2452, but the cost basis of the original 100 shares is unchanged.

The stock goes up in price, and you sell 50 shares for $2000. The selling price doesn't affect the cost basis. The original cost of those 50 shares was $1201 (or half of $2402), so the cost basis of the remaining 52.5 shares is now $2452 less $1201, or $1251.

Note>


Cost basis

Note

Quicken assumes, unless you tell it otherwise, that the shares you sell are the ones you've had the longest.  You can tell Quicken which lots (or portions of lots) to sell when you enter a Sell transaction.

After you set up a Quicken investment account, Quicken keeps track of the cost basis of each security. It takes the dollar amount you enter for the first transaction involving a given security and uses this as the cost basis as of the date of the first transaction. Subsequent purchase costs are added to the cost basis; the cost of shares subsequently sold and any return of capital are subtracted from it.


Credit (definition)
Credit

An item that increases the balance of an asset account (bank, cash, investment, or other asset). For liability accounts (credit cards or other liabilities), a credit decreases the balance you owe.


Current account (definition)
Current account

The account appearing in the active Account Register window or Write Checks window is the current account.

If no window of either type is active, the current account is the one appearing in the open window most recently activated. If no window of either type is open, it is the one that appeared most recently in an open window.


Current file (definition)
Current file

The open Quicken file is the current file. Its name appears in the title bar of the Quicken window.


Data disk (definition)
Data disk

A floppy disk that contains your Quicken data file.


Debit (definition)
Debit

An item that decreases the balance of an asset account (bank, cash, investment, or other asset). For liability accounts (credit cards or other liabilities), a debit increases the balance you owe.


Deposit (definition)
Deposit

Any transaction that is added to your account. Deposits include interest earned and checks you deposit in your account. Deposits are also called "credits."


Dialing prefix (definition)
Dialing prefix

Any combination of numbers and characters that that should be sent to your modem before it dials the phone number.  You can either type a dialing prefix or select it from the drop-down list in the Set Up Modem window.  Some common dialing prefixes are listed below.

Dialing prefix	What it does
9,	Often used to obtain an outside line from a business office.
*70,	Disables "call waiting" service for a touch-tone phone.  Prevents an incoming call from disrupting your modem session.
1170,	Disables "call waiting" service for a rotary (pulse) phone.


Directory (definition)
Directory

A portion of a disk that you've set aside and labeled with a name. (Most people use directories on hard disks; some people also use directories on floppy disks.)


Disk drive (definition)
Disk drive

A device that reads and records data on a disk. Typically named by a letter such as drive A or C.


Dividend (definition)
Dividend

Money paid to shareholders by stock, mutual fund, or money fund. It comes out of earnings or interest.


EGA (definition)
EGA

Enhanced graphics adapter. A kind of color monitor or video card.


Electronic payment (definition)
Electronic payment

A payment that you transmit from Quicken through your modem to the CheckFree Processing Center for payment to a merchant (electronic payee).


Ending balance and current balance (definition)
Ending balance and current balance

The ending balance is the balance of all transactions entered in the account register including postdated transactions. The current balance is the balance of all transactions entered as of today.


Equity (definition)
Equity

Total assets minus total liabilities (also, the value of the owner's or owner's stake in the business).


Export (definition)
Export

To save your data in ASCII format so that it may be imported to another Quicken file or program.  For more information see: Transferring data to and from Quicken.


File password (definition)
File password

A password that restricts access to the accounts in a Quicken file.  Once you have assigned a password to a file, no one can view the accounts in the file without first entering the password.


Financial Calendar (definition)
Financial Calendar

A calendar within Quicken used to schedule upcoming transactions. For example, if you enter your mortgage payment on the calendar as a recurring scheduled transaction, Quicken will regularly enter the payment on its scheduled day and remind you ahead of time.


Financial Calendar Notes (definition)
Financial Calendar Notes

Notes can be attached to dates on the Financial Calendar. Quicken Reminders can display the notes for the current week when you start up Quicken. For example, you can remind yourself of someones birthday or an appointment that needs to be kept.


Find and Replace (definition)
Find and Replace

Allows you to search for transactions that match specific criteria and replace selected information by field.


Forecasting (definition)
Forecasting

A feature in Quickens planning system that allows you to project your future account balances and cash flow based upon past spending trends and other estimated amounts.


Forecasting scenarios (definition)
Forecasting scenarios

Enable you to simulate the impact of important financial events. Setting up multiple scenarios allows you to compare your current financial situation with what-if scenarios. For example, buying a house or getting a raise.


Ginnie Mae (definition)
Ginnie Mae

Popular name for an investment issued by Government National Mortgage Association. An investment backed by a group of mortgages owned by this association. The homeowners who are paying their mortgages each pay principal and interest every month. The investors gets their share of the principal and interest from all mortgages. Since investors are getting back principal every month, the Ginnie Mae's remaining value decreases.


Graph (definition)
Graph

A visual representation of data; for example, investment performance of your 10 highest expenses for the month.


Graph legend (definition)
Graph legend

In a Quicken graph, the legend is the boxed area that explains what each bar or pie wedge in the graph represents.


Homebase (definition)
HomeBase

An alternative means of accessing the most commonly used commands in Quicken. For example, a new user can focus simply on the task of getting set up in Quicken or an advanced user can focus on a group of tasks associated with investment accounts.


Import (definition)
Import

To use data in Quicken that was created in a different Quicken file or account. Also, to use data in Quicken that was created and exported from another program.  For more information see: Transferring data to and from Quicken.


Individual Retirement Account (IRA) (definition)
Individual Retirement Account (IRA)

An account that meets government regulations for individual investment of money for retirement. The money you invest does not generate any taxable income as long as it is in the IRA.


Initialization string (definition)
Initialization string

A series of special letters, digits, and other characters that are used to customize your modem for your preferences (such as modem volume) and your system.

During Autoconfigure, Quicken creates an initialization string that sets up your modem to fit Quicken's requirements.  You should not delete any characters from the initialization string unless you have problems going online.  However, you can add characters to the initialization string.

Refer to your modem documentation for codes specific to your modem.


IntelliCharge (definition)
IntelliCharge

An IntelliCharge account is the same as a regular credit card account, except that you can import credit card transactions into your register by an electronic statement. The electronic statement arrives either by floppy disk or by modem.


Intuit Marketplace (definition)
Intuit Marketplace

Use Intuit Marketplace to order supplies or software directly from Intuit.  Intuit Marketplace guides you through the ordering process and then prints your order form so you can mail it.  Or, if you have a modem, you can use Intuit Marketplace to transmit your order form electronically.

More about...

The Intuit Marketplace


Intuit online account (definition)
Intuit online account

An account that Quicken sets up for you when you sign up for the Portfolio Price Update service.  The account has a number and a password associated with it.  You set the online account password during Portfolio Price Update signup, and Quicken displays the online account number when your signup is complete.


Investment account (definition)
Investment account

An investment account is any collection of securities you decide to track as a group. Quicken supplies information about the group as a whole as well as about the individual securities within the group. The account can be a real brokerage account, a single security, or a collection of securities that have a common purpose.


Investment goal (definition)
Investment goal

Quicken lets you classify securities by investment goal. If you use goals, you can sort and subtotal by goal on investment reports. Quicken's preset goals are college fund, growth, high risk, income, and low risk. You can modify this list.


Keogh (definition)
Keogh

A retirement account for self-employed individuals. The money you invest does not generate any taxable income as long as it is in the Keogh.


Liabilities (definition)
Liabilities

Debts that you owe.  When Quicken calculates your net worth, it counts your credit card accounts and "other liability" accounts as liabilities.


Liability accounts (definition)
Liability accounts

These are credit card and liability accounts.


Market value (definition)
Market value

The market value of a security equals the market price times the number of shares.


Memo (definition)
Memo

A note in a transaction that is unrelated to the income or expense category; for example, an account number or the location where you purchased an item.


Memorized transaction (definition)
Memorized transaction

A transaction that Quicken has saved in a special list called the Memorized Transaction list. This list is useful for transactions you enter on a recurring basis, such as rent and utilities.

For more information see: Using QuickFill and memorizing transactions.


Modem (definition)
Modem

A device that lets your computer send and receive information over a telephone line.  A modem can be either internal (inside your computer) or external (outside your computer).


Money market (definition)
Money market

In general, the market for short-term cash investments. These investments tend not to fluctuate very much in value.


Money market fund (definition)
Money market fund

A special mutual fund that invests only in money market investments. Most money funds allow limited check writing (usually with a minimum of $500 per check) and keep your principal constant but vary the interest rate.


Monochrome (definition)
Monochrome

A monitor that does not display more than one color.


Mutual fund (definition)
Mutual fund

A managed portfolio that sells shares of its own portfolio. The portfolio may include stocks, bonds, and money market investments.


Net Savings (definition)
Net savings

In an income and expense graph, net savings is the amount of money you saved over a specific interval of time.  Quicken calculates this amount by subtracting your total income from your total expenses.  In the graph, net savings is shown as a percentage of your total income for the period.

For example, if the graph shows your net savings as 13.5%, that means that you saved 13.5% of what you earned during that time period.


Net worth (definition)
Net worth

The total that remains after you subtract your liabilities from your assets.

Quicken calculates your net worth by adding the balances of your checking, cash, asset and investment accounts (these are your "assets"), and then subtracting from that total the balances of your credit card and liability accounts (your "liabilities").


Noninvestment account (definition)
Noninvestment account

Bank accounts and cash, credit card, other asset, and other liability accounts are all noninvestment accounts.  With a few variations, Quicken uses the same register for all noninvestment accounts. It uses a different register for investment accounts.


Online account (definition)
Online account

An account that Quicken sets up for you when you sign up for the Portfolio Price Update service. Also known as an Intuit online account.

The online account has a number and a password associated with it.  You set the online account password during Portfolio Price Update signup, and Quicken displays the online account number when your signup is complete.


Online account number (definition)
Online account number

A unique number associated with your Intuit online account.  (When you sign up for the Portfolio Price Update service, Quicken sets up an online account for you.)  Quicken displays the online account number when your Portfolio Price Update signup is complete.  You need this number if your want to use your online account with another Quicken file.

If you lose or forget your online account number, you can find it displayed in the Change Password window.


Online account password (definition)
Online account password

A combination of characters, known only to you, that protects your Intuit online account from unauthorized use.

When you sign up for the Portfolio Price Update service, Quicken sets up an online account for you. You set your password during signup.

If you forget your password, you need to call Intuit Online Services Technical Support to have it reset.  For the phone number, click here.


Option (Investments definition)
Option

An option to buy or sell a stock at a stated price before a stated date. The options themselves are bought and sold in the options market.


Options (Quicken definition)
Options

In Quicken, you can set options for various program options, such as reports, graphs, registers, icons and much more.

You may want to experiment with the various options.  To find out how, see: Customizing Quicken.


Page-oriented printer (definition)
Page-oriented printer

A printer that prints on individual sheets of paper that are fed in from a paper tray.  All laser printers and postscript printers are page-oriented printers.  Dot matrix printers that have a paper tray are also page-oriented printers.


Partial page (definition)
Partial page

Regular checks for laser printers and other kinds of page-oriented printers come three to the page. When you print a set of regular checks that isn't a multiple of three (for example, five checks), you are left with a partial page of one or two unprinted checks. You can use this partial page the next time you print checks. If you have enough checks to print to require a full page as well as the partial page, put the partial page on top so that it prints first.

Voucher checks for page-oriented printers come one to the page. Using voucher checks avoids partial pages entirely.


Payment (definition)
Payments

Transactions that are subtracted from your account. Payments include service charges and automatic teller machine withdrawals. Payments are also called "debits."


Pathname (definition)
Pathname

The location, or directory on a disk where files may be found.

The disk drive is designated by a letter followed by a colon.  For example, A: or C:

The directory or directories are indicated by the backslash (\).  For example, if your Quicken data files are on the C: drive, in the QUICKENW directory, the pathname would be C:\QUICKENW.

Directories can have subdirectories.  If you had a subdirectory of QUICKENW called DATA and kept your Quicken data files in that directory, the pathname would be C:\QUICKENW\DATA.


Percent unrealized gain or loss (definition)
Percent unrealized gain or loss

The percent unrealized gain or loss of a security is its current price per share less its average cost per share divided by its average cost per share and multiplied by 100%.

More detail>


Percent unrealized gain or loss

Equivalently, the percent unrealized gain equals the unrealized gain divided by the cost basis, and multiplied by 100%.

For example>


Percent unrealized gain or loss

For example

If the stock in the previous examples is now worth $40.00 per share, the percent unrealized gain is $40.00 less $23.83, divided by $23.83, or 67.9%.Quicken displays the percent unrealized gain or loss in the %GAIN column in the Update Prices and Market Value window. A negative value indicates a (paper) loss.


Planning Graph (definition)
Planning Graph

A forecasting feature that displays your past and future account balances by month. The graph is based on your past spending trends, scheduled transactions from the Financial Calendar and any what if scenarios that you set up.


Portfolio Price Update (definition)
Portfolio Price Update

An online financial service that updates the prices of the stocks and mutual funds (up to 250 in each update) in your Quicken investment portfolio.  The service can update prices of all stocks and mutual funds traded on the New York Stock Exchange, American Stock Exchange, and MASDAQ.

You can use the service three times at no charge. Then you need to sign up for the service to continue using it.


Postdate (definition)
Postdate

To date a transaction with a date in the future. Postdating is used to write a check that you intend to print and pay at a later date.


Progress Bar (definition)
Progress Bar

A gauge which can appear at the bottom of your Quicken window. Set up a savings goal account or budget and view your progress towards meeting your goal or budget at any time.


Port (definition)
Port

The connector on the computer used to attach the cable from an external device, such as a printer. Each port has a name; Quicken comes adjusted to print to a parallel printer connected to LPT1.


Printer driver (definition)
Printer driver

A program file that controls your printer.  You install the driver for your printer model using the Windows Control Panel.

Microsoft Windows supplies printer drivers for most printers.  Printer drivers may also be available directly from the printer manufacturer.


Print to disk (definition)
Print to disk

Creates an ASCII file that you can read into your word processing or other program.


QIF file (definition)
QIF file

Quicken Interchange Format. QIF is one of the formats that Quicken can export data to, and it is the only format that Quicken can import data from.


Quicken file (definition)
Quicken file

A collection of Quicken accounts.  When you create accounts in the same file, you can easily create transfer transactions between accounts, and you can include any or all accounts in the same file in reports.

More about...

Quicken data files


QuickFill (definition)
QuickFill

Quicken has several automatic features for data entry.  Together, these features are called QuickFill.

With QuickFill, you can have Quicken memorize each new transaction that you enter.  When you are entering data in the Register, Write Checks, or Split Transaction windows, QuickFill will complete each field after you type a few letters.  QuickFill also provides drop-down lists so that you can find items like payee names and categories quickly.

How to...

Change how QuickFill behaves


QuickZoom (definition)
QuickZoom

A Quicken feature that displays more detail about a graph or report.

When used in a graph, QuickZoom creates either a second graph that shows more detail about an element in the original graph, or it creates a transaction report that lists the transactions that the report represents.

When used in a non-transaction report, QuickZoom displays a transaction report that lists all the transactions that the report represents.  When used in a transaction report, QuickZoom takes you directly to the transaction that a line item represents.

How to...

Use QuickZoom


To use QuickZoom:

Whenever you see the mouse pointer turn into a QuickZoom magnifying glass, simply double-click:

•	In a graph, you can QuickZoom on a bar, pie wedge, or legend entry.  You can see the exact value of an element in the graph by holding down the right mouse button.

•	In a report, you can QuickZoom on a line item.


Realized gain or loss (definition)
Realized gain or loss

The realized gain or loss is the difference between the selling price of a security and the cost basis. If you sell it for more than you paid, there is a (real) gain. If you sell it for less, there is a (real) loss.

For example, when you sell 50 shares for $2000, and the cost basis of those shares is $1201, your realized gain is $799.

Quicken displays realized gain or loss in the capital gains report under the heading Gain/Loss. A negative value indicates a (real) loss.


Reconciled item (definition)
Reconciled item

A transaction that has been reconciled using Quicken's Reconcile/Pay Credit Card command. Quicken marks all reconciled transactions with an "X" in the Clr (Cleared) field of the register. The Opening Balance transaction that Quicken creates when you set up an account is also marked with an "X" because it represents the last reconciled balance of the account on the day you started it in Quicken.


Reconciling (definition)
Reconciling

Reconciling is making sure that the records of your account with a bank or other financial service and the records of the service show the same amount of money and the same transaction activity at the end of a specific period. Your records are in a Quicken account register. The service's records are in the statement it sends you.


Record (definition)
Record

To save the check or transaction in the Register to become a permanent part of your records.


Register (definition)
Register

The window where you enter transactions in a Quicken account.


Reminders (definition)
Reminders

A window that pops up in Quicken reminding you of Calendar Notes, checks to print, scheduled transactions, investment or electronic transactions.


Report printer and check printer (definition)
Report printer and check printer

You set up a report printer for printing reports, registers, lists, and market value summaries.

If you print checks with Quicken, you also set up a check printer. For most users, the report printer and check printer are a single printer configured in two ways.


Reports (definition)
Reports

Quicken reports summarize or list transaction information. Quicken has many different report types, and you can limit the information included in a report or change its format with customization options.


Reset string (definition)
Reset string

A group of characters that can reset your modem to its factory settings or to the "power on" settings (settings that take effect when your modem is turned on).  Quicken sets the reset string automatically during Autoconfigure, but you can change it in the Advanced Modem Setup window.


Restore (definition)
Restore

To use a backup file created with the Quicken Backup command.


Savings goal account (definition)
Savings goal account

A savings goal account is a special savings account to track money you'd like to put aside for a special purpose.

An example. You are saving for a trip to Hawaii. You can transfer money periodically from your checking account into this special asset account. You can use this account to gauge how much and how often you should put money aside in order to achieve your financial goal. You can create reports and graphs to check the progress toward your savings goal.

The money never really leaves your checking account, it is just accounted for in this special account. When you reconcile your checking account, these transfers do not appear.


Scenarios (definition)
Scenarios

Quicken allows you to create what if scenarios for planning and comparing the impact of financial events. For example, you can simulate the effect that purchasing a new car would have on your financial status.


Scheduled Transaction (definition)
Scheduled Transaction

By scheduling a transaction ahead of time you can have Quicken remind you before it is due or automatically record it. Transactions can be scheduled by adding them to the Scheduled Transaction list or to the Financial Calendar.


Security (definition)
Security

In Quicken, a security is a single investment with a value and (usually) a share price.  A stock, a group of bonds from one corporation, or a mutual fund is a security when it has a share price and you own a specified number of shares.  If you draw checks on a money market fund whose price never changes, you may wish to track it as a bank account.


Security type (definition)
Security type

Quicken classifies all securities by type.  It displays them by type in the Portfolio View window to help you enter prices from the newspaper. Quicken's preset security types are bonds, CDs, mutual funds, and stocks. You can modify this list.


Snapshots (definition)
Snapshots

Snapshots summarize different aspects of your finances on a single screen. For example, these aspects could include your net worth, monthly income or progress toward meeting a savings goal.


Speed key (definition)
Speed key

This is a key that you use to activate an icon from the keyboard.  For more information see: Adding an icon to the iconbar.


Split (definition)
Split

To allocate a payment or deposit to more than one category or account.  For example, to split a mortgage payment into interest and principal, or to split portions of a payment to a department store into clothing, household, furnishings, or toys, for more accurate reporting.


Other reports (definition)
Other and custom reports

All Quicken reports have a standard format.  You can also customize your reports in a variety of ways.  For example, it's possible to select individual accounts and categories, and the specific date range you want to report on.  For more information, see: Creating reports about your finances.


Standard checks (definition)
Standard checks

Checks with a tractor feed for a continuous printer.


Start new year (definition)
Start new year

To save a backup copy of your entire file and delete old transactions from your current file.

Any uncleared transactions will be copied to the new file.  If you do not want these transactions to appear in the new file, they must first be cleared in the register.


Stock (definition)
Stock

A piece of a company, sold in units called shares.


Subcategory (definition)
Subcategory

A further breakdown of an income or expense category. For example, the expense category Taxes might break down into subcategories such as Federal, State, Property, and Social Security.  For example:

Taxes:Federal

Subcategories are indicated and separated by a colon (:).  In this example, Taxes is the category, and Federal is the subcategory.


Subclass (definition)
Subclass

A further breakdown of a class. For example, if you owned rental property, a class created for one of your property names might break down into subclasses such as Unit 1 and Unit 2.  For example:

Rental Income/Property Name/Unit 1

Subclasses are indicated and separated by a slash (/).  In this case, Rental Income is the income category, Property Name is the class, and Unit 1 is the subclass.


Supercategory (definition)
Supercategory

A group of categories used for budgeting purposes. For example, you can assign the categories Movies and Books to the Supercategory Discretionary and assign a budget amount to track your discretionary expenses.  More detail>


Symbol (definiton)
Symbol

A combination of letters that uniquely identifies a security in your Quicken investment portfolio. Also known as a ticker symbol.  Often, it is the truncated or abbreviated name of the company, fund, or group issuing the security.  Examples:  INTU, FMAGX, NOVL (symbols for Intuit, Fidelity Magellan, and Novell)


Ticker symbol (definition)
Ticker symbol

A combination of letters that uniquely identifies a security in your Quicken investment portfolio. Often, it is the truncated or abbreviated name of the company, fund, or group issuing the security.  Examples:  INTU, FMAGX, NOVL ( ticker symbols for Intuit, Fidelity Magellan, and Novell)


Transaction (definition)
Transaction

In Quicken, a transaction is any item that affects the balance in an account register.  Common types of transactions include:

•	Checks written by hand

•	ATM transactions

•	Deposits

•	Electronic payments

•	Checking account fees and interest

•	Bank service charges


Transaction group (definition)
Transaction group

A group of memorized transactions that you pay or add to an account at the same time. An example could be the phone, electric, and mortgage bills that you always pay at the same time each month.


Transaction password (definition)
Transaction password

A transaction password protects a Quicken file from unauthorized changes to its records.  Once you assign a transaction password to a file, you must enter the password before you can add or modify transactions in any account for the date specified when setting up the password.


Transfer (definition)
Transfer

A transaction that transfers money from one account to another.  Transfers record two parallel transactions: one in the register from which the money will be drawn, and one in the register which will be receiving the money.  The transfer appears in the Category field, with the account name in brackets.  For example, [Savings], [Checking].


Unit trust (definition)
Unit trust

Special kind of mutual fund invested only in bonds. Pays principal and interest.


Treasury bill (definition)
Treasury bill

A Treasury bill is a short-term investment (usually maturing in 3 months, 6 months, or 12 months). These bills are usually issued in amounts of $10,000, but can be issued in amounts up to $1 million.


Unrealized gain or loss (definition)
Unrealized gain or loss

The unrealized gain or loss is the difference between the current market value of a security and the cost basis. If the current market value is greater, there is a (paper) gain. If the cost basis is greater, there is a (paper) loss.

For example, if your 52.5 shares of stock have a cost basis of $1251, but they're now worth $2100, you have an unrealized (paper) gain of $849.

Quicken displays unrealized gains or losses in the portfolio value report under the heading Gain/Loss. A negative value indicates a (paper) loss.


Voucher checks (definition)
Voucher checks

A business check that has an attached voucher page that allows room for more descriptive memos or itemized breakdown of the payment.


VGA (definition)
VGA

Video graphics array. A kind of color monitor.


Wallet checks (definition)
Wallet checks

Checks that have a check stub on the left side.


End of file


*Graphing your finances (contents)
Graphing your finances

To search for a Help topic, click the Search button above.

Overview

Click here

How to...

Create a graph

Memorize and recall a graph

Customize a graph

View more detail in a graph

Print a graph

Common Questions

My graphs aren't printing in color.

How can I view more detail in a pie chart or bar graph?

Quick Tips

Speeding up graph printing on a PostScript printer

Speeding up graph printing on a laser printer


Create a graph

Graph income against expenses

Graph your budget variance

Graph your net worth

Graph your investments


Customize a graph

Customize a graph

Customize a memorized graph

Change Quicken's graph options


Memorize and recall a graph

Memorize a graph

Recall a memorized graph

Rename a memorized graph

Delete a memorized graph


Creating graphs
Overview: Creating graphs

Quicken graphs are a visual summary of your finances.  You can use them to spot trends in your spending patterns, evaluate how well you are meeting your budget, show how your net worth is changing, and analyze your investment portfolio.

Quicken creates four types of graphs:

Income and expense

Budget variance

Net worth

Investment performance

See also ...

Changing Quicken's graph options

Graph colors and the graph legend

Bar graphs

Pie charts


Analyzing income and expenses

Income and expense graphs can help you spot spending patterns, highlight your top ten expenses, warn about overspending, and provide comparisons of historical data.

Quicken creates these graphs using the categories you assign when you enter transactions.

How to...

Graph income against expenses


Understanding budget variance

Budget variance graphs compare actual spending and income with budgeted spending and income. Quicken calculates the difference in dollars between the two so you can see how you are actually doing compared to the budget.

How to...

Graph your budget variance


Analyzing net worth

Net worth graphs are similar to income and expense graphs, except they use account balances rather than category information. Net worth graphs are also similar to net worth reports or balance sheets you create in Quicken.

Create net worth graphs to show the balance of your credit cards or other debts and your bank accounts or other assets over time, or to show if your net worth is changing.

How to...

Graph your net worth


Evaluating investment performance

Investment performance graphs display information to help you evaluate your investment portfolio and spot trends in prices and market value of a particular security.

How to...

Graph your investments


Graph colors and legend

Each segment in a graph has its own color.  To learn the meaning of a particular segment, look for its color in the legend to the right of the graph.


Bar graphs

Graphs with bars compare how two or more items change over a period of time.  You can make a rough estimate of the dollar amounts that the bars represent by looking at the numbers along the y-axis (the vertical axis on the left side of the graph).  To see the exact value of a bar, move the mouse to the bar and press the right mouse button.

If there are more than five items to show in a budget variance graph, a Next 5 button appears on the graph.  Clicking Next 5 displays bars for the next five items in the graph.  When you reach the last five items, clicking Next 5 displays the first five again.


Pie charts

The circular graphs with pie slices compare how much each item contributes to the whole.

If there are more than 10 items to show in a pie chart, the 11th slice is labeled "Other."  You can see the composition of this slice by clicking the Next 10 button, or by moving the mouse to the "Other" item in the graph legend and double-clicking the left mouse button.  When you reach the last 10 items, clicking Next 10 displays the first 10 again.


My graphs aren't printing in color
My graphs aren't printing in color.

You need to change a setting in the Report Printer Setup window:

1.	Create the graph.

2.	From the File menu, choose Printer Setup, then choose Report/Graph Printer Setup.

3.	Click the Print Reports and Graphs in Color checkbox.

4.	Click OK.


Viewing more detail in a pie chart or bar graph
How can I view more detail in a pie chart or bar graph?

You can "hide" one of the largest slices of the pie so you can see other slices in the pie more clearly.

To hide a pie slice in a pie chart (or bar in a bar graph):

•	Press the Shift key while clicking the slice or bar you want to hide with the left mouse button.  After hiding a slice, Quicken displays a subtotal instead of a total at the bottom of the graph legend.  To "unhide" an item, create the graph again.

Note

Hiding categories (slices in a pie chart) isn't the same as filtering them.  When you filter categories, Quicken doesn't include them in its analysis.  When you hide them, Quicken still calculates their value in the graph, but doesn't display the value.


Speeding up graph printing on a PostScript printer

If it is taking you several minutes to print a graph on a PostScript printer, follow these steps:

1.	Create the graph.

2.	From the File menu, choose Printer Setup, then choose Report/Graph Printer Setup.  The Report Printer Setup window appears.

3.	Click the Print Reports and Graphs in Color checkbox.  Do this even if you don't have a color printer.  PostScript translates colors into shades of gray faster than it can draw patterned graphs.

4.	Click OK.  Try printing your graph again.  Your graph should print much faster.

How to...

Print a graph


Speeding up graph printing on a laser printer

Follow these steps to print your graphs faster and use less toner in the process:

1.	From the File menu, choose Report/Graph Printer Set Up.

2.	Click Settings.

3.	In the Settings window, click Options.

4.	In the Options window, click Advanced.

5.	In the Resolution box in the Advanced Options window, change the number from 300 to 150.  This reduces the printed dots-per-inch from 300 to 150.

6.	Click OK.  Try printing your graph again; it should print faster.

How to...

Print a graph


Graphing income against expenses
Graph income against expenses

To graph income against expenses:

1.	From the Reports menu, choose Graphs, then choose Income and Expense.

2.	Enter the beginning and ending dates for the period of time you want the graph to cover.

3.	If you want to include subcategories in your graphs, select the Show Subcategories in Graph checkbox.

4.	To apply an income and expense filter, click Accounts (to limit your graph to certain accounts), Categories (to limit your graph to certain categories, and Classes (to limit your graph to classes).

5.	Click Create.

More about ...

What your graph shows

How to...

View more detail in a graph

Print a graph


Graphing your budget variance
Graph your budget variance

Budget variance graphs compare actual spending and income with budgeted spending and income. Quicken calculates the difference in dollars between the two so you can see how you are actually doing compared to the budget.

Before you create this graph you must first set up a budget.  If you haven't done this yet, see instead: Setting up a budget.

To graph your budget variance:

1.	From the Reports menu, choose Graphs, then choose Budget Variance.

2.	Enter the beginning and ending dates for the period of time you want the graph to cover.

3.	If you want to include subcategories in your graphs, select the Show Subcategories in Graph checkbox.

4.	To apply an income and expense filter, click Accounts (to limit your graph to certain accounts), Categories (to limit your graph to certain categories), and Classes (to limit your graph to classes).

5.	Click Create.

More about ...

What your graph shows

How to...

Set up a budget

View more detail in a graph

Print a graph


Graphing your net worth
Graph your net worth

To graph your net worth:

1.	From the Reports menu, choose Graphs, then choose Net Worth.

2.	Enter the beginning and ending dates for the period of time you want the graph to cover.

3.	If you want to include subcategories in your graphs, select the Show Subcategories in Graph checkbox.

4.	To apply an income and expense filter, click Accounts (to limit your graph to certain accounts), Categories (to limit your graph to certain categories), and Classes (to limit your graph to classes).

5.	Click Create.

More about ...

What your graph shows

How to...

View more detail in a graph

Print a graph


Graphing your investments
Graph your investments

To graph your investments:

1.	From the Reports menu, choose Graphs, then choose Investments.

2.	Enter the beginning and ending dates for the period of time you want the graph to cover.

3.	If you want to include subcategories in your graphs, select the Show Subcategories in Graph checkbox.

4.	To apply an income and expense filter, click Accounts (to limit your graph to certain accounts), Categories (to limit your graph to certain categories), and Classes (to limit your graph to classes).

5.	Click Create.

To change how the graph shows your portfolio:

•	When the graph appears, you can change how the graph breaks down the value of your investment portfolio by clicking one of these buttons:

Type

Goal

Sec  (this is the default)

Account

More about ...

What your graph shows

How to...

View more detail in a graph

Print a graph


Viewing more detail in a graph
View more detail in a graph

Once you have created a graph, you can display more detail about an individual bar or pie slice using QuickZoom.  You can also suppress individual bars and pie slices.

QuickZoom for graphs:

•	To see the next level of detail in a bar or pie slice, double-click it.

To display the exact value of a bar or pie slice:

•	Move the mouse to the bar or pie slice and then press the right mouse button.  The value remains on screen until you release the mouse button.

To hide a bar or pie slice so that it doesn't show in the graph:

•	Move the mouse to the bar or pie slice; then, while pressing the Shift key, click the left mouse button.  This is useful if you need to rescale the graph to see more detail in the smaller bars or slices.


Income and Expense Graph

Income and expense graphs help you answer these questions:

•	Is my income changing over time?

•	Is my income covering my expenses?

•	Where does my money come from?

•	Where does my money go?

What you see

•	The upper part (Monthly Income and Expenses) compares your total income against your total expenses over time. Each bar represents either a month's income or a month's expenses.

•	The bottom part (Expense Comparison) shows your total income, broken down by what you spent and what you didn't spend.  More detail>

How to...

View more detail in a graph

Print a graph


Income and Expense Graph (upper)
Monthly Income and Expenses

This bar chart compares your total income against your total expenses over time. Each bar represents either a month's income or a month's expenses.

How to...

View more detail in a graph

Print a graph


Income and Expense Graph (lower)
Expense Comparison as a Percentage of Total Income

The pie chart shows your total expenses as a percentage of your total income for the period of time you specified.  The slices in the pie represent the amounts you assigned to each expense category.

•	If your expenses were less than your income, another slice appears in the pie, labeled "Net Savings."  This slice represents the difference between your total income and what you actually spent.

•	If you have more than 10 expense categories, the top 10 categories are shown, while the remaining categories are represented by "Other."

To see the next 10 categories, click Next 10.

How to...

View more detail in a graph

Print a graph


QuickZoom Graph (Expense Comparison)
QuickZoom: Expense Comparison

This new graph provides more detail about the month's expenses.

The pie represents your total expenses for the month. The slices in the pie represent the amounts you assigned to each expense category during the month.  The size of a slice indicates the proportion of your expenses represented by that category.  The legend for the graph shows what percentage of your total expenses went to each category.

To display the exact value of a bar or pie slice:

•	Move the mouse to that bar or slice and press the right mouse button. The Data Label shows you how much you spent for that category during the month.

To display a Quicken report listing individual transactions represented in a slice:

•	Move the mouse to that category's slice in the pie or its entry in the legend.  Then double-click or press Ctrl+Z.


QuickZoom Graph (income summary)
QuickZoom: Income Comparison

This new graph provides more detail about the month's income.

The pie represents your total income for the month. The slices in the pie represent the amounts you assigned to each income category during the month.  The size of a slice indicates what proportion of your income falls under that category.  The legend for the graph shows what percentage of your income came from each category.

To display the exact amount that a slice or an entry in the legend represents:

•	Point to the item with the mouse and press the right mouse button.  The Data Label shows you how much you earned under that category during the month.

To display a Quicken report that lists the individual transactions that a slice represents:

•	Point to either the category's slice in the pie or the category's entry in the legend.  Then double-click or press Ctrl+Z.


QuickZoom Graph (category by month)
QuickZoom: Monthly Expenditures

This new graph provides additional detail about this expense category.

The bars show how your expenditures for that category varied during the time period covered by the original graph.  Each bar represents a month's expenditures.

To display the exact amount that a bar represents:

•	Point to the bar with the mouse and press the right mouse button.  The Data Label shows you how much you spent for that category for that month.

To display a Quicken report that lists the individual transactions that a bar represents:

•	Point to the bar and double-click or press Ctrl+Z.


QuickZoom Graph (net savings by month)
QuickZoom: Net Income by Month

This new graph provides more detail about your net savings. The bars show how your savings varied during the time period covered by the original graph.  Each bar represents a month's savings.

Bars that move up from the horizontal axis of the graph represent positive savings.  During those months, your income was greater than your expenses.  Bars that move down represent the opposite:  in those months, your expenditures were greater than your income.

To display the exact amount that a bar represents

•	Point to the bar with the mouse and press the right mouse button.  The Data Label shows you how much you saved during that month.

To display a Quicken report that lists the individual transactions that a bar represents:

•	Point to the bar and double-click or press Ctrl+Z.


Budget Variance Graph

Budget variance graphs help you answer these questions:

•	Am I staying within my budget from month to month?

•	How well do I estimate what I will earn and spend?

•	In what categories do I overspend or underspend?

What you see

This graph shows how much you were over or under your budget each month during the time period you specified.

•	The top part of the graph (Actual vs. Budgeted Net Income) shows the total variance from your budget.  More detail>

•	The bottom part of the graph (Actual vs. Budgeted Categories) compares directly what you budgeted for a given category against what you actually spent.  More detail>

How to...

View more detail in a graph

Print a graph


Budget Variance Graph (upper)
Actual vs. Budgeted Net Income

This graph shows how much you were over or under your budget each month during the time period covered by the graph.

•	Each bar represents the amount you were over or under your budget for a particular month.

•	Bars that move up are months that you were under your budget; bars that move down are months that you were over your budget.

How to...

View more detail in a graph

Print a graph


Budget Variance Graph (lower)
Actual vs. Budgeted Categories

This graph compares your actual income and expense amounts against the amount you budgeted for each category in your Quicken file.

•	Only the first five categories are shown in the graph.  Click Next 5 to display the next five categories in the graph.

•	When you reach the last five categories, clicking the button displays the first five again.

How to...

View more detail in a graph

Print a graph


QuickZoom Graph (budget detail for month)
QuickZoom: Actual vs. Budgeted Categories

This new graph provides more detail about your budgeting for the month. The bars show how much you were over or under your budgeted amount for each budget category during the month.

If you have more than five categories in your budget, the remaining categories are represented by a bar labeled "Other."  To display a graph of the next five categories, double-click the "Other" bar.

To display the exact amount that a bar represents:

•	Point to the bar with the mouse and press the right mouse button.

To display a Quicken report that lists the individual transactions that a bar represents:

•	Point to the bar and double-click or press Ctrl+Z.

How to...

Print a graph


QuickZoom Graph (comparison by month)
QuickZoom: Monthly Budget vs. Actual

This new graph provides additional detail about the category represented by the bar you double-clicked. The bars compare the actual amount for the category against your budgeted amount.  Each pair of bars (Budget and Actual) represents a single month.

To display the exact amount that a bar represents:

•	Point to the bar with the mouse and press the right mouse button.

To display a Quicken report that lists the individual transactions that a bar represents:

•	Point to the bar and double-click.

How to...

Print a graph


Net Worth Graph

Net worth graphs help you answer these questions:

•	Do I own more than I owe?

•	In what assets do I have most of my money?

•	What are my largest debts?

•	How is my net worth changing over time?

What you see

This graph shows your assets, liabilities, and net worth during the period of time you specified.  Each month has two bars in the graph.

•	Each bar that rises above 0 on the vertical axis represents the value of your assets on the last day of the month.

•	Each bar that moves down from zero represents the value of your liabilities on the last day of the month.

•	The line that connects the square points on the graph represents your net worth as it changes from month to month.

•	Each point on the line is your net worth on the last day of a particular month.

How to...

View more detail in a graph

Print a graph


QuickZoom Graph (Asset Comparison)
QuickZoom: Asset Comparison

This new graph provides more detail about the month you double-clicked.  The pie represents the total value of your assets on the last day of the month.  Each slice in the pie represents the value of one of your asset accounts in your Quicken file.

To display the exact value of an account:

•	Move the mouse to the account's slice in the pie or entry in the legend and press the right mouse button.  The Data Label displays the balance of the account as of the last day of the month.

To display a Quicken report that lists the individual transactions in the account:

•	Double-click either the account's slice in the pie or its entry in the legend.

How to...

Print a graph


QuickZoom Graph (net worth liabilities)
QuickZoom: Liability Comparison

This new graph provides more detail about the month you double-clicked.  The pie represents the total value of your liabilities on the last day of the month.  Each slice in the pie represents the value of one of your liability accounts in your Quicken file.

To display the exact value of an account:

•	Move the mouse to the account's slice in the pie or entry in the legend and press the right mouse button.  The Data Label displays the balance of the account as of the last day of the month.

To display a Quicken report that lists the individual transactions in the account:

•	Double-click either the account's slice in the pie or its entry in the legend.

How to...

Print a graph


Investment Performance Graph

Investment performance graphs help you answer these questions:

•	Is my portfolio value increasing?

•	How are my stocks and bonds doing?

What you see

•	The upper graph (Monthly Portfolio Value) shows how the value of your investment portfolio has changed over time.  More Detail>

•	The lower graph (Average Annual Total Return) shows how well each part of your portfolio has performed compared to the average return of your portfolio as a whole.  More detail>

How to...

Display a different breakdown of your portfolio

Display the exact value of an item in the graph

Display graphs that show additional detail

Print a graph


Investment graph buttons
Display a different breakdown of your portfolio

To display a different breakdown of your portfolio:

•	Near the top of the Investment Performance Graph, click the button that represents what you want the graph to show.  When you click the button, Quicken redraws the graph.


Investment Performance Graph Buttons

This list shows what each button does.  If you need more information about a button, click its name in the list:

This button...	Does this...
Type	Breaks your portfolio down by the types of investments you have made.
Goal	Breaks your portfolio down by your investment goals.
Sec	Breaks your portfolio down by the individual securities you hold.
Account	Breaks your portfolio down by your individual investment accounts.


Monthly Portfolio Value graph
Monthly Portfolio Value

This graph shows what your portfolio was worth over the specified time period.

Each bar represents the value of your portfolio on the last day of the month. (The month is shown below the bar.)  The relative heights of the bars indicate how your portfolio value has changed from month to month.

The segments in the bars break down the value of your portfolio depending upon the type of view you have chosen (Type, Goal, Sec, or Account).  For example, if you chose Goal from the buttons across the top of the graph, each segment would represent one of your investment goals.

How to...

Display a different breakdown of your portfolio

Display the exact value of an item in the graph

Display graphs and reports that show additional detail

Print a graph


Average Annual Return graph
Average Annual Total Return

The heavy black line running across the graph represents the average annual return of your securities during the period of time covered by the graph.  The value takes into account dividends, interest, and other payment you receive, including increases and decreases in the market value of your securities.

The bars that run above and below the heavy black line measure how well your securities are performing.  Taller bars indicate better performance.

How to...

Display a different breakdown of your portfolio

Display the exact value of an item in the graph

Display reports that show transaction details

Print a graph


Viewing exact amounts (investment graph)
Display exact amounts (Data Label)

To display an exact amount:

•	Move the mouse pointer so that it touches the item for which you want to display an exact amount.  Then press the right mouse button.

What does an amount represent?

If you are unsure what an amount represents when you display it, click in this list:

A bar in the Monthly Portfolio Value graph

A legend entry in the Monthly Portfolio Value graph

Either end of the average annual return line

A bar in the Average Annual Return graph


Zooming for more detail
Display more detail

To display more detail:

•	Double-click the item for which you would like to see more detail.

Double-click this . . .	To display this . . .
Monthly bar	A pie chart that shows what  percentage of the total market value each part of your portfolio makes up.
Return line (either end)	A report that lists the transactions from which Quicken calculated the average return of your portfolio.
Return bar	A report that lists the transactions from which Quicken calculated the average return of the items in your portfolio that the bar represents.


Monthly portfolio value bar

The amount you display from one of these bars is the value of your entire portfolio at the end of the month that the bar represents.


Legend entry

The amount you display from a legend entry in the Monthly Portfolio Value graph is the value of a particular part of your portfolio at the end of the last month shown on the graph.

What the legend entry represents depends on which button is selected at the top of the graph.  For example, if the Sec button is selected, the amount you display by selecting a legend entry will be the value of a particular security.


Average annual return line

The amount you display from either end of this line is the rate of return for your entire portfolio during the period of time that the graph represents.

The amount shown is adjusted for an annual basis.  For example, if the graph covers the first 6 months of the year and the rate of return shown is 12%, that is what your portfolio would earn by the end of the year if it performs as well during the second half of the year as it did the first.


Annual return bar

The amount you display from one of these bars is the rate of return earned by a particular part of your portfolio.

What the bar represents depends on which button is selected at the top of the graph.  For example, if the Sec button is selected, the amount you display by selecting a bar will be the rate of return for a particular security.


QuickZoom Graph (Portfolio Value)
QuickZoom: Portfolio Value

This graph provides more detail about the composition of your portfolio, or about the composition of part of your portfolio.  It shows the composition of your portfolio on the last day of a particular month (the month represented by the bar you double-clicked in the original graph).  The pie slices are the parts that make up your portfolio.  What the slices represent depend on which button you have clicked at the top of the graph:

To display the exact amount that a particular slice in the graph represents

•	Move the mouse to the slice and press the right mouse button.

Zooming for more detail

From this graph, you can use QuickZoom to display more information:

•	If the graph shows all of your portfolio, you can display another graph that shows detail about a specific part of your portfolio.  Simply double-click the slice that represents that part.

•	If the graph shows securities, you can display a graph that shows the price history of a particular security.  Simply double-click the slice that represents the security.

How to...

Print a graph


QuickZoom Graph (Price and Value History)
QuickZoom: Price and Value History

This new graph provides details about the value and price history of the security you double-clicked.  The bars represent the value of your shares as of the dates that appear under the bars.  The line connecting the square points on the graph represents the share price of the security.  Each point on the line is the share price as of the date that appears below.

To display the exact value of your shares on a particular date:

•	Move the mouse to the bar for that date and press the right mouse button.

To display the exact price of the security on a particular date:

•	Move the mouse to the square for that date and press the right mouse button.

To display a Quicken report listing the individual transactions from which Quicken calculated the value of the security.

•	Double-click the bar for that value in the graph.

How to...

Print a graph


Type

Clicking this button changes the graph so that the graph shows the types of investments you have made.  In this graph, each bar segment or pie slice will represent a particular type of investment, such as stocks, bonds, or CDs.


Goal

Clicking this button changes the graph so that the graph shows the investment goals you have made.  In this graph, each bar segment or pie slice will represent a particular goal, such as income, growth, or college savings.


Sec

When you first create an investment performance graph, this button is selected.

This button changes the graph so that the graph shows individual securities.  In this graph, each bar segment or pie slice will represent a specific security.


Account

Clicking this button changes the graph so that the graph shows individual investment accounts.  In this graph, each bar segment or pie slice will represent a specific investment account.


Memorized Graphs List
Memorized Graphs

Use this window to recall, edit, or delete graphs that you have already memorized.

To recall a memorized graph:

1.	Select a graph in the list.

2.	Click Use.  The Recall Memorized Graph window appears.

3.	Make any changes you want to the date range or filters.  These changes will not be saved unless you rememorize the graph after you create it.

4.	Click OK.  Quicken creates and displays the graph.

How to...

Customize a memorized graph

Rename a memorized graph

Delete a memorized graph

Memorize a graph

What you see

Graph Title list

Edit, Delete, Use, Close buttons


Memorizing a graph
Memorize a graph

To memorize a graph:

1.	Create the graph you want to memorize.

2.	Click Memorize on the Graph button bar, or choose Memorize Graph from the Edit menu.

3.	Enter a name for the graph, and then click OK.

How to...

Create a graph

Memorize and recall a graph

Customize a graph


Renaming a memorized graph
Rename a memorized graph

To rename a memorized graph:

1.	From the Reports menu, choose Memorized Graphs.

2.	Select the graph you want to rename from the list.

3.	Click Edit.

4.	Enter a new name for the memorized graph and then click OK.

How to...

Create a graph

Memorize and recall a graph

Customize a graph


Recalling a memorized graph
Recall a memorized graph

To recall a memorized graph:

1.	From the Reports menu, choose Memorized Graphs.

2.	Select the graph you want to recall from the list.

3.	Click Use.

4.	Make any changes you want to the date range or filters.  These changes will not be saved unless you rememorize the graph after you create it.

5.	Click OK.  Quicken creates and displays the graph.

How to...

Create a graph

Memorize and recall a graph

Customize a graph


Customizing a memorized graph
Customize a memorized graph

Quicken gives you great flexibility in creating a graph.  You can change a graph's date range, as well as the accounts, categories, and classes it includes.

If you customize a memorized graph after recalling it, Quicken will not save the changes unless you rememorize the graph.

To customize a memorized graph:

1.	From the Reports menu, choose Memorized Graphs.

2.	Select the graph you want from the list.

3.	Click Use.

4.	Make any changes you want to the date range or filters, and then click OK.

5.	Click Memorize on the Graph button bar, and then click OK.

How to...

Create a graph

Memorize and recall a graph

Customize a graph


Customizing a graph
Customize a graph

Quicken gives you great flexibility in creating a graph.  You can change a graph's date range, as well as the accounts, categories, and classes it includes.

To customize a graph:

1.	First, create a graph (see below).

2.	Click Customize on the graph button bar.  The Customize Graph window appears.

3.	Make any changes you want to the date range or filters.  These changes will not be saved unless you memorize the graph.

4.	Click OK.  Quicken creates and displays the customized graph.

How to...

Create a graph

Memorize and recall a graph

Customize a graph


Deleting a memorized graph
Delete a memorized graph

To delete a memorized graph:

1.	From the Reports menu, choose Memorized Graphs.

2.	Select the graph you want to delete from the list.

3.	Click Delete.

4.	Click Yes to delete the graph.

How to...

Create a graph

Memorize and recall a graph

Customize a graph


Graph Title list

This list includes all the graphs that you have memorized.  To memorize a graph, create it and then click Memorize.


Memorized Graphs List buttons

This button...	Does this...
Edit	Lets you rename the selected memorized graph.
Delete	Deletes the selected memorized graph.
Use	Recalls the selected memorized graph.
Close	Closes the list.


Edit Memorized Graph window
Edit Memorized Graph

Use this window to change the name of a graph you've already memorized.

To change the name of a memorized graph:

•	Enter a new name in the Graph Name field, then click OK.


Memorize Graph window
Memorize Graph

Use this window to memorize a graph you've already created.

To memorize a graph:

•	Enter a name for the graph in the Graph Title field, then click OK.


Customize Graph or Recall Memorized Graph window
Customize Graph or Snapshot /
Recall Memorized Graph

If you customize a memorized graph after recalling it, Quicken will not save the changes unless you rememorize the graph.

How to...

Change the date range of a graph

Change the accounts included in the graph

Change the categories included in the graph

Change the classes included in the graph

What you see

From...To

Date Range

Show subcategories in graph

Graph supercategory budgets

Accounts, Categories, Classes buttons


From...To

These fields show the current date range of the graph.  Click in the fields and type to change the date range.  To keep the graph easy to read, limit the period of time covered by the graph to one year or less.

This option appears only if you are customizing or recalling a regular Quicken graph, not a Snapshots graph.


Date Range

If necessary, change the date range to include the dates you want the graph to include.

This option appears only if you are customizing a Snapshots graph.


Show subcategories in graph

Select to show the extra detail that subcategories allow you.

This option appears only if you are creating an Income and Expense or Budget Variance graph.


Graph supercategory budgets

Select to show supercategories in the graph.

This option appears only if you are creating a Budget Variance graph.


Accounts, Categories, Classes buttons

Click to customize the graph filters.  A checkmark on the button tells you that some items are being excluded.

This button...	Does this...
Accounts	Lets you select accounts to include in the graph.
Categories	Lets you select categories to include in the graph.
Classes	Lets you select classes to include in the graph.


Change the date range of a graph

To change the date range:

1.	Click in the From field and enter the starting date.

2.	Press Tab to move to the To field.

3.	Enter the ending date.

How to...

Create a graph

Memorize a graph

Recall a memorized graph


Change the accounts included in the graph
Change the accounts included in a graph

To select accounts to include:

1.	Click Accounts.

2.	Mark the accounts you want to include by clicking on them.

3.	Click OK.  A checkmark on the button tells you that some accounts are being excluded.

How to...

Create a graph

Memorize a graph

Recall a memorized graph


Change the categories included in the graph
Change the categories included in a graph

To select categories to include:

1.	Click Categories.

2.	Mark the categories you want to include by clicking on them.

3.	Click OK.  A checkmark on the button tells you that some categories are being excluded.

How to...

Create a graph

Memorize a graph

Recall a memorized graph


Change the classes included in the graph
Change the classes included in a graph

To select classes to include:

1.	Click Classes.

2.	Mark the classes you want to include by clicking on them.

3.	Click OK.  A checkmark on the button tells you that some classes are being excluded.

How to...

Create a graph

Memorize a graph

Recall a memorized graph


Create Graph window
Create Graph

Quicken can create different kinds of graphs to give you insight into your finances.

How to...

Create a graph

What you see

From...To

Income and Expense Graph

Budget Variance Graph

Net Worth Graph

Investment Performance Graph

Show subcategories in graph

Graph supercategory budgets

Accounts, Categories, Classes buttons

Memorized button


Income and Expense Graph

Income and expense graphs can help you spot spending patterns, highlight your top ten expenses, warn about overspending, and provide comparisons of historical data.

These graphs use the categories you assigned when you entered transactions.

How to...

Graph income against expenses


Budget Variance Graph

Budget variance graphs compare actual spending and income with budgeted spending and income.  Quicken calculates the difference in dollars between the two so you can see how you are actually doing compared with your budget.

How to...

Graph your budget variance


Net Worth Graph

Net worth graphs are similar to income and expense graphs, except they use account balances rather than category data.  Net worth graphs are also similar to account balance reports.

Create net worth graphs to show the balance of your credit cards or other debts and your bank accounts or other assets over time, or to show if your net worth is changing.

How to...

Graph your net worth


Investment Performance Graph

Investment graphs help to evaluate your investment portfolio and the price history of your securities.

Four portfolio value graphs summarize the market value of each security you own, either by type, goal, security, or Quicken investment account.

How to...

Graph your investments


Memorized button

Click to select a previously memorized graph.

How to...

Memorize a graph


Using Quicken HomeBase
Use Quicken HomeBase

The Quicken HomeBase provides easy access to the most commonly used Quicken commands and features.

To use Quicken HomeBase:

1.	From the Activities menu, choose the HomeBase command.  The Quicken HomeBase window appears.

2.	Click on a HomeBase topic (on the left) to display its commands and features (on the right).

3.	Click on the command or feature you want to use.


How to use Quicken HomeBase
Quicken HomeBase

The Quicken HomeBase provides easy access to the most commonly used Quicken commands and features.

To use Quicken HomeBase:

1.	Click on a HomeBase topic (on the left) to display its commands and features (on the right).

2.	Click on the command or feature you want to use.


Quicken HomeBase: Setup options
HomeBase: Setup

To set up Quicken:

•	Click a Setup option.  For example, to create a new Quicken account, choose Create Accounts.

What you see

Create Accounts

Category List

Intuit Marketplace

Printer Setup

Quicken Tutorial


Create Accounts

This option creates a new account and adds it to your Quicken file.  When you create a new account, you choose one of these eight account types:  checking, savings, credit card, cash, money market, investment, asset, or liability.


Category List

Opens the Category List and makes available the categories and accounts you can apply to your transactions.


Intuit Marketplace

Lets you order software, checks, and other Intuit products.  In addition to checks, you can order deposit slips, envelopes, stamps, forms leaders for printers, and stationery.


Printer Setup

Opens the Printer Setup window, and lets you choose the printer you want to set up.


Quicken Tutorial

Starts Quicken's Quick Tour, an overview of Quicken's main features.


Quicken HomeBase: Day To Day options
HomeBase: Day To Day

To use Quicken:

•	Click an option.  For example, to write a check, click Write Checks.

What you see

Use Register

Financial Calendar

Account List

Write Checks

Reconcile Account


Use Register

Displays the register of the current account in a window. The register lists the transactions in your accounts.


Financial Calendar

Opens the Financial Calendar. You can schedule past and future transactions and plan for future spending.


Account List

Opens the Account List window and makes your accounts available. You can add accounts to the list or change information about existing accounts.


Write Checks

Opens the Write Checks window for the current account, from where you can write and print checks, or write and transmit electronic payments.


Reconcile Account

When the current account is a bank, cash, asset, liability, or investment account, this option opens the Reconcile window, where you can balance the account with the statements you receive from your bank, investment company, or other provider of financial services.


Quicken HomeBase: Reports options
HomeBase: Reports

To work with a Quicken report feature:

•	Click it.  For example, to create a report listing transactions from your accounts, click Itemized Category Report.

What you see

Itemized Category Report

Income/Expense Graph

More Reports

More Graphs

Financial Snapshot


Itemized Category Report

Produces a preset report listing transactions from all of your accounts, grouped and subtotaled by category.


Income/Expense Graph

Creates a graph that compares your income against expenses for the period of time you select.


More Reports

Opens the Create Report window, and lets you create any preset home, business, or investment report by simply selecting the report you want to create.


More Graphs

Opens the Create Graph window, and lets you create the following four types of graphs:

Income and expense

Budget variance

Net worth

Investment performance


Financial Snapshot

Open the Quicken Snapshots window.  Snapshots are miniature versions of Quicken's graphs, reports, calendar notes, and savings or budget goals progress graphs.


Quicken HomeBase: Planning options
HomeBase: Planning

To work with a Quicken planning feature:

•	Click it.  For example, to set up a budget, click Budgeting.

What you see

Budgeting

Financial Planners

Forecasting

Tax Planner

Savings Goals


Budgeting

Displays a window that you use to set up a budget for your income, expenses, and transfers.


Financial Planners

Displays the Financial Planners window, which lets you choose the financial planning tool you want to use.


Forecasting

Displays the Forecasting window, which lets you predict how your account balances will look in the future.


Tax Planner

Opens the Tax Planner.  Quicken Tax Planner can help you estimate your taxes at any time during the year.


Savings Goals

Click to set up a Quicken savings goal.

A Quicken savings goal lets you hide money for something you want to save for -- for example, a vacation or a new car.  Although the money is really in your bank account, you mark it as unavailable for other spending purposes.


Quicken HomeBase: Investment options
HomeBase: Investments

To work with a Quicken investment feature:

•	Click it.  For example, to create an investment account, click Create Investment Account.

What you see

Create Investment Account

Investment Portfolio

Update Portfolio Prices

Portfolio Value Report

Investment Graph


Create Investment Account

Click to create a new investment account.

Quicken's regular investment and mutual fund accounts help you track your investments in stocks, bonds, mutual funds, and other securities that fluctuate in price.


Investment Portfolio

Opens the Portfolio View window, where you can:

•	Enter an investment transaction.

•	Change security prices.

•	Create a graph showing value and price history for a particular security.

•	Report on all transactions related to a security and print them out.


Update Portfolio Prices

Provides easy access to the Portfolio Price Update service.

Portfolio Price Update is an Intuit online service that automatically updates the prices of all securities (up to 250) in your Quicken investment portfolio.  Prices are 15 minute delayed.


Portfolio Value Report

Produces a report showing the value of each security on a specified date. The report shows number of shares, most recent known price for the date, cost basis, unrealized (paper) gain or loss, and market value for the date.


Investment Graph

Creates a graph that shows the performance of your investments over the period of time that you select.


Quicken HomeBase: Tools options
HomeBase: Tools

To use one of the Quicken tools:

•	Click it.  For example, to change the way Quicken is set up, click Quicken Options.

What you see

Find and Replace

Recategorize

Quicken Home Inventory or Calculator

View Loans

Quicken Options


Find and Replace

Finds all transactions that match your search criteria, and then allows you to replace the text in any field in some or all of the found transactions.


Recategorize

Finds all transactions with a specific category, and then allows you to recategorize some or all of the found transactions.


Quicken Home Inventory

Runs Quicken Home Inventory if you have it installed on your computer.  Quicken Home Inventory accurately organizes all records of your personal possessions in one place.

If you do not have Quicken Home Inventory and would like to order it, click HomeBase Setup, then click Intuit Marketplace.


Calculator

Opens the Quicken Calculator.  You can use the Calculator to do standard mathematical calculations.

The Calculator appears in the Tools list in Quicken Deluxe 4 CDROM for Windows.


View Loans

Opens the View Loans window. This is the starting point for setting up a loan. You can also view your previous loan payments and see future payments.


Quicken Options

Click to display and change Quicken's program options.


Quicken HomeBase: Deluxe option
HomeBase: Deluxe

To use a Quicken Deluxe 4 CDROM for Windows feature:

•	Click it.  For example, to get interactive financial advice from Jane Bryant Quinn and Marshall Loeb, click Ask the Experts.

What you see

Ask the Experts

Mutual Fund Selector

Quicken Home Inventory

Quicken Quotes

Tradeline Stock Guide


Ask the Experts

Click to get interactive financial advice from Jane Bryant Quinn and Marshall Loeb.

Ask the Experts is a feature of Quicken Deluxe 4 CDROM for Windows.


Mutual Fund Selector

Click to start the Mutual Fund Selector ActiveBook.

The Mutual Fund Selector is a feature of Quicken Deluxe 4 CDROM for Windows.


Quicken Home Inventory

Click to run Quicken Home Inventory.  Quicken Home Inventory accurately organizes all records of your personal possessions in one place.


Quicken Quotes

Click to run Quicken Quotes.  Quicken Quotes extends the quote tracking capability of Quicken by providing price (high, low, close) and volume information for stocks, options, mutual funds, and indexes.  Use Quicken Quotes to track not only the stocks you own, but also the stocks you may be considering buying.


Tradeline Stock Guide

Click to run the Tradeline Electronic Stock Guide, which provides historical stock price information and allows you to search for stocks that meet varied performance criteria.


HELP_HOMEBASE_TOPIC8 DB
HomeBase Topic 8


HELP_HOMEBASE_TOPIC9 DB
HomeBase Topic 9


HELP_HOMEBASE_TOPIC10 DB
HomeBase Topic 10


HomeBase Options window
HomeBase Options

These options control the appearance and functionality of the Quicken HomeBase.

To change a Quicken HomeBase option:

•	Click an option to select or clear it.  A checkmark appears when the option is selected.

What you see

Minimize on Use

Show special effects

Show Quicken iconbar


Minimize on Use

Select this option to minimize the Quicken HomeBase on your desktop whenever you make a selection from it.


Show special effects

Click to enable/disable the scrolling effect in the Quicken HomeBase window.


Show Quicken iconbar

Click to show/hide the Quicken iconbar.


Printer Setup window
Printer Setup

This is where you choose which printer to set up.

To choose a printer to set up:

•	Click Report or Check-writing Printer, then click OK.

What you see

Report Printer

Check-writing Printer


Report Printer

Sets up your printer for printing reports and graphs.  If you select this option, you can select the fonts that you want the printer to use when it prints your reports and graphs.  If necessary, you can also change other printer settings, such as paper size and page orientation.


Check-writing Printer

Sets up your printer for printing checks.  If you select this option, you print a sample check to make sure that all printed information appears in the correct position on the check.  You can also select the font that you want the printer to use when it prints the checks.


Financial Planners window
Financial Planners

This is where you choose a financial planning tool to use.

To display one of Quicken's financial planners:

•	Click an option, then click OK.

What you see

Loan

Savings

College

Retirement

Refinance


Loan

Displays Quicken's Loan Planner, a financial planning tool that you can use to evaluate the payment terms of a loan.


Savings

Displays Quicken's Investment Savings Planner, a financial planning tool that you can use to plan the growth of your savings.


College

Displays Quicken's College Planner, a financial planning tool that you can use to plan for your children's college education.


Retirement

Displays Quicken's Retirement Planner, a financial planning tool that you can use to project your retirement income and plan how you will meet your retirement goals.


Refinance

Displays Quicken's Refinance Planner, a financial planning tool that you can use to calculate the break-even point if you are thinking about refinancing your home.


*Using IntelliCharge (contents)
Using IntelliCharge

To search for a Help topic, click the Search button above.

Overview

Click here

How to ...

Apply for a Quicken credit card

Set up a credit card account to use IntelliCharge

Set up your modem

Update and pay your credit card account

Common Questions

Why can't I connect to IntelliCharge via modem?

Why did Quicken encounter an error when configuring my IntelliCharge account?

Quick Tip

Changing your statement delivery method


Using IntelliCharge
Overview: Using IntelliCharge

Using a special Quicken credit card and IntelliCharge, you can automate entering transactions into your credit card register.

Each month, Intuit either mails you an IntelliCharge statement disk or makes an electronic statement available to you via modem.

The disk or file contains all transactions recorded for your credit card during the current statement period. These transactions are your credit card purchases, finance and cash advance charges, credits from merchants, and payments.

How does it work?

IntelliCharge reads the statement it receives (by modem or from a floppy disk) and checks your category list. If IntelliCharge finds a transaction containing a category not found in your current category list, it asks whether you want to set up a new category or select a different category for this transaction.

After reading your statement, IntelliCharge displays your transactions in a window. This transaction-by-transaction display allows you to review each transaction and accept it into your credit card register. You can always change or edit your transactions after they are recorded in the register.

How to ...

Apply for a Quicken credit card

Set up a credit card account to use IntelliCharge

Set up your modem

Update and pay your credit card account


Quicken can't dial the IntelliCharge number
Why can't I connect to IntelliCharge via modem?

The IntelliCharge line may be busy, or your modem may not be set up correctly.

Try the following:

•	Wait a few minutes and try getting data again. The phone line you are trying to reach could be busy.

•	Add a dialing prefix, if necessary.

•	Use Autoconfigure to reset your modem.


IntelliCharge configuration problem
Why did Quicken encounter an error when configuring my IntelliCharge account?

When Quicken set up your new account, IntelliCharge failed to receive (or transmit) information about your account.

To resolve this problem:

•	Wait a few minutes and try again. The IntelliCharge line you are trying to reach could be busy.

•	Take any steps you can to eliminate line noise. For example, disable Call Waiting by entering *70 as the dialing prefix in the Set Up Modem window.


Changing your statement delivery method

When you sign up for a Quicken credit card, you indicate on your application how you want your account statement delivered: by modem or mailed to you on disk.  If you want to change the delivery method, it's important not to do so until you contact Travelers Bank.  For the Travelers Bank phone number, click here.

To change your statement delivery method:

1.	Contact Travelers Bank and inform them of your desire to change your statement delivery method.

2.	From the List menu, choose Account.

3.	Select the IntelliCharge account.

4.	Click Edit.  The Edit Account Information window appears.

5.	Click More.

6.	Choose how you want to receive your statement, then click Done.

If you select modem delivery, you'll need to enter your Social Security number and a password.


Applying for a Quicken credit card
Apply for a Quicken credit card

To use IntelliCharge, you must have a Quicken credit card.

To apply for a Quicken credit card:

•	Fill in and return the application included in your Quicken package.

Can't find the application?

•	Call Intuit Customer Service.  For the phone number, click here.


Setting up a credit card account to use IntelliCharge
Set up a credit card account to use IntelliCharge

To set up your IntelliCharge account in Quicken:

1.	From the Activities menu, choose Create New Account.

2.	Select the Guide Me checkbox for extra help.  If you select this box, Quicken will "interview" you for the account information, so you can skip the rest of these steps.

3.	Click Credit Card as the account type you'd like to create.

4.	Select the Enable IntelliCharge checkbox, enter the requested basic account information, then click More.  The IntelliCharge Setup window appears.

5.	Choose the same delivery method (modem or disk) that you indicated on your credit card application.  If you select modem, enter your Social Security number and password as well.

6.	Click Done.  If you want to make changes to your basic account information, click Back.

How to ...

Apply for a Quicken credit card

Set up your modem


Updating and paying your Quicken credit card
Update and pay your Quicken credit card

Each month, Intuit either mails you an IntelliCharge statement disk or makes an electronic statement available for you to download by modem.  The disk or file contains all the transactions for your Quicken credit card that occurred in the current statement period.

To update your credit card account:

1.	Get your IntelliCharge statement

2.	Review your IntelliCharge statement

3.	Pay your credit card bill


Get your IntelliCharge statement

By modem:

Your statement will be available to download at approximately the same time you receive your paper statement in the mail.

1.	Be sure your modem is turned on (if it is external) and the phone line is plugged in.

2.	Open the IntelliCharge credit card account.

3.	From the Online menu, choose Get IntelliCharge Data.

4.	Click OK to download your data.  You are now ready to review your IntelliCharge statement.

From a disk:

1.	Open the credit card account.

2.	From the Online menu, choose Get IntelliCharge Data.

3.	Insert your IntelliCharge statement disk in a floppy drive and type the letter of that drive.

4.	Click OK.


Review your IntelliCharge statement

After IntelliCharge reads your statement, it displays the transactions on the statement for your review.  At this point, you can change how a transaction is categorized or mark a transaction for special attention.

1.	(Optional)  Change the categorization of any transaction.  IntelliCharge searches for previous transactions with the same payee and categorizes your new transactions the same way.  More Detail

2.	(Optional)  Select any transaction and click Mark to mark it for special attention.  More Detail

3.	Click Record All to record the new transactions in the register.  You are now ready to pay your credit card bill.


Changing Categorization

To change the category assigned to a transaction:

1.	Select the transaction.

2.	Click Categorize.

3.	Select a new category from the list that appears.

To delete the category assigned to a transaction:

1.	Select the transaction.

2.	Click Delete Cat.


Marking transactions for special attention

For each transaction you mark, IntelliCharge places a single question mark in the left column of the IntelliCharge Statement window.  It also puts five question marks (?????) in the Ref field of the register, so you can find the marked transaction easily after IntelliCharge records the transaction in the credit card account register.


Pay your credit card bill

After you record the transactions on your IntelliCharge statement, the Make Credit Card Payment window appears.  Use this window to pay your credit card bill.

1.	From the Bank Acct drop-down list, select the bank account from which to pay the credit card bill.

2.	Indicate whether you want to make the payment with a handwritten check, a printed Quicken check, or an electronic payment.

3.	Select an amount to pay.

4.	Click OK.  The register appears if you are paying with a handwritten check.  The Write Checks window appears if you are paying with a Quicken check or an electronic payment.

5.	(Optional)  Make any necessary changes to the transaction in the register or the Write Checks window, and click Record.


Printed

Select this option if you want to pay the bill with a check printed by Quicken.


Handwritten

Select this option if you want to pay the bill with a handwritten check.


Electronic

Select this option if you want to pay the bill electronically through CheckFree.  This option is available only if you have already set up a bank account as an electronic payment account.


Minimum amount

Select this option if you want to pay the minimum amount due as shown on your IntelliCharge statement.


Full amount

Select this option if you want to pay the bill in full.


Other amount

Select this option if you want to pay an amount between the minimum amount due and the full amount of the bill.  IntelliCharge remembers the amount the next time you pay.


Get IntelliCharge data (by floppy disk)
Get IntelliCharge data (from a disk)

This is where you tell Quicken where your IntelliCharge statement disk is located.

To specify which drive contains your statement disk:

•	 Type a drive letter and click OK.

See also:

Changing your statement delivery method.


Get IntelliCharge data (by modem)

Quicken is ready to download your IntelliCharge electronic statement by modem.  If your modem is external, be sure it is turned on.

See also:

Changing your statement delivery method.


IntelliCharge Statement window

This is where you review all the transactions from your current statement, change the way IntelliCharge categorizes your transactions, and mark transactions you have questions about.

To review/change/record your current statement:

1.	(Optional)  Change the categorization of any transaction.  IntelliCharge searches for previous transactions with the same payee and categorizes your new transactions the same way.

•	To change the category assigned to a transaction, select the transaction, click Categorize, and select a new category from the list that appears.

•	To delete the category assigned to a transaction, select the transaction and click Delete Cat.

2.	(Optional)  Select any transaction and click Mark to mark it for special attention.  For each transaction you mark, IntelliCharge places a single question mark in the left column of the IntelliCharge Statement window.  It also puts five question marks (?????) in the Ref field of the register, so you can find the marked transaction easily after IntelliCharge records the transaction in the credit card account register.

3.	Click Record All to record the new transactions in the register.  You are now ready to pay your credit card bill.

What you see

Mark

Record All

Cancel

Categorize

Delete Cat


Mark

Click Mark to mark the selected transaction for later review.


Record All

Click this button to record all transactions in the register of your IntelliCharge account.


Cancel

Click Cancel to stop the update process. When you click Cancel, you lose any changes you've made to transaction categories.  The statement is saved to disk and reloaded the next time you choose Get IntelliCharge Data.


Categorize

Click Categorize to assign a category to the selected transaction or change the existing category.


Delete Cat

Click Delete Cat to delete the category currently assigned to the selected transaction.


IntelliCharge Warning
Account number mismatch

The account number of the statement disk does not match the account number you entered in the Credit Card Number box when you set up this credit card account.

One of the following things may have happened:

•	You entered the account number incorrectly when you set up the account.  Select the account in the Account list, and click Edit to change the account number.

•	The bank sent you a new credit card with a new account number (for example, if your card was lost or stolen).  Select the account in the Account list, and click Edit to change the account number and continue using the same Quicken account.

•	You have more than one IntelliCharge account, and the disk in the drive is for a different account.  Open the register for the correct account and try again.

•	The bank sent you the wrong disk.  Contact Intuit Online Services Technical Support.  For the phone number, click here.


IntelliCharge Account Information
Edit Account Information

This is where you enter or change information about the credit card account.

To edit account information:

•	Change the displayed information as needed, and then click More.

What you see

Account Name

Enable IntelliCharge

Credit Card Number

Credit Limit

Additional Information

Tax Information


IntelliCharge Account Information window
IntelliCharge Account Information

This is where you enter information for IntelliCharge.

To enter IntelliCharge account information:

•	Select diskette or modem delivery.  If you select modem delivery, you need to enter your Social Security number and an IntelliCharge password.

What you see

Statement Delivery

Social Security Number

IntelliCharge Password


Statement Delivery

Select either Modem or Diskette.  Your choice here must match your choice on your Quicken credit card application.  Or, you can call Travelers Bank to change your delivery choice.  For the phone number, click here.


Social Security Number

To receive your statement by modem, Quicken requires you to enter the Social Security number you entered on your IntelliCharge application.


IntelliCharge Password

A password prevents unauthorized access to your statement file. A password is required if you are using a modem with IntelliCharge.

You assign the password here. You can enter any combination of numbers and letters. The password must be between four and eight characters long.


Do you want to reenter this
Do you want to reenter this statement?

The transactions in this statement appear to have been entered into your account already.

To have Quicken reenter the statement:

•	Type 'YES' to indicate that you are sure you want to continue.

To cancel the update:

•	Press Cancel.


IntelliCharge Balance Adjustment dialog box
IntelliCharge Balance Adjustment

After importing your credit card transactions, the balance shown in your register is different from that shown in your statement file.

Your balance may be different because your opening balance was incorrect, or you deleted or altered a credit card transaction in your register.

To let Quicken add an entry to your register to make it agree with the statement balance:

•	Click Adjust.

To leave the balance of the register different from that of the statement:

•	Click Do Not Adjust.


Make Credit Card Payment dialog box (IntelliCharge)
Make Credit Card Payment

This is where you pay your credit card bill after updating your IntelliCharge account.

To make a credit card payment:

1.	Select the bank account from which to pay the credit card bill.

2.	Select whether to pay your bill by a handwritten check, a check printed from Quicken, or an electronic payment through CheckFree.  The electronic payment option is available only if you have set up the account for CheckFree.

3.	Select whether to pay the minimum amount allowed, the full amount of the bill, or another amount.  If you choose not to pay your bill at this time, click Cancel.

4.	Click OK.  The register window appears if you are paying with a handwritten check.  The Write Checks window appears if you are paying with a check printed in Quicken or through CheckFree.

What you see

Printed

Handwritten

Electronic

Minimum Amount

Full Amount

Other Amount


IntelliCharge

IntelliCharge is a service that works with Quicken to automatically enter credit card transactions into your register, saving you the trouble of typing them yourself.

An IntelliCharge account is the same as a regular credit card account, except that you import credit card transactions into your register from an electronic statement, which you receive each month via floppy disk or modem.

To use IntelliCharge you must have a Quicken credit card. If you are interested in getting a Quicken credit card, see the application included in your Quicken package.


*Tracking investments (contents)
Tracking investments

To search for a Help topic, click the Search button above.

Overview

Click here

How to...

Set up investment accounts

Set up a security

Track and update security prices

Update your portfolio prices online

Handle transactions and use the investment forms

Manage your securities

Common Questions

What type of Quicken account should I use for my investment?

What do the red bars on my investment graph indicate?

Why is one of my securities missing from my investment graph?

Why doesn't the IRR on the report match the IRR on my investment graph?

The Portfolio View window doesn't show the same market value as the register. What is wrong?

When I sell shares, my broker holds on to part of the cash for 30 days. How do I handle this in Quicken?

How do I handle a company spin-off?

Are my security lots still set up?

Quick Tips

Customizing Portfolio View

Grouping your securities within Quicken accounts


Set up investment accounts

Set up a regular investment account

Set up a mutual fund account


Set up a security

About securities

Set up a security

Set up an investment goal

Assign an investment goal to a security

Set up a security type


Track and update security prices

View prices and market value for one account or all accounts

View prices and market value as of a given day

View the price history of a security

Add to the price history of a security

Edit the price history of a security

Update security prices

Save security prices from Prodigy's Quote Track

Import price data from an ASCII file


Update your portfolio prices online

Overview: Portfolio Price Update

Sign Up for Portfolio Price Update

Use Portfolio Price Update

Change your Portfolio Price Update account


Handle transactions and use the investment forms

Buy a security

Sell a security

Enter investment income

Enter reinvestments

Enter a stock split or a stock dividend

Buy on margin

Buy and redeem US Savings Bonds

Redeem Treasury bills

Record zero-coupon bonds

Sell short

Enter options

Handle a Ginnie Mae or other bond

Enter a return of capital

Track 401(k) Information in Quicken


Manage your securities

Change the type of a security

Delete a security

Delete a security type

Change a security


Tracking investments
Overview: Tracking investments

Quicken's regular investment accounts and mutual fund accounts help you track your investments in stocks, bonds, mutual funds, and other securities that fluctuate in price.   These accounts are designed for investors who want to:

•	Track their investment transactions

•	See the performance of investments

•	Update current market values

•	Create reports and graphs about their investments.

When you record investment transactions in a regular (portfolio) investment account or a mutual fund account, and enter the current prices from time to time, Quicken shows you how much your investments are worth.  If you don't have price information, use an asset account instead.

How to...

Set up a regular investment account

Set up a mutual fund investment account

More about...

What type of Quicken account to use for an investment

Grouping your securities within Quicken accounts


Buying a security
Buy a security

To buy a security:

1.	From the Activities menu, choose Portfolio View.  Or from an investment register, click Port View.  The Portfolio View window appears.

Make sure the account containing the security is displayed.  If this is a new security, see: Setting up a security.

2.	Select the security in the list.  Use the Up or Down Arrow key to locate the security.

3.	Click Buy on the button bar.  The Buy investment form appears, where you enter the security name, number of shares, price, commission/fee, etc.

4.	Fill in the Buy investment form.  For details about filling in the form, click here.

5.	Click OK to record the transaction.


Selling a security
Sell a security

To sell a security:

1.	From the Activities menu, choose Portfolio View.  Or from an investment register, click Port View.  The Portfolio View window appears.  Make sure the account containing the security is displayed.

2.	Select the security in the list.  Use the Up or Down Arrow key to locate the security.

3.	Click Sell on the button bar.  The Sell investment form appears.

4.	Fill in the Sell investment form.  For details about filling in the form, click here.

5.	Click OK to record the transaction.


Entering investment income
Enter investment income

To enter investment income:

1.	From the Activities menu, choose Portfolio View.  Or from an investment register, click Port View.  The Portfolio View window appears.  Make sure the account containing the security is displayed.

2.	Select the security in the list.  Use the Up or Down Arrow key to locate the security.

3.	Click Income on the button bar.  The Record Income investment form appears.

4.	Fill in the Record Income form.  For details about filling in the form, click here.

5.	Click OK to record the transaction.


Entering reinvestments
Enter reinvestments

To enter investments:

1.	From the Activities menu, choose Portfolio View.  Or from an investment register, click Port View.  The Portfolio View window appears.  Make sure the account containing the security is displayed.

2.	Select the security in the list.  Use the Up or Down Arrow key to locate the security.

3.	Click Reinvst on the button bar.  The Reinvest Income form appears.

4.	Fill in the Reinvest Income form.  For details about filling in the form, click here.

5.	Click OK to enter the transaction.


Entering stock splits and stock dividends
Enter a stock split or a stock dividend

To enter a stock split or dividend:

1.	From the Activities menu, choose Portfolio View.  Or from an investment register, click Port View.  The Portfolio View window appears.  Make sure the account containing the security is displayed.

2.	Select the security in the list.  Use the Up or Down Arrow key to locate the security.

3.	Click More on the button bar, then choose StkSplit.  The Stock Split investment form appears.

4.	Fill in the Stock Split form.  For details about filling in the form, click here.

5.	Click OK to record the transaction.


Buying on margin
Buy on margin

A "margin loan" is money you borrow from a broker to pay for a security you are buying.  You don't have to tell Quicken you have a margin loan.  (If you buy a security and don't have enough cash for it in your account, Quicken displays a negative cash balance.)  Alternatively, you may want to set up a liability account for the loan.

To record the interest you pay on a margin loan:

1.	From the Activities menu, choose Portfolio View.  Or from an investment register, click Port View.  The Portfolio View window appears. Make sure the account containing the security is displayed.  If this is a new security, see: Setting up a security.

2.	Select the security in the list.  Use the Up or Down Arrow key to locate the security.

3.	Click More on the button bar, then choose Margin Interest Expense.  The Margin Interest Expense investment form appears.

4.	Fill in the Margin Interest Expense form.  For details about filling in the form, click here.

5.	Click OK to record the transaction.

If you have set up a liability account for the margin loan:

1.	Follow steps 1 and 2 above.

2.	Click More on the button bar, then choose Transfer Cash In.

3.	Fill in the Transfer Cash In form.  For details about filling in the form, click here.

4.	Click OK to record the transaction.


Buying and redeeming US savings bonds
Buy and redeem US savings bonds

The U.S. government issues Series EE bonds in various face value denominations.  You buy a Series EE bond at a discount from its face value. Interest is paid only when a bond is redeemed.  The interest from a series EE bond is exempt from state and local taxes, and no federal tax is due until the bond is redeemed.

To buy US savings bonds:

1.	From the Activities menu, choose Portfolio View.  Or from an investment register, click Port View.  The Portfolio View window appears.

2.	Click Buy on the button bar.  The Buy investment form appears.

3.	In the Security box, enter a meaningful name, such as US $1000 6% 1/23 for the purchase of a bond with a face value of $1000, series EE bond, maturity date 1/20/23.  The Set Up Security window appears.

4.	Enter the setup information about the bond and click OK.  The Buy investment form redisplays.

5.	In the Number of Shares box, enter the number of bonds multiplied by 10.  This is to match the way prices are quoted.  In this example, you'd enter 10.

6.	In the Price box, enter the purchase price divided by 10.  This is to match the way bond prices are quoted.  In this example, the purchase price of the bond was $500, so you'd enter 50 in the box. The Total of Sale is $500.00.

7.	Click OK.

To redeem US savings bonds (at or before maturity):

1.	From the Activities menu, choose Portfolio View.  Or from an investment register, click Port View.  The Portfolio View window appears.

2.	Select the bond in the list.  Use the Up or Down Arrow key to locate the bond.

3.	Click Sell on the button bar.  The Sell investment form appears.

4.	In the Number of Shares box, enter the face value of the bond divided by 100.  For example, for a $250,000 bond, enter 2500.

5.	Leave the Price box empty.

6.	In the Total of Sale box, enter the actual cost excluding commission and accrued interest.

7.	(Optional) Select the account you'd like the amount of the sale deposited in.

8.	(Optional) Enter a memo.

9.	Click OK.  In this example Quicken enters a price of approximately $100 if you bought the bond when it was first issued, but if you bought it after it has been returning principal, the amount may be much less.


Handling a Ginnie Mae bond
Handle a Ginnie Mae or other bond

To buy a Ginnie Mae (or other bond):

1.	From the Activities menu, choose Portfolio View.  Or from an investment register, click Port View.  The Portfolio View window appears.  Make sure the account containing the bond is displayed.

2.	Select the bond in the list.  Use the Up or Down Arrow key to locate the bond.

3.	Click Buy on the button bar.  The Buy investment form appears.

4.	In the Number of Shares box, enter the face value of the bond divided by 100.  For example, for a $250,000 bond, enter 2500.

5.	Leave the Price box empty.

6.	In the Total of Sale box, enter the actual cost excluding commission and accrued interest.

7.	(Optional) Select the account you'd like the amount of the purchase deducted from.

8.	(Optional) Enter a memo.

9.	Click OK.  In this example Quicken enters a price of approximately $100 if you bought the bond when it was first issued, but if you bought it after it has been returning principal, the amount may be much less.

How to...

Sell a Ginnie Mae or other bond

Enter a return of principal

Retire a Ginnie Mae bond


Redeeming Treasury bills
Redeem Treasury bills

You purchase Treasury bills at a discount from their face value. When you sell the bill or bond, part of the proceeds is interest income.  To record this in your investment account, you must record the investment income and the sale of the bill.

To record the income interest:

1.	From the Activities menu, choose Portfolio View.  Or from an investment register, click Port View.  The Portfolio View window appears.  Make sure the account containing the bill or bond is displayed.

2.	Select the bill or bond in the list.  Use the Up or Down Arrow key to locate the security.

3.	Click Income on the button bar.  The Record Income investment form appears.

4.	Fill in the Record Income form.  For details about filling in the form, click here.

5.	Click OK to record the transaction.

To record the sale:

1.	Click Sell.  The Sell investment form appears.

2.	Fill in the Sell form.  For details about filling in the form, click here.

3.	Click OK to record the transaction.


Recording zero-coupon bonds
Record zero-coupon bonds

You buy zero-coupon bonds at a discount. During the time you hold them, their value increases, due to the interest they earn. Although you don't receive this interest until you sell the bonds, the interest is reported to you every year on Form 1099 OID as taxable interest income.

To record the interest income:

1.	From the Activities menu, choose Portfolio View.  Or from an investment register, click Port View.  The Portfolio View window appears.  Make sure the account containing the bill or bond is displayed.

2.	Select the bill or bond in the list.  Use the Up or Down Arrow key to locate the security.

3.	Click Income on the button bar.  The Record Income investment form appears.

4.	Fill in the Record Income form.  For details about filling in the form, click here.

5.	Click OK to record the transaction.

To record the increase in the value of the bond:

1.	Click More and then choose Return of Capital.  The Return of Capital investment form appears.

2.	Enter a dollar amount equal to the negative value of the interest. (The negative return of capital increases your cost basis.  It thus reduces realized gain if you sell the bond or update the current market price of the bond.)

3.	(Optional) Enter a memo.

4.	Click OK.

Notes

Return of capital is not the same as capital gains distribution.

To ensure that the market value also declines with a return of capital, you must update the price of the security.

How to...

Update security prices

Update your portfolio prices online


Selling short
Sell short

When you "sell short," you sell a security you don't own. You borrow the shares from your broker and deliver these shares to the purchaser.  You hope to buy the security later at a lower price to pay back your broker.

To sell short:

1.	From the Activities menu, choose Portfolio View.  Or from an investment register, click Port View.  The Portfolio View window appears.  Make sure the account containing the security is displayed.

2.	Select the security in the list.  Use the Up or Down Arrow key to locate the security.

3.	Click Sell on the button bar.  The Sell investment form appears.

4.	Enter the number of shares and the price.

5.	Confirm that you do wish to make a short sale.

6.	Click OK.

To buy the security later:

1.	From the Activities menu, choose Portfolio View.  The Portfolio View window appears.

2.	Select the security in the list.  Use the Up or Down Arrow key to locate the security.

3.	Click Buy.  The Buy investment form appears.

4.	Fill in the form.  If you're selling short a security you already own in the same account (with the intention of buying additional shares), create different lots for the security.

How to...

For information about filling out the form and entering lots, see

Buy or Sell Shares


Entering options
Enter options

You treat an option as a security.

To enter options:

1.	From the Activities menu, choose Portfolio View.  Or from an investment register, click Port View.  The Portfolio View window appears.

2.	Click Buy on the button bar.  The Buy investment form appears.

3.	For the security name, enter a descriptive phrase, such as: CALL IBM May 100 (to represent the call, ticker symbol, exercise month, strike price).

4.	For the number of shares, enter the actual number of shares you are entitled to buy on the call.

5.	Enter the purchase price of the call.

6.	Enter any fees.

7.	Click OK.  For additional details about filling in the form, click here.


Selling a Ginnie Mae bond
Sell a Ginnie Mae bond

To sell a Ginnie Mae bond:

1.	From the Activities menu, choose Portfolio View.  Or from an investment register, click Port View.  The Portfolio View window appears.  Make sure the account containing the bond is displayed.

2.	Select the bond in the list.  Use the Up or Down Arrow key to locate the bond.

3.	Click Sell on the button bar.  The Sell investment form appears.

4.	In the Number of Shares box, enter the face value of the bond divided by 100.  For example, for a $250,000 bond, enter 2500.

5.	Leave the Price box empty.

6.	In the Total of Sale box, enter the actual cost excluding commission and accrued interest.

7.	(Optional) Select the account you'd like the amount of the sale deposited in.

8.	(Optional) Enter a memo.

9.	Click OK.  In this example Quicken enters a price of approximately $100 if you bought the bond when it was first issued, but if you bought it after it has been returning principal, the amount may be much less.


Entering a return of capital or principal
Record a return of principal or capital

A "return of capital" is money paid to you as total or partial repayment of the money you invested. Return of capital differs from a sale in that you are not the one who initiates the return of capital.

For example, a mortgage-backed security, such as a Ginnie Mae, returns capital when the underlying mortgages pay off principal, which is passed on to you.

A unit trust returns capital as it sells the bonds within the trust.

To record a return of principal or capital:

1.	From the Activities menu, choose Portfolio View.  Or from an investment register, click Port View.  The Portfolio View window appears.  Make sure the account containing the security is displayed.

2.	Select the security in the list.  Use the Up or Down Arrow key to locate the security.

3.	Click More on the button bar, then choose Return of Capital.  The Return of Capital investment form appears.

4.	Enter the amount.

5.	(Optional) Enter a memo.

6.	Click OK.

Notes

Return of capital, which isn't a taxable event, is not the same as capital gains distribution.

Recording a return of capital lowers the cost basis of the security by the amount of the return of capital.  If you enter a negative amount in the Return of Capital form, you raise the cost basis and decrease the cash balance in your account.

To ensure that the market value also declines with a return of capital, you must update the price of the security. This new price equals the current price times the FACTOR (which is supplied in your statement).

How to...

Update security prices

Update your portfolio prices online


Retiring a Ginnie Mae bond
Retire a Ginnie Mae bond

If you hold a Ginnie Mae until it returns all its principal, it becomes worthless. You need to record this information in your investment account.

To retire a Ginnie Mae bond:

1.	From the Activities menu, choose Portfolio View.  Or from an investment register, click Port View.  The Portfolio View window appears.  Make sure the account containing the bond is displayed.

2.	Select the bond in the list.  Use the Up or Down Arrow key to locate the security.

3.	Click Sell on the button bar.  The Sell investment form appears.

4.	In the Number of Shares box, enter the face value of the bond divided by 100.  For example, for a $250,000 bond, enter 2500.

5.	In the Price box, enter 0.

Notes

If the bond was purchased at face value and the return of principal was accurately recorded, you have no capital gains or losses (except for commissions).

If the bond was purchased after issue, there may be a gain or loss.


Setting up a mutual fund account
Set up a mutual fund account

A mutual fund account tracks a single mutual fund with no cash balance. Setting up a mutual fund account is a two-step process:

Step One:	Set up the mutual fund account

Step Two:	Enter the opening balance of the mutual fund account.


Setting up a mutual fund account
Set up a mutual fund account

A mutual fund account tracks a single mutual fund with no cash balance. Setting up a mutual fund account is a two-step process:

Step One:	Set up the mutual fund account

1.	From the Activities menu, choose Create New Account.  The Select Account Type window appears.

2.	Choose Investment Account, then click OK.

3.	Enter a name for the investment account in the Account Name box.

4.	Select the "Account Contains a Single Mutual Fund" checkbox.

5.	(Optional) If this is a tax-deferred account for tracking your IRA or 403(b), select the "Tax-Deferred Account" checkbox.

6.	(Optional) Enter a description for the account.

7.	(Optional) Click Info to enter more information about your account.

8.	Click OK to set up the account.  Quicken now displays the Set Up Mutual Fund Security window appears.

9.	Enter information in the Set Up Mutual Fund Security window.

10.	Continue to Step Two below.

What happens

Investment categories, which all begin with an underline (for example, _DivInc. _IntInc), appear in your Category list, whether or not you selected standard categories.  You can't delete these categories or edit their names.  However, you can change their descriptions, which ordinarily appear in Quicken reports.

Step Two:	Enter the opening balance of the mutual fund account.


Enter the opening balance of a mutual fund account
Set up a mutual fund account

A mutual fund account tracks a single mutual fund with no cash balance. Setting up a mutual fund account is a two-step process:

Step One:	Set up the mutual fund account

Step Two:	Enter the opening balance of the mutual fund account.

We recommend that you enter every transaction you've made for the fund, starting with your initial purchase or acquisition.  If you don't enter all transactions, starting with the initial purchase or acquisition, Quicken cannot report accurate unrealized or realized gains.

1.	Complete Step One above.

2.	Open your new mutual fund account. From the Lists menu, choose Account, then choose your mutual fund account.

3.	In the account register (or in Portfolio View) click More on the button bar at the top of the window. Then choose Add Shares to Acct.  More detail>

4.	Enter the date.  More detail>

5.	Enter the name of the mutual fund.

6.	Enter the number of shares (up to four decimal places) you owned on the date you entered in the Date box.

7.	In the Price Per Share field, enter a share price in fractions or decimals. More detail>

8.	In the Total Cost Basis field, enter a dollar amount, including commission, fees, and load if you did not enter a price per share.

9.	(Optional) Enter a memo in the Memo box.

10.	Click OK to record the transaction.

11.	Repeat steps 3 through 10 for each security in the account.

12.	If you are entering all historical data, or setting up for this year, use the buttons on the button bar to enter all subsequent transactions for each security (such as purchases, sales, dividends, reinvestments).


Are my security lots still set up?

Quicken has improved lot handling. When you buy shares of a particular stock more than once, you no longer need to assign lots by giving each purchase a new security name. Quicken tracks each purchase for you automatically. When you want to sell shares, you can pick the shares from the lots.

You can customize Portfolio View to ensure that all lots you've set up by creating new security names are updated.  From Portfolio View:

1.	Click Custom.

2.	Click the Miscellaneous Tab.

3.	Select the "Copy Price Updates to All Securities with the Same Symbol" checkbox.  If you have assigned the same symbols to each lot of a security, all price histories will be updated when you update prices.


When I sell shares, my broker holds on to part of the cash
When I sell shares, my broker holds on to part of the cash for 30 days. How do I handle this in Quicken?

First sell the security, then do the following:

Enter a Transfer Cash Out transaction for the security:

1.	From the Activities menu, choose Portfolio View.  Or from an investment register, click Port View.  The Portfolio View window appears.  Make sure the account containing the security is displayed.

2.	Select the security in the list.  Use the Up or Down Arrow key to locate the security.

3.	Click More on the button bar, then select Transfer Cash Out.  The Transfer Cash Out form appears.

4.	Enter the dollar amount held by the broker, and select account to deposit the cash in.

5.	Click OK.

Later, when you receive the rest of your money:

•	Enter another Transfer Cash Out transaction and transfer out the remaining funds as described above.


Overview: Tracking 401(k) information
Overview: Tracking 401(k) Information in Quicken

If your 401(k) gives you a statement that shows every purchase, with the number of shares and price for that purchase, you can use a tax-deferred investment account to track the 401(k).

If your 401(k) does not give you a detailed statement, you don't have enough information to use an investment account.  Instead, use a tax-deferred asset account and update its value when you get your statement.  If you want to keep track of different funds that make up your 401(k), use a separate tax-deferred asset account for each fund.

Assigning 401(k) transactions to tax schedules:

Quicken lets you assign tax schedules for transfers into and out of accounts.  When you set up your 401(k) account(s), select "W-2 Salary" as the tax schedule for Transfers In.  Doing so ensures that your tax schedule reports, your Tax Planner data, and any transfer of tax information to a tax program (such as TurboTax) will be accurate.

How to...

Enter a 401(k) deduction from your paycheck

Track company matching funds for a 401(k)


Entering a 401(k) deduction from your paycheck
Enter a 401(k) deduction from your paycheck

To enter a 401(k) deduction from your paycheck:

1.	Set up an investment or asset account if you haven't already done so.  To determine the type of account you should set up, click here.

2.	Open the account in which you deposit your paycheck.

3.	In a blank transaction in your register, enter the word "Paycheck" in the Payee field.

4.	Click Splits.  On the first line of the split, enter "Salary" in the Category field and enter the gross amount of the paycheck in the Amount field.  The gross amount is the amount of your paycheck before deductions are taken.

5.	Enter the deductions from your pay on the following lines as negative amounts.  Assign them to the expense categories Tax:Fed, Tax:State, and Tax:Soc Sec.  Enter one deduction per line.  You may also have deductions for items such as local withholding, medical insurance, and state disability insurance.  Set up new expense categories for these as needed.

6.	Enter your 401(k) account name in the Category field and enter the amount of the contribution as a negative number.  Quicken transfers the money to the 401(k) account, where it increases the account balance.

7.	When you've entered all your deductions, check the amount in the Splits Total field at the bottom of the Splits window.  It should equal the net amount of your paycheck, which is the amount you actually receive.

8.	Click OK to close the Splits window.

9.	In the Payment or Deposit window, click Deposit.

10.	Click Record.

11.	(Optional) Choose Memorize Transaction (Ctrl+M) from the Edit menu to memorize this deposit.  If you memorize this paycheck deposit, the next time you need to record your paycheck you'll save time. You won't need to start from scratch, entering all the categories and amounts. You can recall the memorized transaction, make needed changes to amounts or categories, and record it.

What happens

If you set up the account as a single mutual fund account, Quicken automatically creates a buy transaction in the amount of the transfer (you will probably have to fine tune the price and share amounts after you receive your statement).  For a regular investment account, you need to enter the appropriate Buy transaction yourself.  You may wish to wait until you receive your statement to enter these transactions.

How to...

Memorize an existing transaction

Buy a security

Create a new account


Tracking company matching funds for a 401(k)
Track company matching funds for a 401(k)

Many companies contribute matching funds to their employees' 401(k) plans.  You can track these contributions separately from your own contributions in an investment or asset account.  To determine the type of account you should set up, click here.

If you are using an asset account, you need to enter only a split line in your paycheck transaction or one transaction in your asset account (depending upon how you learn about your companys contribution).  If you are using an investment account to track your company's contributions, do the following:

For each contribution, enter three transactions in your investment account register:

1.	Enter your company's contribution as a MiscInc action.

2.	Enter your company's contribution as a Buy action.

3.	Enter your own contribution as a Buy action.


Tracking company matching funds for a 401(k)
Track company matching funds for a 401(k)

Many companies contribute matching funds to their employees' 401(k) plans.  You can track these contributions separately from your own contributions in an investment or asset account.  To determine the type of account you should set up, click here.

If you are using an asset account, you need to enter only a split line in your paycheck transaction or one transaction in your asset account (depending upon how you learn about your companys contribution).  If you are using an investment account to track your company's contributions, do the following:

For each contribution, enter three transactions in your investment account register:

1.	Enter your company's contribution as a MiscInc action.

In this register field...	Do the following...
Date	Enter the date the contribution was made.
Action	Select MiscInc (miscellaneous income) from the Action list.
Security	Leave blank.
Amount	Enter the dollar amount of your company's contribution.
Category	Enter Comp401k as the category.
2.	Enter your company's contribution as a Buy action.

3.	Enter your own contribution as a Buy action.


Tracking company matching funds for a 401(k)
Track company matching funds for a 401(k)

Many companies contribute matching funds to their employees' 401(k) plans.  You can track these contributions separately from your own contributions in an investment or asset account.  To determine the type of account you should set up, click here.

If you are using an asset account, you need to enter only a split line in your paycheck transaction or one transaction in your asset account (depending upon how you learn about your companys contribution).  If you are using an investment account to track your company's contributions, do the following:

For each contribution, enter three transactions in your investment account register:

1.	Enter your company's contribution as a MiscInc action.

2.	Enter your company's contribution as a Buy action.

In this register field...	Do the following...
Date	Enter the date the contribution was made.
Action	Select Buy from the Action list.
Security	Enter the name of the security for your 401(k) plan.
Price	Enter the price from your statement.
Shares	Enter the number of shares shown on your statement.
Amount	Should be automatically calculated for you if the price and shares are entered.  However, if the price or shares are unknown, then enter the amount paid by your company, the price or share, and Quicken will calculate the third amount for you.
3.	Enter your own contribution as a Buy action.


Tracking company matching funds for a 401(k)
Track company matching funds for a 401(k)

Many companies contribute matching funds to their employees' 401(k) plans.  You can track these contributions separately from your own contributions in an investment or asset account.  To determine the type of account you should set up, click here.

If you are using an asset account, you need to enter only a split line in your paycheck transaction or one transaction in your asset account (depending upon how you learn about your companys contribution).  If you are using an investment account to track your company's contributions, do the following:

For each contribution, enter three transactions in your investment account register:

1.	Enter your company's contribution as a MiscInc action.

2.	Enter your company's contribution as a Buy action.

3.	Enter your own contribution as a Buy action.

In this register field...	Do the following...
Date	Enter the date the contribution was made.
Action	Select Buy from the Action list.
Security	Enter the name of the security for your 401(k) plan.
Price	Enter the price from your statement.
Shares	Enter the number of shares shown on your statement.
Amount	Should be automatically calculated for you if the price and shares are entered.  However, if the price or shares are unknown, then enter the amount paid by your company, the price or share, and Quicken will calculate the third amount for you.


Portfolio View and register show different market values
The Portfolio View window doesn't show the same market value as the register. What is wrong?

To correct the problem:

1.	Go to the Portfolio View window.

2.	Press CTRL+G and set the date to 12/31/99.

3.	Check the market prices. One or more security prices have changed since today's date.

4.	Click Prices.  The Price History window appears.

5.	Remove any prices with dates later than today's date.


What do the flat red bars on the investment graph indicate?
What do the red bars on the investment graph indicate?

The red bars show that there was no activity for your investments during the time period indicated.


Why doesn't the IRR on my report match the IRR shown in my investment graph?
Why doesn't the IRR shown on the report match the IRR on my investment performance graph?

The date range for the graph starts with the first day of the year and ends with the last day of the month.

The date range for the report is more flexible and can start and end on whatever days you choose. Change the date range of the report to match the date range of the investment graph.


One of my securities missing from the graph?
Why is one of my securities missing from the investment graph?

To add a security to the graph, you first need to re-create the graph. Then you need to add the security to the list of securities included in the graph.

To add a security to a graph:

1.	From the Reports menu, choose Graphs.

2.	Select Investments.

3.	Click Securities.  The Select Security to Include window appears.

4.	Mark the security (or securities) you want to add to the graph.

5.	Click OK.

6.	Click Create.  Quicken creates the graph. It now includes the securities you just selected.


Handling company spin-offs
How do I handle a company spin-off?

Overview

Click here

To record a company spin-off:

1.	Enter a RtrnCap action to decrease the cost basis of the parent company.

2.	Enter a Buy action to acquire your shares in the new company.

3.	Adjust the Price History of the new company.


Overview: Company Spin-Offs

A spin-off is a form of divestiture that results in a subsidiary or division becoming an independent company.  In a traditional spin-off, shares in a new entity are distributed to the parent corporation's shareholders on a Pro-Rata basis.

To record a spin-off, you need to decrease the cost basis of the parent company, and then buy shares in the new company.

Note: Every security used in a transaction in an investment account must be in the Security list.  To find out how to add securities to the Security List, click here.


Handling company spin-offs
How do I handle a company spin-off?

Overview

Click here

To record a company spin-off:

1.	Enter a RtrnCap action to decrease the cost basis of the parent company.

Recording this transaction will not decrease the number of shares in the parent company.

In register field...	Do the following...
Date	Enter the date of the spin-off transaction.
Action	Select RtrnCap from the Action list.
Security	Enter the name of the parent company.
Price	Leave blank.
Shares	Leave blank.
Amount	Enter the cash value of the shares you received in the new subsidiary.
2.	Enter a Buy action to acquire your shares in the new company.

3.	Adjust the Price History of the new company.


Handling company spin-offs
How do I handle a company spin-off?

Overview

Click here

To record a company spin-off:

1.	Enter a RtrnCap action to decrease the cost basis of the parent company.

2.	Enter a Buy action to acquire your shares in the new company.

Recording this transaction will bring the parent company cash back into alignment.

In this register field...	Do the following...
Date	Enter the date of the spin-off transaction.
Action	Select Buy from the Action list.
Security	Enter the name of the subsidiary company.
Price	The share price at the time of the company spin-off.
Shares	The number of shares your received in the spin-off.
Amount	Should be automatically calculated for you if the price and shares are entered.  However, if the price or shares are unknown, then enter the amount paid by your company, the price or share, and Quicken will calculate the third amount for you.
3.	Adjust the Price History of the new company.


Handling company spin-offs
How do I handle a company spin-off?

Overview

Click here

To record a company spin-off:

1.	Enter a RtrnCap action to decrease the cost basis of the parent company.

2.	Enter a Buy action to acquire your shares in the new company.

3.	Adjust the Price History of the new company.

1.	From the Activities menu, choose Portfolio View.

2.	From the View drop-down list, select Price Update.

3.	Select the subsidiary in the Portfolio View list.

4.	Click Prices.

5.	Click New.

6.	Enter the date for which you have a price.

7.	Enter the price for that date.

8.	Click OK.

9.	For every other date, click New, enter the date, enter the price, and click OK as above.


Which investment account type to use
What type of Quicken account should I use for my investment?

The table below suggests what type of Quicken account to use with different types of investments.  It is easier to use an asset account if an investment has a constant share price.

If you invest in...	Use this type of account...
One or more securities (stocks, bonds, and mutual funds) for which you want to track a cash balance in addition to the security (for example, a collection of investments through a brokerage firm)	Regular investment
A single mutual fund account that has no cash balance	Mutual fund investment
Real estate investment trusts (REITs) or partnerships	Regular investment
Unit trusts	Regular investment
IRA or Keogh accounts	Regular investment
Variable annuities	Regular investment
Cash management accounts (CMAs)	Bank for checking portion of the account; regular investment for everything else (use transfers for purchases, dividends, and so on)
Money market funds	Money Market (if you write checks); mutual fund investment (if you are interested in tracking rate of return)
CDs or Treasury bills	Regular investment or asset
Fixed annuities	Regular investment or asset
Collectibles and precious metals	Regular investment or asset
Real estate	Asset
Employer retirement plans (401(k))	Regular investment or asset.  For more information, click here.


Adding a transaction to the investment account register
Add a transaction to the investment account register

To enter an investment transaction using forms:

•	Click Buy, Sell, Income, or Reinvst on the register button bar, then fill in the form.

•	Click More on the register button bar. Choose a transaction (such as Add Shares to Account, StkSplit, Transfer Cash In), then fill in the form.

To add a transaction directly into the investment account register:

1.	Scroll to the end of the register to select a blank transaction.  Or choose New Transaction from the Edit menu.  If a blank transaction is already selected, this step is unnecessary. In the following steps, you can use the Tab key to move the insertion point from field to field.

2.	Change the date if you need to.

3.	Click in the Action field and select an action from the Action List drop-down list.  Or enter the name of the action as it appears on the list.

4.	Select a security from the Security drop-down list.  Or enter the name of the security as it appears on the list.

5.	Enter the price per share.

6.	Enter the number of shares.

7.	(Optional) Enter a memo.

8.	Click Record.

How to...

Change a transaction in the register


Deleting a security
Delete a security

You can delete a security only if you have no transactions for it.

To delete a security:

1.	From the Lists menu, choose Security.

2.	In the Security list, select the security you want to delete.

3.	Click Delete.

4.	Click OK to confirm that you want to delete the security.  Quicken removes the security from the Security list.


Deleting an investment goal
Delete a goal from the Investment Goal list

You cannot delete an investment goal if it is being used for any security.

To delete a goal from the Investment Goal list:

1.	From the Lists menu, choose Investment Goal.  The Investment Goal list.

2.	Select the goal you want to delete.

3.	Click Delete.

4.	Click OK to confirm that you want to delete the goal.  Quicken removes the goal from the Investment Goal list.


Deleting a security type
Delete a type from the Security Type list

You cannot delete a security type if it is being used for any security.

To delete a type from the Security Type list:

1.	From the Lists menu, choose Security Type.  The Security Type list.

2.	Select the security type you want to delete.

3.	Click Delete.

4.	Click OK to confirm that you want to delete the security type.  Quicken removes the security type from the Security Type list.


Setting up a regular investment account
Set up a regular investment account

A regular investment account tracks more than one security and can contain a cash balance.  Setting up a regular investment account, and specifying the securities it contains and their balances, is a three-step process:

Step One:	Set up the account.

Step Two:	Specify the securities within the account.

Step Three:	Enter the opening balance of each security within the account.


Setting up an investment account
Set up a regular investment account

A regular investment account tracks more than one security and can contain a cash balance.  Setting up a regular investment account, and specifying the securities it contains and their balances, is a three-step process:

Step One:	Set up the account.

1.	From the Activities menu, choose Create New Account.  The Create New Account window appears.

2.	Make sure the Guide Me checkbox is selected.

3.	Click the Investment button. The Create Investment Account window appears.

4.	Enter a name for the investment account in the Account Name box.  You may want to use the broker's name or a descriptive name, such as "John's IRA."

5.	(Optional) Enter a description.

6.	Click Next.

7.	If this is a tax-deferred account for tracking your IRA or 401(k), click Yes.

8.	Click Next.

9.	Choose the tax schedules to use for transfers into and out of this account from the Transfers In and Transfers Out drop-down lists.  More detail>

10.	Click Next.

11.	Click No. A regular investment  account can track more than a single mutual fund. It can contain many different kinds of securities, including mutual funds. Regular investment accounts can also maintain a cash balance.

12.	Click Done.

The investment categories, which all begin with an underline (for example, _DivInc _IntInc), appear on your category list automatically, whether or not you selected standard categories. These appear as soon as you add an investment account. You can't delete these categories or edit their names.

Step Two:	Specify the securities within the account.

Step Three:	Enter the opening balance of each security within the account.


More detail about...

Transfers In

Transfers Out


Specifying securities within an investment account
Set up a regular investment account

A regular investment account tracks more than one security and can contain a cash balance.  Setting up a regular investment account, and specifying the securities it contains and their balances, is a three-step process:

Step One:	Set up the account.

Step Two:	Specify the securities within the account.

After you've set up your investment account, you need to enter information about each security you plan to track in your account.

1.	From the Lists menu, choose Security.  The Security list.

2.	Click New to create a new security.

3.	Enter a name for the security in the Name box.

4.	(Optional) Enter a symbol if you plan to update your portfolio prices online or import price data from an ASCII file.

5.	From the Type drop-down list, select the security type appropriate for this security.  You can sort and subtotal investment reports and graphs by security type.

6.	(Optional) From the Goal drop-down list, select the appropriate goal for your security.

7.	(Optional) Enter the estimated annual income per share.

8.	Click OK to record this new security.

9.	Repeat steps 1 through 8 to set up each security in the account.

How to...

Set up a security type

Set up an investment goal

Step Three:	Enter the opening balance of each security within the account.


Entering the opening balance of a security
Set up a regular investment account

A regular investment account tracks more than one security and can contain a cash balance.  Setting up a regular investment account, and specifying the securities it contains and their balances, is a three-step process:

Step One:	Set up the account.

Step Two:	Specify the securities within the account.

Step Three:	Enter the opening balance of each security within the account.

We recommend that you record every transaction you've made for each security in the account, starting with your initial purchase or acquisition.  If you don't enter all transactions, starting with the initial purchase or acquisition, Quicken cannot report accurate unrealized or realized gains.

1.	Open the register for your new investment account.  From the Lists menu, choose Account, then choose your investment account.

2.	Click More on the button bar at the top of the window. Then choose Add Shares to Acct.  More detail>

3.	Enter the date.  More detail>

4.	Enter the name of the security.

5.	Enter the number of shares (up to four decimal places) you owned on the date you entered in the Date box.  More detail>

6.	In the Price per share box, enter a share price in fractions or decimals.  More detail>

7.	In the Total Cost Basis field, enter a dollar amount, including commission, fees, and load if you did not enter a price per share.

8.	(Optional) Enter a memo in the Memo box.

9.	Click OK to record the transaction.

10.	Repeat steps 2 through 9 for each security in the account.

11.	If you are entering all historical data, or setting up for this year, use the buttons on the button bar to enter all subsequent transactions for each security (such as purchases, sales, dividends, reinvestments).

12.	When you have entered all historical transactions for every security in this account, determine whether or not the ending cash balance in this account is correct.

If the ending cash balance is correct:

•	Your investment account is now set up.

If the ending cash balance is not correct:

•	See: Updating or entering the beginning cash balance for a regular investment account


Entering shares in this way allows you to:

•	Add shares you already own to your Quicken investment account.

•	Enter a purchase of shares for a date prior to when you started using Quicken, without deducting the money from a Quicken account.


If you are:

•	Entering all historical data, enter the date of your initial purchase or acquisition of the security.

•	Setting up for this year, enter 12/31 of last year.

•	Setting up fast, enter today's date.


If you are:

•	Entering all historical data, enter your actual initial cost (including commission, fees, and load). Leave the Price blank if you prefer to enter the total cost.

•	Setting up for this year or setting up fast, enter the cost per share (including commission, fees, and load) if you purchased the security all at one time. You can leave the Price field blank if you prefer.

To learn how to enter prices for various kinds of securities, click here.


Security type...	Number of shares to enter...
Stock or mutual fund	Actual number of shares
Bonds	Ten times the actual number of bonds (to match the way prices are quoted) Equivalently, enter one hundredth of the total face value of the bonds. For example, if you have two bonds with a total face value of $2,000, enter 20 in the Shares field.
Money market fund or CD	The total value
Collectible	One (1)
Precious metal	Number of ounces


Security type...	Price to enter...
Stock or mutual fund	Actual price per share
Bonds	One-tenth the actual market value of each bond (to match the way prices are quoted)
Money market fund or CD	One dollar
Collectible	Total value
Precious metal	Price per ounce


Updating or entering a beginning cash balance
Update or enter a beginning cash balance for a regular investment account

You might have a cash balance in your regular investment account. This balance can come from a transfer of funds from a bank account, sale of securities, or a cash dividend or interest.

If you are in the Portfolio View window, be sure that you have selected the single account you want to update.

To update or enter a beginning cash balance:

1.	From the Activities menu, choose Update Balances. Then choose Update Cash Balance.  The Adjust Cash Balance window appears.

2.	Enter the current cash balance and date.  Quicken adds a balance adjustment that updates your cash balance.

3.	Update the security prices in the Portfolio View window.  More detail>


If you are:

•	Setting up all historical transactions, or setting up since 12/31 of last year, you need to enter prices for the end of last year as well as for today.  Then you can track unrealized (paper) gains or losses and performance for the current year.

•	Setting up fast, you need to enter current prices for your securities.


Setting up an investment goal
Set up an investment goal

Assign an investment goal to a security so you can view your securities by goal in investment reports.

You may wish to add Retirement, Down Payment, Remodeling, or Medium Risk. You can use goals to designate industry groups (such as technology, energy, or consumer products).

You can also set up goals as a way of remembering who suggested you purchase the security (by using the name of your broker, friend, or coworker as the goal). Then you can create a report that tells you who is giving you the best advice.

To set up an investment goal:

1.	From the Lists menu, choose Investment Goal.  The Investment Goal list.

2.	Click New.

3.	Enter a goal in the Set Up Investment Goal window and click OK.

How to...

Delete an investment goal

Assign an investment goal to a security


Setting up a security type
Set up a security type

You must specify a security type for each security in the Security list.

In the Portfolio View window, Quicken sorts securities by type. You can also create investment reports that group securities by security type.

To set up a security type:

1.	From the Lists menu, choose Security Type.

2.	Click New.

3.	Enter the security type.

4.	Select whether you would like Quicken to display the prices as a decimal or a fraction.

5.	Click OK.


Setting up a security
Set up a security

Every security used in a transaction in an investment account must be in the Security list.

If you are in Portfolio View:

•	Click New. Then follow steps 3 through 8 below.

If you are not in Portfolio View:

1.	From the Lists menu, choose Security.

2.	Click New to create a new security.

3.	Enter the name of the security in the Name box.

4.	(Optional) Enter a symbol if you plan to update your portfolio prices online or import price data from an ASCII file.

5.	In the Type drop-down list, select the type appropriate for your security.

6.	(Optional)  In the Goal drop-down list, select the goal appropriate for your security.

7.	(Optional) In the Estimated Annual Income box, enter the amount per share you expect to earn.  This figure is displayed in some Portfolio View views.

8.	Click OK to record the new security.

How to...

Update your portfolio prices online

Import price data from an ASCII file

Learn more about ticker symbols

Learn more about securities

Delete a security

Set up a security type


Editing a security
Edit a security

Every security used in a transaction in an investment account must be in the Security list.

To edit a security:

1.	From the Lists menu, choose Security.

2.	Select a security in the list.

3.	Click Edit.

4.	Change any of the information about the security.

5.	Click OK.

How to...

Learn more about securities

Deleting a security


Update security prices

To update security prices:

1.	From the Activities menu, choose Portfolio View.

2.	(Optional) If you are recording prices for a different date, click the Down Arrow next to the date.   Quicken displays a calendar. Use it to choose a different date.

3.	Select the account or accounts you want to view (the current account, a different account, selected accounts, or all accounts).

4.	From the View drop-down list, select Price Update.  You can update prices in any of the views. Price Update provides the most relevant information.

5.	Select the security you want to update.

6.	Enter the new price in the Mkt Price column.  More detail>

How to...

Update your portfolio prices online

Edit the price history of a security

Delete a price for a security

Display prices and market value as of a given day

Import price data from an ASCII file

Save security prices from Prodigy's Quote Track


Entering a new price

Use this key...	To do this...
+ or -	Change the price to the next 1/8 (or .0125).
* (asterisk)	When a price is unchanged, press the asterisk key (*) to indicate that the price is correct for the current date.  (The "e" will disappear.)
	If you make a mistake changing a price and want to return to the estimated price previously displayed, press the asterisk (*) key.


Viewing prices and market value for accounts
View prices and market value for one account, selected accounts, or all accounts

To view the market value of your accounts:

1.	From the Activities menu, choose Portfolio View.  The Portfolio View window lists prices and values for your securities.

•	If it lists information about the current account, the drop-down list (located below the button bar) displays the account name.

•	If it lists information about selected accounts, the drop-down list displays "Selected Accounts."

•	If it lists information about all your accounts, the drop-down list displays "All Accounts."

2.	To look at a different account, or a different group of accounts, click Selected Accounts in the drop-down list. Then mark the accounts you want to view in the Customize Portfolio window.

How to...

View prices and market value as of a given day


Viewing prices and market value as of a given day
View prices and market value for a given day

In the Portfolio View window, you can view price and market value information about your securities as of any given day. If you haven't provided Quicken with prices for that day, it provides the most recent prices available.

Quicken provides information in the window on all securities in the selected account or accounts you've marked to include.

As of today:

1.	From the Activities menu, choose Portfolio View.

2.	Select the account or accounts you want to view (the current account, a different account, selected accounts, or all accounts).

3.	Select Price Update from the View drop-down list.

As of a different day:

1.	From the Activities menu, choose Portfolio View.

2.	(Optional) If you are recording prices for a different date, click the calendar button next to the date (located just below the button bar).  Quicken displays a pop-up calendar. Use it to choose a different date. You can also press Ctrl+G or click the date in the Portfolio View window.

3.	Select the account or accounts you want to view (the current account, a different account, selected accounts, or all accounts).

4.	Select Price Update from the View drop-down list.

While viewing the price history of a security:

•	In the Price History window, double-click a date.  You return to the Portfolio View window. The date is changed to the date you just selected in the Price History window.

How to...

Add to the price history of a security

Change the market prices of securities as of a given day

Edit the price history of a security

Learn more about the Security list

View prices and market value for one account or all accounts

View the price history of a security


Viewing the price history of a security
View the price history of a security

The price history of a security includes prices from three sources: investment transactions that include a security price, prices you enter in the Portfolio View window, and prices you enter directly in the Price History window.

To view the price history of a security:

1.	From the Activities menu, choose Portfolio View.

2.	Select the security which has a price you want to update.  Use the Up or Down Arrow key to locate the security.

3.	Click Prices.  Quicken displays the price history for the security you selected.

How to...

Add to the price history of a security

Edit the price history of a security

View prices and market value as of a given day


Adding to the price history of a security
Add a price for a security

When you add a price, the new information is added to the Portfolio View window. No changes are made to transactions already entered in an investment register.

To add a price for a security:

1.	From the Activities menu, choose Portfolio View.

2.	From the View drop-down list, select Price Update.  You can add prices in any of the views. Price Update provides the most relevant information.

3.	Select the security which has a price history you want to update.  Use the Up or Down Arrow key to locate the security or click to select the security.

4.	Click Prices.

5.	Click New.

6.	Enter the first date for which you have a price.

7.	Enter the price for that date.

8.	Click OK.

9.	For every other date, click New, enter the date, enter the price, and click OK as above.

How to...

Edit the price history of a security

View prices and market value as of a given day

View the price history of a security


Editing the price history of a security
Edit the price history of a security

When you change or delete a price, the new information is added to the Portfolio View window. No changes are made to transactions already entered in an investment register.

To edit the price history of a security:

1.	From the Activities menu, choose Portfolio View.

2.	From the View drop-down list, select Price Update.  You can edit prices in any of the views. Price Update provides the most relevant information.

3.	Select the security which has a price history you want to edit.  Use the Up or Down Arrow key to locate the security.

4.	Click Prices.

5.	Select the date which has a price you want to change.

6.	Click Edit.

7.	Enter another price for the date.

8.	Click OK.

How to...

Add to the price history of a security

View prices and market value as of a given day

View the price history of a security


Deleting a price for a security
Delete a price for a security from the Price History list

When you change or delete a price, the new information is added to the Portfolio View window. No changes are made to transactions already entered in an investment register.

To delete a price for a security from the Price History list:

1.	From the Activities menu, choose Portfolio View.

2.	From the View drop-down list, select Price Update.  You can delete prices in any of the views.

3.	Select the security which has a price history you want to update.  Use the Up or Down Arrow key to locate the security or click to select the security.

4.	Click Prices.

5.	Select the date you want to delete.

6.	Click Delete.

7.	Click OK to confirm the deletion.

How to...

Add to the price history of a security

View prices and market value as of a given day

View the price history of a security


Changing a security type
Change the type of a security

To change the type of a security:

1.	Choose Security from the Lists menu.

2.	Select the security from the list.

3.	Click Edit.

4.	Select a different type from the Type drop-down list.

5.	Click OK.


Assigning an investment goal to a security
Assign an investment goal to a security

If you assign an investment goal to a security, you can subtotal investment reports by goal.

You may wish to add Retirement, Down Payment, Remodeling, or Medium Risk. You can use goals to designate industry groups (such as technology, energy, or consumer products).

You can also set up goals as a way of remembering who suggested you purchase the security (by using the name of your broker, friend, or coworker as the goal). Then you can create a report that tells you who is giving you the best advice.

To assign an investment goal to a security:

1.	From the Lists menu, choose Security.

2.	From the Security list, select the security you want to add an investment goal to.

3.   Click Edit.

4.	Select a goal from the Goal drop down-list.

5.	Click OK.


About securities

A security in Quicken is a single investment that has a value and (usually) a share price.

These are securities:

•	a stock

•	a bond

•	a money fund

•	a mutual fund

•	a certificate of deposit (CD)

•	a unit trust

•	an annuity

•	a real-estate investment trust (REIT).

These can also be securities:

•	a collectible

•	a precious metal.

How to...

Set up a security


Deleting a memorized investment transaction
Delete a memorized investment transaction

To delete a memorized investment transaction:

1.	From the Lists menu, choose Memorized Investment Trans.

2.	Select a transaction from the list.

3.	Click Delete.  Quicken removes the transaction from the list.


Using a memorized investment transaction
Use a memorized investment transaction

To use a memorized investment transaction:

1.	Select the blank transaction at the bottom of the investment register (unless you want to replace an existing transaction).

2.	Choose Memorized Investment Trans. from the Lists menu.

3.	Double-click the transaction you want to use.  Quicken enters the transaction in the currently active investment register.  If you select an existing transaction in the register, Quicken overwrites it with the memorized transaction.


Investment Account Register window
Investment Account Register

This is the register for the current investment account.  It shows, in chronological order, all of the security transactions you have recorded in the account.

How to...

Set up a regular investment account

Learn about the Action list

Add a transaction to the investment account register

Change a transaction in the investment account register

Delete a transaction

Print a register to a file

Print a register on a printer

Update prices and market value

Update the balance of an investment account

What you see

Register button bar

Fields in investment account registers

Account Selector

Ending Share/Cash Bal

Market Value

Record, Restore, Edit, Port View buttons

Hide/Show button


Register button bar

This button...	Does this...
Buy	Displays a form for recording the purchase of a security.
Sell	Displays a form for recording the sale of a security.
Income	Displays a form for recording the cash received from dividends, interest income, miscellaneous income (such as tax-free interest), and capital gains distributions (long or short).
Reinvst	Displays a form for recording a reinvestment of dividends or interest income.
More	Displays a list of actions. You select an action; then Quicken displays the form for recording your action.


Record, Restore, Edit, Port View buttons

This button...	Does this...
Record	Records the transaction.
Restore	Restores the transaction to its recorded state.
Edit	Displays a window where you can edit the selected transaction.
Port View	Takes you to the Portfolio View window.


Ending Shares/Cash Bal

Quicken automatically keeps track of your share balance in a mutual fund account and cash balance in other investment accounts.


Market Value

The market value of the account, based on the most recent prices Quicken knows.


Action list (investments)
Action list

The Action list in an investment account register lists actions affecting individual securities or an entire investment account. You select an action from the list to describe each transaction in the register.  You can also choose investment actions by clicking the buttons on the button bar at the top of the register.

To display the Action list:

•	Click in the Action field in an investment account register.

What you see

Buy

BuyX

CGLong

CGLongX

CGShort

CGShortX

Div

DivX

IntInc

MargInt

MiscExp

MiscInc

ReinvDiv

ReinvInt

ReinvLg

ReinvSh

Reminder

RtrnCap

Sell

SellX

ShrsIn

ShrsOut

StkSplit

XIn

Xout


Buy

Buy security with cash already in account (regular investment accounts only).


BuyX

Buy security with cash transferred into account from another account (regular investment accounts and mutual fund accounts).


CGLong

Receive cash from long-term capital gains distribution (regular investment accounts only).


CGLongX

Receive cash from long-term capital gains distribution, then transfer cash out of account (regular investment accounts and mutual fund accounts).


CGShort

Receive cash from short-term capital gains distribution (regular investment accounts only).


CGShortX

Receive cash from short-term capital gains distribution, then transfer cash out of account (regular investment accounts and mutual fund accounts).


Div

Receive cash from dividend (regular investment accounts only).


DivX

Receive cash from interest or dividend, then transfer cash out of account (regular investment accounts and mutual fund accounts).


IntInc

Receive cash from interest income (regular investment accounts only).


MargInt

Use cash from account to pay for interest on margin loan (regular investment accounts only).


MiscExp

Use cash from account to pay for miscellaneous expense (regular investment accounts only).


MiscInc

Receive cash in your account from a miscellaneous source (regular investment accounts only).


ReinvDiv

Reinvest in additional shares of the security with money from dividend or income distribution (regular investment accounts and mutual fund accounts).


ReinvInt

Reinvest in additional shares of the security with money from interest income (regular investment accounts and mutual fund accounts).


ReinvLg

Reinvest in additional shares of the security with money from long-term capital gains distribution (regular investment accounts and mutual fund accounts).


ReinvSh

Reinvest in additional shares with money from short-term capital gains distribution (regular investment accounts and mutual fund accounts).


Reminder

Create a reminder of some pending event associated with the account. Works with Billminder, Quicken's automatic reminder feature (regular investment accounts and mutual fund accounts).


RtrnCap

Receive cash from return of capital (regular investment accounts only).


Sell

Sell security and increase cash in account (regular investment accounts only).


SellX

Sell security and transfer cash out of account (regular investment accounts and mutual fund accounts).


ShrsIn

Add shares to account.  When used in a regular investment account, ShrsIn does not affect the cash balance.  When used in a mutual fund account, ShrsIn increases the share balance.


ShrsOut

Remove shares from account.  When used in a regular investment account, ShrsOut does not affect the cash balance.  When used in a mutual fund account, ShrsOut decreases the share balance.


StkSplit

Change number of shares as a result of stock split (regular investment accounts and mutual fund accounts).


XIn

Transfer cash into account (regular investment accounts only).


XOut

Transfer cash out of account (regular investment accounts only).


Create Opening Share Balance window
Create Opening Share Balance

Quicken reports performance and unrealized gain for the period starting with the date on which you begin tracking the mutual fund. For this reason, the best way to create an accurate cost basis for reports is to enter all transactions from the time you acquire the fund. This is the only way to report an accurate capital gain if you sell the fund.

However, if you are setting the account up in Quicken at a later time and are in a hurry, you can create an opening share balance as of today or as of the end of last year.

This window gives you both options, the more accurate way and the quicker way. If you choose the quicker way, you can enter a complete transaction history in the register later.

If you track the fund from the end of last year, your income reports for this year will be accurate. If you track it from today and you had income from the fund earlier in the year, the reports cannot be accurate.  You will have to add the income received earlier to the income shown in the report.

To set up the account quickly:

•	Fill in the number of shares, enter the price per share as of today or as of the end of last year, change the date if necessary, and click OK.

To set up the account more accurately:

•	Click Cancel and enter the transaction history of the account up to the present.

What you see

Number of shares

Price per share


Number of shares

Enter the number of shares, to the nearest 0.0001, as of the date you specified.


Price per share

Enter the price, from the newspaper or a statement, as of the date you specified.


Update Cash Balance/Update Share Balance window
Update Cash/Share Balance

This is where you match the balance of an investment account to the balance on the account statement. This window bypasses the reconciliation process.

To update the cash balance of an investment account:

•	Enter the cash balance listed in the balance statement and click OK.

To update the share balance of an investment account that is not a mutual fund:

•	Enter the security to adjust (or its first few letters), enter the number of shares listed in the statement, and click OK.

To update the share balance of a mutual fund account:

•	Enter the number of shares listed in the balance statement, change date if necessary, and click OK.


Portfolio View window
Portfolio View

This window lists all the securities in the selected account or accounts.  From here you can enter an investment transaction, change security prices, create a graph showing value and price history for a particular security, and create a report on all transactions related to a security.

To enter an investment transaction:

•	Click a button (Buy, Sell, Income, Reinvst) and then fill in the form.

•	Click More to display more transaction types (such as Add Shares to Account, Stock Split, Transfer Cash In).  Choose a transaction and then fill in the form.

How to...

Set up a security

Track and update security prices

Update your portfolio prices online

Handle transactions and use the investment forms

Manage your securities

Change what the columns display

Customizing Portfolio View

Grouping your securities within Quicken accounts

What you see

The Portfolio View window

The Portfolio View column headings


Portfolio View window
The Portfolio View window

What you see

Buy, Sell buttons

Income button

Reinvst button

Report button

Close button

Prices For Date

Account

View

Securities

Columns in Portfolio View

New, Edit, Delete buttons

Prices button

Price/Value History graph

Custom button

Graph button

Register button

Update button


Common investment transactions

How to...

Buy a security

Sell a security

Enter investment income

Enter reinvestments

Enter a stock split or a stock dividend

Buy on margin

Buy and redeem US Savings Bonds

Redeem Treasury bills

Record zero-coupon bonds

Sell short

Enter options

Handle a Ginnie Mae or other bond

Enter a return of principal


Buy, Sell buttons

Click to record the purchase or sale of a security. Quicken displays a form for entering the transaction.

For instructions on how to fill out the form, see:

Buy/Sell shares


Income button

Click to record investment income received from dividends, interest, miscellaneous income (such as tax-free income) and capital gains distributions (long or short).

For instructions on how to fill out the form, see:

Record income


Reinvst button

Click to record purchases of additional shares of a security with money paid to you by that security as dividend or interest income or capital gains distributions.

For instructions on how to fill out the form, see:

Reinvest income


More button

Click to perform any of these transactions:

Transaction:	Description:	For instructions, see:
ShrsIn	Add shares to account.	Add shares to account
ShrsOut	Remove shares from account.	Remove shares from account
MargInt	Enter a margin interest expense.	Margin interest
MiscExp	Record miscellaneous expense.	Record expense
Reminder	Enter a reminder expense.	Reminder
RtrnCap	Record a return on capital.	Return of capital
StkSplit	Record a stock split.	Stock split
XIn	Transfer cash in.	Transfer cash in/ transfer cash out
XOut	Transfer cash out.	Transfer cash in/ transfer cash out


Report button

Select a security in the Portfolio View window. Then click Report to see a listing of all transactions for that security.


Prices For Date

The preset date is today's date. To change the date so you can look at your portfolio as of a different date, click the calendar button next to the date, then select the date you'd like to use from the pop-up calendar.


View

Portfolio View window provides six ways of looking at your investments:

View:	What you see:
Holdings	The "big picture" of your investments. Choose it when you want to assess the total value of your portfolio.
Performance	How well each security is performing. Look at the ROI (return on investment) percentage.
Valuation	How much an investment is worth compared to how much it has cost you.
Price Update	Shows the dollar gain or loss due to changes in price. Enter current prices here.
Custom 1 and 2	Specialized views you design.
For descriptions of the column headings, see: Portfolio View column headings.


Account

You can look at your securities in one account, selected accounts, or all accounts. From the drop-down list, select the account or accounts you'd like to view.


Close button

Click to close the Portfolio View window.


Custom button

Click to change various settings, such as which accounts and securities to display in the Portfolio View window.  For instructions, see: Customizing Portfolio View.


New, Edit, Delete buttons

Click these buttons to add a new security, or edit or delete an existing security.


Prices button

Click Prices to open the Price History list. You see all the prices you've entered for the security you selected.  For instructions for adding to the price history, see: Add a price for a security.


Graph button

Click to show/hide the Price/Value History graph, which displays the changes in price and value for the currently security in Portfolio View.


Register button

Click to go to the investment register. You must have a single account selected.


Update button

Click to use the Portfolio Price Update service.

Portfolio Price Update is an Intuit online service that automatically updates the prices of all securities (up to 250) in your Quicken investment portfolio.  Prices are 15 minute delayed.


Securities

A list of all the securities contained in this account or accounts. For each security, the first five columns show the:

•	Security name

•	Security type you've assigned to each security

•	Symbol you've assigned to this security

•	Number of shares you've purchased

•	Latest price you've recorded.

These columns are the same for all views (Holdings, Performance, Valuation, Price Update, Custom 1 and Custom 2).   For each view, the remaining three columns are different.  For descriptions of these views, click here.

How to...

Customize Portfolio View


Price History window
Price History for: (selected security)

This window lists the most recent price of the selected security and all previous prices recorded for it by date. You can add a new price, change or delete one of the prices listed, or display updated prices and market values for your securities as of the date of one of the previous prices.

When you add, change, or delete a price, the new information is added to the Portfolio View window. No changes are made to transactions already entered in an investment register.

To view the Portfolio View window for the date of one of the prices listed:

•	Double-click the date in the list.  Quicken takes you to the Portfolio View window for the date.

To add a new price:

•	Click New, fill in the window that appears, then click OK.

To change a price:

•	Select a price, click Edit, fill in the window that appears, then click OK.

To delete a price:

•	Select a price, click Delete, then click OK in the box asking you to confirm the deletion.

What you see

Price History button bar


Price History button bar

This button...	Does this...
New	Displays a window where you can add a new price.
Edit	Opens a window where you can edit the selected price.
Delete	Deletes the selected price. Deleting a price does not affect transactions in your register.
Print	Prints the Price History list.
Close	Closes the window.


Change Price For: window
Change Price for:

Changes the price of the security listed in the title bar as of today's date.

To change the price:

•	Use the + or - key to change the old price to the new one and click OK.  Each key press increases or decreases the price 1/8 (0.125).  For big changes, it may be faster to type the new price over the price shown.


New Price For: window
New Price for:

Gives the security listed in the title bar a new price as of any date.

To give a new price:

•	Enter the price, change the date, and click OK.


Set Up/Edit Investment Goal window
Set Up / Edit Investment Goal

This is where you set up or edit an investment goal to use in an investment account.  You can use a goal to indicate the industry sector of a security.  You can also set up goals as a way of remembering who suggested you purchase the security (by using the name of your broker, friend, or coworker as the goal). Then you can create a report that tells you who is giving you the best advice.

To set up or edit an investment goal:

•	Enter or edit a goal name, then click OK.

What you see

Goal


Goal

You can have up to 15 goals. Names of investment goals can be up to 15 characters including spaces -- for example, Retirement, Down Payment, Remodeling, or Medium Risk.


Set Up/Edit Security Type window
Set Up / Edit Security Type

This is where you set up or edit a security type to use in an investment account.

To set up or edit a security type:

•	Enter or edit a security type name, select a price display format, then click OK.

What you see

Type

Price Display


Type

You can have up to 15 types. Names of security types can be up to 15 characters long including spaces. For example, Money Fund, T-Bill, Tax-Free Bond, Option, REIT, Unit Trust.


Price Display

Fractions are displayed as multiples of 1/16.


Set Up/Edit Security window
Set Up / Edit Security

This is where you name and describe a security you are using in an investment account.  When you set up a mutual fund account, Quicken displays the Set Up Mutual Fund Security window and fills in the Name and Type boxes.

To set up or edit a security you are using in an investment account:

•	Enter or edit the name of the security, its type, a symbol and a goal (optional), then click OK.

What you see

Name

Symbol

Type

Goal

Tax-Free Security

Est Annual Income


Name

If you change the name, Quicken automatically makes the change in any transactions containing it.


Symbol

Enter a symbol if you plan to update your portfolio prices online or import price data from an ASCII file.


Type

Select a security type. The types listed are Bond, CD, Mutual Fund, and Stock. For information on adding a type to the list, click here.

You can sort and subtotal most investment reports by type.


Goal

Select an investment goal. The goals listed are College Fund, Growth, High Risk, Income, and Low Risk. For information on adding a goal to the list, click here.

You can sort and subtotal most investment reports by goal.


Tax-Free Security

Select this option if this is a tax-free security.  Tax-free securities are filtered out of capital gains reports.


Est Annual Income

Enter the amount you expect to earn (the expected annual dividend per share).  This figure is displayed in some Portfolio View views.


Security List

This list shows the securities available for investment accounts in the current file by name, type, symbol (if known) and goal.

How to...

Set up a security

Edit a security

Delete a security

Print this list

What you see

New, Edit, Delete, Report, Close buttons


Security List buttons

This button...	Does this...
New	Displays a window where you can set up new securities.
Edit	Displays a window where you can edit information about a security.
Delete	Removes a security from the list permanently.  You cannot delete a security if Quicken has any transactions for it.
Report	Creates a report on the currently selected security.
Close	Closes the list.


Security Type List

This list shows the types used to classify your securities. It covers all accounts in the current file.

How to...

Set up a security type

Delete a type from the Security Type list

Print this list

What you see

New, Edit, Delete, Close buttons


Security Type List buttons

This button...	Does this...
New	Displays a window where you can set up new types.
Edit	Displays a window where you can edit information about a type.
Delete	Removes a security type from the list permanently.  You cannot delete a security type while it is being used in a security.
Close	Closes the list.


Investment Goals list
Investment Goal List

This list shows the goals you can use to group your investments in investment reports. It covers all accounts in the current file.

How to...

Set up an investment goal

Delete a goal from the Investment Goal list

Print this list

What you see

New, Edit, Delete, Close buttons


Investment Goal List buttons

This button...	Does this...
New	Displays a window where you can set up new goals.
Edit	Displays a window where you can edit information about a goal.
Delete	Removes a goal from the list permanently.
Close	Closes the list.


Memorized Investment Transactions list
Investment Transaction List

This list shows the memorized investment transactions available for the investment accounts in the current file.

How to...

Use a memorized investment transaction

Delete a memorized investment transaction

Memorize and recall transactions

Print this list

What you see

Delete, Close buttons


Memorized Investment Transactions List buttons

This button...	Does this...
Delete	Removes a transaction from the list permanently.
Close	Closes the list.


Portfolio View Settings window
Portfolio View Settings

This is where you change the Portfolio View window to display the information you need in the way you want to see it.

To customize Portfolio View:

1.	As necessary, click the tabs at the top of the window.

2.	Change any of the following Portfolio View settings:

Accounts

Securities

Miscellaneous

Custom Views

3.	Click OK.


Accounts

Select which accounts Quicken includes when you choose Selected Accounts from the drop-down list in the Portfolio View window.


Securities

Initially, the Portfolio View displays all securities in the selected accounts, whether they are open or not. (Open means to hold the security or to have a short position in it as of the date shown at the top of the Portfolio View window.)

•	To always hide a security: select it and click Hide Always.

•	To always show a security: select it and click Show Always.

•	To show all securities in all accounts, only if they are open: click the Accounts tab, and click Mark All. Then click the Securities tab, select each security and click Default, and select the Hide Securities You Do Not Own checkbox.

•	To show all securities in all accounts, whether they are open or not: follow the instructions for showing all securities with open positions in all accounts (see above), but clear the Hide Securities You Do Not Own checkbox.


Miscellaneous

Return Calculations

Layout

Copy Price Updates to All Securities with the Same Symbol

Copy Price History to DOS Format on Exit

Confirm Investment Transactions from Forms


Return Calculations

Option:	What it does:
Entire history	Uses all transactions entered in Quicken.
This year	Calculates returns from this year only.
Last 365 days	Calculates returns for previous year, starting 365 days ago and ending today.
From...	Calculates returns from the date entered through today.


Layout

Normally, the Portfolio View window lists each security's name, security type, and symbol.  You can hide the type and symbol columns if you want, to give more space to the other columns.


Copy Price Updates to All Securities with the Same Symbol

You may want to separate different trades in the same security.  For example, you and your spouse invest in the same security but want to keep your transactions separate.  You can do this using two slightly different security names with the same symbol.

When this option is selected, if you change the price of one security, Quicken copies the price to the other security with the same symbol.


Copy Price History to DOS Format on Exit

If you use both Quicken for DOS and Quicken for Windows, you can update security prices for the same file in either program.  You price updates in Quicken for DOS are visible in Quicken for Windows.  However, the reverse isn't normally true.  To see Quicken for Windows price updates in Quicken for DOS, select this checkbox.


Confirm Investment Transactions from Forms

When you fill in an investment form, Quicken asks you to confirm your entries before leaving the form.


Custom Views

You can choose column headings for the last three columns in Portfolio View.  More detail>

To learn what a column heading means, click its name in the list below.

Avg Cost	Total Market Value
Cost basis	Total % Gain
Est Income	Type
Gain/Loss	% Cost
Inv. Yield	% Gain Loss
Last Price	% Income
Mkt Price	% Invested
Mkt Value	% MktVal
MktVal Chg	% Yield
ROI	$ Income
Sym	$ Invested
	$ Return


Here are some examples:

If you want to create a "market" view:

•	Choose these column headings: Gain/Loss, % Gain/Loss and Mkt Value

If you want to create a "gain" view:

•	Choose these column headings: Est Income, Yield, and Mkt Value.


Customizing Portfolio View

You can change the Portfolio View window to display the information you need in the way you want to see it.

To customize Portfolio View:

1.	From the Portfolio View window, click Custom.  The Portfolio View Settings window.

2.	As necessary, click the tabs at the top of the window.

3.	Change any of the following settings:

Accounts

Securities

Miscellaneous

Custom Views

4.	Click OK.


Grouping securities within accounts
Grouping your securities within one or more Quicken accounts

Here are some recommendations for grouping your securities within one or more Quicken accounts.

Security type...	Recommendation...
Brokerage accounts	Use a separate, regular investment account for each actual brokerage account or other managed account you have. If you have a cash management account (CMA) with a broker, set up the checking part as a Quicken bank account. Set up a regular investment account for the rest of the investments in the brokerage account.
IRAs	Use a separate investment account for your IRA and your spouse's IRA. (Even if you do not now have securities with fluctuating prices in your IRA, it's a good idea to set up your IRA as a regular investment account, as you may want to change the investment later.) If you have more than one security in your IRA, put them in the same regular investment account, even if the securities are managed by different mutual fund managers. If you transfer an IRA security from one manager to another, Quicken can still track the performance of your IRA as a whole.
Securities you hold directly	You may wish to set each one up as a separate, regular investment account. Then you can easily reconcile each account with its statement. You can also lump the securities in a single, regular investment account, especially if you have other investment accounts. Then you can subtotal these securities by account in reports and graphs and track them as a group.


Columns in Portfolio View

For each Portfolio View (Holdings, Performance, Valuation, Price Update, Custom View 1 and Custom View 2) the last three column headings are different. You choose the column headings for the Custom Views; Quicken provides preset column headings for the other views.

To learn what a column heading means, click its name in the list below.

Avg Cost	Total Market Value
Cost basis	Total % Gain
Est Income	Type
Gain/Loss	% Cost
Inv. Yield	% Gain Loss
Last Price	% Income
Mkt Price	% Invested
Mkt Value	% MktVal
MktVal Chg	% Yield
ROI	$ Income
Sym	$ Invested
	$ Return


Avg. Cost

Average cost of each share of the security.

This equals the total cost of all currently held shares of a security (the cost basis) divided by the number of shares currently held.


Cost basis

Total cost of all currently held shares of a security, including income reinvested in the security.


Est Income

Estimated annual income from each security's interest, dividends and distributions. This is the per share estimate you entered when setting up the security multiplied by the number of shares.


Gain/Loss

Gain or loss (in $) of all currently held shares of the security. This is the market value of the shares minus the cost basis.


Inv. Yield

Yield on investment is the estimated income (as you specified when setting up the security) divided by the dollar amount invested (including reinvestments).


Last Price

Market price before the most recent price was entered.


Mkt Price

Most recent price entered for this security.

If today's price has not been entered, Quicken puts an "e" for Estimated next to the price.  If the price has gone up since the previous price entered, Quicken puts an up arrow next to the price.  If the price has gone down since the previous price entered, Quicken puts an down arrow next to the price.


Mkt Value

Market value of your holdings in each security, equal to the market price per share multiplied by the number of shares you hold.


MktVal Chg

Increase or decrease in the market value as a result of the latest price change.


ROI

Return on investment, defined as $ Return divided by $ Invested. ROI indicates how well a security has performed.

It is the total profit you'd make from a security if you sold your shares in it today. The amount is expressed as a percentage of the amount you invested in the security.

ROI takes account of the current market price and includes previous sales of the security and income received from the security.

For example, let's say you bought shares for $100, received $5 in dividends and today the shares are worth $120. The $ Invested is $100, the $ Return is $25 ($5 dividends plus the increase in market value). The ROI is 25/100 = 0.25, displayed as 25%.

Note. If you change the return date, the ROI will change, since either the $ Invested amount or $ Return amount will not be the same if you are using a different date.


Sym

The security's symbol, which is used if you plan to update your portfolio prices online or import price data from an ASCII file.


Total Market Value

Total market value of all securities you hold in selected accounts.


Total % Gain

Percentage increase in the total market value of the selected account or accounts. This is the current market value less the cost basis, of all currently held securities divided by the cost basis.

A negative value indicates a loss.


Type

The security type, as you specified when setting up the security.


% Cost

Calculated by dividing the Cost Basis of a given security by the Total Cost Basis for all of the securities in the displayed account.


% Gain/Loss

Gain or loss of all currently held shares of the security (the market value minus the cost basis).


% Income

Total dollar amount received from income from a security (interest, dividends, capital gains distributions, not including reinvested income) divided by the cost basis.


% Invested

Amount you have invested in a security expressed as a percentage of what you have invested in all securities.


% MktVal

Market value of a security expressed as a percentage of the total market value of all your securities.


% Yield

Estimated income per share divided by the current market price per share.


$ Income

Total dollar amount received from a security (including reinvested income), in dollars.


$ Invested

Actual dollar amount that you have invested in a security to date, including any expenses for that security (but excluding reinvestments).

When you change the period over which Quicken calculates returns, Quicken calculates $ Invested to be the market value of the security at the starting date plus the dollar amount you have invested in the security since that date (excluding reinvestments). In this way, $ Invested indicates the total cost of the security to you since the starting date.


$ Return

The total return of a security since you invested in it. This is the current market value plus the income taken out as cash plus cash received from sales of shares, minus the amount invested.

For example, let's say you bought 100 shares for $5 each, for a total of $500. You later sold 50 shares for $6 each for a total of $300. Now the market price of your 50 remaining shares is $7 for a total of $350.

The $ Return is $350 (current market value) plus $300 (sales) minus the $500 you invested for a total return of $150.

Note that reinvestments are not explicitly added to $Return, because they contribute to the market value, which is a part of $Return.


Move shares in window
Add Shares to Account

Use this form if you're receiving shares of a security and didn't use cash to purchase them.  You can also use this form if you're setting up the opening balances for securities in your investment account.  For information about setting up opening balances, see: Setting up the opening balance of each security.

Add Shares to Account actions increase your number of shares without subtracting cash from any Quicken account.

To fill in the form:

1.	Enter the number of shares received.

2.	Enter the actual initial cost per share (including commission, fees, and load).  The cost per share depends on whether you're receiving the shares as a gift or as an inheritance.  More detail>

3.	(Optional) Enter a memo about the transaction.


Initial cost per share

Inherited shares	The cost basis of inherited shares is generally the value of the shares on the date that the decedent died or alternative valuation date. When you receive the inherited shares, record the cost per share on that date.
Gift shares	The cost basis of shares you received as a gift depends on the value of the shares on the date of the gift and the price that the giver paid for the shares, as well as your sale price if you sell the shares.


Buy/Sell Shares window
Buy/Sell Shares

Use this form to record the cash purchase and sale of securities. You pay for a security either with cash in the same account or with cash you transfer in from another account, such as your checking account.

When you're selling a security, you keep the cash from the sale in the same account or transfer it to another account.

To fill in the form:

1.	Enter the number of shares you bought or sold.

2.	Enter the price.

3.	Enter the Commission/Fee.  More detail>

4.	(Optional) Select the account you'd like the amount of the sale deducted from (for purchases) or deposited in (for sales).  If you leave this box empty, Quicken deducts the cost of the security from this account (for purchases) or deposits the amount of the sale (for sales) in this account.

5.	(Optional) Enter a memo about the transaction.

6.	(Optional) Click Lots to select the security lot or lots you'd like to sell.  If you have bought shares of the same security more than once, and now want to sell just a portion of your accumulated shares, you can choose which shares to sell. If you don't specify particular shares, Quicken assumes you're selling the first shares you purchased (known as First In, First Out or FIFO).


Commission/Fee

Commission	If there is an explicit commission added to the purchase or subtracted from the sale proceeds, enter it here.
Loads	A "load" (sometimes called a "front-end load") is a commission built into the purchase price of a mutual fund or other security.   A load fund has two share prices: a "Buy" or "Offer" price and a "Sell" or net asset value (NAV) price. Enter the purchase of a load fund at the "Buy" price with no additional commission. The true market value of your investment is based on the "Sell" or NAV price.  If you want to correct the market value, update the price of the fund.  For information about updating prices, see: Updating security prices.


Reinvest income window
Reinvest Income

Use this form to record purchases of additional shares of a security with money paid to you by that security as dividend or interest income or capital gains distribution.

Use the Reinvest Income action to enter reinvestments of dividends, interest income, and capital gains distributions (short or long).

To fill in the form:

1.	Enter the amount (for example, the amount of the dividend, the amount of the capital gain) and the number of shares received.

2.	Enter the price per share.  Reinvestments work like two transactions: Dividend and Buy. Reinvestments increase your cost basis, because each reinvestment counts as a purchase of shares.

3.	(Optional) Enter a memo about the transaction.


Move shares out window
Remove Shares from Account

Use this form if you're giving shares that are now in a Quicken account to someone (as a gift, for example).

To fill in the form:

1.	Enter the number of shares you are removing.  Quicken reduces the number of shares in your account and records a sale with a capital gain of zero. No cash is added to any account.

2.	(Optional) Enter a memo about the transaction.


Record income window
Record Income

Use this form to record the cash received from dividends, interest income, miscellaneous income (such as tax-free interest), and capital gains distributions (long or short).

For reinvested dividends or interest, including interest that stays in a CD or dividends that stay in a money market fund, use the Reinvestment form.

To fill in the form:

1.	Enter the amount (Quicken provides five options: Dividend, Interest, Capital Gain Distribution Short, Capital Gain Distribution Long, and Miscellaneous).

2.	(Optional) Select the account you'd like the funds deposited in.  If you leave this box empty, Quicken deposits the income amount in this account.

3.	(Optional) Enter a memo about the transaction.


Record expense window
Miscellaneous Expense

Use this form to record an expense associated with this security.

To fill in the form:

1.	Enter the amount.

2.	Select a category from the drop-down list.

3.	(Optional) Enter a memo about the transaction.


Stock split window
Stock Split

When a security splits, you are given additional shares. Use this form to record this split.

When you record a stock split, Quicken recalculates your average cost per share. Quicken doesn't recalculate the price. If you want to correct the market value, update the price. Quicken doesn't change transactions previously recorded.

For information about updating prices, see: Updating security prices.

To fill in the form:

1.	Enter numbers to express the ratio of new shares to old.  For example, if the stock split is 2:1, enter 2 in the New Shares box and 1 in the Old Shares box.

If you received a stock dividend, which is a dividend issued in the form of shares instead of cash, enter it as a stock split (provided it is nontaxable). For the ratio of new shares to old, add 1 to the number of dividend shares given per existing share.  For example, if you receive 0.05 shares per existing share, enter 1.05 to 1 as the ratio of new shares to old shares.

2.	Enter the new price per share.

3.	(Optional) If you enter a miscellaneous amount, you can assign a category to it. Select a category from the Category for Misc. drop-down list.

4.	(Optional) If you want to transfer the income to a different account, select an account from the Transfer Account drop-down list.

5.	(Optional) Enter a memo about the transaction.


Reminder window
Reminder

Use this form to enter a reminder. For example, you might want to sell some shares of a particular stock next Tuesday. A reminder message is displayed each time you start Quicken.

To fill in the form:

1.	Enter your reminder message (up to 18 characters).

2.	(Optional) Enter a memo about the transaction.


Margin interest window
Margin Interest

Use this form to record interest you pay your broker on a margin loan. A margin loan is money you borrow to pay for a security you are buying.

To fill in the form:

1.	Enter the interest amount.

2.	(Optional) Enter a memo about the transaction.


Return of capital window
Return of Capital

Use this form to record cash received from return of capital. A return of capital is money paid to you as total or partial repayment of the money you invested.

Return of capital differs from a sale in that you are not the one who initiates the return of capital. For example, a mortgage-backed security (such as a Ginnie Mae) returns capital when the underlying mortgages pay off principal, which is passed on to you.

To fill in the form:

1.	Enter the amount you received.

2.	(Optional) Enter a memo about the transaction.

Notes

Return of capital is not the same as capital gains distribution.

Recording a return of capital lowers your cost basis.

To ensure that the market value also declines with a return of capital, you must update the price of the security. This new price equals the current price times the FACTOR (which is supplied in your statement).

How to...

Update security prices


Move cash in/ move cash out window
Transfer Cash In/Out

Use this form to record transfers of money in or out of this investment account.

To fill in the form:

1.	Enter the amount you are transferring in or out.

2.	Select the account you are either taking money out of or depositing money into.

3.	(Optional) Enter a memo about the transaction.


Writing checks from an investment account
Write checks from an investment account

To write checks from an investment account:

1.	Create a bank account.  You'll use this account for tracking transactions and writing checks.  Give the account a meaningful name. For example, if this account is a cash management account, name the account invest cma.

2.	Enter an opening balance of 0.00.

•	When you need to transfer cash, dividends, or handle other transactions, use the correct investment form (or select the action from the Action list in the investment register) and select the bank account (in this example, invest cma) as the Transfer Account.

•	When you need to write a check or record a transaction to cover investment expenses for this account, enter this information in the bank account.

The transfers you enter and the checks you write from this account should result in a 0.00 ending balance.


Specific identification of Shares window
Specific Identification of Shares

This is where you choose the specific shares you want to sell.  You can choose whether you want to sell all the shares in a particular lot, or just some of those shares.

To sell a particular lot (or part of a lot):

1.	Select the lot from which you wish to sell shares.

2.	Click Use All to include ALL available shares from the lot, OR

3.	Click Use Part to manually specify how many shares to include.  Quicken displays the number of shares you plan to sell.

What you see

Use All, Use Part, Clear buttons


Use All, Use Part, Clear buttons

This button...	Does this...
Use All	Sells all the shares in the selected lot.
Use Part	Sells only a part of the shares in the selected lot.  Enter the number of shares you want to sell in the Specify Quantity window.
Clear	Deselects any lots you have marked to sell in this transaction


Specify Quantity window
Specify Quantity

This is where you sell part of the shares in the selected lot.

To sell part of the shares in the selected lot:

•	Enter the number of shares you want to sell, then click OK.


Quicken 3 for Windows and Quicken 7 for DOS window
Using Quicken for Windows and Quicken for DOS

Quicken has found that you are using both Quicken for DOS and Quicken for Windows and you have recently updated your security prices using Quicken for DOS.

Click OK if you want to merge the price history data you've entered in Quicken for DOS with the existing price history data in Quicken for Windows.

Quicken will update the Quicken for Windows price history.

If you plan to continue updating prices in both Quicken for Windows and Quicken for DOS, you need to make a change to the Quicken Options.

1.	From the Edit menu, Options, then click General.

2.	Select the Save Price History in DOS Quicken format checkbox.

When this option is selected, Quicken saves your price history data in Quicken DOS format. This feature allows you to use both versions Quicken for DOS and Quicken for Windows, and keeps the price histories for each version in synch.

3.	Click OK.


Price/Value History Graph

The Price/Value History graph plots the price history and value of the selected security over time.  To display the graph, click Graph in Portfolio View, or double-click a security in the Price History window.

What you see

Price (blue line)

Value (green line)

Start and End dates

Adjust for Splits

Show Mkt Value

To display the exact value or price of your shares on a particular date:

•	Move the cursor over the lines in the graph.  As with all Quicken graphs, whenever you see the QuickZoom magnifying glass you can click your mouse to show the actual price or value in the graph.

How to...

Print this graph


Price (blue line)

The blue line represents the change in price over time of the currently selected security, plotted against the legend at the left of the graph.


Value (green line)

The green line represents the change in market value over time of your shares in the selected security, plotted against the legend at the right of the graph.

This line appears only if the Show Mkt Value option is selected in the Graph Price History window.


Start and End dates

Change these dates to control the period of time plotted on the graph.


Adjust for Splits

•	Selecting this option adjusts the price of the security in the graph to account for any stock splits.

•	Clearing this option shows the actual market price of the security in the graph, regardless of any split activity.


Show Mtk Value

Clear this option to plot only the price history (blue line) of the selected security on the graph.  Select this option to plot the market value (green line) of the selected security.


*Using QuickFill and memorizing transactions (contents)
Using QuickFill and memorizing transactions

To search for a Help topic, click the Search button above.

Overview

Click here

How to...

Use QuickFill

Memorize transactions

Set up and use memorized transaction groups

Common Questions

Can I change how QuickFill behaves?

What is a locked transaction?

Quick Tips

Assigning a memorized transaction to an icon


Use QuickFill

Complete entries automatically

Use drop-down lists to complete an entry

Memorize transactions automatically

Recall memorized transactions automatically

Change how QuickFill behaves


Memorize Transactions

Memorize and recall transactions manually

Change a memorized transaction

Delete a memorized transaction

Turn automatic memorization of transactions off and on


Using QuickFill
Overview: Using QuickFill

QuickFill is Quicken's automatic data entry feature.  QuickFill gives you the ability to enter and recall transactions with just a few keystrokes.  With it you can:

•	Memorize each new transaction

•	Recall a memorized transaction when you tab out of the Payee field in a register or check

•	Have Quicken open the drop-down list when you place the insertion point in a field.

How to...

Have Quicken complete entries for you

Fill in entries from drop-down lists

Have Quicken memorize all new transactions

Enter memorized transactions automatically

Change how QuickFill behaves


What is a locked transaction?

Memorized transactions can be locked or unlocked.  Locked transactions aren't changed if you enter another transaction with the same payee, and unlocked transactions are changed.

For example

Suppose you usually withdraw $40 from an ATM.  You memorize a transaction called "ATM Withdrawal" with an amount of $40, and lock it.  When you type "ATM Withdrawal" in your register, QuickFill fills in the rest of the transaction.  Then, if you changed the amount and recorded the new transaction, the memorized transaction would still retain the old amount.  If the transaction were not locked, the new transaction would overwrite the old one in the Memorized Transactions list.

Transactions that you memorize manually are locked by default.  If you upgraded from an earlier version of Quicken, all your previously memorized transactions are also locked.  Transactions that are memorized automatically are not locked.

How to...

Lock and unlock transactions


Completing entries automatically
Complete entries automatically

Through QuickFill, you can have Quicken fill in fields for you in the register or the Write Checks window.  All you have to do is type the first few letters in the field and Quicken fills in the rest.

For this feature to work, the QuickFill option "Automatic Completion of Fields" must be turned on.  More detail>

To complete entries automatically:

1.	Begin typing in the field.  Automatic completion works with Num, Payee, Category, Class, Security, investment action, and transfer account names.  When you enter transfer account names, you don't have to type the brackets.

2.	If the name that Quicken adds to the field is incorrect, keep typing until the correct name appears.

3.	If you want to add a subcategory, type a colon (:) after Quicken enters the category name.  Then type as many letters as you need to make Quicken fill in the correct subcategory name.

4.	If you want to include a class name, type a slash (/) after Quicken enters the category or subcategory name.  Then type as many letters as you need to make Quicken fill in the correct class.

Tip

Once Quicken has placed a name in a field, you can quickly see if there are any other names that begin with the letters you typed.  Press Ctrl+Down Arrow to see the next matching name.  To see the previous matching name, press Ctrl+Up Arrow.  You can also use the plus and minus keys on the numeric keypad.


Using drop-down lists to complete an entry
Use drop-down lists to complete an entry

For this feature to work, the QuickFill option "Drop Down Lists Automatically" must be turned on.  More detail>

To use drop-down lists to complete an entry:

1.	Tab into one of these fields:

Num	Payee	Category
Action (Investment registers only)	Security (Investment registers only)	Account (Investment registers only)
2.	When you tab into a field that has a list, the list automatically drops down.  When you click a name in the list, Quicken adds the name to the field.


To turn this feature on or off:

1.	Display any Quicken register, or the Write Checks window.

2.	Click Options on the button bar.  The Options window appears.

3.	Click the QuickFill tab at the top of the window.

4.	Select or clear "Automatic Completion of Fields."

5.	Click OK.


To turn this feature on or off:

1.	Display any Quicken register, or the Write Checks window.

2.	Click Options on the button bar.  The Options window appears.

3.	Click the QuickFill tab at the top of the window.

4.	Select or clear "Drop Down Lists Automatically."

5.	Click OK.


Memorizing transactions automatically
Memorize transactions automatically

For this feature to work, the QuickFill option "Automatic Memorization of New Transactions" must be turned on.  More detail>

What happens

•	If you enter a payee who is not already on the Memorized Transaction list, Quicken adds the transaction to the list when you record the transaction.

•	If you enter a transaction for a payee who is already on the Memorized Transaction list, Quicken updates the memo, amount, and category with the new information you just entered.

•	This feature works only for new transactions.  If you are editing a transaction you entered previously, no memorization occurs.


To turn this feature on or off:

1.	Display any Quicken register, or the Write Checks window.

2.	Click Options on the button bar.  The Options window appears.

3.	Click the QuickFill tab at the top of the window.

4.	Select or clear "Automatic Memorization of New Transactions."

5.	Click OK.


Recalling memorized transactions automatically
Recall memorized transactions automatically

Through QuickFill, you can recall a transaction merely by typing a few letters in the Payee field.

For this feature to work, the QuickFill option "Automatic Recall of Transactions" must be turned on.  More detail>

To recall a memorized transaction:

1.	Begin typing in the Payee field.

2.	If the name that Quicken adds to the Payee field is incorrect, keep typing until the correct name appears.

3.	Press Tab.  When you press Tab, Quicken's automatic recall feature fills in the rest of the transaction and places the insertion point in the Amount field.  If necessary, you can change the amount of the transaction before you record it.


To turn this feature on or off:

1.	Display any Quicken register, or the Write Checks window.

2.	Click Options on the button bar.  The Options window appears.

3.	Click the QuickFill tab at the top of the window.

4.	Select or clear "Automatic Recall of Transactions."

5.	Click OK.


Memorizing a transaction
Memorize and recall transactions manually

If you have turned off QuickFill's automatic memorization and recall features, you can still memorize (or recall) a transaction if you need to.  If you use a particular transaction frequently, you can also add an icon for the transaction to the iconbar.

How to...

Memorize an existing transaction

Memorize a new transaction

Recall a memorized transaction

Add an icon to represent a transaction


Memorizing an existing transaction manually
Memorize an existing transaction manually

When an existing transaction is not on the Memorized Transaction list, you can add it to the list, even when the QuickFill options for memorization are turned off.

To memorize an existing transaction manually:

1.	Open the window that contains the transaction (either the register or the Write Checks window).

2.	Go to the transaction you want to memorize.

3.	From the Edit menu, choose Memorize Transaction.

4.	Click OK.  Quicken memorizes all the information in the transaction except the date.


Memorizing a new transaction manually
Memorize a new transaction manually

When the QuickFill option Automatic Memorization of New Transactions is turned off, you can still memorize new transactions on a case-by-case basis.

To memorize a new transaction manually:

1.	From the Lists menu, choose Memorized Transaction.

2.	Click New on the button bar.

3.	Select the type of payment.

4.	Enter the payee, amount, memo, and category as if you were entering the transaction in the register.

5.	If you want to split the amount of the transaction between two or more categories, click Splits, enter the category information, then click OK.

6.	If you are going to pay the transaction with Intuit checks and you want a printed address to appear on the checks, click Address.  Enter the address and click OK.

7.	Click OK to add the new transaction to the Memorized Transaction list.


Recalling a memorized transaction manually
Recall a memorized transaction manually

When the QuickFill option Automatic Memorization of New Transactions is turned off, you can manually memorize new transactions on a case-by-case basis.

To recall a memorized transaction manually:

1.	Scroll to the bottom of the register or Write Checks window and select a new, blank transaction.

Caution. If you select a transaction you've already entered, Quicken will overwrite the transaction with the transaction you select from the Memorized Transaction list.

2.	From the Lists menu, choose Memorized Transaction.

3.	Select the transaction you want to use, then click Use.  Quicken enters the details of the transaction in either the register, or if you are writing checks, in the Write Checks window.

4.	(Optional).  Review the transaction and make any changes you want.  For example, you may want to change the amount of the transaction.

5.	Click Record.


Changing a memorized transaction
Change a memorized transaction

You can edit and change memorized transactions just as you do any other kind of transaction.

To change a memorized transaction:

1.	From the Lists menu, choose Memorized Transaction.

2.	Select the transaction you want to change and click Edit.

3.	Make the changes you want in any of the fields.

4.	Click OK.

Tip

If all you want to do is change the amount of the transaction, it's easier to edit the amount after you've recalled the transaction into the register.


Deleting a memorized transaction
Delete a memorized transaction

You can delete memorized transactions that you no longer use.  Deleting a memorized transaction removes the transaction from the Memorized Transaction list.

To delete a memorized transaction:

1.	From the Lists menu, choose Memorized Transaction.

2.	Select the transaction you want to delete and click Delete.

3.	Click OK to confirm that you want to delete the memorized transaction.


Locking and unlocking memorized transactions
Lock and unlock memorized transactions

Transactions that you memorized manually are locked by default, but you can change the locked status of any transaction.

To lock or unlock a transaction:

1.	From the Lists menu, choose Memorized Transaction.  The Memorized Transactions List appears.  A "locked" graphic in the Locked column means the transaction is locked.

2.	Click in the Locked column of any transaction to lock or unlock it.


Memorized Transactions list
Memorized Transaction List

This is where you recall a memorized transaction and enter it in either the register or the Write Checks window.  Every noninvestment memorized transaction appears in the list.

How to...

Memorize and recall transactions manually

Change a memorized transaction

Delete a memorized transaction

Turn automatic memorization of transactions off and on

Use an amortized payment in a transaction

Print a copy of this list

What you see

Memorized Transaction list button bar

Lock button

Calendar button

View Locked Items Only


Memorized Transaction list button bar

This button...	Does this...
New	Adds a new transaction to the list.  A window appears where you can enter the details of the new transaction.
Edit	Edits the transaction you selected.  A window appears where you can edit the details of the transaction.
Delete	Deletes the transaction you selected.
Use	Enters the details of the selected transaction in either the register, or if you are writing checks, in the Write Checks window.
Report	Creates a report listing all transactions containing the payee name used in the transaction you selected.
Close	Closes the list.


Lock button

Select a transaction from the list, then click the Lock button to lock or unlock it.  Locked transactions don't change if you memorize another transaction with the same payee.

More about...

Locked transactions


Calendar button

Select a transaction from the list, then click the Calendar button to display or exclude it from the list of transactions on the Financial Calendar.


View Locked Items Only

Click to view only locked transactions.  Locked transactions don't change if you memorize another transaction with the same payee.

To lock or unlock a transaction:

•	Select a transaction, then click the Lock button, or simply click in the transaction's Locked column.

More about...

Locked transactions


Create/Edit Memorized Transaction dialog box
Create/Edit Memorized Transaction

To create or edit a memorized transaction:

1.	Enter or change the information, as necessary.

2.	To split the transaction, click Splits.  The Splits window appears.  Enter the information as you would for a split transaction in your register.

3.	To print checks with Quicken, click Address.  You can enter the payee address here. When you print this check, Quicken inserts the address on the check face.

4.	Click OK.

What you see

Type

Payee

Memo

Category

Amount

Cleared

Splits, Address buttons


Cleared

If you are creating a new memorized transaction, leave it uncleared (the checkbox should be empty).

If you want to change the cleared status of an existing memorized transaction, select or clear the checkbox as necessary.


*Using Intuit online services (contents)
Using Intuit online services

To search for a Help topic, click the Search button above.

Overviews

Setting up your modem

Registering your software online

Portfolio Price Update

How to...

Set up your modem

Register your Quicken software online

Sign Up for Portfolio Price Update

Use Portfolio Price Update

Change your Portfolio Price Update account


Set up your modem

Let Quicken set up your modem

Change basic modem settings

Change advanced modem settings

Solving communications problems


Sign Up for Portfolio Price Update

Free trial updates

How to sign up


Use Portfolio Price Update

Updating your portfolio prices

About ticker symbols

Preventing a price update for a security

Advanced options


Change your Portfolio Price Update account

Changing your billing information

Changing your password

Canceling Portfolio Price Update


Advanced options for Portfolio Price Update

Using with more than one Quicken file

Using on more than one computer

Signing up for additional accounts


Update Portfolio Prices command (Online menu)
Update Portfolio Prices command

If you have not yet signed up for the Portfolio Price Update service:

•	Choosing this command updates prices for the securities in your Quicken investment portfolio up to 3 times at no charge.

OR

If you have used your 3 free updates, choosing this command prompts you to sign up for the Portfolio Price Update service.

If you have already signed up for the Portfolio Price Update service:

•	Choosing this command prompts for your online account password, and then updates prices for the securities in your Quicken investment portfolio.

If you have already signed up for the Portfolio Price Update service, but not in the current Quicken file:

•	Choosing this command gives you a choice of setting up a new online account for the current Quicken file, or entering your existing online account number and password.

How to...

Sign up for Portfolio Price Update

Use Portfolio Price Update


Change Online Account: Change Password command (Online menu)
Change Online Account: Change Password command

Opens the Change Password window.  Use the window to set a new online account password for protecting access to your Portfolio Price Update account.

How to...

Change your password


Change Online Account: Change Account Info command (Online menu)
Change Online Account: Change Account Info command

Opens a window that tells you how to change your Portfolio Price Update account information (including name, address, and billing information).


Software Registration command (Online menu)
Software Registration command

Opens the Registration window in which you can register your Quicken 4 for Windows software online.  Online registration is an alternative to mailing the registration card that came in your Quicken package.

How to...

Register your Quicken software online


Set Up Modem command (Online menu)
Set Up Modem command

Opens the Set Up Modem window.  In this window, you make or change basic modem settings to use with the Intuit online services (Portfolio Price Update, IntelliCharge, Intuit Marketplace, and online software registration).

Quicken can set up your modem automatically.  See Letting Quicken set up your modem

How to...

Change basic modem settings

Change advanced modem settings


Setting up your modem to use Intuit online services
Overview: Setting up your modem to use Intuit online services

To register your Quicken software online or use the Intuit online services in Quicken, your modem must be set up correctly.

The modem setup procedures for Intuit online services and the CheckFree service are different.

For Intuit online services, Quicken sets up your modem automatically.  For the CheckFree service, you must set up the modem yourself.

Modem setup for Intuit online services

Quicken sets up your modem automatically the first time you choose Set Up Modem from the Online menu or initiate one of the Intuit online services (Portfolio Price Update, IntelliCharge, Intuit Marketplace, or Software Registration).

If Quicken's automatic settings work for your modem:

•	You are able to connect to Intuit, and you don't have to change your modem settings manually.

If Quicken's automatic modem settings do not work for your modem:

•	You are unable to connect to Intuit.  You need to change individual modem settings in the Set Up Modem window (and possibly the Advanced Modem Setup window).

If you change Quicken's automatic modem settings and then wish to restore them:

•	Use Autoconfigure.  (You should also use Autoconfigure when you buy and install a new modem.)

How to...

Let Quicken set up your modem

Use Autoconfigure

Set up your modem

Set up your modem for CheckFree


Modem

A device that lets your computer send and receive information over a telephone line.  A modem can be either internal (inside your computer) or external (outside your computer).


Letting Quicken set up your modem
Let Quicken set up your modem

Quicken sets up your modem automatically for Intuit online services (Portfolio Price Update, IntelliCharge, Intuit Marketplace, and online software registration).  If the automatic settings are correct and Quicken is able to make an online connection to Intuit, you don't have to change your modem settings manually.

To let Quicken set up your modem:

1.	Make sure your modem is turned on.

2.	From the Online menu, choose Set Up Modem.  Or, initiate an online activity (Update Portfolio Prices, Get IntelliCharge Data, Intuit Marketplace, or Software Registration).

Automatic modem setup happens only the first time you choose Set Up Modem or initiate one of these online activities.

To set up your modem, Quicken does the following:

•	Scans your communications ports to find your modem.

•	Queries your modem and makes the modem settings it determines are correct.

•	Displays a status message while modem setup is going on. (Setup typically takes about 20 seconds.)

•	Displays a window in which you can enter a dialing prefix, if you need one.

Note:  To test Quicken's automatic modem settings, try online software registration.  If you are able to register online, the modem settings are correct.


Using Autoconfigure
Use Autoconfigure

Autoconfigure is a button in the Set Up Modem window.  When you click Autoconfigure, Quicken performs its automatic modem setup procedure.

To set up your modem, Quicken does the following:

•	Scans your communications ports to find your modem.

•	Queries your modem and makes the modem settings it determines are correct.

•	Displays a status message while it sets up your modem.

•	Displays a confirmation message when Autoconfigure is completed.

When to use Autoconfigure

•	If you change Quicken's automatic modem settings and then wish to restore them.

•	When you use an Intuit online service, then buy and install a new modem.

How to use Autoconfigure:

1.	From the Online menu, choose Set Up Modem.

2.	In the Set Up Modem window, click Autoconfigure.


Changing basic modem settings
Change basic modem settings

If Quicken's automatic modem settings are not correct and you are unable to make an online connection to Intuit, you must change one or more of the settings yourself.  Check each setting, following the instructions below, and change any that may be incorrect.

To change your modem settings:

1.	From the Online menu, choose Set Up Modem.

2.	From the Port drop-down list, select the port to which your modem is connected.

3.	From the Speed drop-down list, select the speed (baud rate) of your modem.

4.	You can skip the access number.  A toll-free number has already been set for use within the United States (including Alaska, Hawaii, and Puerto Rico).

If you need to connect to an Intuit online service while you are traveling outside the United States, you must enter a special phone number in the Access Number box.  See International access.

5.	(Optional)  In the Dialing Prefix box, enter any prefix (such as 9, or *70,) required to reach an outside line or turn off "call waiting".  Or select a prefix from the drop-down list.

6.	Select the correct dial type:  Tone if you have a touch-tone phone line or Pulse if your phone line works only with rotary-dial phones.

7.	Click OK.


Changing advanced modem settings
Change advanced modem settings

Quicken's automatic modem setup enters advanced settings for your modem; you can adjust them if necessary.

Caution:  Do not change the advanced modem settings unless you understand the changes you are making.

To change advanced modem settings:

1.	From the Online menu, choose Set Up Modem.

2.	In the Modem Setup window, click Advanced.

3.	Enter the desired characters into the Reset String box.  Or edit any existing characters.

4.	Enter the desired characters into the Initialization String box.  Or edit any existing characters.

If your modem can accept a maximum of 40 characters and you enter more than 40, Quicken sends the string as two or more commands, each beginning with AT.

5.	Click OK.


Modem Autoconfigure

This window appears while Quicken is automatically configuring (setting up) your modem.

During Autoconfigure, Quicken does the following:

•	Scans your communications ports to find your modem.

•	Queries your modem and makes the settings it determines are correct.

You can follow these steps in this status window.  Autoconfigure typically takes about 20 seconds.

When Autoconfigure is completed, Quicken displays a confirmation message .

To stop Autoconfigure:

•	Click Cancel.


Modem Autoconfigure Completed

This window appears after Quicken has completed Autoconfigure.

After you click OK to close the window, be sure to set a dialing prefix in the Dialing Prefix box, if you need one.

However, you should not change any of the other modem settings until you test them by making an online connection to Intuit.  If the connection is successful, the modem settings are correct and you do not need to change them.

You can test the settings by initiating an activity that makes an online connection to Intuit.  These activities include:

•	Online software registration.  (Choose software Registration from the Online menu.)

Registering your Quicken software online is the easiest way to test your modem settings.  And you enjoy the benefits of becoming a registered Quicken user.

•	Intuit Marketplace  (Choose Intuit Marketplace from the Online menu.)

If you want to order Quicken supplies or other Intuit software, try the convenience of online ordering with Intuit Marketplace.

•	Portfolio Price Update.  (Choose Update Portfolio Prices from the Online menu.)

If you have a Quicken investment account, try the Portfolio Price Update service.  Your first three updates are free.


Changing basic modem settings
Set Up Modem - Intuit Online Services

In this window, you make the basic settings that allow your modem to work with the Intuit online services.

To change your modem settings:

1.	Check each setting in the window.

2.	Change any setting that is incorrect.  For some settings, you choose an option from the drop-down list.  For others, you can type in a setting.

What you see

Port

Speed

Access Number

Dialing Prefix

Dial Type

Advanced button

Autoconfigure button

International Access

If you need to connect to an Intuit online service while you are traveling outside the United States, you must enter a special phone number in the Access Number box.  See International access.


Port

The port is a connection or socket used to connect your modem to your computer.  Each port has a name.

From the Port drop-down list, select the serial port to which your modem is connected.  If you are unsure which port to select, try COM2 first.  If you have a mouse using COM2, try COM1 for your modem.  You can also ask your computer dealer which port your modem is attached to.


Speed

From the Speed drop-down list, select the number that corresponds to the modem speed (baud rate) required by your modem.  2400 is a common speed.  Many newer modems support faster speeds, up to 19,200 and above.

This setting represents the speed used between your computer and your modem, which may be faster than the speed used between your modem and the remote modem.  For this reason, the appropriate setting for a 9600 or 14,400 baud modem is 19,200.  If Quicken sets your modem speed to 19,200, try it to see if it works before you reset it to a lower speed.

Caution:  Do not set your modem speed above 19,200 unless you have a 16550 UART.  Setting your modem speed too high may result in communications problems.


Access Number

A toll-free phone number (represented by the text U.S. number (free call)) is already set in the software.

If this number is temporarily unavailable, Quicken automatically dials a second time.  If the number is busy or fails to answer, wait while the modem dials again. (It may take up to 60 seconds for the modem to redial.)

If you inadvertently type over any part of the access number text, you should restore it by selecting U.S. number (free call) again from the drop-down list.


Advanced button

Opens the Advanced Modem Setup window, where you can enter advanced settings for your modem.  Automatic modem setup enters these settings for you, but you can adjust them if necessary.


International access to Intuit online services;
International access to Intuit online services

If you need to connect to an Intuit online service from outside the United States, you must enter a series of numbers in the Access Number box.  Any (or all) of the following may be required:

•	Numbers (if any) required to dial out from a hotel

•	Country code or other numbers required to dial to the United States

•	The Intuit international access number (415-328-1725)

This phone number is a toll call to Intuit.

•	Your calling card number (if you are charging the call to a calling card)

To enter the international numbers:

1.	Delete all the text in the Access Number box.

2.	In the Access Number box, enter the numbers you need in the required order.

Enter a comma wherever you need a "pause character." (A comma tells the modem to pause for 2 seconds before sending the next number.)

To restore the U.S. local number:

1.	Click the Down Arrow to the right of the Access Number box.

2.	Select U.S. number (free call).

That text once again appears in the Access Number box.


Dialing Prefix

A dialing prefix is any combination of numbers and characters that that should be sent to your modem before it dials the phone number.  You can either type a dialing prefix or select it from the drop-down list.

Dialing prefix	What it does
9,	Often used to obtain an outside line from an office.
*70,	Disables "call waiting" service for a touch-tone phone.  Prevents an incoming call from disrupting your modem session.
1170,	Disables "call waiting" service for a rotary (pulse) phone.
The comma after the dialing prefix is a "pause character."  It tells the modem to pause for 2 seconds after the dialing prefix and before dialing the phone number.

Note: The prefix to disable "call waiting" may be different in your area.  Call your phone company to confirm the correct code.


Dial Type

Select Tone if you have a touch-tone (push-button) phone line. Most telephone lines are touch-tone. Select Pulse if you have a rotary-dial phone line.


Advanced Modem Setup

In this window, you can enter advanced settings for your modem.  Automatic modem setup enters these settings for you, but you can adjust them if necessary.

Caution:  Do not change the advanced modem settings unless you understand the changes you are making.

To change advanced modem settings:

•	Enter the desired characters into the appropriate box.  Or edit any existing characters.

What you see

Reset String

Initialization String

To restore the automatic settings that Quicken made for you:

1.	Click Cancel to return to the Set Up Modem window.

2.	Click Autoconfigure.


Reset String

The reset string can reset your modem to its factory settings or to the "power on" settings (settings that take effect when your modem is turned on).  The reset string is set before the initialization string.

The reset string should probably be one of the following:

Setting	Description
AT&F	Factory default.  Autoconfigure sets AT&F as a default for all modems that support it.
ATZ	Power on.  There are two reasons to use this setting: • You have an older modem (1200 baud) that does not support AT&F. • You have stored settings in your modem's permanent memory that you want left unchanged.  (These must be settings that do not affect Quicken.)
none               (leave the box blank)	You have set up your modem outside of Quicken and you want those settings left unchanged.


Initialization String

During Autoconfigure, Quicken creates an initialization string that sets up your modem to fit Quicken's requirements.  You should not delete any characters from the initialization string unless you have problems making an online connection to Intuit.  However, you can add characters to the initialization string to customize your modem for your system and your preferences (such as modem speaker volume).

In this box, enter any special letters, digits, and other characters to be sent to the modem.  (Most modem commands begin with the prefix AT.)  Refer to your modem documentation for codes specific to your modem.

If your modem can accept a maximum of 40 characters and you enter more than 40, Quicken sends the string to the modem as two or more commands, each beginning with AT.


Changing the modem's speaker volume
Change the modem's speaker volume

To adjust the volume of the modem's speaker, or to turn it off entirely, add the desired command to the end of the initialization string.

Check your modem manual to confirm that these are the appropriate commands for your modem:

Command	What it does
M0	Turns off the modem speaker
L0	Sets lowest speaker volume
L1	Sets low speaker volume
L2	Sets medium speaker volume
L3	Sets high speaker volume


Dialing Prefix

A dialing prefix is any combination of numbers and characters that should be sent to your modem before it dials the phone number.  Although Quicken can set up your modem automatically, it cannot tell whether a dialing prefix is required.

You can either type a dialing prefix or select it from the drop-down list.

Dialing prefix	What it does
9,	Sometimes used to obtain an outside line
*70,	Disables "call waiting" service for a touch-tone phone.  Prevents an incoming call from disrupting your modem session.
1170,	Disables "call waiting" service for a rotary (pulse) phone
The comma after the dialing prefix is a "pause character."  It tells the modem to pause for 2 seconds after the dialing prefix and before dialing the phone number.

Note: The prefix to disable "call waiting" may be different in your area.  Call your phone company to confirm the correct code.


Solving communications problems
Solve communications problems

If you have problems with your modem or problems connecting to Intuit, click the problem description below.  In most cases, you will find your solution.  Also check your modem user's guide for troubleshooting suggestions particular to your modem.

Problems

No response from the modem

Modem responds but you can't connect

Modem doesn't initialize using COM4


Problem: No response from the modem

If your modem is not responding, try these solutions.

Check the modem itself.

•	If you have an external modem, make sure it is turned on and securely plugged in to your computer.

•	If you have an older modem that has switches, check the switch settings.  Your modem manual describes the function of each switch.  With the modem turned off, set the switches to originate a call (not to answer), to respond to DTR (data terminal ready), and to recognize commands.

Close other communications programs.

•	If you have other programs that use your modem (such as fax software, online services such as CompuServe and America Online, or other communications software), close those programs.

Change settings in the Set Up Modem window.

•	Change the serial port from its current setting (typically COM2) to COM1, to see if you have been using the wrong port.

•	Make sure that you modem speed is not set too high.  Unless you have a 16550 UART, your modem speed should not be set over 19,200.


Problem: Modem responds, but you can't connect

If your modem responds, but you are unable to connect to Intuit, try these solutions.

Check the modem itself.

•	Check to see that the phone cable is securely connected to your modem and to the wall outlet.  Be sure that the cable is connected to the line outlet on the back of your modem, not the phone outlet.

Change settings in the Set Up Modem window.

•	Change the Speed setting to match the speed (baud rate) of your modem.  Make sure that your modem speed is not set too high.  Unless you have a 16550 UART, your modem speed should not be set over 19,200.

•	Put in the appropriate dialing prefix, if necessary.

•	Change the Dial Type settings for tone or pulse dialing.

Change settings in the Advanced Modem Setup window.

•	In the Initialization String box, you may need to include a different sequence of commands for Quicken to send to the modem before dialing the access number.  Enter any special letters, digits, and other characters to be sent to the modem.

To find out what codes you need, look in the modem user's manual.  Most commands must begin with the prefix AT.

Caution:  Do not change this setting unless you understand the change you are making.

If the access number is unavailable, wait for Quicken to dial it again.

•	The toll-free number set in the software may be temporarily unavailable.  If the number is not available, your modem dials a second time.  Be patient; it may take as long as 60 seconds for the modem to redial.

Try again in a few minutes.

•	It could be a service problem and not a modem problem.


Problem: Modem doesn't initialize using COM4

If you have your modem set up for COM4 and Quicken freezes when it tries to initialize the modem, your settings may be incorrect.

If there is no device connected to COM2:

•	Switch your modem to from COM4 to COM2.

If you have devices connected to both COM1 and COM2, and you have no COM3:

You can leave your modem connected to COM4, but you need to edit your Windows SYSTEM.INI file.

1.	Quit Quicken.

2.	From the Windows Program Manager File menu, choose Run.

3.	On the command line, type NOTEPAD, then click OK.

4.	From the Notepad File menu, choose Open.

5.	Open the SYSTEM.INI file.  It's located in your WINDOWS directory.

Include the directory path if the file is not in the currently displayed directory.  For example, c:\windows\system.ini

To display the files in a particular directory, double-click the directory name in the Directories list.  To select a particular file, click its name in the list under the File Name box.

6.	Add the following items to the [386Enh] section of the SYSTEM.INI file.

COM3IRQ=-1

COM4Base=02E8

COM4IRQ=3

7.	Reboot Windows.

8.	Start Quicken.

Your modem should initialize.  If the modem still does not initialize, check the installation section of your modem user's guide for additional troubleshooting ideas.


Online software registration
Overview: Online software registration

Quicken now provides an online alternative to filling in and mailing the registration card included in your package.  (The registration card is attached to the back of the envelope that contains the collateral information.) You can now register your Quicken 4 for Windows software from your computer.

If you register Quicken online, do not mail the printed registration card.

Registration benefits

We encourage you to register your Quicken software as soon as you install it.  When you register Quicken, you are entitled to:

•	Product support

•	Special offers on new Intuit products and services

•	Advance notification of new product updates

If you live outside the United States

At this time, online software registration is available only to residents of the United States, including Alaska, Hawaii, and Puerto Rico.  If you live outside these areas, mail the printed registration card to Intuit.

How to...

Register your Quicken software online


Registering your Quicken software online
Register your Quicken software online

To register your Quicken software online:

1.	Make sure your modem is turned on and plugged in.

2.	From the Online menu, choose Software Registration.

3.	In the Registration window, enter information into each box and click OK.

4.	(Optional) Answer the questions in the Survey window.

5.	Click Register.

What happens

•	Quicken dials Intuit, establishes an online connection, and sends the information you entered.

Note:  If you have not yet connected to Intuit or set up your modem, Quicken attempts to set up your modem automatically before it dials Intuit.

•	When your registration is complete, Quicken ends the online connection and displays a confirmation message.

•	The Software Registration command on the Online menu becomes dimmed so you don't accidentally register again.


Registration window
Software Registration

Online software registration is an alternative to filling in and mailing the registration card that came in your Quicken package.  In this window (the first of two), you enter basic information about yourself, including name, address, and telephone number.

To complete the window:

1.	Enter information into each box.  Use the Tab key to move from box to box.

Initial, Company, and Phone are optional.  (If you enter a phone number, include an area code.)  You must enter information in the other boxes.

2.	Click OK.

At this time, online software registration is available only to residents of the United States, including Alaska, Hawaii, and Puerto Rico.  If you live outside these areas, mail the printed registration card to Intuit.


Survey window

In this window, you answer a series of questions that help Intuit better understand its customers.  Although completing the survey is optional, we hope you will take a moment to provide Intuit with this information.  The more we know about you, the better equipped we are to design software that meets your needs.

To complete this window:

1.	Click the Down Arrow to see possible choices for each question.  If you don't want to answer a question, skip it or select the blank line as your answer.

2.	Click Register.

Quicken dials Intuit, establishes an online connection, and sends the information you entered.

When your registration is complete, Quicken ends the online connection and displays a confirmation message.

To return to the Registration window to check or change information:

•	Click Previous Page.

To cancel online registration:

•	Click Cancel.


Updating your portfolio prices
Update your portfolio prices

Once you have signed up for Portfolio Price Update, you can update your Quicken investment portfolio prices quickly and easily.

To update your portfolio prices:

1.	In the Portfolio View window, click Update.  Or, from the Online menu, choose Update Portfolio Prices.

2.	Enter your online account password and click OK.

Quicken does the following:

•	Dials a phone number and establishes an online connection.

•	Retrieves and updates prices for the stocks and mutual funds in your Quicken portfolio (in the current Quicken file only).

•	Disconnects the phone line.

•	Displays a message confirming the price update.

•	Displays the Portfolio View window for the account that is currently open.  If no account is open, Quicken displays the Portfolio View window for the last account that was open.

Even though you see updated prices for only the current investment account, all the prices in your security list have been updated.

Note:  After you update your portfolio prices, the date Quicken adds to the Price History is the last trade date for the security, not the date on which the price was updated.


About ticker symbols

To update the price of a security, Quicken needs its ticker symbol.  If you have not entered a ticker symbol for a security, Quicken cannot update its price.

Most ticker symbols are not case-sensitive; you can enter them in either uppercase or lowercase letters.  However, for some security types (preferred and classified stocks, warrants, rights, units, and when issued), the ticker symbols are case-sensitive.   For more information, see Case-sensitive ticker symbols.

When you start a portfolio price update, Quicken checks to see if all the securities in your portfolio have ticker symbols.  If any securities are missing symbols, Quicken displays a message telling you which securities cannot be updated.

Finding ticker symbols

If you don't know the ticker symbol for a stock or mutual fund, you can find it:

•	In your brokerage or mutual fund account statement.

•	In the Wall Street Journal or other financial publication, such as Barron's or the Investor's Business Daily.

•	By calling your broker or mutual fund company.

How to...

Prevent a price update for a security

Enter ticker symbols for stock indices


Case-sensitive ticker symbols

Most ticker symbols are not case-sensitive; you can enter them in either uppercase or lowercase letters.  For example, you could enter either INTU or intu as the ticker symbol for Intuit.  There are some exceptions, however.

For the security types listed below, there are several rules for entering ticker symbols:

NASDAQ

•	A capital letter is added to the end of the security symbol.

American Stock Exchange and New York Stock Exchange

•	A colon (:) must precede the security symbol, with no space between the colon and the first letter of the symbol.

•	The security symbol must be followed by one or more specific characters.

•	The security symbol and following characters are case-sensitive.  The rules for uppercase and lowercase must be followed exactly.

To see the rules and examples, click on a type in the list below.

Security Types

Preferred stocks

Warrants

Classified stocks

Rights

Units

When issued

Miscellaneous


Preferred stocks

NASDAQ:

•	Add a capital P at the end of the security symbol (no space before the P).

•	For a fifth class of preferred stock, add a capital Z (instead of P) at the end of the security symbol.

American Stock Exchange and New York Stock Exchange:

•	Enter a colon (:) and then the security symbol.

•	At the end of the security symbol, add an underscore, the letter "p" and the class of preferred stock.

•	Enter the security symbol in upper case and the class in lower case.

Examples:

:BT_pq	Banker's Trust Preferred Q
:GM_pd	GM Preferred D


Warrants

NASDAQ:

•	Add a capital W at the end of the security symbol (no space before the W).

•	For a second class of warrants, add a capital Z (instead of W) at the end of the security symbol.

American Stock Exchange and New York Stock Exchange:

•	Enter a colon (:) and then the security symbol.

•	At the end of the security symbol, add an underscore and the letter "t".

•	Enter the security symbol in upper case and the "t" in lower case.

Examples:

:DYP_t	Morgan Stanley Warrants
:JIC_t	Morgan Stanley Japan Warrants


Classified stocks

NASDAQ:

•	For class A stocks, add a capital A at the end of the security symbol (no space before the A).

•	For class B stocks, add a capital B at the end of the security symbol (no space before the B).

American Stock Exchange and New York Stock Exchange:

•	Enter a colon (:) and then the security symbol.

•	At the end of the security symbol, add the class of the stock.

•	Enter the security symbol in upper case and the class in lower case.

Examples:

:ACVa	Alberto Culver Class A
:WSOa	Watso Class A


Rights

NASDAQ:

•	Add a capital R at the end of the security symbol (no space before the R).

American Stock Exchange and New York Stock Exchange:

•	Enter a colon (:) and then the security symbol.

•	At the end of the security symbol, add an underscore and the letter "r".

•	Enter the security symbol in upper case and the "r" in lower case.

Examples:

:VIA_r	Viacom Rights
:KIF_r	Korean Investment Rights


Units

NASDAQ:

•	Add a capital U at the end of the security symbol (no space before the U).

American Stock Exchange and New York Stock Exchange:

•	Enter a colon (:) and then the security symbol.

•	At the end of the security symbol, add an underscore and the letter "u".

•	Enter the security symbol in upper case and the "u" in lower case.

Examples:

:GPR_u	Great Pacific Units
:ELN_u	Elan Units


When issued

NASDAQ:

•	Add a capital V at the end of the security symbol (no space before the V).

American Stock Exchange and New York Stock Exchange:

•	Enter a colon (:) and then the security symbol.

•	At the end of the security symbol, add an underscore and the letter "w".

•	Enter the security symbol in upper case and the "w" in lower case.

Example:

:GE_w	General Electric


Miscellaneous

NASDAQ:

Add a capital Z at the end of the security symbol (no space before the Z) for the following security types:

.•	Second class of warrants

•	Fifth class of preferred stock

•	Any unit, receipt, or certificate representing a limited partnership interest


Entering ticker symbols for stock indices
Enter ticker symbols for stock indices

Quicken updates certain stock market indices if you include them in your investment portfolio.

The available indices and their ticker symbols are as follows:

Index	Symbol
Dow Jones Industrial Average	^DJI
Dow Jones Transportation Average	^DJT
Dow Jones Utilities Average	^DJU
S&P 500 Composite Index	^SPC
You can enter the ticker symbol in either uppercase or lowercase letters.  Be sure to include the carat (^) before the symbol.  (The ^ is usually found above the number 6 on your keyboard.)


Ticker Symbol

The ticker symbol is a letter combination that uniquely identifies a security.  Often, it is the truncated or abbreviated name of the company, fund, or group issuing the security.

Examples:  INTU (Intuit), NOVL (Novell), FMAGX (Fidelity Magellan)


Preventing a price update for a security
Prevent a price update for a security

You may want to prevent Quicken from trying to update the price of a security if:

•	You don't know its ticker symbol and don't want to get a "missing ticker symbol" message from Quicken.

•	You want to reduce total update time by preventing updates for securities that you don't track frequently.

•	You have more than 200 securities in your portfolio and want to exclude one or more from the update.  (For each update session, Quicken can update up to 200 securities per Quicken file.)

To prevent a price update for a security:

•	Type an asterisk (*) in front of its ticker symbol.  Examples:  *INTU, *NOVL, *FMAGX

If you don't know a security's symbol and want to avoid the "missing ticker symbol" message, type an asterisk in the Symbol box instead of a ticker symbol.  See Setting up a Security


Changing your billing information
Change your billing information

Once you have signed up for the Portfolio Price Update service, you may want to make changes to the information you provided Intuit.  For example, you may want to change:

•	Name or address

•	Phone number (day or evening)

•	The credit card to which you want Portfolio Price Update billed

•	The expiration date on your credit card

To make any changes to your online account information, you need to call Intuit Online Services Customer Service.  To get the phone number, click here.

When you call, you need to provide your mother's maiden name to verify your identity.  (You entered it in the window where you set your online account password.)


Changing your online account password
Change your password

For maximum protection of your Intuit online account, we recommend that you change your password at regular intervals.

To change your password:

1.	From the Online menu, choose Change Online Account, and then choose Change Password.

2.	In the first box, enter your current online account password.

When you type into this and other boxes, you see only asterisks (for security).

3.	In the second box, enter a new online account password.

For suggestions on creating a password, click here.

4.	In the third box, enter the new online account password again.

The new and re-entered passwords must match exactly.

5.	Click OK.

If you lose or forget your password

Only you have access to your online account password.  If you lose or forget your password, you must call Intuit Online Services Technical Support to have it reset.  To get the phone number, click here.


Canceling Portfolio Price Update
Cancel Portfolio Price Update

If you no longer wish to use Portfolio Price Update, you can cancel the service.  After you have canceled Portfolio Price Update, you can sign up for the service again as you did before.

To cancel Portfolio Price Update, call Intuit Online Services Customer Service.  To get the number, click here.

After you have canceled Portfolio Price Update, you can sign up for the service again.  You do not receive additional free price updates if you cancel Portfolio Price Update and then sign up again.


Change Account Information

In this window, you find instructions for changing your Portfolio Price Update account.  When the window opens, it shows the current status of your account and the online account number.

You can contact Intuit to change any of the following account information:

•	Name or address

•	Phone number

•	Credit card to which the account is billed

•	Credit card expiration date

To change your account information, call Intuit Online Services Customer Service.  To get the number, click here.


Using Portfolio Price Update with more than one Quicken file
Use Portfolio Price Update with more than one Quicken file

When you sign up for Portfolio Price Update, the Quicken file you are currently using is linked to your new online account.  (The name of the current Quicken file appears in the Quicken window's title bar.)  You can sign up for Portfolio Price Update only once in any Quicken file.

While most people use only one Quicken file, others use multiple Quicken files to separate home and business data, data for different years, and data for different people.

If you want to use Portfolio Price Update with another Quicken file, you have two choices:

•	Use your existing online account with the other Quicken file.

OR

•	Sign up for a new online account to use with the other Quicken file.

How to...

Use your existing online account

Sign up for a new online account

More about...

Quicken files


Use your existing online account

To use your existing online account:

1.	Open the Quicken file that doesn't have an online account.

2.	In the Portfolio View window, click Update.  Or, from the Online menu, choose Update Portfolio Prices.

3.	In the Online Account window, enter the account number and password for your existing online account and click OK.  (You can also select the account number from the drop-down list.)

The current Quicken file is now linked to your existing online account.


Sign up for a new online account

To sign up for a new online account:

1.	Open the Quicken file that doesn't have an online account.

2.	In the Portfolio View window, click Update.  Or, from the Online menu, choose Update Portfolio Prices.

3.	In the Online Account window, click New Account.

4.	Complete the Portfolio Price Update Signup window and click OK.  See Signing up for Portfolio Price Update.


linked

When a Quicken file and an online account are linked, it means that:

•	You cannot use that Quicken file with any other online account.

•	You cannot set up another online account (sign up for Portfolio Price Update again) while you are using that Quicken file.


Using Portfolio Price Update on more than one computer
Use Portfolio Price Update on more than one computer

You can use your Portfolio Price Update online account on more than one computer.  The account is linked to the Quicken file you were using when you signed up, not the computer you were using it on.

If you copy your Quicken file to the other computer:

You must use your existing online account for Portfolio Price Update.  Quicken recognizes that you already have an online account linked to that file, and it prompts you for the password.

If you use a different Quicken file on the other computer:

You can either use your existing online account with that file or sign up for a new online account.

How to...

Use your existing online account

Sign up for a new online account


Use your existing online account

To use your existing online account:

1.	In the Portfolio View window, click Update.  Or, from the Online menu, choose Update Portfolio Prices.

2.	In the Online Account window, enter the account number and password for your existing online account and click OK.

After your prices are updated, the current Quicken file is linked to your existing online account.


Sign up for a new online account

To sign up for a new online account:

1.	In the Portfolio View window, click Update.  Or, from the Online menu, choose Update Portfolio Prices.

2.	In the Online Account window, click New Account.

3.	Complete the Portfolio Price Update Signup window and click OK.  See Signing up for Portfolio Price Update


Signing up for more than one Portfolio Price Update account
Sign up for more than one Portfolio Price Update account

Although a single Portfolio Price Update online account will probably meet your needs, you can sign up for more than one online account, if you wish. Portfolio Price Update usage for each account is billed separately.

To sign up for an additional Portfolio Price Update account:

1.	Open a Quicken file that you have not yet used with Portfolio Price Update.

2.	In the Portfolio View window, click Update.  Or, from the Online menu, choose Update Portfolio Prices.

3.	In the Online Account window, click New Account.

4.	Complete the Portfolio Price Update Signup window and click OK.

5.	Set a password for your new account and click OK.

When your sign-up is complete, Quicken displays your new online account number.


Portfolio Price Update
Overview: Portfolio Price Update

Portfolio Price Update is a service that updates the prices of the stocks and mutual funds in your Quicken investment portfolio.  The service can update prices of all stocks and mutual funds traded on the New York Stock Exchange, American Stock Exchange, and NASDAQ.

You may use Portfolio Price Update three times at no charge.  Then you need to sign up for the service to continue using it.  You can sign up online in minutes.

Common Questions

What hours is it available?

How much does it cost?

How current are the updated prices?

How to...

Sign up for Portfolio Price Update


What hours is it available?

The Portfolio Price Update service is available 24 hours a day, 7 days a week.


How much does it cost?

For current pricing information, call Intuit Online Services Customer Service.  To get the phone number, click here.

Charges for using Portfolio Price Update are billed monthly to your credit card. Once you sign up for Portfolio Price Update, you are charged the basic monthly fee, whether or not you use the service.

Your monthly billing cycle begins the day you sign up, rather than on the first day of the month.


How current are the updated prices?

STOCKS

•	While the market is open, stock prices are delayed by at least 15 minutes.

•	After the market is closed, stock prices reflect the most recent closing price.

MUTUAL FUNDS

•	Mutual fund prices are updated once a day at 5:30 p.m. EST.

•	Before 5:30 p.m., mutual fund prices are quoted at the previous day's closing price.

Portfolio Price Update includes only "last price" information; high, low, and volume are not included.


Free trial updates
Portfolio Price Update: Free trial updates

You can use Portfolio Price Update three times at no charge.  Then you need to sign up for the service to continue using it.

To update the price of a security, Quicken needs its ticker symbol.  See About ticker symbols.

To use your free updates:

1.	In the Portfolio View window, click Update.  Or, from the Online menu, choose Update Portfolio Prices.

A message appears informing you of the free updates.  The message appears before each free update and counts the updates as they are used.

2.	Click OK.

3.	Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the second and third free updates.

The fourth time you request a price update, Quicken prompts you to sign up for the Portfolio Price Update service.

How to...

Sign up for Portfolio Price Update


Signing up for Portfolio Price Update
Sign up for Portfolio Price Update

You can use Portfolio Price Update three times at no charge.  The fourth time you request a price update, Quicken prompts you to sign up for the Portfolio Price Update service.

To sign up for Portfolio Price Update:

1.	In the Portfolio View window, click Update.  Or, from the Online menu, choose Update Portfolio Prices.

2.	In the Portfolio Price Update-Online Account window, click New Account.

3.	In the Portfolio Price Update Signup window, enter information into the Name/Address, Phone, and Credit Card Information boxes.

4.	Click OK.

5.	In the Set Password window, set a password for your online account.

6.	Click OK.

Quicken now dials Intuit, establishes a connection, and sends the information you entered.

Quicken displays a confirmation message with your online account number.  Be sure to write it down.


Online account number

When you sign up for Portfolio Price Update, Intuit creates an online account for you.  This account is identified by the unique number you see in the confirmation message window.  Be sure to write down the number.

You need your online account number to use Portfolio Price Update with a different Quicken file.  See Using Portfolio Price Update with more than one Quicken file.

If you lose or forget your online account number, you can find it in the Change Password window.

To display the online account number:

1.	Be sure you are using the Quicken file in which you signed up for Portfolio Price Update.

2.	From the Online menu, choose Change Online Account, and then choose Change Password.

The online account number appears in the upper right corner of the Change Password window.

3.	Click Cancel to close the Change Password window.


Portfolio Price Update - Online Account

In the Portfolio Price Update-Online Account window, you can do two things:

•	Initiate sign-up for a new Portfolio Price Update account.

•	Use an existing Portfolio Price Update account by entering the online account number and password.

Why the Online Account window appears

•	You have used up your three free price updates and you request a fourth update.

What you can do

•	You sign up for Portfolio Price Update in one Quicken file. You request a price update while using a different Quicken file.

What you can do

•	You sign up for Portfolio Price Update on one computer. You start Quicken on another computer and request a price update. You use different Quicken files on both computers.

What you can do

How to...

Use Portfolio Price Update with more than one Quicken file

Use Portfolio Price Update on more than one computer

Sign up for more than one Portfolio Price Update account


What you can do

Click New Account to sign up for the Portfolio Price Update service.


What you can do

•	To create a new online account to use with the second Quicken file, click New Account.

(You may want to create the new account for billing purposes; Portfolio Price Update usage for each account is billed separately.)

OR

•	To use the existing online account with the second Quicken file, enter your online account number and password.  (You can also select your online account number from the drop-down list.)


What you can do

•	To create a new online account to use on the second computer, click New Account.

(You may want to create the new account for billing purposes; Portfolio Price Update usage for each account is billed separately.)

OR

•	To use your existing online account on the second computer, enter your online account number and password.  (You can also select your online account number from the drop-down list.)


Update Portfolio Prices

You may use the Portfolio Price Update service 3 times at no charge.

The first 3 times you select Update Portfolio Prices from the Online menu, you see this message advising you of the 3 free updates.  The message also tells how many of the free updates you have used.

The fourth time you select Update Portfolio Prices, Quicken prompts you to sign up for the Portfolio Price Update service.

How to...

Sign up for Portfolio Price Update


Portfolio Price Update - Signup

Once you have used your free updates, you need to sign up for the Portfolio Price Update service.  You begin the sign-up process in this window.

To sign up for Portfolio Price Update:

1.	Enter information into each box.

2.	Click OK.

What you see:

Name/Address

Phone

Credit Card Information

Pricing Information


Name/Address

Optional information	Initial and Company are optional.  All other information is required.
State	Use the two-letter abbreviation for your state.  You can type it, or click the Down Arrow to select it from the list.
Country	You cannot change the country.  At this time, Portfolio Price Update is available only to residents of the United States (including Alaska. Hawaii, and Puerto Rico).


Phone

At least one phone number is required.  You may enter either a day or evening phone number.  We recommend that you enter both numbers, in case Intuit needs to contact you about your account.

Be sure to enter an area code for each phone number.  Acceptable formats include:

(415) 123-4567

415/123-4567

415-123-4567


Credit Card Information

Credit Card #	Your monthly charges will be billed to the credit card you specify in this box.  Enter your complete credit card number.  Spaces are optional.  Intuit accepts MasterCard, Visa, American Express, and Discover cards. Intuit keeps your credit card information confidential.
Expiration date	Use any of the following date formats: m/yy or mm/yy or mm-yy.   Examples:  4/96, 12/95, 10-96, 4-95
Name on card            (if different)	If the name on the credit card you are using is different from the name you entered previously in this window, enter the name on the credit card here.  Be sure to include the initial, if you use one.


Pricing Information

For the most current pricing information, call Intuit Online Services Customer Service.  To get the phone number, click here.


Set Password

In this window, you set a password to protect your online account from unauthorized use.

To set your password:

1.	In the first box, enter a password.

In this and the second box, you see only asterisks when you type (for security).  For suggestions on creating a password, click here.

2.	In the second box, enter the password again.

Whatever you enter must match the first password exactly.

3.	In the third box, enter your mother's maiden name.

If you lose or forget your password or wish to change your online account, you need to call Intuit Online Services Technical Support. To get the phone number, click here.  When you call, you will be asked for the name you entered here to confirm your identity.


Suggestions for creating a password

When you create a password, keep the following guidelines in mind:

•	Your password may contain between 4 and 16 characters.

For adequate security, we recommend that your password contain at least 8 characters, preferably a mixture of letters, numbers, and/or symbols (such as + or /).  One effective combination is two words separated by a symbol.

•	Don't use common words or names (especially your own name, or the names or your spouse or children).

•	If you enter blank spaces as the leading or trailing characters of your password, Quicken removes them.  (Blank spaces are permitted within the password.)

•	Passwords are not case-sensitive, so it doesn't matter whether you use uppercase or lowercase letters.


Enter Online Account Password

In this window, enter the password you set for your online account.

The online account number linked to the current Quicken file appears above the password box.  If you have more than one online account, be sure to enter the password for the correct account.

To enter your password:

1.	Enter the password in the box.

When you type, you see only asterisks (for security).

2.	Click OK.

If you use Portfolio Price Update more than once during a Quicken session, you don't need to enter your password more than once.


Change Online Account Password

For maximum protection of your online account, we recommend that you change your password at regular intervals.

To change your password:

1.	In the first box, enter your old (current) online account password.

In this and the other boxes, you see only asterisks (for security).

2.	In the second box, enter a new online account password.

For suggestions on creating a password, click here.

3.	In the third box, re-enter the new online account password.

What you enter must match the new password in the second box exactly.


Portfolio Price Update - Signup Confirmation

This window appears after you have successfully signed up for the Portfolio Price Update service.  It confirms the creation of your online account and displays your online account number.

You can now use Portfolio Price Update with the current Quicken file.


Missing Ticker Symbols

To update the price of a security, Quicken needs its ticker symbol.

When you start a portfolio price update, Quicken checks to see if all the securities in your portfolio have ticker symbols.  If any securities are missing symbols, they are listed in this window.

Do one of the following:

•	Click OK.

Quicken updates the rest of your portfolio--those securities that have ticker symbols.  No updates are performed on the securities in the list.

•	Click Cancel.

Cancels your price update and returns to the Portfolio View window, where you can add ticker symbols to those securities that do not have them.  See Setting up a Security

If you don't have a ticker symbol for a security and want to avoid the "missing ticker symbol" message, type an asterisk in the Symbol box instead of a ticker symbol.  See Preventing a price update for a security


Unable to Update Prices

If Quicken is unable to update prices for one or more securities in your investment portfolio, those securities are listed in this window.

Why Quicken cannot update a security

•	The ticker symbol for the security may be incorrect.  (This includes the case where the symbol for a security has changed.)

Check to be sure that you have the correct ticker symbol for the security.  See About ticker symbols

•	The ticker symbol may not appear in the database of securities.

In this case, Quicken doesn't have access to price information for the security.  To prevent Quicken from trying to update its price in the future, type an asterisk in front of its ticker symbol.  See Preventing a price update for a security

•	The security may no longer be traded.


Unable to update more than 200 securities

Each time you access Portfolio Price Update, Quicken can update as many as 200 securities in your investment portfolio.

When you initiate a price update, Quicken requests prices for all securities that have ticker symbols (excluding those whose symbols are preceded by an asterisk).  If you have more than 200 securities in your portfolio, Quicken sends the first 200 to be updated and ignores the rest.

If you have more than 200 securities, you may want to select the securities that don't get updated.  To prevent a price update for a security, type an asterisk in front of its ticker symbol.  See Preventing a price update for a security .


Credit card information required

This window appears when Quicken needs credit card information.  It can appear for any of the following reasons:

•	The credit card you having been using to pay for the Portfolio Price Update service has expired or is no longer active.

•	The credit card number you entered when you signed up for the Portfolio Price Update service was not valid or was declined.

•	You have requested a price update but are not signed up for the Portfolio Price Update service.  A credit card is needed to activate the service for you.

You must enter your current credit card information to continue using (or begin using) the Portfolio Price Update service.


Problem with MEM_BAG

The MEM_BAG is a section of the your Quicken file that contains scheduled transactions, budget settings, desktop settings, graph filter settings, and the accounts selected for the Financial Calendar.

Deleting MEM_BAG allows Quicken to create a new one.  You will, however, need to set up your scheduled transactions, graph filters, and desktop settings again.

A damaged MEM_BAG could result in the following types of errors:

•	General Protection Fault while setting up a budget, printing a budget, saving a budget, choosing activities, backing up, exiting Quicken, or scheduling transactions.

To force Quicken to recreate the MEM_BAG:

1.	Press and hold down the CTRL and SHIFT keys together.

2.	From the File menu, choose File Operations, then choose Delete.

3.	Exit Quicken.  Quicken will recreate the MEM_BAG with default settings for budgets, graphs, and the desktop.


Problem with QMT File

The QMT file is the Quicken file that contains the various lists created in your data files.  The error messages "Your memorized list file is invalid or damaged," or "Unable to open item list" along with error codes 503 and 1551 are all indications of a damaged QMT file.

Also, if you experience any incomplete or unexpected data in your category list, class list, or the memorized transaction list, you will need to rebuild your QMT file.

How to...

Rebuild a damaged QMT file


Memory Problem

Quicken for Windows needs more memory, or there is a memory conflict between applications that are currently running.  Do one or more of the following:

•	Quit all open applications, then restart your computer.

•	Disconnect from any network connections

•	Remove any unnecessary TSRs (terminate-and-stay-resident programs) and other utilities

How to...

Resolve TSR and device driver conflicts

Free up memory by disabling programs in the Windows Startup Group


TSRs and device driver conflicts
Resolve TSR and Device Driver Conflicts

Some utilities do not work well together in memory.  Sometimes DOS and/or Windows cannot properly manage the memory used by the utilities.  Also some utilities are not written to operate in Windows.  In the Windows directory there is a SETUP.TXT file which may list these incompatible utilities.

Running certain utilities and applications together can exhaust available memory.  Turning off a TSR (terminate-and-stay-resident) program, device driver or any unused applications frees memory for other applications.  Turning off all unneeded utilities can help isolate a problem to a specific area and fix the memory conflict, too.

As you upgrade your hardware and software, device drivers often have to be upgraded as well (e.g. a mouse driver or a memory manager).

If Quicken operates normally while the utilities turned off, there could be a memory or program conflict with those utilities.  You can usually resolve Quicken problems by "remarking out" TSRs or unneeded drivers in your AUTOEXEC.BAT or CONFIG.SYS files.

Procedure:

1.	From the Windows Program Manager File menu, choose Run.

2.	On the command line, type SYSEDIT, then click OK.  Four windows will appear.  In the windows will be the following files:

•	SYSTEM.INI	•	WIN.INI

•	CONFIG.SYS	•	AUTOEXEC.BAT

3.	Scroll through the AUTOEXEC.BAT and CONFIG.SYS FILES, remarking out any line with a potentially incompatible TSR or device driver.  To do so, type REM at the beginning of the line, and then press the space bar once to put a space between REM and the next letter.

NOTE:  Do not remark out lines that will affect hard disk compression, disk partitioning, external drives, modem setup, printer setup, etc.

4.	After remarks have been added, save each file by choosing Save from the File menu.

5.	Exit SYSEDIT, then Windows.  Reboot, then try to run Quicken again.


Free up memory by disabling programs in the Windows StartUp Group

Insufficient memory in Windows can cause General Protection Faults & lockups in Quicken for Windows.  Computer users who have 4MB of RAM on their computers frequently run out of memory if too many applications are loaded in Windows.

Placing program icons in the StartUp group of Windows is an easy way to start applications every session automatically.  Major Windows applications often require 2 to 3 megabytes of memory to run. Placing 3 to 4 programs in the Windows StartUp group can easily use up available memory in Windows on a 4MB computer.

Removing icons from the StartUp group gives the user the ability to start a single application with the maximum amount of memory available in Windows.

Quicken for Windows requires a minimum of 3 megabytes of RAM.   That means a 4 megabyte computer system running other Windows applications may not have enough memory to run Quicken for Windows because the full 3 megabytes is not available.

Note: Check Help About Program Manager for amount of Memory Available.

To remove applications from the StartUp Group:

1.	Start Windows, then go to the Program Manager

2.	Click on Window Menu, and select Startup Group.

3.	Drag program icons from StartUp to another program group in Program Manager

4.	Exit Windows, then restart Windows.  Windows will start without running the applications in the StartUp group.

To disable applications in the StartUp group for one session:

1.	Start Windows.

2.	Hold down the Shift key while Windows is loading.  This will start Windows without running the applications in the StartUp group


Memorized list is full
Memorized Transaction List Capacity

The Memorized Transaction list can hold anywhere from 1,000 to 2,000 transactions, depending on the size of the transactions.  If the list becomes half-full, Quicken tells you it is turning off automatic memorization.  If the list becomes completely full, you cannot memorize any more transactions until you delete existing ones.

Your list fills up like this only if you don't usually make payments to the same payees.  If this is the case, automatic memorization isn't much of a benefit to you anyway, so you should consider turning it off.

How to...

Delete a memorized transaction

Turn automatic memorization of transactions off and on


Changing reconciled transaction
Changing reconciled transactions

Changing a reconciled transaction affects future reconciliations.  Quicken lets you know if you are about to change a reconciled transaction and asks you to confirm the change.

Your ability to change transactions after they are entered or even reconciled gives you complete control of your finances.  However, if you want to protect your data from accidental or unauthorized changes, Quicken lets you assign passwords to keep it secure.

How to...

Use passwords to keep your data secure


Not a valid Quicken file

One of your data files may be corrupted.  You should restore your data from a previous backup, or call Intuit Technical Support to discuss the possibility of data recovery.

How to...

Restore a Quicken file


No valid prices found to import

The symbols in the data file don't match those in the Security list, or the data in the import file is not correct for some other reason.  See the topics below for more information.

How to...

Import security prices from an ASCII file

Save security prices from Prodigy's Quote Track


Name is in use as a category

The name you are trying to assign is the name of an existing category.

To solve this problem:

•	Use a completely different name.

•	Use a similar, but slightly different name.  For example, if the word "House" is being used as a category name, use the name "House1" instead.

•	Rename the category.

How to...

Change a category


You are about to permanently delete a category

Once you delete a category and confirm the deletion, Quicken cannot recover it.  Be sure you really want to delete a category before doing so.

When Quicken deletes a category, it removes it from the category list and erases it from the Category field of any transactions to which it has been assigned.

When you delete a subcategory, Quicken deletes it from the category list and reassigns its transactions to the parent category.

Quicken won't let you delete a category that has subcategories.  You need to promote the subcategories to categories or move the subcategories under another category before you can delete the category.

How to...

Turn a subcategory into a category

Move a subcategory to a different category


You are about to permanently delete a category
You are about to permanently delete a class

What happens

When you delete a class, Quicken removes the class from the Class list and erases it from the Category field of any transactions to which it has been assigned.

If this is what you want to do, click OK.

If you don't want to delete the class, click Cancel.


No checks to print

There are no checks to print in the current account.  Keep in mind that Quicken prints only those checks identified by the word PRINT in the account register's Num field.

To solve this problem you may need to open a different account, or you may simply want to print or reprint a check you've already entered in the register.

To print or reprint a check in the account register:

1.	Select the transaction for the check you want to print.

2.	Select the check number in the Num field and type PRINT over the check number.  Quicken now considers the check unprinted.

3.	Click Record.

4.	Print the check as usual, taking not to enter the correct first check number.

To see if there are checks to print in a different account:

1.	From the Lists menu, choose Account.  Or click the Accounts icon on the iconbar.  The Accounts list appears.

2.	Find the Chks column in the Account List and scroll your list of accounts, if necessary.  Quicken displays a check mark if an account has checks to be printed.  (You may also see a lightning bolt in the Chks column.  This means an account has electronic payments to transmit.)

To open an account and print its checks:

1.	Double-click an account in the Account List.  Or, select an account in the Account List, then click Open.

2.	From the File menu, choose Print Checks.  The Select Checks to Print window appears.  (See below for more detail.)

How to...

Print checks


No checks selected to print
You have not selected any checks to print

To fix this problem, try the following:

•	Change your print selection to Selected Checks, click the Choose button, then mark the checks that you want to print.  A checkmark appears next to the checks that have been selected to print.


No budget amounts were found

You need to set up a budget before you can create a budget report.

If you have already set up a budget, and you still get this error message, make sure you click the Save button in the Budget button bar before you create the report.

How to...

Set up a budget


No matching transactions were found
No matching transactions found

Quicken can't find any transactions that match the specified report criteria.  Try changing the report settings, especially the date range, and create the report again.

How to...

Create a report on selected accounts

Limit which transactions are included in your report

Create a report on selected categories, classes, and supercategories


No reconciliation for mutual fund accounts with splits

You cannot reconcile a mutual fund account when a stock split transaction is present.  You should update your balance instead.

How to ...

Update the balance of an investment account


Error accessing disk

Quicken can't read or write to one of your data files.  Possible reasons for this condition (in order of likelihood), and their solutions are listed below.

You may be out of disk space:

•	Try deleting any unused programs or files on your disk.

One of your data files may be corrupted:

•	First, try reindexing your Quicken data file.  From the File menu, choose File Operations, then Reindex.

•	If reindexing the file doesn't solve the problem, try copying your Quicken data file, then loading the new copy.  For more detailed instructions, click here.

You may be running low on memory:

•	Resolve TSR and device driver conflicts

•	Free up memory by disabling programs in the Windows Startup Group


Problem with page size

Quicken can't print what you've asked it to print.  Either the printer's page size is too small, or the margins are set too wide.

To select a larger page size:

1.	Start Windows, then go to the Program Manager.

2.	Click on Window Menu, then select Main.

3.	Double-click on the Control Panel icon.  The Control Panel will open.

4.	Double-click on the Printers icon.  The Printers window appears.

5.	Select the printer you want to print to in the list, then click Setup.  The Setup window appears.

6.	Select the correct page size from the Paper Size drop-down list (such as 8.5 by 11 inches).

7.	Click OK, then click Close.

To change the margins:

1.	From the Quicken File menu, choose Printer Setup, then choose Report/Graph Printer Setup.

2.	Make sure the correct printer is selected (at the top of the window).

3.	Change the margin settings to smaller values.  Here are some suggested values:

Left = .50

Right = .50

Top = .50

Bottom = .50


Disk is full during a reindex

To solve this problem, we suggest you switch to Windows Standard Mode, then reindex again.

To reindex your data file in Windows Standard Mode:

1.	Quit Quicken and Windows.

2.	Restart Windows by typing the following at the DOS prompt:

WIN /S

3.	Restart Quicken, then reindex your file.

4.	Quit Quicken and Windows, then restart Windows as you normally do.

If you are running Windows for Workgroups 3.11:

•	Type WIN /D:T to restart Windows in Step 2 above.


File is already open
File already open

Quicken can't access its files properly because SHARE.EXE is installed on your system.  SHARE.EXE is a MS-DOS program that installs file-sharing and locking capabilities on your disks and network drives.

To disable SHARE.EXE:

•	REMark out the SHARE.EXE command in your AUTOEXEC.BAT or CONFIG.SYS file.

•	If you are running VSHARE.386 in your Windows SYSTEM.INI file, put a semi-colon in from of the command to disable it.  For example,

Examples

In this file...	Disable SHARE as follows...
AUTOEXEC.BAT	REM SHARE.EXE
CONFIG.SYS	REM INSTALL=SHARE.EXE
SYSTEM.INI	;VSHARE.386


Invalid password

After you set up a password, you can't open a file or make changes to its transactions unless you enter the password correctly.  That's why it's especially important to write your password down and keep it in a safe place in case you forget it.

In case you forget your password:

•	If possible, try restoring from a backup made prior to when the password was assigned.  If there is no such backup to restore from, you will need to create a new file and/or re-enter your transactions.

Note

Intuit has no "master password" that can access your password protected file.

How to...

Create a Quicken file


Invalid check number

The number you are trying to enter is not a valid Quicken check number.  Try entering a different check number.

Note

Zero ("0") is not a valid check number


Help for Quicken messages

Many Quicken messages have a Help button.  To get more information about a message, simply click the Help button.


Welcome to Quicken!

New User Setup helps you learn more about Windows and Quicken, and steps you through the process of creating your first Quicken accounts.

As you complete each step in New User Setup, Quicken checks the step off on the left side of the window.

When you are ready to begin:

•	Click Next.

To learn more about the power of Quicken,
click a topic below:

Quicken is easy to use

Quicken saves you time

Quicken gives you insight

Quicken organizes your finances

What you see

Next button


Quicken is easy to use

Quicken works just like your paper checkbook.  Just enter checks in the Write Checks window.  Quicken automatically sorts your records and updates your register and balance.


Quicken saves you time

Quicken prints checks, pays bills, updates your register, and reconciles your bank account in half the time it takes by hand.


Quicken gives you insight

Quicken automatically categorizes your spending and provides insightful reports and graphs.  So you'll always know where your money goes.


Quicken organizes your finances

Quicken keeps your finances complete, accurate, and up-to-date.  It eliminates math errors and shows you exactly how much money you have in each account.  Quicken organizes your financial records in one place and finds any transaction instantly.


Do you want to see a Windows tutorial?

To answer the question:

•	Click Yes if you want to brush up on your mouse skills, or learn the basics of using Microsoft Windows.  Click No to skip it.  You can run it later if you want, by choosing the Tutorials: Introduction to Windows command from the Help menu.

What you see

Yes, No buttons

Back button


Yes, No buttons

Click Yes to run the Microsoft Windows tutorial.  Click No to skip the Windows tutorial and continue to the next screen.


Do you want to see a Quicken overview?

The Quicken Quick Tour presents an overview of the following topics:

• Quicken Basics	• Graphs and Reports
• Setting Up Accounts	• Financial Calendar
• Using the Register	• Advanced Features
• Reconciling	• Getting Help
To answer the question:

•	Click Yes if you want to run the Quick Tour.  Click No to skip it.  You can run it later if you want, by choosing the Tutorials: Introduction to Quicken command from the Help menu.

What you see

Yes, No buttons

Back button


Yes, No buttons

Click Yes to run the Quicken Quick Tour.  Click No to skip it and continue to the next screen.


Quicken will help you set up your accounts

With Quicken, you can create up to 255 related accounts in a single Quicken file.  To take a look at the types of accounts you can use, click here.

For personal finances, you probably need only one Quicken file. When all your accounts are in one file, Quicken can:

•	Maintain one list of categories, classes, and memorized transactions for all your accounts

•	Combine data from all accounts in a single report or graph to track your income and expenses, net worth, and other information

•	Transfer money from one account to another in the same file.

What you see

Back button

Next button


Here's what you'll need...

To set up your accounts, it's best if you have the following information available.  If you don't have the information, don't worry.  You can update your account balances later.

You should have...	So you can...
Your most recent bank statements	Enter the correct starting balance and date when you create your first account.
Your checkbook	Enter checks you've written since your last bank statement.
Any ATM slips or receipts you have not recorded in your checkbook.	Enter ATM and other transactions since your last bank statement.
What you see

Back button

Next button


Quicken will help you set up your accounts

You are now ready to set up a few of your bank accounts.  Quicken will guide you through the process of setting up your first checking, savings, and credit card account.  Along the way you'll learn the basics of using Quicken.

What you see

Back button

Next button


Do you want to set up an account?

To answer the question:

•	Click Yes to create a Quicken account; otherwise, click No.

What you see

Yes, No buttons

Back button


Yes, No buttons

Click Yes to create a Quicken account.  Click No to continue to the next screen.


What do you want to call this account?

To answer the question:

1.	Enter a unique name for the account.

2.	Click Next.

What you see

Account Name

Back button

Next button


Do you have the last statement for this account?

To answer the question:

•	Click Yes if you have your last account statement; click No if you don't have your records with you.

What you see

Yes, No buttons

Back button


Enter the ending date of the statement

To complete the window:

1.	Enter the ending date of your last account statement.

2.	Click Next.

What you see

Statement Date

Back button

Next button


Statement Date

You'll find the ending date printed on your last account statement.


Enter the ending balance of the account

To complete the window:

1.	Enter the ending balance of your account.  It should be listed on your last account statement.

2.	Click Next.

What you see

Ending Balance

Back button

Next button


Ending Balance

Enter the account ending balance, as listed on your last account statement.


Account Summary

This window displays the name and balance date of the account Quicken is about to create.

If you want to make changes:

•	Click Back.

If everything is OK:

•	Click Next to create the account.

What you see

Back button

Next button


Account Summary

This window displays the name and balance date of the account Quicken is about to create.

If you want to make changes:

•	Click Back.

If everything is OK:

•	Click Next to create the account.

What you see

Back button

Next button


About your accounts...

Each Quicken account has a register associated with it.  On the screen, a Quicken register looks just like the register you use in your checkbook.

You use the register to record transactions.  Each time you enter a new transaction, Quicken automatically adjusts the account balance and shows the new amount at the bottom of the register.

The only transactions you don't enter in the register are checks you plan to print from Quicken. (Go to the Write Checks window for these transactions.)

Categorize income and expenses

All Quicken registers have a Category field. When you enter a category name in the Category field of a transaction, you categorize the transaction with an income or expense category. These categories identify where your income comes from and what your expenses are.

When you categorize your transactions, any Quicken reports, budgets, and graphs you create will be more meaningful, providing detailed information about your spending.


What is a category?

A useful label

In Quicken, categories are labels that you can apply to transactions.  You use them to keep track of where your money comes from and where it goes.  Examples of categories that you might use are "Salary," "Groceries," and "Utilities."

Categories extend the power of Quicken

When you categorize your transactions, Quicken reports, graphs, and budgets become much more meaningful.  You can create reports and graphs that tell you how much you spend on items like food, entertainment, or mortgage interest; or how much income you receive from sources like salary, dividends, or interest.

Quicken's categories are flexible

Quicken provides a list of standard categories that you can begin using immediately.  You can add categories of your own to the list and delete categories that you don't need.  If a category doesn't provide enough detail, you can create subcategories within the category.  Your reports will show the subcategory amounts as subtotals for their parent category.

Supercategories give you a broader view

You can group your categories together into supercategories for budgets and budget reports.  Supercategories give you another level for viewing your finances.  For example, you may want to group Dining and Groceries under Food, and enter a single budget amount for Food.

What you see

Back button

Next button


Do you want to use business categories?

Quicken comes with two sets of standard categories, one for home use and one for business use.  Whether you answer Yes or No to this question, you will automatically get Quicken's home categories.

To answer the question:

•	Click Yes to include business categories; otherwise, click No.

See a list of...

Quicken's standard home categories

Quicken's standard business categories

What you see

Yes, No buttons

Back button


Yes, No buttons

Click Yes if you are not sure if you want to use business categories  You can always delete the ones that you don't need later.  Click No if you won't be using Quicken for a small business.


You've just completed New User Setup!

To start using Quicken:

1.	Display the register for each account you've set up.

2.	Enter any new checks in the register.

3.	Enter any new deposits, withdrawals or ATM transactions in the register.

How to...

Select an account to use (and display its register)

Add a transaction to a register

What you see

Back button

Done button


Done

Click to display the Quicken Homebase and start using Quicken.  Homebase provides easy access to Quicken's most popular activities and features.


Intuit phone numbers

To see a list of Intuit phone numbers:

•	Click here

Before you call with a question or problem:

Be at your computer with Windows and Quicken running, and have the following information handy:

•	Quicken version number (from the Help menu, choose About Quicken)

•	If you receive an error message, exact wording of the message

•	Hardware type and model and amount of memory (RAM) installed

•	DOS version number and Windows version number

•	Monitor type

•	Printer manufacturer, type, and model (if relevant to your problem)

•	Network configuration, if any


Product Support (Click here for the next page.)

For questions about...	Contact...	At this number...
Quicken for Windows	Quicken Technical Support Talk to a representative during our business hours.	415-858-6004
	QuickFax System Order and receive FAXes about problems and solutions at any time.	415-858-6090
	Quicken Online Forum Use your CompuServe or Prodigy membership to send your questions to us.	For details,  click here.


Product Support (Click here for the next page.)

For questions about...	Contact...	At this number...
IntelliCharge Portfolio Price Update Online Software Registration Intuit Marketplace Call this number if technical problems occur while using any Intuit online service with Quicken. For other support numbers and information about these services, click here.	Intuit Online Services Technical Support	415-858-6070


Product Support (Click here for the next page.)

For questions about...	Contact...	At this number...
CheckFree Call this number if problems occur within Quicken before you transmit transactions to CheckFree.	Intuit Technical Support for CheckFree	415-858-6070
Call this number if problems occur with payment processing after you transmit transactions to CheckFree.	CheckFree Corporation Technical Support	614-825-3500


Service Information (Click here for the next page.)

For information about...	Contact...	At this number...
Intuit checks, invoices, and other supplies Call this number for information only.  We cannot accept orders over the phone.	Intuit Supplies Customer Service	800-433-8810 (U.S./International) 800-268-5779 (Canada only)
Portfolio Price Update Call this number for pricing information, or to change your customer profile (e.g. name, address).	Intuit Online Services Customer Service	800-245-2164
Tax Planner Call this number to find out if there are tax law changes that affect the way you use Tax Planner	Quicken Tax Update Hotline	415-858-6081


Service Information (Click here for the next page.)

For information about...	Contact...	At this number...
IntelliCharge with Quicken credit card Call this number to apply for a Quicken credit card. Call this number for card limits, billing inquires, statement delivery, and other Quicken credit card issues. Call this number to report a lost or stolen Quicken credit card. Call this number to get your Quicken credit card balance or last payment amount and date received.	Intuit Customer Service Travelers Bank Travelers Bank Travelers Bank	800-756-1855 800-772-2221 800-426-2441 800-262-9323


To Place an Order (Click here for the next page.)

To order...	Contact...	At this number...
Software upgrades Intuit software products Quicken Business User's Guide	Intuit Direct Sales	602-295-3220 (Before March 1995) 520-295-3220 (Beginning March 1995)
Intuit checks, invoices, and other supplies Send your order by FAX, mail, or modem.  We cannot accept orders over the phone.	Intuit Supplies	FAX: 415-852-9146 (U.S. only) FAX: 416-752-1140 (Canada only) Mailing Address: Intuit Supplies P.O. Box 50930 Palo Alto, CA  94303-9796


Quicken customer forums and user groups

If you have a modem and a membership to CompuServe or Prodigy, you can send your questions directly to Intuit support representatives online.  Also, many online services have product forums where their customers can post questions and answers about software.  Browsing such a forum can help you learn more about Quicken from other Quicken users.  If you don't have a membership to an online service, contact the service you wish to join for membership and pricing information.

Finally, personal computer user groups are a great way to learn more about computers and software.  Some user groups even have special interest groups for Quicken users!

How to...

Access the Intuit forum on CompuServe

Access the Intuit forum on Prodigy

Locate a personal computer user group


Locating a personal computer user group

To find a DOS or Windows computer user group in your area, contact the Association of PC User Groups at (914) 876-6678.


Accessing the Intuit forum on CompuServe

Using an ASCII interface:	Using the Win-Cim interface:
1. Connect to CompuServe.	1. Connect to CompuServe.
2. At the ENTER CHOICE! prompt, enter "GO INTUIT."	2. From the Services window, select Forums.
3. The message "WELCOME TO THE INTUIT FORUM" appears.	3. From the Forums window, select Intuit Forum.


Accessing the Intuit forum on Prodigy

Connect to Prodigy, then JUMP INTUIT.


End of file


*Printing (contents)
Printing

To search for a Help topic, click the Search button above.

Overview

Click here

How to...

Set up your printer

How to print...

Print to a file

Preview on the screen before printing

Common Questions

How do I change the form size for my printer?

How do I print a sample check?

How do I print a partial page of checks?

How can I correct common printing problems?

Quick Tips

Speeding up graph printing on a PostScript printer

Speeding up graph printing on a laser printer

Creating a logo for your checks

Printing a logo on checks


Set up your printer

To print checks

To print reports and graphs

Change the font for printed reports and graphs

Change options for printing checks

Adjust alignment (page-oriented printers)

Adjust alignment (continuous-feed printers)


How to print...

Checks

Checks you've printed before

Lists

Graphs

Reports

Forecasts

Snapshots

Account registers

Quicken windows

The Financial Calendar


Print to a file

Print a report to a file

Print a register or list to a file


Preview on the screen before printing

Preview a report on the screen before printing

Preview a register or list on the screen before printing


Printing
Overview: Printing

In Quicken, you can print checks you have written, reports and graphs you have created, any account register, and certain Quicken lists.

When you print checks with Quicken, you use special personalized checks from Intuit, designed to work with Quicken.  Intuit makes checks for continuous-feed printers and page-oriented printers. You can print a check as you create it or wait and print all your checks at another time.

Quicken enables you to print to most printers and offers several styles of printing, depending on your printer's capabilities.

Setting up your printer

Before you print checks, set up your check printer and align your checks by printing a sample check.  Reports and graphs have a separate setup procedure for printing.

Setting up your printer to print checks

Setting up your printer to print reports and graphs

Here are the things you can print:

Checks

Registers

Lists

Reports

QuickZoom reports

Budget spreadsheets

Reconciliation reports

Financial planners

Graphs


Checks

You can print checks on a continuous-feed or page-oriented printer.


Registers

Print to a printer or to disk. Quicken can:

•	Abbreviate every transaction so each one fits on one line

•	Display all lines of a split transaction

•	Print in check number order instead of chronological order


Lists

You can print these lists:

•	Category & Transfer

•	Memorized Transaction

•	Security

•	Class

•	Scheduled Transaction

•	Electronic Payee

•	Security Type

•	Investment Goal

•	Memorized Investment Transaction


Reports

You can print any report to a printer (in one of several disk formats) or preview it on the screen. You can print negative amounts in color, and print the entire report or a range of pages.


QuickZoom reports

When you use QuickZoom to look more closely at the transactions composing a graph, you can print the resulting report.

•	Monthly Expenditures (Income and Expense graph)

•	Expense Comparison (Income and Expense graph)

•	Monthly Budget vs. Actual (Budget Variance graph)

•	Asset Comparison (Net Worth graph)

•	Liability Comparison (Net Worth graph)

•	Price and Value History (Investment graph)

•	Average Annual Total Return (Investment graph)


Budget spreadsheets

You can print a budget spreadsheet to a printer (in one of several disk formats) or preview it on the screen. You can print the entire report or a range of pages.


Reconciliation reports

You can show reconciliation to your bank balance as of any date you choose. You can include all transactions or summary information and uncleared transactions.


Financial planners

You can print the schedules for all financial planners.


Graphs

You can print graphs in 2 or 3 dimensions, in color or black and white. Your printer needs sufficient memory to print a graph successfully at a resolution of 300 dpi (dots per inch).

Quicken uses the same settings you selected for printing reports.


Printing a Quicken window
Print a Quicken window

To print a Quicken window:

1.	In Quicken, press ALT + Print Screen key (many times called PrScr or Print Scrn).  A picture of the screen is sent to Windows Clipboard.

2.	Open Paintbrush, the Windows drawing program.  You can use any drawing package; you can also use Write.

3.	Paste (Crtl+V) the image into the program.  You can print the image or save it to disk.


Setting up a printer to print checks
Set up a printer to print checks

To set up your printer:

1.	From the File menu, choose Printer Setup, then choose Check Printer Setup.

2.	Select the printer you want to use from the Printer drop-down list.  If your printer isn't listed, use the Microsoft Windows Control Panel to install the printer driver for your printer.  If a driver isn't available, install one that your printer will emulate.

3.	Select Auto-detect in the Paper Feed drop-down list.  Quicken automatically detects whether your printer is continuous-feed or page-oriented.

4.	Choose the style of check you are using (standard, wallet, or voucher).

5.	If you have a page-oriented printer, you can set up Quicken to print partial pages of checks.  To find out how, click here.

6.	(Optional) To customize your printer setup, click the buttons on the window. To learn about an option, click its name in this list:

Font

Align

Settings

Logo

7.	Click OK to save your printer setup selections.

How to...

Install a printer driver


Font

Displays a window where you select the font that you want your printer to use when it prints your checks.  If you do not select a font, the printer uses its default font (usually Courier).


Align

Click to adjust how printed text aligns on your checks.

How to...

Adjust alignment (page-oriented printers) OR

Adjust alignment (continuous-feed printers)


Settings

Displays a window that shows the current settings that are in effect for the printer you've chosen.  Click Settings when you need to specify a different paper size for your checks.  You may need to do this when you are changing from one check style to another.


Logo

Click to select a logo to print on your voucher or standard checks.

How to...

Create a logo for your checks

Print a logo on your checks


Setting up a printer for printing reports and graphs
Set up a printer for printing reports and graphs

Before you print reports or graphs from Quicken, you must set up your printer.  Depending on the capabilities of your printer, you can select several printing options, including fonts, paper size, and page orientation.

To set up your printer:

1.	From the File menu, choose Printer Setup and then choose Report/Graphs Printer Setup.

2.	Select the printer you want to use from the Printer drop-down list.  If your printer isn't listed, use the Microsoft Windows Control Panel to install the printer driver for your printer.  If a driver isn't available, install one that your printer will emulate.

3.	Select Auto-detect in the Paper Feed drop-down list.  Quicken automatically detects whether your printer is continuous-feed or page-oriented.

4.	If you have a color printer, select the Print Reports and Graphs in Color checkbox.

5.	If you want to change the margins (top, bottom, left, right) enter different margin sizes in the boxes.  Leave the preset margin unless you are planning to print something out of the ordinary.

6.	To customize your printer set up, click the buttons described below:

Head Font

Body Font

Settings

7.	Click OK to save your selections.

How to...

Install a printer driver


Selecting a font for titles and headings

1.	Click Head Font.

2.	From the drop-down lists, choose the name, style, and size of the font you want to use.  Keep in mind that some printers will not print certain font types and sizes, even though they are selectable.

3.	Click OK.

If you don't select a font:

Quicken will use the default font for your printer.


Selecting a font for body text

1.	Click Body Font.

2.	From the drop-down lists, choose the name, style, and size of the font you want to use.  Keep in mind that some printers will not print certain font types and sizes, even though they are selectable.

3.	Click OK.

If you don't select a font:

Quicken will use the default font for your printer.


Printing a logo on your checks
Print a logo on your checks

Requirements:

•	Artwork for a logo must come from a Windows bitmap file (.BMP).

•	Logo artwork can be no larger than 1" square.

•	Logos are printed on standard or voucher checks only (not on wallet checks).

•	A page-oriented printer is required to print a logo.

To print a logo on your checks:

1.	From the File menu, choose Printer Setup, then choose Check Printer Setup.

2.	From the Check Printer Setup window, click Logo.

3.	From the Check Logo Artwork window, click File.

4.	From the Open Artwork File window, choose the file you want to use as the logo.

If you see the file containing your logo in the list box on the left, just double-click that file's name and click OK.

If you don't see the file, it's probably in a different directory. Click on the folders in the list box on the right side of the window. Each time you click on a folder, its contents are displayed in the list box on the left. When you find the file, double-click that file's name and click OK.

5.	Click OK.  To print checks with a logo, be sure that the "Print your logo" checkbox is selected when you print them.

How to...

Create a logo for your checks

Print checks


Creating a logo for your checks
Create a logo for your checks

You can print your own logo on your checks. To do this, you need to create the artwork and store it as a bitmap file (that is, a file with a .BMP extension). You can use Paintbrush (or a similar application) to create the bitmap.

When you print checks with a logo, Quicken imports the bitmap file and prints the artwork into a 1/2 inch by 1/2 inch square in the upper-left corner of each check. When Quicken fits your artwork into this square, the image may become distorted and appear jagged, compressed, or expanded.

You can easily edit the bitmap so that it prints with professional quality. If you have a printer that prints at 300 dots per inch (dpi), you should edit the bitmap so that it fits within an area of 150 dots by 150 dots (1/2 inch by 1/2 inch). When you match the number of dots per inch in the bitmap file with the resolution of your printer, the quality of the artwork on the printed check improves.

If you have a monochrome printer, create the artwork in black and white for best results.

How to...

Print a logo on your checks


Check Logo Artwork window
Check Logo Artwork

This is where you select the logo to print on your checks.

Requirements:

•	Artwork for a logo must come from a Windows bitmap file (*.BMP).

•	Logo artwork can be no larger than 1/2 inch by 1/2 inch square.

To select the logo to print:

•	Click File.

What you see

File, Clear buttons


Check Logo Artwork buttons

This button...	Does this...
File	Displays the Open Artwork File window. Select the file containing your logo.
Clear	Removes the logo from the Selected Logo box.


Open Artwork File window
Open Artwork File

This is where you tell Quicken which file contains your logo. To do this, you need to locate the directory and then find the file in that directory.

If you see the file containing your logo in the list box on the left:

•	Double-click that file's name and click OK. When you return to the Check Logo Artwork window, Quicken displays the logo in the Selected Artwork box.  If your logo is too big, a message appears telling you so.

If you don't see the file, it's probably in a different directory:

•	Click on the folders in the list box on the right side of the window. Each time you click on a folder, its contents are displayed in the list box on the left. When you find the file, double-click that file's name and click OK. When you return to the Check Logo Artwork window, Quicken will display the logo in the Selected Artwork box.


Changing the form size for your printer
Change the form size for your printer

Form size is a setting that adjusts your printer to the dimensions of the check style you are printing (standard, wallet, or voucher).  For most printers, Quicken automatically adjusts the form size when you switch to a different check style.

For some older model and dot-matrix printers, Quicken cannot adjust the form size.  When this is the case, Quicken tells you that the form size is incorrect for the style of check you are printing.  To correct the problem, you can change the form size yourself.

To change the form size

1.	From the File menu, choose Printer Setup and then choose Check Printer Setup.

2.	Click Settings.

3.	From the Paper Size drop-down list, select the User Defined Size option.

Selecting this option allows you to enter the correct values for the paper size.

4.	Enter one of these sets of values for the paper size, then click OK.

For...	Use these values...
Standard checks	Unit:	.01 inch
	Width:	850
	Length:	350
Wallet checks	Unit:	.01 inch
	Width:	850
	Length:	284
Voucher checks	Unit:	.01 inch
	Width:	850
	Length:	700


Correcting common printing problems
How can I correct common printing problems?

Solution One:  Rename the WPR.DAT file

The WPR.DAT file is a Quicken printer file.  It contains your font and printer settings.  If you rename this file, Quicken creates a new WPR.DAT file.  Under some circumstances, this can correct printing problems.  However, you will lose your font and check alignment settings.

Solution Two:  Disable the Print Manager

Disabling the Print Manager creates a "direct line" from Quicken to the printer.  Under some circumstances, this corrects printing problems by allotting the system resources to one job at a time.  See Windows Help on the Print Manager for more detail.

How to...

Rename the WPR.DAT file

Disable the Print Manager


To rename the WPR.DAT file:

1.	Exit Quicken for Windows.

2.	At the Windows Program Manager, double-click the Main program group, then double-click the File Manager to open it.

3.	Click the QUICKENW directory.  This will open the directory and display the files within it.  If you installed Quicken in a different directory, locate that directory and click it to open it.

4.	Click the WPR.DAT file.

5.	From the File menu, choose Rename.

6.	In the To: field, type OLDWPR.DAT and click OK.  This will rename your WPR.DAT to OLDWPR.DAT.  When you restart Quicken, a new WPR.DAT file will be created.


To disable the Print Manager:

1.	At the Windows Program Manager, double-click the Main program group, then double-click the Control Panel to open it.

2.	Double-click the Printers icon.

3.	Clear the Use Print Manager checkbox.


Printing a sample check
Print a sample check

Quicken allows you to test your printer setup by printing a sample check.  If you need to make adjustments, you can print another sample until your checks print correctly.

To print the test check:

1.	Load the correct forms or paper in your printer.

2.	Be sure the printer is turned on and is online.

3.	From the File menu, choose Printer Setup, then choose Check Printer Setup.  The Check Printer Setup window appears.

4.	Be sure that the correct Check Style is selected, then click Align.

5.	If you are printing on a continuous-feed printer, click Fine in the Alignment for Continuous Printer window.

6.	From the Check Printer Alignment window, click Test to print a sample check.

7.	Examine the printed sample.

•	If the sample check printed correctly, you have completed the setup. Click OK in the Check Printer Setup window to save your setup.

If you print checks on a continuous-feed printer, note the correct position of the check form for future printing.

Visually line up part of your printer with one of the position numbers at the edge of the check.  Make a note of this spot on the printer.  From now on, use this spot on the printer as an alignment cue to position your checks visually each time you insert them in your printer.

•	If the check is not properly aligned, see:
Adjusting alignment (page-oriented printers) OR
Adjusting alignment (continuous-feed printers)

Partial pages of checks.  For standard or wallet sheet-fed checks, Quicken saves the horizontal and vertical alignments according to the numbers of checks on a page.  If you use partial pages of checks (that is, pages with one or two checks missing), you may have to adjust the alignment for each of the three options.


Adjusting check alignment (continuous-feed printers)
Adjust check alignment (for continuous-feed printers)

Adjust the check alignment when your printer is not printing checks correctly.

To make adjustments, do the following first:

1.	Load the correct forms or paper in your printer.

2.	Be sure the printer is turned on and is online.

3.	From the File menu, choose Printer Setup, then choose Check Printer Setup.  The Check Printer Setup window appears.

4.	Be sure that the correct Check Style is selected, then click Align.  The Alignment for Continuous Printer window appears.

If the printing on the check is off vertically by more than a line or two:

1.	Click Coarse.  Quicken prints a test check with a pointer line printed on it. Don't move the forms in the printer.

2.	In the Type Position Number window, enter the position number the pointer line is pointing to on the check.  Quicken prints another test check. Review the check alignment. If more adjustment is needed, repeat the steps listed above.

3.	Click OK to save your changes.

If the printing on the check needs only fine tuning (horizontally or vertically)

1.	Click Fine.  The Check Printer Alignment window appears.

2.	Enter your adjustments.  You can use either method:

This method...	Works best when...
Moving text in the onscreen example	The printed text is badly misaligned on your printed sample.
Entering numbers into the Horiz and Vert fields	You have slight adjustments to make or when you happen to know the correct horizontal and vertical adjustment values for your printer.
3.	(Optional)  Click Test to print a sample check and test your changes.

4.	Click OK to save your changes.


Adjusting check alignment (page-oriented printers)
Adjust check alignment (for page-oriented printers)

Adjust the check alignment when your printer is not printing checks correctly.

To print a test check:

1.	Load the correct forms or paper in your printer.

2.	Be sure the printer is turned on and is online.

3.	From the File menu, choose Printer Setup, then choose Check Printer Setup.  The Check Printer Setup window appears.

4.	Be sure that the correct Check Style is selected, then click Align.  The Check Printer Alignment window appears.

5.	Click Test to print a sample check.

To adjust the alignment, if necessary:

1.	If you are making adjustments for a partial page of standard or wallet style checks, indicate the number of checks left on the page by clicking either 2 or 1 under "Checks per Page."

Note:  You can save up to three sets of alignment adjustments, one for each possible number of standard or wallet checks on a sheet.

2.	Enter your adjustments.  You can use either of these methods:

This method...	Works best when...
Moving text in the onscreen example	The printed text is badly misaligned on your printed sample.
Entering numbers into the Horiz and Vert fields	You have slight adjustments to make or when you happen to know the correct horizontal and vertical adjustment values for your printer.
3.	(Optional)  Click Test to print a sample check and test your changes.

4.	Click OK to save your changes.


Entering numbers into the Horiz and Vert boxes
Enter numbers into the fields

You can enter adjustment numbers (in hundredths of an inch) in the Horiz and Vert fields.  Use the following table as a guide for entering the numbers:

Problem:	Solution:
Text prints too high	Increase the number in the Vert field.  For example, if the text is 1/4" too high, you would add 25 to the Vert field.  (25 is 0.25").
Text prints too low	Decrease the number in the Vert field.  For example, if the text is 1/4" too low, you would subtract 25 from the Vert field.  You can enter a negative number if necessary.
Text prints too far to the left	Decrease the number in the Horiz field.  For example, if the text is 1/4" too far to the left you would subtract 25 from the Horiz field.  You can enter a negative number if necessary.
Text prints too far to the right	Increase the number in the Horiz field.  For example, if the text is 1/4" too far to the right you would add 25 to the Horiz field.


Moving text in the onscreen example
Move text in the onscreen example

The text shown in the Printer Alignment window initially shows how text should be aligned on your printed sample.  You can move this text to show Quicken how the text on your sample is misaligned.

To move text:

1.	Move the mouse pointer to any block of text.

2.	While holding down the left mouse button, move the text until its position matches the misaligned text on your printed sample.


Printing checks
Print checks

Before you print you must first set up your printer for printing checks from Quicken.  If you have not done this yet, see: Setting up a printer for printing checks.

To print checks:

1.	If you haven't inserted the checks in your printer, do so now.  Insert the checks the same way you would insert letterhead paper.

2.	Make sure your printer is turned on and that it is online.

3.	Open the account you want to print checks from.

4.	From the File menu, choose Print Checks.  The Select Checks to Print window appears.

5.	If necessary, change the number in the First Check Number box so that it matches the number of the first check in your printer.

6.	Select an option for printing checks:

All Checks

Checks dated through

Selected Checks

7.	Click Print.  The Print Checks window appears.

8.	If your checks have a logo, click the "Print your logo" checkbox.

9.	Click Print to start printing the checks.

10.	Did your checks print correctly?  If they did, click OK.

If the checks did not print correctly:

•	Type the number of the first check that did not print correctly and click OK.  Examine your printer to see if the checks jammed or the printer ran out of checks.  If the text on the checks printed too high, too low, or too far to the left or right, you may need to adjust the check printing settings.  See:

Adjusting alignment (continuous-feed printers)OR
Adjusting alignment (page-oriented printers)

How to...

Print a partial page of checks

Print a logo on your checks


Check style
Check style (continuous-feed printers)

The style shown should be the correct style for the checks you are printing.  If it is not, you may need to reset the paper size for that style of checks.

To reset the check paper size:

1.	Close the Print Checks window.  From the File menu, choose Printer Setup, then choose Check Printer Setup.  Then click Settings.

2.	Select the User Defined Size option from the Paper Size drop-down list. Then enter one of these sets of values for the paper size:

For...	Use these values...
Standard checks	Unit: .01 inch	Length:  350
Wallet checks	Unit: .01 inch	Length:  284
Voucher checks	Unit: .01 inch	Length:  700


Check style (page-oriented printers)

Select the style you want to use from the drop-down list.  You can select Standard, Wallet, or Voucher.


Printing a partial page of checks
Print a partial page of checks

When to do it:

When you have a partial page of one or two blank checks remaining after you have printed checks on your page-oriented printer.  You can reuse the partial page the next time you print checks.  This applies to standard and wallet checks, but not to voucher checks (which come only one to a page).

You can only print a partial page of checks on a page-oriented printer such as a laser printer.

To print a partial page of checks:

1.	Make sure your printer is turned on and that it is online.  Do not insert your checks yet.

2.	From the File menu, choose Printer Setup, then choose Check Printer Setup.

3.	Under "Partial Page Printing Style," select the icon that shows how you place paper into your printer's envelope feeder:

Left

Centered

Portrait

If you are unsure which one to use, see the section of your printer manual that describes how to use the envelope feeder.

4.	Click OK.

5.	From the File menu, choose Print Checks.  The Select Checks to Print window appears.

6.	Make sure that the first check number on the screen is the same as the first check number on your partial page.

7.	Under "Print," select Selected Checks, then click Choose.

8.	Select one or two checks to print, then click OK.

9.	Click Print.  The Print Checks window appears.

10.	Under "Checks on First Page," click one of the following:

One	If your partial page has one check on it.

Two	If your partial page has two checks on it.

11.	Insert the partial page of checks into your envelope feeder.  If your printer requires that you insert the page so that the checks are facing down (as HP LaserJet IIP does), insert the page face down.  Look in your printer manual if you aren't sure.

12.	Click Print to start printing the checks.

13.	Did your checks print correctly?  If they did, click OK.

If the checks did not print correctly:

•	Type the number of the first check that did not print correctly and click OK.  Examine your printer to see if the checks jammed or the printer ran out of checks.  If the text on the checks printed too high, too low, or too far to the left or right, you may need to adjust the check printing settings.  See:

Correcting check alignment


Portrait

Select this orientation if:

•	You center the page in the envelope feeder

and

•	The top edge of each check enters the printer first.

Some printers that print this way:

•	HP DeskJet series


Centered

Select this option if:

•	You center the page in the envelope feeder

and

•	The left or right edge of each check enters the printer first.

Some printers that print this way:

•	Apple LaserWriter II series

•	HP LaserJet II and III series

•	Canon LBP-8 series


Left

Select this option if:

•	You position the page on the left side of the envelope feeder

and

•	The left or right edge of each check enters the printer first.

Some printers that print this way:

•	HP LaserJet IIp and IIIp

•	Apple Personal LaserWriter

•	Canon LBP-4

•	IBM 4019 and 4029 series


Reprinting checks
Reprint checks

In Quicken, you can reprint any check at any time.  These instructions assume that you printed at least once before the check you are about to print now.  If this is not the case, see instead: Printing checks.

To reprint checks:

1.	In the check register, select the transaction for the check you want to reprint.

2.	Select the check number and type Print.  The word "Print" should replace the check number.

3.	Click Record.

4.	From the File menu, choose Print Checks.

5.	Print the check as usual, paying attention to entering the correct first check number.


Changing the font for printed reports and graphs
Change the font for printed reports and graphs

To change the font:

1.	From the File menu, choose Printer Setup, then choose Report/Graph Printer Setup.

2.	Click Head Font.

3.	From the drop-down lists, choose the name, style, and size of the font you want to use in report headings.  Keep in mind that some printers will not print certain font types and sizes, even though they are selectable.

4.	Click OK.

5.	Click Body Font.

6.	From the drop-down lists, choose the name, style, and size of the font you want to use in graphs and the main text of your reports.

7.	Click OK.

8.	Click OK to save your new font selections.

Note

Keep in mind that some printers will not print certain font types and sizes, even though they are selectable.


Printing a report
Print a report

To print a report:

1.	Make sure your printer is turned on, is online, and contains paper.

2.	Create the report you want to print.

3.	From the File menu, choose Print Report or click Print on the Report button bar.

4.	Select any other options that you want to use:

Print in color

Draft mode printing

Print range

5.	Click Print.


Print range

You can have Quicken print all pages in your report or you can select a range of pages for Quicken to print.


Draft mode printing

Speeds up printing by substituting a font chosen by the printer for the one you have chosen for your reports.


Print in color

Click if you have a color printer.  For reports, negative numbers print in red. Graphs print in full color.


Printing a graph
Print a graph

Before you print the graph, you may want to check which printing options are in effect for graphs.  For details, see below.

To print a graph:

1.	Make sure your printer is turned on, is online, and contains paper.

2.	Create the graph you want to print.

3.	From the File menu, choose Print Graph.

How to...

Set up a printer to print reports and graphs

Change Quicken's graph options


Printing Snapshots
Print Snapshots

You can print any page of Snapshots.  If you have calendar notes that are longer than will fit in the Snapshot, Quicken prints only what fits.

To print a Snapshot page:

1.	Check that your printer is turned on, is set to online, and is loaded with paper.

2.	From the Reports menu, choose Snapshots.

3.	Display the Snapshot page you want to print.

4.	Click Print, or choose Print Snapshots from the File menu.

How to...

Display Snapshots


Printing a forecast
Print a forecast

To print a forecast:

1.	Check that your printer is turned on, is set to online, and is loaded with paper.

2.	From the Plan menu, choose Forecasting.

3.	From the File menu, choose Print Forecast.

How to...

Create a forecast

Create a forecast from your budget


Printing the Financial Calendar
Print the Financial Calendar

To print the Financial Calendar:

1.	Check that your printer is turned on, is set to online, and is loaded with paper.

2.	From the Activities menu, choose Financial Calendar.

3.	From the File menu, choose Print Calendar.

How to...

Use the Financial Calendar


Printing the transactions in a register
Print the transactions in a register

To print the entire register:

1.	Open the register you want to print.

2.	Click Report in the register button bar.

3.	Click Print in the report button bar.

To print a part of the register:

1.	Open the register you want to print.

2.	From the File menu, choose Print Register.

3.	(Optional)  Change the range of dates shown.  Quicken prints all of the transactions from the beginning date to the ending date.  If you leave the dates as shown, Quicken prints all transactions to date for this year.

4.	(Optional)  Enter a title for the register in the Title box.

5.	Select any other printing options that you want to use:

Print One Transaction Per Line

Print Transaction Splits

Show Savings Goal Transactions

Sort By Number

6.	Click Print.  The Print Report window appears.

7.	Select any other options that you want to use:

Print in color

Print in draft mode

Print Range

8.	Click Print.  Quicken prints the report.


Print One Transaction Per Line

Abbreviates each transaction so that it fits on one line in the printout.  Quicken normally prints each transaction on three lines.


Print Transaction Splits

Prints the additional lines of split transactions.  If you do not select this option, Quicken omits the additional lines.


Sort By Number

Prints the transactions in order by check number (instead of chronological order).  When you select this option, Quicken omits a running balance from your printout.


Printing a list
Print a list

You can print the Category & Transfer, Class, Memorized Transaction, Security, Electronic Payee, Security Type, Investment Goal, and Memorized Investment Transaction lists.

To print a list:

1.	Open the window of the list you want to print.  With the exception of the Electronic Payee list, the commands to open list windows are on the Lists menu.  To open the Electronic Payee list, choose CheckFree from the Activities menu and then choose Electronic Payee List.

2.	From the File menu, choose Print List.  The Print Report window appears.

3.	(Optional) Under "Print Range" enter a range of pages you want Quicken to print.

4.	Click Print.


Printing a report to a file
Print a report to a file

When you print a report, you can print it to a file instead of a piece of paper.  This gives you the ability to transfer the content of the report to another application.  Depending on the file format you select, you can edit the report in a word processor, edit the report in Lotus 1-2-3 or a Lotus compatible spreadsheet.

To print to a file:

1.	Create the report you want to print.

2.	Click Print in the Report window.  Quicken displays the Print Report window.

3.	Under "Print to," click one of these options:

ASCII Disk File

Tab-delimited Disk File

1-2-3 (.PRN) Disk File

4.	Click Print.

5.	Enter the path and filename of the file.

6.	Click OK.


Previewing a report on the screen
Preview a report on the screen

Before you print a report, you can display it on the screen to see what it will look like when you print it on a printer.

To preview a report on the screen:

1.	Create the report you want to print.

2.	Click Print in the Report window.  The Print Report window appears.

3.	Click Preview.


Printing a register or list to a file
Print a register or list to a file

When you print a register or a list, you can print it to an ASCII file instead of a piece of paper.  This gives you the ability to transfer the register or the list to another application.

To print to a file:

1.	Display the register or list.

2.	From the File menu, choose Print Register or Print List.

3.	For registers only, fill in the Print Register window:

•	(Optional) Enter a title.

•	Select the printing options that you want to use:

Print One Transaction Per Line

Print Transaction Splits

Show Savings Goal Transactions

Sort By Number

4.	Under "Print to," click one of these options:

ASCII Disk File

Tab-delimited Disk File

1-2-3 [.PRN] Disk File

5.	Click Print.

6.	Enter the path and filename of the file.

7.	Click OK.


Previewing a register or list on the screen
Preview a register or list on the screen

Before you print a register or list, you can display it on the screen to see what it will look like when you print it on a printer.

To preview a register or list on the screen:

1.	Display the register or list.

2.	From the File menu, choose Print Register or Print List.

3.	From the Print Register or List window, click Print.

4.	From the window that appears next, click Preview.


Preview

Prints your report, register, list, or budget to the screen. You then have the opportunity to view it onscreen before you print it.


ASCII Disk File

Prints your report to an ASCII file.  Select this option if you want to edit the file with a word processor.  Most word processors accept ASCII files.


Tab-delimited Disk File

Prints your report in tab-delimited format. This format is recognized by most word processing and spreadsheet programs


1-2-3 (.PRN) Disk File

Prints your report to a .PRN file.  Select this option if you want to edit the report with Lotus 1-2-3 or a Lotus-compatible spreadsheet program.


Installing a printer driver
Install a printer driver

Drivers are small programs that allow printers, video cards, sound cards, or any specific piece of hardware to run and communicate with Windows.  Because of incompatibility, upgrades or damage to a particular driver, you may need to reinstall that driver.  While this is not very difficult, one rule always applies:  When a driver is already loaded, you will not be able to reinstall it correctly until you remove the installed driver first.

To remove the current printer driver:

1.	At the Windows Program Manager, open the Main program group, then double-click the Control Panel icon.

2.	Double-click Printers.

3.	Select the print driver you want to remove, then click Remove.

4.	Click Yes to confirm the removal.

To install a printer driver:

1.	At the Windows Program Manager, open the Main program group, then double-click the Control Panel icon.

2.	Double-click Printers.

3.	Click Add.  This brings up a list at the bottom of the screen.

4.	Scroll the list of printers, then select the specific driver or a driver that your printer will emulate.  More detail>

5.	Click Install and follow the screen directions.


If your printer is not listed:

Consult your printer manual for suggested emulations.

•	Most dot matrix printers emulate either an Epson or an IBM printer.

•	For 9-pin dot matrix printers you can try the Epson FX-80, FX-86E, or the IBM Proprinter.

•	For 24-pin dot matrix printers you can try the Epson LQ-510, Epson LQ-1500, or the IBM Proprinter X24, or X24E.

•	For laser printers, most will emulate the HP family of laser printers.  Try the HP LaserJet Series II.


Check Printer Setup window
Check Printer Setup

This is where you indicate to Quicken which printer you will use to print checks from Quicken.  It is also your starting place for changing the text font that appears on your printed checks, and for specifying the correct paper size when you switch to a different check style.

How to...

Set up a printer for printing checks

What you see

Printer

Paper Feed

Check Style

Partial Page Printing Style

Font

Align

Settings

Logo


Paper Feed

The choices on this drop-down list set the paper-feed option for your printer.  The default selection is (Auto-detect).  This means that Quicken will automatically detect what type of paper feed mechanism your printer has.

Unless you have a specific reason to change this setting, leave it on Auto-detect.

If you need to change the setting:

•	Select one of these options from the drop-down list:

Continuous	For continuous-feed printers.  Most dot matrix printers are continuous-feed printers.
Page-oriented	For page-oriented printers.  All laser printers are page-oriented printers.


Partial Page Printing Style

If you have checks left over from a previous printing session, you can reuse them if you have a page-oriented printer like a laser printer.

To print a partial page of checks, click the button that shows how you position your checks in your printer's envelope feeder:

Left	Select this option if (a) you insert the page on the left side of the feeder and (b) the left or right edge of each check enters the printer first.

Centered	Select this option if (a) you center the page in the feeder and (b) the left or right edge of each check enters the printer first.

Portrait	Select this option if (a) you center the page in the feeder and (b) the top edge of each check enters the printer first.

These buttons are not available if your printer is a continuous-feed printer.


Align

Displays a window where you can make adjustments when printed information doesn't align properly on your checks.  This option is available only with page-oriented printers.


Report and Graphs Printer Setup window
Report Printer Setup

This is where you indicate to Quicken which printer you will use to print reports and graphs.  It is also your starting place for changing the text fonts that appear in your reports and graphs, and for changing printer settings such as paper size, page orientation, and resolution.

How to...

Set up a printer for printing reports and graphs

What you see

Printer

Paper Feed

Print reports and graphs in color (color printers only)

Margins

Head Font

Body Font

Settings


Printer

Select the printer you want to set up or use from the drop-down list.


Print reports and graphs in color (color printers only)

If you have a color printer, you can have Quicken print your reports and graphs in color.  For reports, negative numbers print in red. Graphs print in full color.


Margins

You can change the margins by entering different numbers in the margin boxes.  Leave the preset margin unless you are planning to print something out of the ordinary.


Head Font

Displays a window where you select the font you want your printer to use to print headings and titles in your reports and graphs.  If you do not select a font, the printer uses its default font (usually Courier).


Body Font

Displays a window where you select the font you want your printer to use to print the text in your reports and graphs.  If you do not select a font, the printer uses its default font (usually Courier).


Settings

Displays a window that shows the current settings that are in effect for the printer you've chosen.  Click Settings when you need to specify a different paper size, page orientation, or resolution for your reports and graphs.


Select Printing Font window
Select Font

This is where you select the font you want to use.  Depending on which button you clicked to display this window, the font you select here will apply to one of these items:

•	Printed text on checks

•	Headings and titles in reports and graphs

•	Text in reports and graphs.

To select a font:

•	Select a font from the list, specify its style and printing size, then click OK.

What you see

Font

Font Style

Size


Font

Shows the fonts available on your printer.


Font Style

Shows the styles available for the font you selected.  Currently, Quicken supports only regular font styles.


Size

Shows the character sizes available for the font you selected.  The larger the number, the larger the character size.


Select Checks to Print window
Select Checks to Print

This window tells how many checks you have to print, and total amount of those checks.  It also lets you select which checks to print, and enter the number of the first check in your printer.

To complete the window:

1.	If necessary, change the check number of the first check to print.  The number displayed should match the check number of the first check in your printer.

2.	Select the checks to print by clicking All Checks, Checks Dated Through, or Selected Checks (see below for more information).

3.	Click Print. The Print Checks window appears.

What you see

First Check Number

All Checks

Checks dated through

Selected Checks

Print

Print First

How to...

Print checks

Print a partial page of checks


First Check Number

Shows the number of the first check in your printer.  If the number shown is incorrect, change it so that it matches the number on the first check.


All Checks

Prints all unprinted checks, including postdated checks.


Checks dated through

Prints all checks up to a specific date.  By default, the date shown is the current date.  You can change the date by entering a different date in the box provided.


Selected Checks

Allows you to select the checks to be printed.  After you select this option, click the Choose button, then mark the checks you want to print and click OK.


Print

Displays the Print Checks window, where you give Quicken more explicit information about how to print your checks.


Print First

Prints only the first check out of the group of checks that you selected.  Use this option instead of printing a test check when you're fairly sure everything is aligned correctly and ready to print.  That way, you can sign and use the printed check.


Select Checks to Print window
Select Checks to Print

This is where you select checks to print (or not to print) from a list of unprinted checks.  When the window first displays, all checks are selected to print, as indicated by checkmarks in the column at the left of the window.

To select or deselect a check to print:

•	Click the check in the list.

To select or deselect all of the checks listed:

•	Click Mark All or Clear All.


Print Checks window
Print Checks

This is where you give Quicken more explicit information about how to print your checks.

To complete the window:

1.	As necessary, select a different check style, the number of checks on the first page of checks you are about to print, whether to print a logo on the checks, and how many additional copies of your checks you want printed.

2.	Click OK.

What you see

Check Style

Checks on First Page

Print your logo

Additional copies

OK


Check Style

Shows the style of checks you are printing (Standard, Wallet, or Voucher).  If the style is incorrect, you can change it by selecting another style from the drop-down list.

If you have a continuous-feed printer.  You may need to reset the paper height when you select a new check style.


Checks on First Page

This option applies only when you are printing a partial page of checks on your page-oriented printer.  If this is the case, click the button that shows the number of checks on the first page.


Print your logo

Select this option if you are printing a logo on your checks.


Additional copies

If you are printing multipart voucher checks, you can print up to three additional copies.  This option is available only with page-oriented printers.


OK

Prints the checks you have selected.


Check Printing Alignment window
Check Printer Alignment

This window initially shows how text should be aligned on your check.  Use the alignment cursor to show how text is actually aligned on your check.  Quicken takes the alignment you indicate and transposes it into the correct alignment on the next sample check you print.

To make adjustments:

1.	Move the cursor over the check in the window to see the alignment cursor.

2.	Using the printed sample check as a guide, show how your check is aligned incorrectly:

•	Hold down the left mouse button and move the text around until it looks the same as your printed sample check.  You can also type the alignment values for your printer model in the Horiz and Vert boxes.

To test the alignment:

•	Click Test.

What you see

Checks on Page

Misalignment (in .01" increments)

Test


Misalignment (in .01" increments)

Provides another way of making horizontal and vertical adjustments.  Here, you enter the adjustments as numbers in the Horiz and Vert boxes.  The number you enter is the distance of the adjustment multiplied by 100.  For example, if the adjustment is 3/4 inch, you would enter 75 (which is 3/4 times 100).  Negative numbers are OK.


Checks on page

If you are printing standard or wallet style checks, this option tells Quicken whether you are making adjustments for a full page of checks (three per page), or for a partial page of checks (one or two per page).


Test

Prints a test check.  You use the test check to make sure that printed information aligns properly on the check.


Type Position Number window
Type Position Number

Repositions your checks in the printer if the test pattern prints too high or too low.

If the test pattern prints correctly:

•	Click OK.  For a way to avoid printing a sample in the future, see the tip at the end of this topic.

If the test pattern prints too high or too low:

1.	Look at the test pattern. It has an arrow labeled POINTER LINE that points to one of the numbers in the perforated tractor strip along the side of the check.

2.	Enter the even number closest to the pointer line.

3.	Click OK.  Quicken repositions the checks and prints another sample.

Tip

When the checks are positioned correctly, note which number in the perforated tractor strip lines up with a part of your printer. Next time line the checks up in the same way and skip printing a sample.


Print List window
Print List

You are about to print the list in the active window on the report printer or to a disk.  If you are printing a list, the window is titled Print Category List, Print Security List, and so on, depending on the list.

To print on a printer:

•	Click Print.

To print to a disk:

•	Select Disk, click Print, type a name in the window that appears, and click OK.


Print Register window
Print Register

You are about to print the account register in the active window on the report printer or to a disk.

To print the register:

•	Click Print, and then click Print again in the window that appears.

What you see

Print Transactions From / To

Title

Print One Transaction Per Line

Print Transaction Splits

Show Savings Goal Transactions

Sort By Number

Print


Print Transactions From / To

If necessary, change the range of dates shown.  Quicken prints all of the transactions from the beginning date to the ending date.  If you leave the dates as shown, Quicken prints all transactions to date for this year.


Title

If you enter nothing, Quicken titles the printout "Register."


Print One Transaction Per Line

Select to abbreviate each transaction slightly so that it fits on one line.


Print Transaction Splits

Select to print the split portion of each transaction below the transaction.


Show Savings Goal Transactions

Select to print any contributions to, or withdrawals from, a savings goal account.

This option appears only if you've created a savings goal.


Sort By Number

When Quicken prints by check number, it uses an asterisk (*) to indicate a gap in the numbering sequence.


Print

Displays the Print Report window. Lets you print the register to a printer, a file, or preview it on the screen.


Print Report window
Print Report/List/Register/Budget

You are about to print the report, register, list, or budget spreadsheet in the active window on the report printer, or to a disk.

To print on the report printer:

•	Click Print.

To print to a disk:

•	Select one of the options. Then Quicken lets you type the drive and directory where the file should be printed. Click OK in the box. These file types are available:

ASCII Disk File

Tab-delimited Disk File

1-2-3 [.PRN] Disk File

To print to the screen to preview it before you print it:

•	Click Preview.

Other options

You can have Quicken:

•	Print in color (if you have a color printer).

•	Print in draft mode (this speeds up printing)

•	Print an entire report or print a range of pages.


Print to .PRN File

Prints the report to a .PRN file of the kind used by Lotus 1-2-3.

To print a .PRN file:

•	Type a DOS filename or pathname and click OK.  Use a pathname rather than a simple filename if the file will be in a directory other than the one holding the current Quicken file.

How to...

Print a report to a file


Print To Disk

Prints to a disk file in ASCII format.

To print to disk:

•	Type a DOS filename or pathname and click OK.  Use a pathname rather than a simple filename if the file will be in a directory other than the one holding the current Quicken file.

How to...

Print a register or list to a file

Print a report to a file


Did checks print OK? (message)
Did check(s) print OK?

If they did:

•	Click OK.

If they did not:

•	Enter the number of the first incorrectly printed check and then click OK.  Examine your printer to see if the checks jammed or the printer ran out of checks.  If the text on your checks is not aligned correctly, adjust the alignment.

How to...

Adjust alignment (page-oriented printers)

Adjust alignment (continuous-feed printers)


Print Preview

This window lets you see what you are about to print.

To see what's on this page:

•	If all the columns and rows on this page don't appear in the window, use the scroll bars on the right side and bottom of the window or maximize the window to view the rest of the page.

What you see

Print button

Close button

Next page, Prev page buttons

Zoom In, Zoom Out buttons


Print button

Opens the Print window.


Next page, Prev page buttons

This button...	Does this...
Next page	Displays next page of the report.
Prev page	Displays previous page of the report.


Zoom In, Zoom Out buttons

This button...	Does this...
Zoom In	Magnifies the preview image.
Zoom Out	Reduces the preview image.


Close button

Closes the window.


Adjustments window
Adjustments

For continuous-page printers, Quicken provides two methods for adjusting check alignment: Coarse and Fine.  You can use one method or both, depending on the type of alignment problems you are having.

Use this method...	If...
Coarse	the printing on the check is off by more than a line or two.
Fine	you need to make small horizontal or vertical adjustments to the printing.


Intuit Printer Library window
Intuit Printer Library

To help you align your checks, Quicken first prints a sample check. Don't try to adjust the printing at this point. Quicken helps you align your checks using a step-by-step process.

Just follow the instructions provided.


Printer font window
Printer font

Quicken is printing this check using the default font built into your printer.

If the check doesn't print correctly, check the preset font your printer is using. For best results, use a 10-pitch font. Also, do not condense the text. Condensed text does not properly align on Quicken checks.


Tear-off strip on check
Tear-off strip

Quicken is asking whether or not the tear-off strip is still attached to the page of checks you have just inserted into your printer.

If the strip is intact:

•	Click Yes.

If the strip is no longer attached to the check or checks:

•	Click No.

Note

You will have better results if the strip is left on the checks.


Type Position Number window
Type Position Number

Quicken prints a pointer line on the sample check. The arrows at each end of the pointer line point to position numbers printed along the edges of the check.

To make adjustments:

•	Enter the number the pointer line is pointing to on the check you just printed.


*Using the register (contents)
Using the register

To search for a Help topic, click the Search button above.

Overview

Click here

How to...

Use the register

Enter a transaction

Change a transaction

Split transactions between several categories

Add passwords for security

Use QuickFill and memorize transactions

Common Questions

How do I enter my paycheck and keep track of my deductions?

How do I find the transaction I just entered? It seems to have disappeared.

Quick Tips

Using the pop-up calculator

Entering dates and using the pop-up calendar


Use the register

Select an account to use

Find a transaction in the register

Go to the other account involved in a transfer

Change Quicken's register options

Create a register report


Enter a transaction

Add a transaction to the register

Assign a category to a transaction

Assign a class to a transaction

Split a transaction

Transfer money between accounts

Recall a memorized transaction

Contribute to a savings goal

Enter a paycheck


Change a transaction

Change a transaction in the register

Delete a transaction

Void a transaction

Find and replace transaction information

Recategorize a transaction

Revise checks you've written


Split transactions between several categories

Split a transaction

Change a split transaction


Add passwords for security

Add a password to a transaction

Change a transaction password

Remove a transaction password


Using the register
Overview: Using the register

Each Quicken account has a register associated with it.  On the screen, a Quicken register looks just like the register you use in your checkbook.

You use the register to record transactions. (Transactions are items that affect the balance in your account.)  Each time you enter a new transaction, Quicken automatically adjusts the account balance and shows the new amount at the bottom of the register.  Here are some common transactions:

•	Checks written by hand

•	ATM (automatic teller machine) transactions

•	Deposits

•	Electronic funds transfers (deposits or withdrawals)

•	Checking account fees and interest

•	Bank service charges.

The only transactions you don't enter in the register are checks you plan to print from Quicken. (Go to the Write Checks window for these transactions.)

Categorize income and expenses

All Quicken registers have a Category field. When you enter a category name in the Category field of a transaction, you categorize the transaction with an income or expense category. These categories identify where your income comes from and what your expenses are.

When you categorize your transactions, any Quicken reports, budgets, and graphs you create will be more meaningful, providing detailed information about your spending.

For more information about categories, see:

What is a category?

Setting up a category

Split a transaction in a register

Sometimes you may want to assign more than one category (or class) to a transaction or you may need to transfer funds to more than one account.

For example, you might purchase gardening supplies, pet supplies, as well as household items at a hardware store. You can easily enter the amount into Quicken, split the transaction and apply the proper amount (or percent of the entire transaction amount) to the Gardening, Household and Pet categories.

For more information, see:

Splitting a transaction

Find a transaction in a register

You can find a transaction in the register even if you don't remember all the information contained in the transaction.

For step-by-step instructions, see:

Finding a transaction

Create a report (and print it)

Each register has a Report button. Click it, and Quicken creates a report listing the transactions in the current register. To see a particular transaction as it appears in the register, use QuickZoom (double-click on the transaction using the magnifying glass cursor). Quicken takes you back to the place in the register where you entered the transaction.


The transaction I just entered disappeared
How do I find the transaction I just entered? It seems to have disappeared.

Did you enter a transaction with a date earlier than today's date?  Quicken sorts your transactions by date.  Use QuickScroll to move back in the register chronologically to find it.

To use QuickScroll:

•	Drag the scroll box in the scroll bar.  You'll see a date and check number appear and change as you drag the scroll box.  These represent the date of the transaction, and its check number (if appropriate) that will be at the top of the register when you release the scroll box.


Adding a transaction to the register
Add a transaction to the register

You use the register to record all transactions except checks you plan to print from Quicken.

To add a transaction to the register:

1.	From the Activities menu, choose Use Register.  The Register window appears.

2.	Use the Account Selector to select the account you'd like to record the transaction in.

3.	Select a blank transaction in the account register.  If the current transaction is not blank, go to the end of the register.  Or, choose New Transaction from the Edit menu.

4.	Enter information about the transaction into each register field.  You can use the Tab key to move the insertion point from field to field.

5.	When you have finished entering the transaction, click Record.  Quicken updates the balance in the Register window and records the transaction as a permanent part of your records.

How to...

Enter a transaction

Change a transaction

Split transactions between several categories

Write checks you plan to print with Quicken


Finding a transaction
Find a transaction

By using the Find command, you can quickly locate any transaction in the Register or Write Checks window.  You can find a transaction even if you don't know all the information contained in the transaction.

To find a transaction:

1.	Click Find on the register button bar.  The Quicken Find window appears.

2.	In the Find field, enter the word, phrase, or amount you want to find.  If you don't remember the amount of the transaction, you can search for other items, such as the transaction date or the name of the payee.

3.	(Optional)  Choose a field name from the Search drop-down list.  By default, Quicken searches all fields in the register.  But if you know which field contains the text or amount, you can speed the search by having Quicken look only in that field.

4.	(Optional)  If you want to change the scope of the search, choose one of the items shown on the Match If drop-down list.

5.	(Optional) Select Search Backwards to search back through your register instead of forwards.

6.	Click Find to find a single transaction, or click Find All to generate a list of all matching transactions in all of your accounts.

How to...

Use match characters


Find Transaction/Investment Transaction window
Quicken Find

Use this window to find a specific transaction, or to generate a report of all transactions matching your search criteria.  You can have Quicken search either for a dollar amount, or for text information such as a date, payee name, or category.

To find a transaction:

1.	In the Find field, enter the text or the amount you want Quicken to look for.

2.	Click Find to find a single transaction, or click Find All to generate a list of all matching transactions in all of your accounts.

What you see

Find field

Search

Match If

Search Backwards

Find, Find All buttons

How to...

Use match characters


HELP_FIND_SMALLINV DB
Quicken Find (Investment)

Use this window to find a specific transaction, or to generate a report of all transactions matching your search criteria.  You can have Quicken search either for a dollar amount, or for text information such as a date, payee name, or category.

To find a transaction:

1.	In the Find field, enter the text or the amount you want Quicken to look for.

2.	Click Find to find a single transaction, or click Find All to generate a list of all matching transactions in all of your accounts.

What you see

Find field

Search

Match If

Search Backwards

Find, Find All buttons

How to...

Use match characters


Find field

Enter the text or the amount you want Quicken to look for.

When you enter the text or the amount, you can use special characters, called match characters, to designate what you want Quicken to match as it searches for transactions.

How to...

Use match characters


Search

To limit the search to a single register field:

•	Choose the field you want from the Search drop-down list.  For example, you could limit the search to only the Payee field.


Match If

To change the scope of the search:

•	Choose one of the following:

Contains	Greater
Exact	Greater or equal
Starts with	Less
Ends with	Less or equal


Contains

Restricts the search to transactions that contain the text or the amount you entered in the Find box.


Exact

Restricts the search to transactions that have an item that exactly matches what you typed in the Find box.  Exact works with both text and dollar amounts.

Example.  If you enter "Sunshine Landscaping" and limit the search to the Payee field, Quicken finds all the payments that you made to Sunshine Landscaping.


Starts with

Restricts the search to transactions that have an item that starts with the characters or phrase you typed in the Find box.

Example.  If you enter "6" and limit the search to the Date field, Quicken finds all transactions you recorded in the month of June.


Ends with

Restricts the search to transactions that have an item that ends with the characters or phrase you typed in the Find box.

Example.  If you enter "93" and limit the search to the Date field, Quicken finds all transactions you recorded in 1993.


Greater

Restricts the search to transactions that have amounts greater than the amount you entered in the Find box.

Example.  If you entered $1000, Quicken finds all transactions that are greater than $1000.


Greater or equal

Restricts the search to transactions that have amounts greater or equal to the amount you entered in the Find box.

Example.  If you entered $1000, Quicken finds all transactions that are $1000 and above.


Less

Restricts the search to transactions that have amounts less than the amount you entered in the Find box.

Example.  If you entered $1000, Quicken finds all transactions that are less than $1000.


Less or equal

Restricts the search to transactions that have amounts less or equal to the amount you entered in the Find box.

Example.  If you entered $1000, Quicken finds all transactions that are $1000 and below.


Search Backwards

Leave this option selected to search backwards through the register, or clear it to search forwards.


Find, Find All buttons

This button...	Does this...
Find	Locates a single matching transaction.  To continue finding items, continue to click Find.
Find All	Locates and displays a list of all matching transactions.  From this list you can double-click a transaction to display it.


HELP_FIND_REPORT DB
Quicken Find All

This window shows a report of all transactions that match your search criteria.  You can get here by clicking Find All from the Quicken Find window.

To go to found transactions in the register:

Double-click on a transaction, or select it and then click Zoom.

What you see

Print, Zoom, and Close buttons

Transaction list

Show Matches in Splits


Transaction list

This is a list of all the transactions found by Quicken.  The list shows all the transaction information for each transaction.


Quicken Find All buttons

This button...	Does this...
Print	Prints the list of found transactions.
Zoom	Goes to the selected transaction in the register.
Close	Closes the Find window.


Show Matches in Splits (for non-investment accounts only)

Select this checkbox to show split information in the transaction list.


HELP_FIND_REPLACE DB
Find/Replace

Use this window to find transactions matching certain criteria and then replace information in some or all of them.

This feature does not work in investment accounts.

How to...

Find and replace transaction information

What you see

Print, Close buttons

Find, Search, Match If fields

Replace, With fields

Transaction list

Show Matches in Splits

Find All, Replace, Mark All, Clear All buttons


Print, Close buttons

This button...	Does this...
Print	Prints the list of found transactions.
Close	Closes the Replace window.


Find, Search, Match If fields

This field...	Shows this...
Find	The text or amount you want Quicken to look for.  You can use match characters in this field.
Search	The field you want Quicken to search.
Match If	The search criteria you want Quicken to use.


Replace, With fields

This field...	Shows this...
Replace	The field you want to replace in the found transactions.
With	The text or amount you want to replace the old information with.


Find/Replace buttons

This button...	Does this...
Find All	Searches your registers for all matching transactions.
Replace	Replaces the selected transactions with the replace information.
Mark All	Marks all the found transactions to be replaced.
Clear All	Unmarks all the found transactions.


Finding and replacing transaction information
Find and replace transaction information

Quicken makes it easy to find transactions matching certain criteria and then replace information in some or all of them.

This feature does not work in investment accounts.

To find and replace transaction information:

1.	From the Edit menu, choose Find/Replace.

2.	Complete the Find, Search, and Match If fields.

3.	Click Find All.  Quicken finds and displays all matching transactions.

4.	Mark the transactions you want to replace.  To mark or unmark a transaction, click on it.  Or click Mark All or Clear All to mark or unmark all found transactions.

5.	Complete the Replace and With fields.

6.	Click Replace to replace the field you chose with the new information in the marked transactions.

7.	(Optional) Click Print to print the list of found transactions.

Note

To replace the Category or Amount field in a split transaction, you must first select the Show Matches in Splits checkbox, and then select the matching split item.

How to...

Use match characters.


Recategorize window
Recategorize

Use this window to recategorize transactions.  For example, you may want to go back and assign categories to uncategorized transactions.

This feature does not work in investment accounts.

How to...

Recategorize transactions

What you see

Print, Close buttons

Search Category and Replace With fields

Transaction list

Show Matches in Splits

Find All, Replace, Mark All, Clear All buttons


Recategorizing transactions
Recategorize transactions

You may recategorize any non-investment transaction.

To recategorize transactions:

1.	From the Activities menu, choose Recategorize.

2.	Select the category you want to change from the drop-down list.

3.	Click Find All.  Quicken finds and displays the matching transactions.

4.	Mark the transactions you want to replace.  To mark or unmark a transaction, click on it.  Or click Mark All or Clear All to mark or unmark all found transactions.

5.	Enter the new category in the Replace With field.

6.	Click Replace to recategorize the marked transactions.

7.	(Optional) Click Print to print the list of found transactions.


Recategorize fields

This field...	Shows this...
Search Category	The category you want to search for.
Replace With	The category you want to replace the old one with.


Going to the other account involved in a transfer

When a transaction includes a transfer to another account, you can go directly to the other transaction involved in the transfer.  This is useful when you want to see the parallel transaction created by a transfer.

1.	In the Register window, select the transaction that includes the transfer information.  (If you are in the Write Checks window, display the check that contains the transfer information.)

2.	From the Edit menu, choose Go To Transfer (Ctrl+X).  The register for the other account appears.

3.	(For Split transactions only)  Click Splits to display the category information for the transaction.  Then click the line that contains the name of the transfer.


Creating a register report
Create a register report

Quicken can create a report listing the transactions in the current register.

To create a register report:

1.	Display a Quicken noninvestment register.

2.	Click Report on the register button bar.  The Register Report appears.

3.	To see a particular transaction as it appears in the register, use QuickZoom (double-click on the transaction using the magnifying glass cursor). Quicken takes you back to the place in the register where you entered the transaction.


Saving your data
Save your data

Quicken automatically saves each transaction to disk when you click Record.  For this reason, there is no Save command as you would expect with a word processor or spreadsheet program.

Quicken also saves changes you make to any of the memorized lists when you exit the program or switch to another Windows application.


Changing a transaction in the register
Change a transaction in the register

You can edit any transaction in the register.  When you have recorded your changes, Quicken recalculates all subsequent balances if necessary.

To correct a typing mistake:

•	Choose Undo from the Edit menu.

To restore a transaction to the way it was when you started:

•	Click Restore at the bottom of the register window.

To change a transaction after you have recorded it in Quicken:

•	Select the transaction, make the changes, then click Record to record the changes.

How to...

Delete a transaction

Void a transaction

Find and replace transaction information

Recategorize a transaction


Splitting a transaction
Split a transaction

Sometimes you need to identify more than one category for a transaction.  In Quicken, you can split a transaction in up to 30 parts, each with its own category, memo, and amount. You can assign a specific amount or a percentage of the entire transaction amount to each split.

To split a transaction:

1.	Select the transaction you want to split.

2.	Click Splits.  The Splits window opens, showing lines for the split amounts.  The first line contains the total transaction amount.

3.	Enter the category (and class if necessary), a memo, and amount (or percentage) for the first split.  Quicken calculates the remainder and displays it in the amount column of the next line.

4.	Continue adding categories and amounts (or percentages) until you have added one categorized line for each part of the transaction.

You can add up to 30 lines per transaction.

Quicken updates the remainder after each split. If the total of your split items doesn't match your transaction total, delete the remainder. Then click Adj. Tot. to change the transaction total. (Quicken also changes the total in the register.)

5.	Click OK to close the Splits window.

6.	Click Record to record the split transaction.

How to...

Change a split transaction

Handle splits in voucher checks

Enter a paycheck


Changing a split transaction
Change a split transaction

You change split transactions much as you do other transactions.

To change a split transaction:

1.	Select the transaction, then click Splits  Or select the transaction, then click the check button to the right of -Splits- in the transaction's category field.

2.	Make any changes you want in the Splits window:

Delete a line

Insert a line

Clear all split lines

Recalculate the total

3.	When you have finished making changes, click OK to close the Splits window.

4.	Click Record to record the revised transaction.


To delete a line:

Move the cursor to the line.  Click Delete on the Splits button bar.  Or press Ctrl+D.


To insert a line:

Click Insert on the button bar. Quicken inserts a line above the cursor.


To clear all split lines:

Click Clear All on the button bar. Quicken asks if you want to delete all split lines. Click Yes to remove the split items.

You can also clear all split lines directly from the register.  To do so, click the X button to the right of -Splits- in the transaction's category field.


To recalculate the total:

If you want the transaction total to equal the new total of your split items, click Adj. Tot.


Transferring money between accounts
Transfer money between accounts

When you create a new account, Quicken adds it to the Category & Transfer list so that you can transfer money to that account.

To transfer money between accounts:

1.	Display an account register.

2.	Click Transfer on the register button bar.  The Transfer Funds window appears.

3.	Enter the date, description, and amount of the transaction.

4.	Select the account to transfer money from, and the account to transfer money to.

5.	Click OK.  Quicken enters the name of the transfer account in the Category field, and creates a parallel transaction in the other account.

Instead of using the Transfer Funds window, you can record the transaction directly:

1.	Start a new transaction in the Register or Write Checks window.

2.	Enter all information for the transaction as usual, except in the Category field.

3.	If you know the name of the account you want to transfer to, start typing the name of the account in the Category field.  QuickFill completes the account name and puts brackets around it to show that it is a transfer.

4.	If you are not sure of the name of the account, click the drop-down button to display the list of categories.  Scroll to the end of the list, and click the transfer account name to enter it in the Category field.

5.	Click Record to complete the transfer transaction.  Quicken records the check in your check register and creates a parallel transaction in the other account for that amount.  To see the parallel transaction, choose Go To Transfer from the Edit menu.


Deleting a transaction
Delete a transaction

Caution!  Once you delete a transaction, Quicken cannot recover it.  Be sure you want to delete the transaction before doing so.

If you delete a transaction that includes a transfer, Quicken deletes the transfer from both the source and destination accounts.

To delete a transaction:

1.	Display an account register, then select the transaction that you want to delete.  (Or if the transaction is a check in the Write Checks window, display the check.)

2.	Click Delete on the register button bar.

3.	Click Yes to confirm that you want to delete the transaction.  Quicken removes the transaction from the register and recalculates all subsequent balances.

How to...

Change a transaction


Inserting a blank transaction
Insert a blank transaction

To insert a blank transaction:

1.	Select the transaction in your register which is just below the place you want to insert a blank transaction.

2.	Choose Insert Transaction from the Edit menu.  Quicken inserts a new transaction above the selected one.


Voiding a transaction
Void a transaction

From time to time you may need to void a transaction.  By marking the transaction as void instead of just deleting it, you'll retain an accurate record of your check numbers.

Caution!  Don't void an electronic payment.  If you do, Quicken cannot get the confirmation number it needs to stop the payment.  Use instead Quicken's Stop Payment command.

To void a transaction:

1.	Select the transaction in the register.  Or display the check in the Write Checks window.

2.	From the Edit menu, choose Void Transaction.

3.	Click Record to record the transaction.

What happens

Quicken removes the dollar amount of the transaction and inserts the word VOID before the payee name.  Quicken also adds an X to the Clr field so that the transaction won't interfere with reconciling.

If the transaction contains split amounts, Quicken changes each amount to zero.

How to...

Change a transaction


Add Number to list
Add New Num/Ref

This is where you can add a new item to the Number or Reference list.

To add a new item to the Number or Reference list:

•	Type a name containing up to 5 characters, then click OK.


Edit Number list
Edit Num List

This is where you can delete a user defined item, or create a new item on the Num List.

To delete an item on the Num list:

•	Select the item, then click Delete.

To add a new item to the Num list:

•	Click New.


Account Register window

The account register is where you record all transactions, except checks you plan to print with Quicken.  It displays, in chronological order, all the transactions that you have entered in the current account.

How to...

Use the register

Enter a transaction

Change a transaction

Split transactions between several categories

Add passwords for security

Write checks you plan to print with Quicken

What you see

Register button bar

Register fields

Account Selector

Record, Restore, Splits buttons

1-Line Display

Hide Sav. Goal $

Account balances

Hide/Show button


Account register fields

To learn about the fields in an account register, click an account type below:

Checking

Savings

Credit Card

Cash

Money Market

Investment

Asset

Liability


Account Selector

The Account Selector is a horizontal row of buttons located just above the Record, Restore, and Splits buttons.  Each button in the Account Selector is labeled with one of your account names.

To work with an account, simply click its button on the Account Selector.  If you have a lot of accounts, use the scroll bars at the ends of the Account Selector to view the accounts that don't fit on the screen.  You can also rearrange the buttons by dragging them with the mouse.

Investment accounts do not appear in the Account Selector of noninvestment registers.


Register button bar

This button...	Does this...
Edit	Displays a list of edit commands.
Delete	Deletes the current transaction.
Find	Displays the Find window, which helps you locate register transactions.
Transfer	Displays Transfer Funds window.
Options	Displays the Register Options window.
Report	Creates a Register report, which lists the transactions in the current register.
Close	Closes the Register window.


Record, Restore, Splits buttons

This button...	Does this...
Record	Records the transaction in Quicken and adjusts the balance of the account.
Restore	Restores a transaction to the way it was before you started to change it. Click Restore if you make a mistake when you are entering or editing a transaction.
Splits	Displays a window where you split the total amount of a transaction between two or more categories. You can assign amounts or percentages to split items.


Account balances

Current Balance	This is the balance of all transactions you have entered up to today's date.  Postdated transactions are not included in this total.
Ending Balance	This is the balance of all transactions in the account, including postdated transactions.  With a liability account, this amount is the outstanding balance (principal only) of the loan.
Credit Remaining	(Credit card accounts only)  This is your credit card limit minus the current balance of the account.


1-Line Display

Condenses the register by displaying each transaction in one line.


Hide Sav. Goal $

This option appears only if you have contributed to a savings goal from this account.

Select the checkbox to display your actual account balance by hiding transfers from the account to your savings goals.


Hide/Show button ( [image])

This button is located on the right side of the register, just above the scroll bar.

Click it to hide/show the Register button bar. You can see more transactions if the button bar is hidden.


Fields in bank account registers

In a bank account register (checking, savings, or money market), you fill in these fields when you enter a transaction. For information about a field, click its name in the list.

Date

Num

Payee

Payment

Clr

Deposit

Memo

Category


Date

This is the date of the transaction.  To enter a date quickly, click the Calendar button or press the right mouse button. Click a date on the pop-up calendar.  You can also change the date by placing the insertion point in the Date field and pressing one of these keys:

Press	To get this date
+	Next day
-	Previous day
t	Today
m	Beginning of month
h	End of month
y	Beginning of year
r	End of year


Num

Enter then number of a printed check, handwritten check, or type of transaction (for example, ATM).

For certain types of transactions, Quicken adds one of the following codes to the Num field:

This code...	Identifies...
EFT	Electronic payments that have been transmitted to CheckFree.
FIXED	Fixed payments made by CheckFree.
PRINT	Quicken checks that haven't been printed.
XMIT	Electronic payments that are waiting to be transmitted to CheckFree.
You can also add an item to the Number list. To do this, click in the Num field, click your right mouse button, click New, then enter a name.


Payee

Enter the payee's name if you are entering a check.  For deposits and other transactions, enter the word "Deposit" or any word or phrase to identify the transaction.


Payment

Enter the amount of each check, payment, or other withdrawal from the account here.  You can enter any amount from zero to $9,999,999.99 (negative amounts to -9,999,999.99 are also allowed).  The balance changes automatically to reflect your entry.

If you need to calculate an amount, click the Calculator button, or press the right mouse button to display the pop-up calculator.


Clr

This column indicates the cleared status of each transaction.  An X in this column indicates that you have reconciled a transaction with a previous bank statement.

Common Question

What's the difference between "x" and "X" in the Clr field?


Deposit

Enter the amount of each deposit, interest earned, or any adjustments in your favor here.  You can enter any amount from zero to $9,999,999.99 (negative amounts to -9,999,999.99 are also allowed).  The balance changes automatically to reflect your entry.

If you need to calculate an amount, click the Calculator button, or press the right mouse button to display the pop-up calculator.


Memo

This is an optional field.  Use it to add a memo to yourself or a note about the transaction.


Category

You can add categories, transfers, and classes to this field.

How to...

Set up and use categories

Transfer money between accounts

Set up and use classes


Fields in cash account registers

In a cash account register, you fill in these fields when you enter a transaction. For information about a field, click its name in the list.

Date

Ref

Payee

Spend

Clr

Receive

Memo

Category


Ref

You can use this field for any reference purpose.  For example, you can use it to track ATM transaction codes.


Payee

For cash purchases, enter the name of the person or business you paid the cash to.  For transfers of cash into the account, enter where you received the cash from.


Spend

Enter purchases that you make with cash.  You can enter any amount from zero to $9,999,999.99 (negative amounts to -9,999,999.99 are also allowed).  The balance changes automatically to reflect your entry.

If you need to calculate an amount, click the Calculator button, or press the right mouse button to display the pop-up calculator.


Clr

This column indicates the cleared status of each transaction.  An X in this column indicates that you have marked the transaction as cleared in the Reconcile window.

Common Question

What's the difference between "x" and "X" in the Clr field?


Receive

Enter increases in the amount of cash on hand.  You can enter any amount from zero to $9,999,999.99 (negative amounts to -9,999,999.99 are also allowed).  The balance changes automatically to reflect your entry.

If you need to calculate an amount, click the Calculator button, or press the right mouse button to display the pop-up calculator.


Fields in credit card account registers

In a credit card account register, you fill in these fields when you enter a transaction. For information about a field, click its name in the list.

Date

Ref

Payee

Charge

Clr

Payment

Memo

Category


Payee

For credit card purchases, enter the name of the business where you made the charge.


Charge

Enter amounts that increase the balance you owe on your credit card.  This includes charges you make with the credit card, finance charges, and annual fees.

You can enter any amount from zero to $9,999,999.99 (negative amounts to -9,999,999.99 are also allowed).  The balance changes automatically to reflect your entry.

If you need to calculate an amount, click the Calculator button, or press the right mouse button to display the pop-up calculator.


Clr

This column indicates the cleared status of each transaction.  An X in this column indicates that you have reconciled a transaction with a previous credit card statement.

Common Question

What's the difference between "x" and "X" in the Clr field?


Payment

Enter amounts that decrease what you owe on your credit card.  This includes payments you've made and credits you've received from the credit card company.  The balance changes automatically to reflect your entry.

You can enter any amount from zero to $9,999,999.99 (negative amounts to -9,999,999.99 are also allowed).

If you need to calculate an amount, click the Calculator button, or press the right mouse button to display the pop-up calculator.


Fields in liability account registers

In a liability account register, you fill in these fields when you enter a transaction. For information about a field, click its name in the list.

Date

Ref

Payee

Increase

Clr

Decrease

Memo

Category


Payee

For increases to your account, enter the source of the increase.  For decreases, such as loan payments, enter the name of the company or individual to whom you make your payments.


Increase

Enter any amount that increases the amount that you owe.  You can enter any amount from zero to $9,999,999.99 (negative amounts to -9,999,999.99 are also allowed).  The balance changes automatically to reflect your entry.

If you need to calculate an amount, click the Calculator button, or press the right mouse button to display the pop-up calculator.


Clr

This column indicates the cleared status of each transaction.  An X in this column indicates that you have reconciled a transaction with a previous loan statement.

Common Question

What's the difference between "x" and "X" in the Clr field?


Decrease

Enter any amount that decreases the amount you owe.  This can include loan payments and prepayments of principal.

You can enter any amount from zero to $9,999,999.99 (negative amounts to -9,999,999.99 are also allowed).  The balance changes automatically to reflect your entry.

If you need to calculate an amount, click the Calculator button, or press the right mouse button to display the pop-up calculator.


Fields in asset account registers

In an asset account register, you fill in these fields when you enter a transaction. For information about a field, click its name in the list.

Date

Ref

Payee

Decrease

Clr

Increase

Memo

Category


Payee

For decreases to your account, enter a word or phrase that describes the decrease ("Depreciation," for example).  For increases to your account, enter the source of the increase.


Decrease

Enter amounts that depreciate (decrease) the value of your asset.  You can enter any amount from zero to $9,999,999.99 (negative amounts to -9,999,999.99 are also allowed).  The balance changes automatically to reflect your entry.

If you need to calculate an amount, click the Calculator button, or press the right mouse button to display the pop-up calculator.


Clr

This column indicates the cleared status of each transaction.  You can use it to close off items that are no longer active as assets.

For example, if you sell an asset, you would add an X to the Clr column for each transaction associated with the asset.  This gives you the ability to retain your records about the asset, yet create reports that don't include the asset as part of your net worth.  (When you create reports, you would set up a filter to exclude the transactions you cleared in the asset account.)

Common Question

What's the difference between "x" and "X" in the Clr field?


Increase

Enter amounts that increase the total value of your asset.  You can enter any amount from zero to $9,999,999.99 (negative amounts to -9,999,999.99 are also allowed).  The balance changes automatically to reflect your entry.

If you need to calculate an amount, click the Calculator button, or press the right mouse button to display the pop-up calculator.


Fields in investment account registers

In an investment account register, you fill in these fields when you enter a transaction. For information about a field, click its name in the list.

Date

Action

Security

Price (per share)

Shares

Amount

Clr

Memo

Comm Fee


Action

Enter an action by selecting it from the Action list, or by typing a recognizable portion of it.


Security

Enter a security by selecting it from the Security list. If you enter a new security name, Quicken displays the Set Up Security window. Fill in the information requested.

With a mutual fund account, Quicken automatically enters the name of the fund as a security.


Price (per share)

For buys and sells, enter the price per share. (Or let Quicken calculate the price from the number of shares and the dollar amount.)


Shares

Enter the number of shares when you remove shares from the account (ShrsOut). When you sell shares (Sell or SellX), Quicken calculates the number of shares from the new price and dollar amount.


Amount

When you enter a price and number of shares, Quicken calculates the dollar amount. If the true dollar amount is different, type over the amount. Quicken displays the difference as a commission or fee.


Clr

This column indicates the cleared status of each transaction.  An X in this column indicates that you have marked the transaction as cleared in the Reconcile window.

Common Question

What's the difference between "x" and "X" in the Clr field?


Comm Fee

Enter any commissions or fees associated with a transaction in this field.

In certain cases where Quicken has to round off the shares or price, Quicken may add a small adjustment automatically to Comm/Fee to make sure that the transaction adds up correctly.

This field appears only when certain actions are selected (such as Buy and Sell).


Transfer Funds window
Transfer Funds

To transfer funds to an account:

1.	Enter the date, description, and amount of the transaction.

2.	Select the account to transfer money from, and the account to transfer money to.

3.	Click OK.  Quicken enters the name of the transfer account in the Category field, and creates a parallel transaction in the other account.

What you see

Date

Description

$

Transfer Money From:

(Transfer Money) To:


Description

This is an optional field.  Use it to add a memo to yourself or a note about the transfer.


$

Enter the amount of the transfer here.  You can enter any amount from zero to $9,999,999.99.

If you need to calculate an amount, click the Calculator button, or press the right mouse button to display the pop-up calculator.


Transfer Money From:

The account funds will be withdrawn from.


(Transfer Money) To:

The account funds will be deposited in.


Split Transaction window
Splits window

This is where you split a transaction into two or more parts.  Each "split" has its own category, memo, and amount.  For each split, you can enter a percentage of the total amount instead of a specific amount. Quicken calculates the percentage and enters the amount.

To split a transaction:

•	Enter the memo, category, and amount (or percentage) for each split, using a separate line for each split amount.  Each time you enter a split, Quicken calculates the remainder and displays it in the amount column of the next line.

If the splits don't add up to the original amount:

•	Decide whether you want the total for the transaction to include the remainder shown on the last line.  If the split amounts are correct and you don't want the total to include the remainder, delete the remainder and click Adj. Tot.

What you see

Insert

Delete

Clear All

Adj.Tot.


Using match characters
Use match characters

These are the match characters you can use when you are searching for a transaction or setting up a filter for a report.

This character...	Does this...
A question mark (?)	Stands for any single character.
Two periods (..)	Stands for any number of characters at the beginning, middle, or end of what you type.
A tilde (~)	Tells Quicken to ignore all matches for the text that follows.


Entering your paycheck
Enter a paycheck

You can use a split transaction to enter the details of your paycheck.  Although you can just enter the net pay in the register if you prefer, entering your gross pay and all the deductions in the Splits window gives you more accurate reports and lets you see what taxes and other deductions you are paying.  If you're going to import your Quicken data into a tax preparation program such as TurboTax for Windows, it helps to have the deductions already entered.

Quicken's standard home categories provide most of the categories you will need.  If you need additional categories, such as a health plan payment or a 401(k) contribution, you can easily create them.

To split your paycheck and assign your deductions to categories:

1.	Open the account in which you deposit your paycheck.

2.	In a blank transaction in your register, enter the word "Paycheck" in the Payee field.

3.	Click Splits.  On the first line of the split, enter "Salary" in the Category field and enter the gross amount of the paycheck in the Amount field.  The gross amount is the amount of your paycheck before deductions are taken.

4.	Enter the deductions from your pay on the following lines as negative amounts.  Assign them to the expense categories Tax:Fed, Tax:State, and Tax:Soc Sec.  Enter one deduction per line.  You may also have deductions for items such as 401(k) contributions, local withholding, medical insurance, and state disability insurance.  Set up new expense categories for these as needed.

When you've entered all your deductions, check the amount in the Splits Total field at the bottom of the Splits window.  It should equal the net amount of your paycheck, which is the amount you actually receive.

5.	Click OK to close the Splits window.

6.	In the Payment or Deposit window, click Deposit.

7.	Click Record.

8.	(Optional) Choose Memorize Transaction (Ctrl+M) from the Edit menu to memorize this deposit.  If you memorize this paycheck deposit, the next time you need to record your paycheck you'll save time. You won't need to start from scratch, entering all the categories and amounts. You can recall the memorized transaction, make needed changes to amounts or categories, and record it.

How to...

Split a transaction

Set up a category

Track 401(k) Information in Quicken


Entering dates and using the pop-up calendar

To enter a date quickly, click the Date button, then click a date on the pop-up calendar.

You can also change the date by placing the insertion point in the Date field and pressing one of these keys:

Press...	To get this date...
+	Next day
-	Previous day
t	Today's date
m	First day of this month.  Press again to get the first day of the previous month.
h	Last day of this month.  Press again to get the last day of the next month.
y	First day of this year.  Press again to get the first day of the previous year.
r	Last day of this year.  Press again to get the last day of the next year.


Using the pop-up calculator

If you need to calculate an amount, click the Calculator button in any field in which you enter an amount. Quicken displays a pop-up calculator.

Click the calculator buttons (or use the number keys in the top row of your keyboard) to calculate amounts, then click Enter to paste the amount into the field.


Quicken Calculator

Click the calculator buttons (or use the number keys in the top row of your keyboard) to calculate amounts.

To copy the result from the display panel and paste it into an entry field:

•	Click Copy (or press Ctrl+C). The result is copied to the Windows Clipboard. To paste it into an entry field, press Ctrl+V.


Select Account to Use window
Select Account to Use

This list shows the accounts you can make transfers to.  All accounts in the current file are listed.

To select a transfer account:

•	Select the account in the list, then click Use.


Payment or Depost window
Payment or Deposit

Indicate whether the amount you are entering in the split is a payment or deposit.


Split Adjustment window
Split Adjustment

The sum of the split items and the amount of the transaction differ.  Quicken provides two options:

Edit the splits

You can open the Split window and change the amounts assigned to the split items.

Allocate and edit splits

You can assign percentages of the remainder to existing split items.


Split Adjustment window
Split Adjustment

The sum of the split items and the amount of the transaction differ.  Quicken provides two options:

Adjust the transaction total

You can have Quicken recalculate the amount of the transaction so that it matches the total of the split items.

Create a balancing split item

You can have Quicken create an uncategorized split item which equals the remaining amount.


Go To Date window
Go To Date

In a register

Goes to the first transaction in this register with this transaction date.

In Portfolio View

Displays information about your securities as of the date you specify. If there is no securities information with that date, goes to the date closest to that date. Appears when the Portfolio View window is active.

How to...

Display prices and market value as of a given day


Using Quicken Reminders

Quicken Reminders can remind you of upcoming bills when you start Quicken.  From the Reminders window, you can record scheduled transactions that are due, or print checks that are ready to be printed.

The Reminders window also displays your Financial Calendar notes, and tells you if you have scheduled transactions that are due in a different Quicken file.

How to...

Record scheduled transactions due

Print checks due

Create and display calendar notes

Turn Reminders off or on


Create and display calendar notes

Add a note to the Financial Calendar

Display calendar notes for a different time period


Quicken Reminders window
Quicken Reminders

This window reminds you if you have checks to print, scheduled transactions due, electronic payments to transmit, or an IntelliCharge statement to download.  It also displays any notes you've added to your Financial Calendar.

How to...

Record scheduled transactions due

Print checks due

Create and display calendar notes

Turn Reminders off or on

What you see

Reminders button bar

Calendar Notes

Show Notes for

Reminder Notices

Checks to Print

Scheduled Transactions Due


Reminders button bar

This button...	Does this...
Options	Lets you set Billminder and Reminders options.
Close	Closes Quicken Reminders.


Calendar Notes

This is a list of the notes on your Financial Calendar for the selected time period.

Calendar notes appear in the Reminders window only if Show Calendar Notes is selected in Reminders options.  To change your Reminders options: choose Options from the Edit menu, then click Reminders.


Show Notes for

Select the period of time from which to display your Financial Calendar notes.

Calendar notes appear in the Reminders window only if Show Calendar Notes is selected in Reminders options.  To change your Reminders options: choose Options from the Edit menu, then click Reminders.


Reminder Notices

Quicken lets you know if you have electronic payments to transmit, an IntelliCharge statement to download, and checks to print or scheduled transactions due in other files.


Checks to Print

Click this button to print any checks due.


Scheduled Transactions Due

Click this button to record or edit the scheduled transactions that are due in the current file.


Displaying calendar notes for a different time period
Display calendar notes for a different time period

The Reminders window can display your calendar notes for a variety of different time periods.

To display notes for a different time period:

•	From the Reminders window, select a time period from the Show Notes For drop-down list.  If the Reminders window is not displayed, choose Reminders from the Activities menu.

Note

Financial Calendar notes appear in the Reminders window only if Show Calendar Notes is selected in Reminders options.  To change your Reminders options: choose Options from the Edit menu, then click Reminders.


Recording scheduled transactions that are due
Record scheduled transactions that are due

The Scheduled Transactions Due window appears automatically at Quicken startup if there are transactions due.  You can also display the window by clicking Scheduled Transactions Due in the Reminders window.  If the Reminders window is not displayed, choose Reminders from the Activities menu.

To record scheduled transactions due:

1.	In the Scheduled Transactions Due window, select the transactions you want to record:

To select a transaction, click on it.  Use Shift+click to select adjacent transactions, or use Ctrl+click to select multiple nonadjacent transactions.

2.	Click Record.  Quicken records the selected transactions in your register(s), removes them from the Scheduled Transactions Due list, and changes their next scheduled due dates.


Printing checks due from the Reminders window
Print checks due

To print checks due from the Reminders window:

1.	Click Checks to Print in the Reminders window.  If the Reminders window is not displayed, choose Reminders from the Activities menu.

2.	Select checks for printing:

•	Check to make sure the number of the first check in your printer matches the number in the First Check Number field.

•	Click All Checks to print all your checks, Checks dated through to print only checks before the date shown, or Selected checks to select only certain checks to print.

3.	Click Print.

4.	Select a check style, the number of checks on the first page, and click OK.


Turning Reminders off or on
Turn Reminders off or on

To turn Reminders off or on:

1.	From the Activities menu, choose Reminders.  The Reminders window appears.

2.	Click Options.  The Reminders Options window appears.

3.	Select or clear the Reminder Messages on Startup checkbox.

4.	Click OK.


Scheduled Transactions Due list
Scheduled Transactions Due

This window lists the scheduled transactions that are due in the current file.  You may record the scheduled transactions into your register(s), edit the transactions before recording them, or have Quicken remind you of them later.

How to...

Record scheduled transactions due

Defer scheduled transactions due

Edit scheduled transaction information

Skip scheduled transactions due (so that you are not reminded of them again)

What you see

Scheduled Transactions Due list

Record, Edit, Delete, Done buttons


Scheduled Transactions Due list

This is a list of all the scheduled transactions that are now due in this file.  Quicken lists the date, description, account, and amount for each transaction.


Record, Edit, Delete, Done buttons

This button...	Does this...
Record	Records the selected transactions in your register(s), removes them from the Scheduled Transactions Due list, and changes their next scheduled due dates.
Edit	Allows you to edit the transaction information for the selected transaction.
Delete	Deletes the selected transactions from the list, doesn't record them in your register(s), and removes them from their currently scheduled dates on the Financial Calendar (but not future dates).
Done	Closes the window.  Any transactions still in the list are not recorded, but you will be reminded about them again the next time you start Quicken.


Skipping scheduled transactions that are due
Skip scheduled transactions that are due

The Scheduled Transactions Due window appears automatically at Quicken startup if there are transactions due.  You can also display the window by clicking Scheduled Transactions Due in the Reminders window.  If the Reminders window is not displayed, choose Reminders from the Activities menu.

Skipping a scheduled transaction:

•	does not record it your register.

•	removes it from the Scheduled Transactions Due window.

•	removes it from its currently scheduled date on the Financial Calendar (but not future dates).

To skip scheduled transactions that are due:

1.	In the Scheduled Transactions Due window, select the transactions you want to skip.

To select a transaction, click on it.  Use Shift+click to select adjacent transactions, or use Ctrl+click to select multiple nonadjacent transactions.

2.	Click Delete.

How to...

Record scheduled transactions due

Defer scheduled transactions due

Edit scheduled transaction information


Deferring scheduled transactions that are due
Defer scheduled transactions due

The Scheduled Transactions Due window appears automatically at Quicken startup if there are transactions due.  You can also display the window by clicking Scheduled Transactions Due in the Reminders window.  If the Reminders window is not displayed, choose Reminders from the Activities menu.

To have Quicken remind you later about scheduled transactions that are due:

•	Click Done in the Scheduled Transactions Due window.  Quicken defers any transactions still in the list, and reminds you again the next time you start Quicken.

How to...

Record scheduled transactions due

Edit scheduled transaction information

Skip scheduled transactions due (so that you are not reminded of them again)


Editing scheduled transactions that are due
Edit scheduled transactions due

The Scheduled Transactions Due window appears automatically at Quicken startup if there are transactions due.  You can also display the window by clicking Scheduled Transactions Due in the Reminders window.  If the Reminders window is not displayed, choose Reminders from the Activities menu.

To edit scheduled transactions that are due:

1.	In the Scheduled Transactions Due window, select the transaction you want to edit.

2.	Click Edit.

3.	Make changes as necessary, then click OK.

How to...

Record scheduled transactions due

Defer scheduled transactions due

Skip scheduled transactions due (so that you are not reminded of them again)


Record Scheduled Transaction window
Record Scheduled Transaction

To record the transaction:

•	Click the Record button.  Quicken records the transaction in your register, and changes the transaction's next scheduled due date.

To skip the transaction:

•	Click Skip.  Quicken doesn't record the transaction, and removes it from its currently scheduled date on the Financial Calendar (but not future dates).

To edit the scheduled transaction:

•	Make changes as necessary.  To change split information, click the Splits button.  To change address information, click Address.

What you see

Record Scheduled Transaction fields

Record Scheduled Transaction buttons


Record Scheduled Transaction fields

This field...	Shows this
Due Date	The next due date of the transaction.
Account	The account the transaction should be recorded in.
Type	The type of the transaction.  Transactions can be deposits, payments, printed checks, or electronic payments.
Payee	The payee's name, or a description of the transaction.
Memo	Optional additional information.
Category	The category or transfer account assigned to this transaction.
Amount	The amount of the transaction.
Num Field	The check number or other identifier that will appear in the register's Num field.  You may enter a number by hand, click the drop-down list and make a selection, or leave the field blank.


Record Scheduled Transaction buttons

This button...	Does this...
Record	Records the transaction in the register.
Skip	Doesn't record the transaction, and removes it from its currently scheduled date on the Financial Calendar (but not future dates).
Splits	Opens the Splits window.
Addresses	Opens the Addresses window if this transaction is a check to be printed.


Edit Transaction window
Edit Transaction

To edit a scheduled transaction:

1.	Enter or change the information, as necessary.

2.	To split the transaction, click Splits.  The Splits window appears.  Enter the information as you would for a split transaction in your register.

3.	To print checks with Quicken, click Address.  You can enter the payee address here. When you print this check, Quicken inserts the address on the check face.

4.	Click OK.

What you see

Due Date

Account

Type

Payee

Memo

Category

Amount

Num field

Splits, Address buttons


Due Date

The next due date of the transaction.


Num field

The check number or other identifier that will appear in the register's Num field.  You may enter a number by hand, click the drop-down list and make a selection, or leave the field blank.


Edit Transaction Group window
Edit Transaction Group

To edit a scheduled transaction group:

1.	Enter or change the information, as necessary.

2.	Click OK.

What you see

Due Date

Account

Group Type


Select Account window
Checks to Print

You have checks due to print in each of the accounts listed.

To choose the account to print checks from:

•	Select the account in the list, then click OK.  The Select Checks to Print window appears and you can print the checks due in the account.


*Creating reports about your finances (contents)
Creating reports about your finances

To search for a Help topic, click the Search button above.

Overview

Click here

How to...

Create a report

Customize a report

Create a report from scratch

Memorize a report for later use

Print a report

Common Questions

Can I save my desktop with a report open?

How can I find (and fix) uncategorized transactions in my reports?

I copied a report to Clipboard and pasted it into my word processing program. What happened to my report columns?

Quick Tip

Displaying more columns onscreen


Create a report

Create a home or business report

Create an investment report

Change Quicken's report options


Customize a report

Customize a report

Limit which transactions are included in your report

Create a report on selected categories, classes, and supercategories

Create a report on selected accounts


Create a report from scratch

Basic report types

Create a summary report

Create a budget report

Create a comparison report

Create a transaction report

Create an account balances report


Memorize a report for later use

Memorize a report

Use a memorized report

Customize a memorized report

Rename a memorized report

Delete a memorized report


Print a report

Print a report

Print a report to a file

Preview a report on the screen

Change the font for printed reports

Change Quicken's report options


Creating reports about your finances
Overview: Creating reports

Once you've entered transactions, Quicken can automatically create reports based on transactions in one or more of your accounts.  These reports can help you examine your finances in more detail.

You can create any preset home, business, or investment report by simply clicking the Reports icon on the Quicken iconbar and then selecting the report you want to create.

You can use QuickZoom to examine transaction detail in summary, transaction, budget, investment income, and investment transaction reports. When you select an amount in a report and double-click it, Quicken displays a QuickZoom report, which is a list of the transactions that make up that amount. If you use QuickZoom in a transaction report, Quicken displays the register.

Quicken reports are divided into families:

Home

Investment

Business

Other

Memorized Reports

Reconciliation


Home reports

Cash Flow

Monthly Budget

Itemized Categories

Tax Summary

Net Worth

Tax Schedule

Missing Checks

Comparison


Investment reports

Portfolio Value

Investment Performance

Capital Gains

Investment Income

Investment Transactions


Business reports

P&L Statement

P&L Comparison

Cash Flow

A/P by Vendor

A/R by Customer

Job/Project

Payroll

Balance Sheet

Missing Checks

Comparison


Other reports

If you want to create a report from scratch, start with one of these report types.

Transaction

Summary

Comparison

Budget

Account Balances


What happened to my report columns?
Displaying more columns onscreen

When you paste a report into a word processing program, the default tab settings defined for your word processor are applied to the text you've inserted. This means that the column settings Quicken that defined are lost.

To realign the columns in your report:

•	Change the tab settings in your word processing program. Since the columns vary in width, you probably need to set each tab to accommodate the data in each column.

To display all the columns on one page:

•	You may have to change to a smaller font size.


Saving a desktop with a report open
Can I save my desktop with a report open?

No. Quicken won't allow you to save the desktop with a report open. You must either memorize the report and open it after you've started up Quicken the next time or rerun the report the next time you run Quicken.


Fixing uncategorized amounts in reports
How can I find (and fix) uncategorized transactions in my reports?

If you see Income-Other and Expenses-Other on your summary reports, you have recorded transactions that haven't been categorized.

To find the specific transactions with uncategorized amounts, use QuickZoom.

1.	Position the mouse over the amount in the report and double-click.  This generates a report of all transactions Quicken used to obtain totals in the summary report.

2.	Use QuickZoom in this new report to go to the register and assign categories to the original transactions.

How to...

Recategorize a transaction


Create report window
Create Report

Quicken can create different kinds of personal and business reports to give you insight into your finances.

To create a Quicken report:

1.	Change the report dates (if needed).

2.	Select a Report Family (such as Home or Business).

3.	Select a Report Name (such as Cash Flow).

4.	(Optional) If you want to customize the report (for example, to change the layout or limit the report to certain categories), click Customize.

5.	Click OK.  Quicken creates the report.

What you see

Report Dates

Report Family

Report Name

Sample Report

Customize

How to...

Customize a report


Report Dates

Select a date range or enter the specific dates you want the report to include. For an explanation of the ranges, click here.

If necessary, you can set up Quicken to adjust to your fiscal year.  For more information, click here.


Report Family

You'll find these same groupings of reports on the Reports menu. Select a report family (such as Home). Quicken then displays the reports you can create.


Report Name

Once you've selected a report family, Quicken lists the reports in that family and briefly describes them in the Report Name box.


Sample Report

When you select a report, Quicken displays a small sample report in this box. The report doesn't contain your data.


Customize

Click to change the dates, report layout, include different categories in the report, or add categories you've created since you last used this report.


Report date ranges
Report dates

Option	Quicken definition
Custom dates	You enter the start and stop dates for the date range you want Quicken to cover in the report.
Include all dates	Quicken creates a report starting from your earliest Quicken transaction and ending with your latest.
Current month  Current quarter Current year	Quicken creates a report starting from the first day of this month, quarter, or year and ending on the last day of this month, quarter, or year. (Quarters begin January 1, April 1, July 1, or October 1.)
Month to date Quarter to date Year to date	Quicken creates a report starting from the first day of this month, quarter, or year and ending today. (Quarters begin January 1, April 1, July 1, or October 1.)
Last month Last quarter Last year	Quicken creates a report starting from the first day of last month, quarter, or year and ending with the last day of last month, quarter, or year. (Quarters begin January 1, April 1, July 1, or October 1.)
Earliest to date	Quicken creates a report starting from the earliest Quicken transaction and ending with today's date.


Customizing reports
Customize Report

You can customize a report to display just the information you need in the way you want to see it.

How to...

Customize a report

What you see

Report Dates

The following options appear under "Customize" in the window.  Click an option below to learn about types of changes you can make to your report.

Report Layout

Accounts

Transactions

Show Rows

Categories/Classes

Matching


Report Layout options
Report Layout

Quicken reports can be changed to meet your needs. This list describes how to change the report layout and how to hide or display certain types of information.

Not all options are available for each report.

Report Layout options:

Title

Row Headings

Column Headings

Subtotal by

Interval

Sort by

Max short-term gain holding period

Organization

Cents in Amounts

Totals Only

Memo

Category

Amount as %

Difference as % / Difference a $

Account Detail

Split Transaction Detail

Cash Flow Detail


Title

Enter a different title. Quicken displays and prints the report with this new title.


Row Headings (summary and comparison reports)

Choose category, class, payee, or account names as row headings for the report.


Column Headings (summary, comparison, budget, and account balances reports)

Create a report with separate columns for each time period (such as each week or each month) or for each category, class, payee or account.

If you choose Don't Subtotal, Quicken creates the report with a single column.


Subtotal by (transaction reports)

Group and total transactions by a time period (such as each week or each month) or by category, class, payee, account, or tax schedule.


Interval (account balances reports)

Create a column and total account balances for a time period (such as each week or each month).


Sort by (transaction reports)

Change the order of transactions in the report. You can sort transactions by:

•	Account/Date (None)

•	Date (descending)/Account

•	Account/Check number (descending)

•	Amount (ascending)

•	Payee (alphabetical order)

•	Category (alphabetical order)


Max short-term gain holding period (investment capital gains reports)

Enter a number specifying how many days you must have held a security before selling it for the resulting capital gain to qualify as a long-term gain.


Organization

This option...	Does this...
Income and expense	Totals income, expense, and transfer transactions in separate sections of your report.
Cash flow basis	Groups and totals inflows and outflows (including expenses and transfers out of the account).  For example>
Net worth format	(Account balances reports)  Prints your net worth as the last item.
Balance sheet format	(Account balances reports)  Prints net worth as a liability ("equity") with total liabilities and equity last.
Supercategory	(Budget reports)  Groups and totals budget amounts by supercategory instead of inflows and outflows.


Cash Flow Basis

For example

If you have an asset account called "House," and you treat home improvement transactions as transfers to that account, choosing cash flow basis lets you treat those transfers as spending, giving you a more accurate picture of your total expenditures.


Cents in Amounts

•	Select checkbox to display amounts in dollars and cents.

•	Clear checkbox to display amounts in dollars. (Quicken rounds to the nearest dollar.)


Totals Only

•	Select checkbox to display only the total dollar amount of transactions meeting your criteria.

•	Clear checkbox to list all transactions meeting your criteria.


Memo (transaction reports)

•	Select checkbox to include a column for memos in the report.

•	Clear checkbox to omit column for memos.


Category

•	Select checkbox to show categories in the report.

•	Clear checkbox to omit column for categories.


Difference as % / Difference as $ (comparison reports)

•	Select Difference as % checkbox to see the difference in amounts expressed as a percentage.

•	Select Difference as $ checkbox to see the difference in amounts expressed in dollars.


Amount as % (summary reports)

•	Select checkbox to see each summary amount as a percentage of the total amount.

•	Clear checkbox to see total amounts only.


Account Detail (balance sheet, net worth, and account balances reports)

•	Select checkbox to have Quicken display subtotals by class for all selected accounts (or by security if it's an investment account).

•	Clear checkbox to omit subtotals by class (or security) for all selected accounts.

Note: If you select many accounts with a number of classes or securities, Quicken may take longer to generate a report with account detail.


Split Transaction Detail (transaction reports)

•	Select checkbox to include split details.

•	Clear checkbox to omit split details.


Cash Flow Detail (investment performance reports)

•	Select checkbox to show all transactions that contribute to the Average Annual Total Return figure.

•	Clear checkbox to show only the Average Annual Total Return figure.


Select Sort Criteria window
Select Sort Criteria

This is where you can change the order of transactions in the report.

To sort the report:

•	Select a sort criteria from the drop-down list, then click OK.


Accounts

Depending on the report type you are creating, Quicken may preselect certain accounts. Selected accounts have a check mark to the left of their name in the Accounts Used list.

To select or deselect individual accounts:

•	Click them in the list.

To select a group of accounts:

•	Click the account type button (Bank, Cash, Credit Card, Investment, Asset, or Liability).

To include or remove all accounts:

•	Click Mark All or Clear All.


Transactions

You can select and limit the transactions Quicken includes in your report.

Transactions options:

Amounts

Include Unrealized Gains

Tax-related Transactions Only

Transaction Types

Status


Amounts

•	Have Quicken include all transactions OR

•	Enter an amount and select whether Quicken limits the transactions to those less than, greater than, or equal to the amount you enter.


Include Unrealized Gains

For transaction reports:

•	Click checkbox to have Quicken generate additional transactions representing price fluctuations for securities.

•	Clear checkbox to have Quicken omit unrealized gains.

For summary reports:

•	Click checkbox to have Quicken include inflows or income rows for unrealized gains.

•	Clear checkbox to omit income or inflows or income rows for unrealized gains.


Tax-related Transactions Only

•	Click checkbox to include only those transactions categorized with tax-related categories.

•	Clear checkbox to include all transactions (those categorized with tax-related categories as well as all other categorized transactions).


Transaction Types

Include all transactions or limit the report to certain transaction types: deposits, unprinted checks, or payments.

For asset accounts (such as cash accounts), payments are decreases. For liability accounts (such as credit card accounts), payments are increases.


Status

Only change this filter if you are creating a report to show which transactions are cleared or uncleared.


Show Rows

You can show or hide transfer and category information in the row heading.  Not all options are available for each report.

Show Rows options:

Transfers

Subcategories

Categories


Transfers

•	Include all transfers in the report

•	Exclude all transfers in the report OR

•	Exclude transfers between accounts that are included in the report. (These internal transfers cancel each other out in the report.)


Subcategories

•	Display subcategories (and subclasses) grouped under their main categories

•	Hide subcategories (and subclasses)
OR

•	Display subcategories with the main categories grouped under them.


Categories (budget reports only)

•	Include all categories (even unused ones) in the report

•	Include categories that you have used, or categories to which you have assigned budget amounts in the Set Up Budget window
OR

•	Include only those categories to which you have assigned budget amounts in the Set Up Budget window.


Categories/Classes
(or Select to Include for investment reports)

You can select the categories, classes, and supercategories (budget reports only) you want to report on.  For investment reports, you can select the securities, security types, and investment goals to report on.

To select or deselect individual items:

•	Click them in the list.

To select or deselect all items:

•	Click Mark All to select all, click Clear All to remove all check marks.


Matching

Quicken provides filters that let you define what must be true about a transaction for it to be included in a report.  For example>

To use matches to filter report transactions:

•	Enter the text to match, using QuickFill, the drop-down lists, or Quicken's special match characters.

Case (capital or non-capitals) doesn't matter, and Quicken ignores any spaces before or after the phrase you enter.


For example

You can include only transactions with a specific payee by typing the payee's name in the Payee Contains box.

For investment accounts, you can filter your reports by the security or the memo contents.

In the Category Contains box, you can type a category name or an account name to report on transfers to a specific account.

For a category or class match, Quicken also searches through entries in the Splits window.


Match characters for limiting reports

Match character...	Type of match...
= (equal sign)	An exact match (include only transactions that match the text you type exactly)  Examples>
.. (two periods)	A match that contains unspecified characters where you type .. (at the beginning, in the middle, or at the end of the text you type)  Examples>
? (question mark)	A match with one unspecified character  Example>
~ (tilde)	The report excludes all matches for the text that follows  Examples>


= (equal sign)  (Click here for more examples.)

Example	The report includes	The report doesn't include
=tax	tax, Tax, TAX	taxable, tax deduction, Tax:State, surtax, new tax loss, rent, utilities
~=tax	taxable, tax deduction, Tax:State, surtax, new tax loss, rent, utilities	tax, Tax, TAX


.. (two periods)  (Click here for more examples.)

Example	The report includes	The report doesn't include
..tax	tax, Tax, TAX, surtax, property tax	taxable, tax deduction, Tax:State, new tax loss, rent, utilities
tax..	tax, Tax, TAX, taxable, tax deduction, Tax:State,	surtax, new tax loss, rent, utilities
t..x	trix, tx, tkx, t-----x, tax, Tax, TAX	taxable, tax deduction, Tax:State, surtax, new tax loss, rent, utilities
..	tax, rent, utilities, and so on	transactions that are blank in the specified field (for example, uncategorized transactions)


? (question mark)  (Click here for more examples.)

Example	The report includes	The report doesn't include
=t?x	tkx, tax, Tax, TAX	trix, tx, t-----x, taxable, tax deduction, Tax:State, surtax, new tax loss, rent, utilities


~ (tilde)  (Click here for more examples)

Example	The report includes	The report doesn't include
~tax	rent, utilities	tax, Tax, TAX, taxable, tax deduction, Tax:State, surtax, new tax loss
~..	transactions that are blank in the specified field (for example, uncategorized transactions)	tax, rent, utilities, and so on


Memorize Report window
Memorize Report

This is where you save a report and its settings (such as the report layout and categories selected) after you have created it.

To complete the window:

•	Enter a name for the report, select how Quicken should memorize the dates, then click OK.

What you see

Named Range

Custom

None

How to...

Memorize a report for later use

Customize a report


Named Range

Select Named Range to have Quicken calculate the dates depending on when you recall the report. For example, if you memorize a report with the date range "Month to date," the report will cover the period from the beginning of the month to the day when you recall the report.


Custom

Select Custom to memorize the reports with the exact dates currently in effect.


None

Select None to use the preset dates, as set in the report options.


Memorizing a report
Memorize a report

Memorize a report to save the settings (for example, the report layout, categories selected, subtotal choice) after you have created it.

To memorize a report:

1.	Create a report.

2.	Click Memorize on the Report button bar, or from the Edit menu, choose Memorize Report.

3.	Enter a name for the report.

4.	Select how Quicken should memorize the dates.

5.	Click OK.

How to...

Customize a memorized report

Delete a memorized report

Use a memorized report


Creating a home or business report
Create a home or business report

To create a home or business report:

1.	Click the Reports icon on the Quicken iconbar.  Or, from the Reports menu, choose Home or Business, then the type of report you want to create.  The Create Report window appears.

2.	If necessary, change the date range or enter the specific dates you want the report to include. For an explanation of the ranges, click here.

3.	Select Business or Home as the Report Family.  The reports you can create appear.

4.	Select a Report Name.  These are the preset reports you can choose from. When you select a report name, Quicken displays a sample report at the bottom of the window.  The sample report does not contain your data.

5.	If you want to customize the report (for example, to change the layout or limit the report to certain categories) click Customize.

6.	Click OK to create the report.  Quicken searches your file for transactions within the date range and displays the report.

More about ...

Report types


Creating an investment report
Create an investment report

You can produce a number of standard reports on investment accounts.

To create an investment report:

1.	Click the Reports icon on the Quicken iconbar.  Or, from the Reports menu, choose Investment, then the type of report you want to create.  The Create Report window appears.

2.	If necessary, change the date range or enter the specific dates you want the report to include. For an explanation of the ranges, click here.

3.	Select Investment as the Report Family.  The reports you can create appear.

4.	Select a Report Name.  These are the preset reports you can choose from. When you select a report name, Quicken displays a sample report at the bottom of the window.  The sample report does not contain your data.

5.	If you want to customize the report, click Customize..  For example>

6.	Click OK to create the report.  Quicken searches your file for transactions within the date range and displays the report.

How to...

Create a report on selected accounts

Limit which transactions are included in your report

Learn more about report types


Investment report options
Customize Options for Investment Reports

Option	What you can do
Report Layout	Change report dates. Change how Quicken subtotals (for example, by security or by account). Show cents in amounts. Subtotal by week, month, year, etc., or don't subtotal. Enter maximum short-term gain holding period (Capital Gains report only). Show cash flow detail (Investment Performance report only). Organize the report using cash flow or income and expense. When you select income and expense, transfers are listed separately at the end of the report.
Accounts	Mark the accounts you'd like to include in or remove from the report. • To remove an account from the report, click it in the list to remove the check mark. • To include all accounts, click Mark All. • To include all accounts of a certain type, click the appropriate button to the right of the list. For example, to include all investment accounts, click Investment.
Transactions	Select whether to include tax-related transactions.
Show Rows (capital gains, investment income, and investment transactions reports)	Select how you'd like Quicken to handle transfers: • Include all transfers in the report • Exclude all transfers in the report OR • Exclude transfers between accounts that are included in the report. (These transfers cancel each other out in the report.)
Select to Include	Select which securities, security types, and investment goals to include.
Matching	Restrict your report to a particular security.


Customizing a report
Customize a report

Quicken gives you great flexibility in creating your reports.  You can change the layout, date range, which accounts to include, and various other settings.  You can also filter the report, for example, to include only certain payees or categories.  After customizing a report you can memorize it for future use.

To customize a report:

1.	First, create a report (see below).

2.	Click Customize on the report button bar.  Or, click Customize in the Create Report window.  The Customize window appears.

3.	In the "Customize" section, select one of the following report areas to customize:

Report Layout

Accounts

Transactions

Show Rows

Categories/Classes

Matching

4.	Change the settings for the selected area in the right part of the window.

5.	Click OK.  Quicken applies your new settings to the report.

How to...

Create a report


Creating a transaction report
Create a transaction report

To create a transaction report:

1.	Click the Reports icon on the Quicken iconbar.  Or, from the Reports menu, choose Other, then choose Transaction.  The Create Report window appears.

2.	If necessary, change the date range or enter the specific dates you want the report to include. For an explanation of the ranges, click here.

3.	Select Other as the Report Family.

4.	Select Transaction as the Report Name.

5.	If you want to customize the report (for example, to change the layout or limit the report to certain categories) click Customize.

6.	Click OK to create the report.  Quicken searches your file for transactions within the date range and displays the report.

How to...

Create a report on selected accounts

Create a report on selected categories or classes

Limit which transactions are included in your report

Learn more about report types


Creating a summary report
Create a summary report

To create a summary report:

1.	Click the Reports icon on the Quicken iconbar.  Or, from the Reports menu, choose Other, then choose Summary.  The Create Report window appears.

2.	If necessary, change the date range or enter the specific dates you want the report to include. For an explanation of the ranges, click here.

3.	Select Other as the Report Family.

4.	Select Summary as the Report Name.

5.	If you want to customize the report (for example, to change the layout or limit the report to certain categories) click Customize.

6.	Click OK to create the report.  Quicken searches your file for transactions within the date range and displays the report.

How to...

Create a report on selected accounts

Create a report on selected categories or classes

Limit which transactions are included in your report


Creating a comparison report
Create a comparison report

You can produce a report comparing your income and expenses for two time periods. You can choose to compare by category, payee, class, or account.

To create a comparison report:

1.	Click the Reports icon on the Quicken iconbar.  Or, from the Reports menu, choose Other, then choose Comparison.  The Create Report window appears.

2.	If necessary, change the two date ranges being compared in this report.  For an explanation of the ranges, click here.

3.	Select Other as the Report Family.

4.	Select Comparison as the Report Name.

5.	If you want to customize the report (for example, to change the layout or limit the report to certain categories) click Customize.

6.	Click OK to create the report.  Quicken searches your file for transactions within the date ranges and displays the report.

Note

If you see INF in the % Difference column, it's because the first amount is zero.  You might try changing the two date ranges being compared in the report.


Creating a budget report
Create a budget report

You can produce a report on transactions assigned to categories you have marked as monthly budget items. For information on budgeting categories, see the related topics at the end of this topic.

To create a budget report:

1.	Click the Reports icon on the Quicken iconbar.  Or, from the Reports menu, choose Other, then choose Budget.  The Create Report window appears.

2.	If necessary, change the date range or enter the specific dates you want the report to include. For an explanation of the ranges, click here.

3.	Select Other as the Report Family.

4.	Select Budget as the Report Name.

5.	If you want to customize the report (for example, to change the layout or limit the report to certain categories) click Customize.

6.	Click OK to create the report.  Quicken searches your file for transactions within the date range and displays the report.

How to...

Set up a budget

Create a report on selected accounts

Create a report on selected categories or classes

Limit which transactions are included in your report


Creating an account balances report
Create an account balances report

To create an account balances report:

1.	Click the Reports icon on the Quicken iconbar.  Or, from the Reports menu, choose Other, then choose Account Balances.  The Create Report window appears.

2.	If necessary, change the date range or enter the specific dates you want the report to include. For an explanation of the ranges, click here.

3.	Select Other as the Report Family.

4.	Select Account Balances as the Report Name.

5.	If you want to customize the report (for example, to change the layout or limit the report to certain categories) click Customize.

6.	Click OK to create the report.  Quicken searches your file for transactions within the date range and displays the report.

How to...

Create a report on selected accounts

Create a report on selected categories or classes

Limit which transactions are included in your report


Creating a report on selected accounts
Create a report on selected accounts

Depending on the type of report you are creating, certain accounts are preselected for inclusion in your report. For example:

•	When you create a cash flow report, Quicken preselects all bank, cash, and credit card accounts.

•	When you create a capital gains report, Quicken preselects all investment accounts which are NOT tax-deferred.

You are free, however, to change the accounts which are preselected by Quicken.

To create a report on selected accounts:

1.	Click the Reports icon on the Quicken iconbar, then select the Report Family and Report Name for the report you want to create, or, choose a report from the Reports menu.

2.	Click Customize.  The Customize window appears.

3.	Click Accounts.  In the Accounts Used box, Quicken displays a list of your accounts. An account with a check mark next to it is included in this report.

4.	Mark the accounts you'd like to include in or remove from the report.

•	To include all accounts of a certain type, click the appropriate button to the right of the list. For example, to include all investment accounts, click Investment.

5.	Click OK to create the report.


Creating a report on selected categories, classes, and supercategories
Create a report on selected categories, classes, and supercategories

You can create a report that includes all categories, classes and supercategories (budget reports only); or you can select the categories, classes, and supercategories you want to report on.

To create a report with selected categories, classes, and supercategories:

1.	Click the Reports icon on the Quicken iconbar, then select the Report Family and Report Name for the report you want to create, or, choose a report from the Reports menu.

2.	Click Customize.  The Customize window appears.

3.	Click Categories/Classes.  Quicken displays your category list. A category with a check mark next to it is included in this report.

4.	Mark the categories you'd like to include in or remove from the report.

5.	(Optional) If you want to select certain classes to appear in this report, click Classes.

6.	(Optional) If you want to select certain supercategories to appear in this report, click Supercategories.

7.	Click OK to create the report.

How to...

Use categories, classes, & supercategories


Limiting which transactions are included in your report
Limit which transactions are included in your report

You can restrict a report to certain transactions; that is, you can filter out unwanted transactions.

To limit which transactions are included in your report:

1.	Click the Reports icon on the Quicken iconbar, then select the Report Family and Report Name for the report you want to create, or, choose a report from the Reports menu.

2.	Click Customize.  The Customize window appears.

3.	Click Transactions.  For information about an option, click the name in the list below.  Not all options are available for every report type.

Amounts

Include unrealized gains

Include Tax-related Transactions

Transaction Types

Status

4.	Click OK to create the report.


Amounts

You have these options for amounts you can include in your report. To enter an amount in the box, you must select an option other than All.

Option	Result
All	Includes all transaction amounts.
Less than	Includes amounts less than the amount you enter.
Equal to	Includes amounts equal to the amount you enter.
Greater than	Includes amounts greater than the amount you enter.


Include Unrealized Gains

When the checkbox is selected, the report shows unrealized (paper) gains and losses. These gains and losses reflect increases and decreases in the value of your securities as their prices change.


Include Tax-related Transactions

Includes only transactions that have been categorized with tax-related categories.


Transaction Types

You have the following options for types of transactions you can include in your report.

Option	Result
Payments	Includes payments only (including checks). For nonbank accounts, payments are decreases to cash and other asset accounts, and increases to credit card and other liability accounts.
Deposits	Includes deposits only.
Unprinted Checks	Includes unprinted checks only.
All transactions	Includes all transactions.


Status

Transaction status indicates whether or not a transaction has been cleared (or reconciled) in your register.

Quicken reports include all transactions, regardless of cleared status, unless you change this filter.

Don't clear or change any checkbox for these choices unless you plan to create a report specifically showing transactions that are cleared or uncleared.


Using a memorized report
Use a memorized report

If you make changes to a memorized report, you must rememorize it (or memorize it using a different name) if you want Quicken to save the changes you've made.

If you don't rememorize the report, Quicken ignores the changes you've made. When you recall the report, Quicken displays the previous version of the report.

To use a memorized report:

1.	Click the Reports icon on the Quicken iconbar, then select Memorized as the Report Family and select the report from the list, or, choose Memorized Reports from the Reports menu. Then select a report from the Memorized Report list and click Use.

2.	(Optional) Click Customize to make changes to the report.  For example, you may want to change the dates, report layout, include different categories in the report or add categories you've created since you last used this report.

3.	Click OK.

How to...

Memorize a report

Rename a memorized report


Customizing a memorized report
Customize a memorized report

If you make changes to a memorized report, you must rememorize it (or memorize it using a different name) if you want Quicken to save the changes you've made.

If you don't rememorize the report, Quicken ignores the changes you've made. When you recall the report, Quicken displays the previous version of the report.

To customize a memorized report:

1.	Click the Reports icon on the Quicken iconbar, then select Memorized as the Report Family and select the report from the list, or, choose Memorized Reports from the Reports menu. Then select a report from the Memorized Report list and click Use.

2.	Click Customize to make changes to the report.  For example, you may want to change the report layout, include different categories in the report or add categories you've created since you last used this report.

3.	Click OK.  The report appears.

4.	Click Memorize to save this report with the new settings.  Give the report a different name if you'd like to keep the previous memorized version of this report. Keep the same name if you want Quicken to overwrite the previous version of the report with this new memorized report.

How to...

Memorize a report


Renaming a memorized report
Rename a memorized report

To rename a memorized report:

1.	From the Reports menu, choose Memorized Reports.

2.	Select the report from the list.

3.	Click Edit.

4.	Change the name of the memorized report.

5.	Click OK.

How to...

Use a memorized report


Deleting a memorized report
Delete a memorized report

To delete a memorized report:

1.	Choose Memorized Reports from the Reports menu.

2.	Select the report from the list and click Delete.  Quicken asks you to confirm that you want to delete the report.

3.	Click OK.

How to...

Rename a memorized report


Report window

This window displays the report you've created.  Use QuickZoom to get more detail on individual transactions or categories.

How to...

Print a report

Customize a report

Memorize a report

Transfer tax schedule report data to a tax program

What you see

Customize

Memorize

Copy

Print

Sort

Export

Close

For comparison reports

If you see INF in the % Difference column, it's because the first amount is zero.  You might try changing the two date ranges being compared in the report.


Customize

Opens the Customize window, where you can:

•	Change the title, dates, row and column headings, or the accounts included in the report.

•	Organize the report on a cash flow basis or by income and expense, to include or exclude internal transfers, to show cents in reports, and whether to show subcategories separately.

•	Limit the scope of your reports by having Quicken report only on transactions containing a specific payee, memo, category, or class.  You can also limit reports by income or expense, or by cleared status.


Memorize

Memorize the report so you can recall it easily at any time.


Copy

Copy the report to the Clipboard. The report is saved as tab-delimited text. You can paste the text into:

•	A spreadsheet (created by a program such as Lotus1-2-3) OR

•	A word processing file (created by a program such as Microsoft Word or Word Perfect).


Print

Print the report to a printer, disk file or to the screen.


Sort (transaction reports only)

Change the order of transactions in the report. You can sort transactions by:

•	Account

•	Date (descending)

•	Check number (descending)

•	Amount (ascending)

•	Payee (alphabetical order)

•	Category (alphabetical order).


Export (capital gains and tax schedule reports only)

Allows you to export this file to a tax program. The file is saved in tax export format (.TXF).


Close

Remove the report from the screen.


Report types

Quicken home, business, and investment reports have preset formats. You can produce a report containing just the information you need by either customizing a preset report after you create it or by creating a report from scratch, based on a basic transaction, summary, comparison, budget or account balances report.

The standard report types are listed on the Home, Business, and Investment submenus. Look on the Other submenu for the basic report types.


Memorized Reports list
Memorized Reports

This window lists the reports you have memorized in alphabetical order.

To display a memorized report:

•	Select the report, then click Use.  The Create Report window appears, where you can change the title, the date range, or customize the report further before displaying it.

To rename a memorized report:

•	Select the report, then click Edit.

To delete a memorized report:

•	Select the report, then click Delete.

How to...

Memorize a report


Rename Memorized Report

This is where you rename a memorized report.

To rename a memorized report:

•	Change the report title and then click OK.


Memorized Report window
Memorized Report

This window displays a memorized report either in its original form, with a new title, with a new date or date range, or in customized form.

Settings

For home and business reports, clicking Settings displays a custom window appropriate to the report type.  For investment reports, clicking Settings displays the window you used to produce the report originally -- for example, the Portfolio Value Report window.


HELP_TAXEXPORTFILE DB
Create Tax Export File

Use this window to export the tax schedule or capital gains report to tax software.  If you are using TurboTax for Windows, you don't need to export the data yourself; TurboTax will do it automatically.

How to...

Transfer tax schedule report data to a tax program

What you see

File Name

Save File as Type

Directories

Drives


File Name

The name of the file for the tax schedule or capital gains report.


Save File as Type

The format the file will be saved in.


Directories

The current directory.


Drives

The current drive.


HELP_SELECT_TO_INCLUDE DB
Select (Items) to Include

To select an item:

•	Click its name in the list. Quicken marks the item with a checkmark.  To select all items in the list, click Mark All.

To deselect an item:

•	Click its name in the list. Quicken removes the checkmark from the item.  To deselect all items in the list, click Clear All.


*Setting up savings goals (contents)
Setting up savings goals

To search for a Help topic, click the Search button above.

Overview

Click here

How to...

Set up a savings goal

Contribute to a savings goal

Withdraw from a savings goal

Report on a savings goal

Display and change the Progress Bar

Common Question

How can I see my actual bank balance when I have money in a savings goal account?


Set up a savings goal

Set up a savings goal

Edit a savings goal

Delete a savings goal


Setting up savings goals
Overview: Setting up savings goals

A Quicken savings goal lets you "hide" money for something you want to save for -- for example, a vacation or a new car.  Although the money is really in your bank account, you mark it as unavailable for other spending purposes.

When you create a savings goal, Quicken automatically creates a savings goal account to help you track how much money you've contributed to your goal.

How to...

Set up a savings goal

Contribute to a savings goal

Withdraw from a savings goal

Report on a savings goal

Display and change the Progress Bar


Setting up a savings goal
Set up a savings goal

To set up a savings goal:

1.	From the Plan menu, choose Savings Goals.

2.	Click New.

3.	Enter a name, amount, and finishing date for the savings goal.  The name you enter will be the name of the account used to track the savings goal.

4.	Click OK.  The Savings Goals window shows your Projected Monthly Contribution in the lower right corner of the window.  This is the amount that you should set aside each month in order to achieve your goal.

How to...

Edit a savings goal

Delete a savings goal

Contribute to a savings goal

Withdraw from a savings goal

Report on a savings goal

Display and change the Progress Bar


Editing a savings goal
Edit a savings goal

To edit a savings goal:

1.	From the Plan menu, choose Savings Goals.

2.	Select the goal you want to edit in the list.

3.	Click Edit.

4.	Change the amount or finish date of the goal.  You can't edit the name of the goal.

5.	Click OK.

How to...

Set up a savings goal

Delete a savings goal

Contribute to a savings goal

Withdraw from a savings goal

Report on a savings goal

Display and change the Progress Bar


Deleting a savings goal
Delete a savings goal

To delete a savings goal:

1.	From the Plan menu, choose Savings Goals.

2.	Select the goal you want to delete.

3.	Click Delete.

4.	Quicken asks you if you want to keep the asset account for your records.  Click Yes if you want to delete the goal, but not the asset account.  Click No if you want to delete the goal and the account.

Note:  Keeping the asset account for your records is useful because you can continue to run reports on the savings goal activity.

5.	In either case, Quicken returns the funds to their source accounts.

How to...

Set up a savings goal

Edit a savings goal

Contribute to a savings goal

Withdraw from a savings goal

Report on a savings goal

Display and change the Progress Bar


Report on a savings goal

Quicken can generate a report of all the contributions made to a savings goal.

To report on a savings goal:

1.	From the Plan menu, choose Savings Goals.

2.	Select the goal you want to report on.

3.	Click Report.  The report shows the opening balance, and all the transfers into and out of the savings goal account.

How to...

Create reports about your finances


Contributing money to a savings goal
Contribute to a savings goal

When you contribute to a savings goal, you "transfer" money from a bank account into your savings goal account.  Although the money is really in your bank account, you "hide" it and mark it as unavailable for other spending purposes.

To contribute to a savings goal:

1.	From the Plan menu, choose Savings Goals.

2.	Click Contribute.  The Contribute to Goal window appears.

3.	Enter the date, select the account to transfer money from, and the amount to contribute.

4.	Click OK.

How to...

Withdraw from a savings goal

Report on a savings goal

Display and change the Progress Bar


Withdrawing money from a savings goal
Withdraw from a savings goal

When you withdraw from a savings goal, you "transfer" money back into the account you made a contribution from.  In actuality, the money never left your bank account; you are simply "unhiding" it when you make the withdrawal.

To withdraw money from a savings goal:

1.	From the Plan menu, choose Savings Goals.

2.	Click Withdraw.  The Withdraw From Goal window appears.

3.	Change the date if necessary, select the bank account to put money back into, and enter the amount to withdraw from the savings goal.

4.	Click OK.

How to...

Contribute to a savings goal

Report on a savings goal

Display and change the Progress Bar


Displaying and changing the Progress Bar
Display and change the Progress Bar

With the Progress Bar, you can choose two savings, budget, or supercategory budget goals to display at all times at the bottom of the Quicken window.  The goals are displayed as "gas gauge" graphs that show your progress towards the goal.

To display the Progress Bar:

•	From the Plan menu, choose Progress Bar.  To hide the Progress Bar, click Close on the Progress Bar.

To change the Progress Bar:

•	Click Cust on the Progress Bar, then select the goals to display.

How to...

Display different goals on the Progress Bar

Change Progress Bar display options


Actual account balance when using savings goals
 How can I see my actual bank balance when I have money in a savings goal account?

When you set aside money in a savings goal account, Quicken keeps track of both your actual bank balance (what your bank statement will say) and the balance of your account without the money you've set aside for your savings goal.

To see your actual bank balance:

•	Select the Hide Goal Txns. checkbox in the register of the account you've contributed money from.


Create/Edit Savings Goal window
Create/Edit Savings Goal

Use this window to set up or edit a savings goal.  You can get here by clicking New or Edit from the main Savings Goals window.

How to...

Set up a savings goal

Edit a savings goal

What you see

Goal Name

Goal Amount

Finish Date


Goal Name

Enter a name for the savings goal here, such as Vacation or Car.  When you edit an existing savings goal, you can't change the name.


Goal Amount

Enter the amount of the savings goal here.  For example, if you want to set aside $3,000 for a vacation, enter 3,000.


Finish Date

This field contains the date by which you want to set aside all the money.  So if you plan to take a vacation in August of 1995, enter 8/1/95 here.


Savings Goals window
Savings Goals

A Quicken savings goal lets you "hide" money for something you want to save for -- for example, a vacation or a new car.  Although the money is really in your bank account, you mark it as unavailable for other spending purposes.

How to...

Set up a savings goal

Contribute to a savings goal

Withdraw from a savings goal

Report on a savings goal

Display and change the Progress Bar

What you see

Savings Goals button bar

Savings Goals list

Savings Goals Progress Graph

Goal, Start, Finish fields

Projected Monthly Contribution

Contribute, Withdraw buttons


Savings Goals button bar

This button...	Does this...
New	Creates a new savings goal.
Edit	Lets you change an existing savings goal.
Delete	Deletes the selected savings goal.
Report	Creates a register report of all transactions in the savings goal account.
Close	Closes the window.


Savings Goals list

This is a list of all the savings goals you have defined.

This column...	Shows this...
Goal Name	The name of the savings goal.
Goal Amount	The amount of the goal.
Finish Date	The date by which you want to achieve the goal.
Current Savings	The amount that has already been contributed to the goal.


Savings Goals Progress Graph

This is a "gas gauge" of your progress towards the savings goal.


Goal, Start, Finish fields

This field...	Shows this...
Goal	The amount of the goal.
Start	The date you started contributing to the goal.
Finish	The date by which you want to achieve the goal.


Projected Monthly Contribution

Quicken calculates how much you need to contribute each month to reach the goal in the time allotted, and displays the result here.

The amount is calculated based on the start and end dates, and the goal amount.  Any portion of a month included within the start and end dates is counted as a full month.

For example, if a goal starts on 8/9/95 and ends on 8/9/96, Quicken calculates the Projected Monthly Contribution based on 13 months of contributions.


Contribute, Withdraw buttons

This button...	Does this...
Contribute	Opens the Contribute to Goal window, where you can easily add money to a savings goal.
Withdraw	Opens the Withdraw From Goal window, where you can transfer money back into the accounts from which your contributions came.


Contribute to Savings Goal window
Contribute to Goal

Use this window to contribute money to the savings goal that's currently selected in the Savings Goals window.  When you contribute to a savings goal, you transfer money from a bank account into your savings goal account.

To contribute to a savings goal:

•	Change the date if necessary, select the account to transfer money from, and the amount to contribute, then click OK.

What you see

Date

From Account

$

Current (account name) Balance

How to...

Withdraw from a savings goal

Report on a savings goal

Display and change the Progress Bar


Date

The date you want to assign to the savings goal transaction.


From Account

The name of the account the contribution will be transferred from.


$

The amount of money to contribute to the savings goal.


Current (account name) Balance

The current balance of the account the contribution will be transferred from.


Withdraw From Savings Goal window
Withdraw From Goal

Use this window to withdraw money from the savings goal that's currently selected in the Savings Goals window.  When you withdraw from a savings goal, you transfer money back into the account you made a contribution from.

To withdraw money from a savings goal:

•	Change the date if necessary, select the bank account to put money back into, the amount to withdraw from the savings goal, then click OK.

What you see

Date

Put funds back in

$

Amount saved from (account name)

How to...

Contribute to a savings goal

Report on a savings goal

Display and change the Progress Bar


Put funds back in

The name of the account the money from the withdrawal will be put back into.


$

The amount of money to withdraw from the savings goal.


Amount saved from (account name)

The total amount of money that has been contributed to the savings goal from the currently selected account.


Customize Budget Goal window
Choose Category

Use this window to select a budget goal category to display in the Progress Bar or the Snapshots window.

What you see

This field...	Does this...
Date Range	Displays the date range for the budget goal.  Choose the current month, the current quarter, or the current year.
Category List	Shows the category selected for the budget goal.  Click a category to select it.


Customize Savings Goal window
Choose Savings Goal

Use this window to select a Savings Goal to display in the Progress bar or in the Snapshots window.

To select a Savings Goal from the list:

•	Click on it, then click OK.


Customize Supercategory Budget Goal window
Choose Supercategory

Use this window to select a supercategory budget goal to display in Progress Bar or Snapshots window.

What you see

This field...	Does this...
Date Range	Displays the date range for the budget goal.  Choose the current month, the current quarter, or the current year.
Supercategory List	Shows the supercategory selected for the goal.  Click a supercategory to select it.


Delete Savings Goal window
Delete Savings Goal

Do you want to keep the asset account for your records?

Keeping the asset account for your records is useful because you can continue to run reports on the savings goal activity.

•	Click Yes if you want to delete the goal, but not the asset account.  Click No if you want to delete the goal and the account.

In either case, Quicken returns the funds to their source accounts.


Customize Progress Bar

Use this window to change the Progress Bar to your liking.

How to...

Display different goals on the Progress Bar

Change Progress Bar display options

Set up a savings goal

What you see

Gauge Types (Left and Right)

Choose buttons

Show Labels

Always on Top


Displaying different goals on the Progress Bar
Display different goals on the Progress Bar

To display different goals on the Progress Bar:

1.	Click Cust on the Progress Bar.  The Customize Progress Bar window appears.

2.	Select a Gauge Type for the left and right Progress Bar gauges.

3.	Click Choose for the left and right gauges, then make a selection from the list.

For Savings Goals, this means selecting a goal from those you have already defined.

For Budget Goals, this means selecting a category.

For Supercategory Budget Goals, this means selecting a supercategory.


Changing Progress Bar display options
Change Progress Bar display options

To change Progress Bar display options:

1.	Click Cust on the Progress Bar.  The Customize Progress Bar window appears.

2.	Change the Progress Bar options, as necessary.

3.	Click OK.


Progress Bar options

Gauge Types (Left and Right)

Choose buttons

Show Labels

Always on Top


Gauge Types (Left and Right)

These fields show the currently selected goal type.  You can select Savings Goal, Budget Goal, or Supercategory Budget.

To select a different gauge type, click on the down arrow and select a goal from the drop-down list.


Choose buttons

Click to select a specific goal.  For Savings Goals, this means selecting an account from the list of savings goals you've set up.  For Budget Goals, select a category to display, and for Supercategory budget, select a supercategory.


Show Labels

Select this option to display a label above the selected goal on the Progress Bar.


Always on Top

Select this option to have the Progress Bar always remain on top.


Creating a new account
Create a new account

You can create new accounts in Quicken whenever you need to.  When you create a new account, Quicken adds it to the other accounts in the current file.

To create a new account:

1.	From the Activities menu, choose Create New Account.

2.	Select the Guide Me checkbox if you would like extra help.  If you select this option, Quicken "interviews" you for the account information.

3.	Click the type of account you'd like to create.

4.	Enter the information requested.

How to...

Set up an IntelliCharge account

Set up a regular investment account

Set up a mutual fund account


Create New Account window
Create New Account

To create an account:

•	Click on one of the account type buttons.

To have Quicken interview you for the account information, make sure that the Guide Me checkbox is selected.  A checkmark in the checkbox means that it is selected.

What you see

Account types

Guide Me


Guide Me

Select this option to have Quicken interview you for the account information.


Create Account dialog box
Create Account

To complete the window:

1.	Enter a unique name for the account.

2.	Enter an optional description of the account.

3.	Click Next.

What you see

Account Name

Description

Back button

Next button


Description (optional)

Enter a short phase that describes the account.  Your description can have up to 21 characters.


Back button

Returns you to the previous window.


Next button

Takes you to the next window.


Create Account dialog box
Create Account

To complete the window:

1.	Click Yes if you have your last account statement; click No if you don't have your records with you.

2.	Click Next.

What you see

Yes, No

Back button

Next button


Yes, No

•	If you select Yes, Quicken asks you to enter the balance or value of the account as of a particular date.

•	If you select No, Quicken sets up the new account with a balance of $0.00 as of today's date.


Create Account dialog box
Create Account

To complete the window:

1.	Enter the date of your last statement, today's date, or the date on which you knew the balance or value of the account.

2.	Enter the balance or value of the account as of that date.

3.	Click Next (or Done).

What you see

These fields...	Appear for these accounts...
Statement Date, Ending Balance	Checking, savings, money market
Statement Date, Balance Due	Credit Card
As of Date, Amount	Cash
As of Date, Value	Asset
As of Date, Balance Due	Liability

Back button

Next button

Done button


Statement Date, Ending Balance

Enter the date and ending balance from your last bank statement.


Statement Date, Balance Due

The date and balance due from your last credit card statement.


As of Date, Amount

The amount of cash you have on hand as of a particular date.


As of Date, Value

The current value of the asset as of a particular date.


As of Date, Balance Due

The date and current loan balance from your last statement.


Done

Click to create the account.  If you want to make changes, click Back.


Create Account dialog box
Create Account

The new account has been set up with an opening balance of $0.00, as of today.

If this is OK:

•	Click Done.  You can enter the correct balance later.

If you want to get your records and enter the correct balance now:

•	Click Back, then choose Yes.

What you see

Back button

Done button


Create Account dialog box
Create Account

To complete the window:

1.	Click Yes if this is a tax-deferred account, otherwise, click No.

2.	Click Next.

What you see

Yes, No

Back button

Next button


Yes, No

Select Yes if you're setting up an account for which the amount invested and the earnings are not subject to income tax until a later time; otherwise, select No.


Create Investment Account dialog box
Create Investment Account

To complete the window:

1.	Click Yes if you plan to track a single mutual fund in this account; click No if you plan to track more than one mutual fund.

2.	Click Done.

What you see

Yes, No

Back button

Done button


Yes, No

Select Yes only if you're setting up an investment account for a single mutual fund for which you are not tracking a cash balance.

Select No if you want to set up a regular investment account.  In a regular investment account, you can track a variety of securities, including mutual funds.  You can also maintain a cash balance.


Create Investment Account window
Create Account

This is where you choose the tax schedules to use for transfers into and out of this account.  Doing so ensures that your tax schedule reports, your Tax Planner data, and any transfer of tax information to a tax program (such as TurboTax) will be accurate.

To complete the window:

•	Select tax schedules from the Transfers In and Transfers Out drop-down lists, then click Next (or Done).

What you see

Transfers In

Transfers Out

Back button

Next button

Done button


Create Credit Card Account dialog box
Create Credit Card Account

To complete the window:

1.	Click Yes if you have an IntelliCharge account; click No if you don't.  To use IntelliCharge, you must have a Quicken credit card.

2.	Click Next.

How to...

Apply for a Quicken credit card

What you see

Yes, No

Back button

Next button


Yes, No

•	If you select Yes, Quicken asks you to enter a name for the account and your Quicken credit card account number.

•	If you select No, Quicken asks you to enter a name and a description for the credit card account.


Create Credit Card Account dialog box
Create Credit Card Account

To complete the window:

1.	Enter a unique name for the Quicken credit card account.

2.	Enter your Quicken credit card account number.  Remember, to use IntelliCharge, you must have a Quicken credit card.

3.	Click Next.

What you see

Account Name

Account Number

Back button

Next button


Account Number

Your Quicken credit card account number.


Create Credit Card Account window
Create Credit Card Account

To complete the window:

•	Enter the credit limit of your credit card, then click Next.

What you see

Credit Limit

Back button

Next button


Create Credit Card Account window
Create Credit Card Account

To complete the window:

•	Click the same type of statement delivery that you chose on your credit card application, then click Next.

What you see

Diskette

Modem

Back button

Next button


Diskette

Select this option if you indicated on your credit card application that you wanted your IntelliCharge account statement delivered on disk in the mail each month.


Modem

Select this option if you indicated on your credit card application that you wanted to use your modem to download your IntelliCharge account statement each month.


Create Credit Card Account window
Create Credit Card Account

To complete the window:

•	Enter your Social Security number, type a password, then click Done.

What you see

Social Security

Password

Done button


Create Liability Account dialog window
Create Liability Account

To complete the window:

1.	Click Yes if you want to set up a loan; click No if you don't want to set up a loan (or if you want to set up the loan later).

2.	Click Next.

What you see

Yes, No

Back button


Yes, No

•	If you select Yes, Quicken displays the Set Up Loan window, where you enter information Quicken uses to calculate a payment schedule for a loan.

•	If you select No, Quicken creates the liability account and displays its register.


UNGUIDED SETUP TOPICS FOLLOW


New Account Information window
Create Account

This is where you enter basic information about the new account.

To enter new account information:

1.	Enter a unique name for the account.

2.	Enter the opening balance (except for investment accounts) and date.

3.	(Optional) Enter a description of the account.

4.	(Optional) Click Info to enter some background details about the account.

5.	(Optional) Enter tax information about the account.

6.	Enter other information, as required by the account type, then click OK.

What you see

Account Information

Optional Information

Tax Information


Account Information

Account Name

Balance...as of (non-investment accounts)

Enable IntelliCharge (credit card accounts)

Account contains a single mutual fund (investment accounts)


Optional Information

Description

Credit Card Number (IntelliCharge credit card accounts)

Credit limit (credit card accounts)

Additional Information button


Tax Information

Depending on the account type, one or more of the following controls appear in the window.

Tax button

Tax-Deferred Account - IRA, 401(k), etc.

Transfers In

Transfers Out


Account Name

Enter a name for the account.  The name can be up to 15 characters.  Use any combination of letters, numbers, spaces, and other characters except these:

[	(left bracket)

]	(right bracket)

/	(slash)

:	(colon)

|	(bar)

^	(caret)


Balance . . . as of

Enter the opening balance and starting date:

For a(n) ...	Use the...
Checking account	Ending balance and date from your last bank statement
Savings account	Ending balance and date from your last bank statement.
Money Market account	Ending balance and date from your last bank statement
Credit card account	Balance due and date from your last credit card statement
Cash account	Amount of cash you have on hand and today's date
Asset account	Current value of the asset and today's date
Liability account	Current loan balance from your last statement and today's date
Investment account	(you don't enter an opening balance or starting date for investment accounts).


Description

Enter a short phase that describes the account.  Your description can have up to 21 characters.  For a credit card account that is not set up for IntelliCharge, you may want to enter the credit card number here.

Entering this information is optional.


Account contains a single mutual fund (investment accounts only)

Select this checkbox only if you're setting up an investment account for a single mutual fund for which you are not tracking a cash balance.

If you want to set up a regular investment account, leave this checkbox empty.  In a regular investment account, you can track a variety of securities, including mutual funds.  You can also maintain a cash balance.


Enable IntelliCharge (credit card accounts)

Select this checkbox if you want to use IntelliCharge to update your credit card account automatically -- either by disk or by modem.

To use IntelliCharge, you must have a Quicken credit card.


Credit Card Number (IntelliCharge credit card accounts)

This applies only to credit card accounts you plan to update with IntelliCharge.  Enter the number of your Quicken credit card.


Credit limit (credit card accounts)

When setting up a credit card account, you have the option of entering the credit limit for your credit card.  If you do enter a credit limit, Quicken displays your remaining credit in the account register.


Additional Information button

Opens the Additional Account Information window. You can enter your bank name, your account number, the name of a contact person, their phone number, the interest rate on the account, or other comments.

Entering this information is optional.


Tax button

Opens the Tax Schedule Information window, where you can choose to set up a tax-deferred account (if applicable), and select which tax schedule line items you want to assign to transfers into and out of the account.

The Tax button appears only when creating certain account types, and only if the "Use Tax Schedules with Categories" setting is selected in Quicken's General options (from the Edit menu, choose Options, then click General).


Tax-deferred account - IRA, 401(k), etc.

Select this checkbox if you're setting up an account for which the amount invested and the earnings are not subject to income tax until a later time.

This option appears only when creating certain account types.


Transfers In

Specify which tax scheduled line item should be assigned to transfers into this account.

The Transfers In field appears only if the "Use Tax Schedules with Categories" setting is selected in Quicken's General options (from the Edit menu, choose Options, then click General).

How to...

Assign 401(k) transactions to tax schedules


Assigning 401(k) transactions to tax schedules

If you are setting up an account to track your 401(k), select "W-2 Salary" as the tax schedule for Transfers In.  Doing so ensures that your tax schedule reports, your Tax Planner data, and any transfer of tax information to a tax program (such as TurboTax) will be accurate.

For more information about tracking 401(k) information, click here.


Transfers Out

Specify which tax scheduled line item should be assigned to transfers out of this account.

The Transfers Out field appears only if  the "Use Tax Schedules with Categories" setting is selected in Quicken's General options (from the Edit menu, choose Options, then click General).


Statement Delivery (IntelliCharge credit card accounts)

If you are setting up a credit card account that is enabled for IntelliCharge, choose the same delivery method (modem or disk) that you indicated on your credit card application.


Additional Account Information window
Additional Account Information

This is where you can enter additional information about your account.

To enter additional account information:

•	Type whatever optional information you'd like to associate with the account, and then click OK.

What you see

Bank Name

Account Number

Contact

Phone Number

Comments

Interest Rate


Bank Name

Enter the name of the bank or lending institution.


Account Number

Enter the account number.


Contact

Enter the name of the person handling your account.


Phone Number

Enter a relevant phone number.


Comments

Enter a note or short memo.


Interest Rate

Enter the interest rate.


Tax Schedule Information window
Tax Schedule Information

To complete this window:

•	Select the tax status of the account, then select the tax schedule line items you want to assign to transfers into and out of this account, then click OK.

What you see

Tax-Deferred Account - IRA, 401(k), etc.

Transfers In

Transfers Out


Tax Schedule Information window
Tax Schedule Information

To complete this window:

•	Select the tax schedule line items you want to assign to transfers into and out of this account, then click OK.

What you see

Transfers In

Transfers Out


Transfers In

Specify which tax scheduled line item should be assigned to transfers into this account.


Transfers Out

Specify which tax scheduled line item should be assigned to transfers out of this account.


*Displaying Quicken Snapshots (contents)
Displaying Quicken Snapshots

To search for a Help topic, click the Search button above.

Overview

Click here

How to...

Display Snapshots

Create, edit, or delete a page of Snapshots

Customize Snapshots

Print Snapshots

Quick Tip

Assigning an icon to Quicken Snapshots


Display Snapshots

Display the Snapshots window

Display a different page of Snapshots

Enlarge a Snapshot


Customize Snapshots

Select the number of Snapshots per page

Select what each Snapshot displays


Displaying Quicken Snapshots
Overview: Quicken Snapshots

Quicken Snapshots give you an overall picture of your finances on a single screen.  Snapshots provide an instant overview of your finances, showing exactly what you want to keep track of.

You can display five types of information in Quicken Snapshots:

•	Graphs

•	Reports

•	Calendar notes

•	Budget and savings goals

•	Supercategory budget goals

How to...

Display Snapshots

Create, edit, or delete a page of Snapshots

Customize Snapshots

Print Snapshots


Displaying the Snapshots window
Display the Snapshots window

To display the Snapshots window:

•	From the Reports menu, choose Snapshots.  The Snapshots window appears.

How to...

Display a different page of Snapshots

Enlarge a Snapshot

Create, edit, or delete a page of Snapshots

Customize Snapshots

Print Snapshots


Displaying a different page of Snapshots
Display a different page of Snapshots

To display a different page of Snapshots:

1.	From the Reports menu, choose Snapshots.  The Snapshots window appears.

2.	Click the Down Arrow and select a different page from the "Choose the Snapshot page to display" drop-down list.

How to...

Display Snapshots

Create, edit, or delete a page of Snapshots

Customize Snapshots

Print Snapshots


Enlarging a Snapshot
Enlarge a Snapshot

To enlarge a Snapshot to full size:

1.	From the Reports menu, choose Snapshots.  The Snapshot page you last selected appears.

2.	Select the Snapshot, then click Enlarge, or double-click directly on the Snapshot.

Note

You can't enlarge Financial Calendar notes.

How to...

Display Snapshots

Create, edit, or delete a page of Snapshots

Customize Snapshots

Print Snapshots


Selecting the number of Snapshots per  page
Select the number of Snapshots per page

To select the number of Snapshots per page:

1.	From the Reports menu, choose Snapshots.  The Snapshots window appears.

2.	Click Customize.  The Customize Snapshots window appears.

3.	Click one of the radio buttons under "Snapshots per Page."  You can display between two and six Snapshots per page.

4.	Click OK.

How to...

Display Snapshots

Create, edit, or delete a page of Snapshots

Customize Snapshots

Print Snapshots


Selecting what each Snapshot displays
Select what each Snapshot displays

To change what each Snapshot displays:

1.	From the Reports menu, choose Snapshots.  The Snapshots window appears.

2.	Click the Customize button.  The Customize Snapshots window appears.

3.	Select a Snapshot under "Choose the Snapshot to Customize."

4.	Select a Snapshot type in the Snapshot Type list.

5.	Under "Snapshot Display," select Graph to display the information as a graph, or Text to display a text report.  (This doesn't apply to Calendar Notes, Budget Goal, Savings Goal, or Supercategory Budget.)

6.	If necessary, click Customize Snapshot to change the dates and filters for the Snapshot graph.

7.	Click OK.

How to...

Display Snapshots

Create, edit, or delete a page of Snapshots

Customize Snapshots

Print Snapshots


Creating, editing or deleting a page of Snapshots
Create, edit or delete a page of Snapshots

To create a new Snapshot page:

1.	From the Reports menu, choose Snapshots.  The Snapshots window appears.

2.	Click Customize.  The Customize Snapshots window appears.

3.	Click New in the Snapshot Page box.

4.	Enter a name for the page, then click OK.

To edit a Snapshot page:

1.	From the Reports menu, choose Snapshots.  The Snapshots window appears.

2.	Click Customize.  The Customize Snapshots window appears.

3.	Click Edit in the Snapshot Page box.

4.	Select a Snapshot page from the list.

5.	Click Edit.

6.	Make any changes you want, then click OK.

To delete a Snapshot page:

1.	From the Reports menu, choose Snapshots.  The Snapshots window appears.

2.	Click Customize.  The Customize Snapshots window appears.

3.	Click Edit in the Snapshot Page box.

4.	Select a Snapshot page from the list.

5.	Click Delete.

6.	Click OK at the warning message.

How to...

Display Snapshots

Customize Snapshots

Print Snapshots


Snapshots window
Snapshots

Quicken Snapshots give you an overall picture of your finances on a single screen.  Snapshots provide an instant overview of your finances, showing exactly what you want to keep track of.

Each Snapshot page consists of up to six different Snapshots.

How to...

Display Snapshots

Create, edit, or delete a page of Snapshots

Customize Snapshots

Print Snapshots

What you see

Snapshots

Choose the Snapshot page to display

Snapshots buttons


Snapshots

Snapshots are miniature versions of Quicken's graphs, calendar notes, summary reports, budget goals, savings goals, or supercategory budget goals.  You can have up to six on one page.


Choose the Snapshot page to display

This field shows the name of the currently displayed Snapshot page.  To display a different Snapshots page, click the Down Arrow and select a page from the drop-down list.


Snapshots buttons

This button...	Does this...
Done	Closes the Snapshots window.
Enlarge	Zooms to a full-size version of the selected Snapshot.
Print	Prints the Snapshot page.
Customize	Opens the Customize Snapshots window and lets you tailor the Snapshot page to your needs.


Customize Snapshots window
Customize Snapshots

Use this window to specify what you want to see on a Snapshot page.

How to...

Customize Snapshots

Create, edit, or delete a page of Snapshots

What you see

Choose the Snapshot to customize

Snapshots per Page

Snapshot Page

Snapshot Type list

Snapshot Display

Customize Snapshot


Choose the Snapshot to customize

Click on one of the boxes in the upper left part of the Customize Snapshots window.  The selected Snapshot is the one you will be customizing.


Snapshots per Page

Select how many Snapshots you want on this Snapshot page.  You can have between two and six Snapshots on one page.


Snapshot Page

Select a page to customize from the drop-down list.  Click New to create Snapshot page, or Edit to change the name of a Snapshot page.


Snapshot Type list

Select a Snapshot type from the list for the Snapshot location you have selected.  The Snapshots available include Quicken's graphs, some reports, Calendar Notes, savings or budget goals, and supercategory budget goals.


Snapshot Display

Most Snapshot types can be displayed either as graphs or as text.  Click on Graph or Text to select that option.


Customize Snapshot

Click this button to change the dates and filters for Snapshot graphs.


Edit Snapshot Pages window
Edit Snapshot Pages

To create a new page:

1.	Click New.

2.	Enter a name for the new page, then click OK.

To edit an existing page:

1.	Select the page in the list.

2.	Click Edit.

3.	Make any changes, then click OK.

To delete a page:

1.	Select a page in the list.

2.	Click Delete.

3.	Click OK at the warning message.

What you see

Snapshot Pages

New, Edit, and Delete buttons


Snapshot Pages

This is a list of all the existing Snapshot pages.  To select an item in the list, click on it.  You can also use the Up and Down Arrows to move through the list.


Edit Snapshot Pages buttons

This button...	Does this...
New	Creates a new Snapshot page.
Edit	Lets you change the name of an existing page.
Delete	Deletes the selected page.


New Snapshot Page window
New Snapshot Page

Use this window to create a new Snapshot page.

To create a new Snapshot page:

•	Enter a name for the new page and then click OK.

How to...

Display Snapshots

Create, edit, or delete a page of Snapshots

Customize Snapshots

Print Snapshots


What's New in Quicken 4 for Windows

To print this information, click the Print button above.

This screen summarizes everything that's new in Quicken 4 for Windows, and tells you where to look in the Quicken User's Guide for more information.

Snapshots

•	Snapshots provide an instant overview of your finances. Display your most commonly used graphs, budget and savings goals, and calendar notes, all on a single Snapshot screen. See Chapter 16, "Displaying Snapshots of your financial picture," or click here.

Forecasting

•	Create a forecast graph of your future cash flow and account balances. Base your graph on known items (like scheduled transactions) and estimated items (like budget amounts). See Chapter 22, "Creating a forecast," or click here.

Tax Planner

•	Estimate the amount of taxes you will owe at year-end, based on tax-related data you've already entered in Quicken. See "Estimating your taxes with Quicken Tax Planner" in Chapter 18, or click here.

Budgeting

•	Improved Budget window now lets you easily drag and drop budget categories, group categories into supercategories, collapse and expand categories and supercategories, and display your budget in category or supercategory view.

•	QWIN3 and QDOS users: if you created a budget with subcategories displayed in Quicken 3 for Windows or Quicken for DOS, click anywhere on a category row to show its subcategories in Quicken 4's Budget window.

See Chapter 21, "Creating a budget or savings goal," or click here.

Savings goals

•	Savings Goal status bar shows your progress on setting money aside for important goals, without actually moving money into a real savings account.

•	Contribute money to or withdraw money from a savings goal with one simple form.

See "Creating a savings goal" in Chapter 21, or click here.

Progress bar

•	If you've created a budget or savings goal, display your progress no matter where you are in Quicken with the progress bar.  See "Tracking your goals with the progress bar" in Chapter 21, or click here.

Account register

•	The account selection bar lets you move between all your bank accounts with a single click.

•	Transfer form lets you transfer money between accounts with one simple form.

•	New options let you switch the date and number columns, and switch memo and category columns.

•	Open a split or clear all split lines for a split transaction with a click of a button.

•	Recategorize multiple transactions at one time.

•	Enter a date by clicking the Calendar button in the Date column, and enter an amount by clicking the Calculator button in the Payment or Deposit column.

See Chapter 3, "Using the register," or click here.

Find and replace

•	Change the details of multiple transactions at one time. See "Finding and replacing items" in Chapter 3, or click here.

Financial Calendar

•	Choose to display register transactions, scheduled transactions, or both on the Calendar.

•	Print the Calendar

•	New "Manage List" button displays the Memorized Transactions List, where you can choose exactly which memorized transactions you want to show in the list to the right of the Calendar.

•	QWIN3 users: if you used the financial planning graph in Quicken 3, your data and worksheet can now be found in Quicken 4's forecasting feature. (Choose Forecasting from the Plan menu).

See Chapter 5, "Using the Quicken Financial Calendar," or click here.

Memorized transactions

•	"Lock" a memorized transaction to preserve all details of the transaction whenever you recall it.  For example, suppose you recall a memorized transaction for a $40 ATM withdrawal and then change the amount to $60 in the register.  If the transaction is locked, the next time you recall the transaction, the amount remains $40.  If the transaction is unlocked, the next time you recall the transaction, the amount is $60.  See Chapter 4, "Memorizing transactions," or click here.

Scheduled transactions

•	When Quicken reminds you of scheduled transactions that are due, record them in your register all at once instead of one at a time.  See "When scheduled transactions are due" in Chapter 5, or click here.

Reminder

•	Each time you start Quicken, Reminder automatically reminds you of notes for the day, checks due/to print, scheduled transactions due, investment reminders due, and electronic payments to transmit (if you use CheckFree). See "Using Quicken Reminder and Billminder" in Chapter 5, or click here.

QuickFill

•	QWIN3 users: if you used the option "QuickFill from register" in Quicken 3, all "QuickFill from register" transactions are converted into memorized transactions.  See Chapter 3, "Using the register," or click here.

Investments and Portfolio View

•	Track tax-free securities.

•	Set any time period for a security's price history graph.

•	Show or hide the market value on a security's price history graph.

•	QWIN3 users: securities are initially displayed in the Portfolio View, whether they are open or not.

See Chapter 12, "Tracking investments," or click here.

Reports

•	Preview how your report will look before you print it. See "Printing reports" in Chapter 17, or click here.

•	Use the Profit and Loss Comparison business report to compare profit and loss for month to date vs. year to date, or year to date vs. last year to date.  See "Business Reports" in Chapter 13, or click here.

•	For comparison reports, you can specify "Prior Year Period" as the second date range.

Graphs

•	Memorize and recall graphs. See "Memorizing and recalling graphs" in Chapter 15, or click here.

Fiscal year organization

•	Define a fiscal year instead of a calendar year, and then create reports, graphs, and budgets based on that fiscal year. See Appendix A, "Customizing Quicken," or click here.

Options

•	Options buttons in the register, Calendar, Write Checks window, Graphs window, Reports window, and Reminders window now provide access to options right where you need them.  All options can still be accessed by choosing Options from the Edit menu or choosing Options from the iconbar.

•	The "Save Desktop" option is now found on the File menu.

•	The "Fonts" and "Colors" options are now found in Register options.

•	The "Qcards" option is now found on the Help menu.

See Appendix A, "Customizing Quicken," or click here.

Online services (requires a modem)

•	Update security prices with Portfolio Price Update. See Chapter 25, "Updating your portfolio prices online," or click here.

•	Order checks, software, and other items through Intuit Marketplace. See Appendix C, "Ordering supplies and other Intuit products," or click here.

•	Register as a Quicken user. See "Registering your software" in Chapter 1 of the Getting Started Guide, or click here.

Check backgrounds

•	Display checks onscreen with a variety of colorful backgrounds. See Chapter 6, "Writing and printing checks," or click here.

Other improvements

•	HomeBase provides an easy way to access the most common Quicken menu items.

•	When you create a new account, select "Guide Me" to be guided through step-by-step.

•	Improved Qcards help you perform more tasks, even easier than before.

•	Copy and paste results from the Calculator.

•	Explore other Intuit products on the Add-Ons menu.

•	The Quicken User's Guide index now indexes keywords to useful online Help topics such as setting up a 401(k) in Quicken.


*Technical information about Quicken (contents)
Quicken technical information

To search for a Help topic, click the Search button above.

Topics

About Quicken data files

Quicken files on your hard disk

How much data can Quicken hold?

Quicken's financial planning formulas

Quicken's amortization formula

Information about Quicken's QIF format


Quicken files on your hard disk

File	Content

*.WMF	Quicken graphics files
BILLMNDW.EXE	The Billminder program
BUSINESS.QIF	Quicken business categories
CCT100.DLL	Dynamic link library
CONNECT.SCR	IntelliCharge modem script
INTELLIC.CAT	IntelliCharge file
IPRICE.DLL	Dynamic link library
HOME.QIF	Quicken home categories.
Q3.DIR	Billminder data file
QCHECK.EXE	Quicken compatibility program
QCHECKS.DOC	Order form for checks and supplies
QCOMM.DLL	Dynamic link library
QLINK.DLL	Dynamic link library
QORDER.EXE	Intuit Marketplace program
QODATA.DLL	Dynamic link library
QORDER.HLP	Intuit Marketplace Help file
QOFONT.FON	Intuit Marketplace font file
QTAX.EXE	Quicken Tax Planner program
QTAX.HLP	Quicken Tax Planner Help file
QUICKEN.INI	Quicken initialization file (in your Windows directory)
QW.CFG	Quicken configuration file
QW.EXE	Quicken program
QW.HLP	Quicken Help file
QWPR.DLL	Dynamic link library
REBUILD.EXE	QMT rebuild utility
REBUILD.TXT	Instructions for QMT rebuild utility
SOFTREG.DLL	Dynamic link library
TAX.SCD	Tax schedules
TIBLITE.DLL	Dynamic link library
WPR.DAT	Quicken printer data file
WPR.INI	Quicken initialization file (in your Windows directory)
In addition, Quicken creates a TUTORIAL subdirectory in the directory where you install Quicken.  This subdirectory contains the files for the Quick Tour and Quicken's Qcards.


Quicken's data capacity

Quicken automatically stores each transaction you record.  A typical home user generates 200 to 1,000 transactions per year.  Small business users typically have 300 to 3,000 transactions per year.

How much can my hard disk hold?

On a hard disk, a Quicken data file can hold up to 65,534 transactions (that's approximately 8 MB of disk space).  This is the total for all accounts in the file.

How much can a floppy disk hold?

A floppy disk this size...	Will hold this many transactions (approximately)...
360K	2000
720K	4000
1.2MB	6650
1.44MB	7750
These numbers are only approximate.  The actual number depends on how many memorized items (categories, classes, transactions, etc.) you use.  If you use many categories, classes, and so on, the number of transactions that can fit on a disk will be fewer.


*Transferring data to and from Quicken (contents)
Transferring data to and from Quicken

To search for a Help topic, click the Search button above.

Overview

Click here

How to...

Export data to a QIF file

Import data from a QIF file

Import security prices from an ASCII file

Save security prices from Prodigy's Quote Track

Import data from CheckFree

Transfer tax schedule report data to a tax program

Common Question

How do I copy data from one Quicken file to another?

Quick Tips

Information about QIF files

General structure of QIF files

Identifiers for investment accounts

Identifiers for noninvestment accounts

QIF file example


Transferring data
Overview: Transferring data

Although you cannot directly move or copy transactions from one Quicken account to another, you can do so indirectly using a specially formatted text file called a Quicken Interchange Format (QIF) file.

Once you have created a QIF file, you can import data from the file to any Quicken register.  This allows you to consolidate Quicken accounts from other locations, move data from one account to another, and merge Quicken files.

You can also transfer your Quicken data to a spreadsheet.

How to...

Export data to a QIF file

Import data from a QIF file


Importing security prices from an ASCII file
Import security prices from an ASCII file

You can import security prices from a standard, comma-delimited ASCII file.  Quicken matches prices with your securities if they have the same symbol.  If your securities don't have symbols, you'll need to edit them so that they do.

To import data from an ASCII file:

1.	From the Activities menu, choose Portfolio View.

2.	Display the date for which you have data.

3.	From the File menu, choose Import Prices.

4.	If the data is on a floppy disk, place the disk in a drive.

5.	Enter the filename. (If the file is not in the default directory, enter the full pathname.)

6.	Change the date information if necessary.

7.	Click OK.

Data Requirements

The data must be in standard ASCII format with one symbol/price/date per line, delimited by either commas or double spaces (using only one type of delimiter per line).

These import formats are all acceptable.  Note that Quicken can handle quotation marks:

ABC, 123.456

ABC, 123.456, 12/31/90

ABC  123.456  12/31/90

"ABC", 123.456, "12/31/90"

"ABC", "123.456", "12/31


Saving security prices from Prodigy's Quote Track
Save security prices from Prodigy's Quote Track feature to a file that Quicken can import

In Prodigy, do the following::

1.	[Jump]: QUOTE TRACK and follow the onscreen instructions for creating or viewing a Quote Track list.

2.	From the FILE menu, choose REPORT SET UP

3.	Set your report options:

Destination:	File (You can use the filename QTRACK.CSV, or change it.)
Range:	Entire list
Type:	Closing
Format:	Comma Delimited
Headings:	No
4.	Select COMPLETE to save your options, and then select PRINT to save your changes to the file you specified.  If the file already exists, Prodigy asks whether you want to write over it or add these quotes to it.  If you have more Quote Track lists, you can view them and print them to the same file without resetting your print options.

How to...

Import security prices from an ASCII file


Information about QIF files

You can export transactions from a Quicken account register to a specially formatted text file, then import that data to a different Quicken account register.  This text file MUST be formatted as a Quicken Interchange Format (QIF) file.

You export Quicken data to a QIF file by using the Export command on the File menu.  If you already have data in QIF format, you can import it into Quicken by using the Import command on the File menu.

More about...

General structure of QIF files

Identifiers for investment accounts

Identifiers for noninvestment accounts

QIF file example


General structure of QIF files

The following rules apply to the structure of QIF files:

•	Each transaction must end with a ^ symbol.

•	Each item in the transaction must appear on a separate line.

•	When Quicken exports an account register, it adds one of the following lines at the beginning of the file to identify the type of account:

!Type:Bank	!Type:Invst

!Type:Cash	!Type:Oth A

!Type:CCard	!Type:Oth L

•	You can add a line that forces Quicken to import all transfers, regardless of whether Ignore Transfers is selected when the file is imported.  Add this line immediately after one of the lines above that begins the file:

!Option:AllXfr

More about...

Identifiers for investment accounts

Identifiers for noninvestment accounts

QIF file example


Identifiers for investment accounts

Use these letters to identify specific items in an investment account transaction.  Each line in the transaction must begin with one of these letters:

Letter	What it means

D	Date (optional)

N	Action

Y	Security

I	Price

Q	Quantity (# of shares or split ratio)

C	Cleared status

P	1st line text for transfers/reminders

M	Memo

O	Commission

L	Account for transfer

$	Amount transferred

^	End of entry

If an item is omitted from the transaction in the QIF file, Quicken treats it as a blank item.

More about...

General structure of QIF files

Identifiers for noninvestment accounts

QIF file example


Identifiers for non-investment accounts
Identifiers for noninvestment accounts

Use these letters to identify specific items in a noninvestment account transaction.  Each line in the transaction must begin with one of these letters:

Letter	What it means

D	Date

T	Amount

C	Cleared status

N	Number (check or reference)

P	Payee/description

M	Memo

A	Address (up to 5 lines; 6th line is an optional message)

L	Category (category/transfer/class)

S	Category in split (category/transfer/class)

E	Memo in split

$	Dollar amount of split

^	End of entry

Repeat the S, E, and $ lines as many times as necessary for additional items in a split.  If an item is omitted from the transaction in the QIF file, Quicken treats it as a blank item.

More about...

General structure of QIF files

Identifiers for investment accounts

QIF file example


QIF file example

The following example shows two transactions that were exported from a Quicken bank account to a QIF file.

Line in file	What the line means

!Type:Bank	Header line

D6/12/93	Date of 1st transaction

T-1,000.00	Amount of 1st transaction

N*****	Check number

PFranks Plumbing	Payee

AFranks Plumbing	Address (1st line)

A2567 Fresno Street	Address (2nd line)

ASanta Barbara, CA 90111	Address (3rd line)

LHome Maint	Category/Transfer/Class

^	Ends 1st transaction

D6/15/93	Date (2nd transaction)

T-75.46	Amount (2nd transaction)

CX	Status in Cleared column

N256	Number

PWalts Drugs	Payee

LSupplies	Category/class

SSupplies	First category in split

EOffice supplies	First memo in split

$-36.00	First amount in split

SGarden	Second memo in split

$-39.46	Second amount in split

^	Ends 2nd transaction

More about...

General structure of QIF files

Identifiers for investment accounts

Identifiers for noninvestment accounts


Importing data from a QIF file
Import data from a QIF file

You can import data you have previously exported to an ASCII file in Quicken Interchange Format (QIF). The data can come from an account in a particular Quicken file, or from an application that supports the QIF file format.

To import data from a QIF file:

1.	If you are importing the data from a floppy disk, place the disk in a disk drive.

2.	From the File menu, choose Import.  The QIF Import window appears.

3.	Enter the name of the QIF file you want to import data from.

4.	Select the account you want to import the data into.

5.	Select the items you want to import from the file.

6.	If you are importing data that was previously exported from multiple accounts, or if you are importing CheckFree data, select the checkbox labeled "Special handling for transfers."

7.	Click OK.

How to...

Learn more about QIF files

Export data to a QIF file


Exporting data to a QIF file
Export data to a QIF file

Export data from an account to an ASCII file in Quicken Interchange Format (QIF) when you plan to import it into a different Quicken account.  You can also import the data to applications that support the QIF file format.

To export data to a QIF account:

1.	If you are exporting the data to a floppy disk, place the disk in a disk drive.

2.	From the File menu, choose Export.  The QIF Export window appears.

3.	Enter a name for the QIF file you want to export the data to.

4.	Select the account you want to export the data from.  If you don't see the account in the list, scroll up or down until you find it.

5.	If you want to export only those transactions that occurred during a specific interval of time, enter the beginning and ending dates of that time interval.

6.	Select the items you want to export.

7.	Click OK.

How to...

Learn more about QIF files

Import data from a QIF file


Transferring tax schedule report data to a tax program
Transfer tax-schedule report data to a tax program

If you use tax-preparation software to prepare your taxes, you can print Quicken report data to a file in a format that works with these programs. The format is TXF (Tax Exchange Format).

This procedure is not necessary if you use TurboTax for Windows to prepare your taxes.  TurboTax for Windows can import Quicken for Windows data without any work on your part.

To transfer tax data to a tax program:

1.	Choose the Home: Tax Schedule command from the Reports menu, then create a Tax Schedule report.  You need to turn on the tax schedule settings before you use this command.

2.	Click Export on the Report button bar.  The Create Tax Export File window appears.

3.	In the File Name box, enter a name for this file.  Quicken supplies the correct file extension, which is .TXF (Tax Exchange Format).

4.	If necessary, change the current directory under Directories.

5.	Click OK to save the data, then read your tax program documentation to find out how to import the file.


QIF Import dialog box
QIF Import

This is where you select the file that contains the data you want to import.  You also select the account where you want the data to appear after you import it.

The data can come from a Quicken file or from an application that supports Quicken Interchange Format (QIF).

You can also load CheckFree 3.0 data into the current account.  For details, see below.

To import data from a QIF file:

1.	Enter the name of the QIF file you want to import.

2.	Select the account you want to import the data into.

3.	Select the items you want to import.

4.	Click OK.

What you see

QIF File to Import

Quicken account to import into

Import Items

Browse

How to...

Import data from an existing CheckFree account


QIF File to Import

Enter the name of the file you want to import.  If you want to look through your files to find the right one, click Browse.


Quicken account to import into

Select an account from the drop-down list to import the QIF file into.


Import Items

Select those items you want to import. If you are importing data that was previously exported from multiple accounts, or if you are importing CheckFree data, select the checkbox labeled "Special handling for transfers."


Browse

Click to display a window that lets you browse the files on your disk.


Import from QIF File dialog box
Import from QIF File

This is where you select the QIF file that contains the data you want to import.

To complete the window:

1.	In the File Name box, enter the name of the file.  To display the files in a particular directory, double-click the directory name in the Directories list.  To select a particular file, click its name in the list under the File Name box.

2.	Click OK.


QIF Export dialog box
QIF Export

This is where you export data from the current account to an ASCII file in Quicken Import Format (QIF) when you plan to import it into a different Quicken account.  You can also import the data to applications that support QIF.

To export data to a QIF file:

1.	Enter a name for the QIF file you want to export the data to.

2.	Select the Quicken account you want to export the data from.

3.	If you want to export only those transactions that occurred during a specific time period, enter the beginning and ending dates of that time period.

4.	Select the items you want to export.

5.	Click OK.

What you see

QIF File to Export

Quicken account to export from

Transactions Starting: ... to

Export Items

Browse


QIF File to Export

Enter the name of the file to export to.  If you want to look through your directories to select a file, click Browse.


Quicken account to export from

Select the account you want to export.


Transactions Starting: ... to

Enter the date range of transactions to export.  To export all transactions, leave these fields as 1/1/1 through 12/31/99.


Export Items

Select the items you want to export.


Export to QIF File dialog box
Export to QIF File

This is where you enter the name of the QIF file you are exporting data to.

To complete the window:

1.	In the File Name box, enter the name of the file.  To display the files in a particular directory, double-click the directory name in the Directories list.  To select a particular file, click its name in the list under the File Name box.

2.	Click OK.


Import Price Data dialog box
Import Price Data

You can import security price data for a given date from an ASCII file to the Portfolio View window.  The window is updated for the date supplied in the file.  If no date is supplied, the window is updated for the date it currently displays.

How to...

Import Price Data

Edit a security

What you see

File

Date


File

Enter the name of the file to import prices from.


Date

If the file does not contain specified dates, import the prices to the date entered here.  The currently selected date in Portfolio View is displayed in this field by default.